Home

Korg MICROX X50 User's Manual

1. Attack Release g Delay This parameter sets the delay time of the Gate input If the sound has a very fast attack increase the delay time so that the signal will be input after the Gate is opened This will preserve the attack part of the sound 06 OD HiGain Wah Overdrive Hi Gain Wah This distortion effect utilizes an Overdrive mode and a Hi Gain mode Controlling the wah effect the 3 band EO and the amp simulation will allow you to create versatile distor tion sounds This effect is suitable for guitar and organ sounds Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Mode Overdrive Hi Gain r Drive 3 Band PEQ Amp Simulation Pre Low cut Direct Mix Wet Dry Off On S D z Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that switches the Wah on and off Sw Tggl Mmnt Selects the switching mode for the modulation source that switches the Wah on and off pa 10 10 S Dues Off Tempo Switches Wah on off Sweep Rng Wah Sweep Range Sets the range of Wah Src Source Selects the modulation source that controls the Wah Mode Drive Mode Switches between overdrive and hi gain distortion Overdrive Hi Gain Drive Sets the degree of distortion Pre Low cut Sets the low range cut amount of the distortion input
2. oznos UOTJETNPOW eqeuretTyW SWV o l TeeuM HOLlId 0SX XXorasAop xodoTu se ebueu iepueg qq qq qq qq ug X onor aze3JV se eagnsseadq Teuueuo2 AA AA uq d Tx ebueuo rquoj boagd 4093 ebueyo werborg dd dd ud V 330 S 3ON TTY S uo epou ATOd 00 00 LZT al ug oun szeooS pue AATATATSUSS pueg YO 4tTd TOF 3293jgje ou seu ontea get Aug eyed V JJO S 3ON TTW S UO 9pow OONN 91 00 OT 00 921 AL ug una q oqa 3q2S jjJe sun sieoo pue eun eur4 jo u3oq ueaboad wnap ao4 V JJO SSION TIV S UO 9pow TUWO 00 00 Sc1 QL ug esodsuea eunp szeoo Z V JJO S qON IX S JJO DON f uwo 00 00 VZT OL ug euni3eg eun ut T V JJO S 3ON TTY 00 00 ZT aL ug buey pueg AATATATSUSeS pueg YOITd O I Hx V uoO 3J33O TO4134UuOO got LZT 00 AL 00 2T WL ug 3 SJo O443UO IV 39S9MH 00 00 I21 6L ug 39e1je ou seu en eA gST Aaqug ered 2 JJO punos TIY 00 00 OZT 8L ug 80 002 09 20 ON 3sur unaq 3 2 vx 399etes Ma 3903 GSW ON wezed Nd 00 00 101 69 ug PUIN TUIJAN unaiq ST epow aged ueuM pr 9A ATUO x o Ip 399et9s NdH 303 ST ON wezed M x0 20 001 v9 ug D x 399eT9S NTAN 4303 g8SW ON ueazegd NduN 33 33 66 9 ug x Ipues pues ouo unaq XX HI SS 33 2 x 39919es NGAN 43903 8ST ON ueadegd NdWN ss ss
3. 88 4 3 Voice Voice Mixetr 88 microX GLOBAL 6 Ext Control 93 6 1 A Knob 1 A 2 A 3 A Ai 93 6 2 B Knob 1 B 2 B 3 B 4 B e 93 6 3 C Knob 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 93 5 DEMO Song 95 Demo SONG oc oninia inis oninia doces IO 6 Effect Guide s 97 OverviewW rre 97 1 Effects in each mode sssssnesonesseesseesssesssesssesse 97 2 Dynamic modulation Dmod 97 SN Durs PA RENT DR 97 Insert Effect IFX e 98 To D C Eo omitti ueber mE EE 98 e qnum 98 SLIDE 99 4 Controlling the Insert Effects via MIDI 100 Master Effects MFX1 2 LOO ich Git perenne n teers 100 Ee escas uki eii E 101 AVIA KOT M T E 102 4 Controlling the Master Effects via MIDI 102 Master EQ BERR RRR RR RRR RRR 103 Individual Outputs PERE I RR RR RRR RRR RRR 103 Filter Dynamic 104 00 NO e E 104 01 St Amp Sim Stereo Amp Simulation 104 02 St Compressor Stereo Compressor 104 03 St Limiter Stereo Limiter 104 04 MItband Limit Multiband Limiter 105 05 SE Gate Stereo Gate 106 06 OD HiGain Wah Overdrive Hli Gain Wah
4. 143 77 Exct Phaser Exciter Phaser 143 78 Exct M Dly Exciter Multitap Delay 143 79 OD HG AmpSim Overdrive Hi Gain Amp Simulation 144 80 OD HG Cho Fl Overdrive Hi Gain Chorus Flanger 144 81 OD HG Phaser Overdrive Hi Gain Phaser 145 82 OD HG M Dly Overdrive Hi Gain Multitap Delay 145 83 Wah AmpSim Wah Auto Wah Amp Simulation 146 84 Deci AmpSim Decimator Amp Simulation 146 85 Deci Comp Decimator Compressot 146 86 AmpSim Trml Amp Simulation Tremolo 147 87 Cho FI M Dly Chorus Flanger Multitap Delay 147 88 Phasr Cho Fl Phaser Chorus Flanger 148 89 Reverb Gale U u eere L cei NEEN 148 Master EQ 149 Master E 149 7 Appendices 151 Alternate Modulation Source AMS 151 About Alternate Modulation 151 About Alternate Modulation Sources 151 AMS Alternate Modulation Source List 152 Alternate Modulation settings 154 The effect of alternate modulation on various parameters and example applications 154 Dynamic Modulation Source Dmod 157 Dynamic Modulation Source List
5. 55 Multisample 6 7 8 41 86 Multi set select 55 O ie L exerted 4 8 26 A1 76 90 E g aereo dtes odes ee otrsa eos 4 Oscillator EBD NN 6 oC LI opos Ee UdeMM MEE 14 p PAGE MENU 1 299 999 Pan 21 22 729 29 90 90 01 98 09 Pattern Arpeggio pattern 47 89 177 6 Performance Editor 3 J I u uo s 7 10 11 12 14 41 ITO Ded sasay 41 62 172 Pitch bend change uuu ss 172 Eeer 12 Pitch LFO Modulation 11 Pitch modulation 10 11 12 154 Polyphonic Monophonic 6 40 Portamento 11 40 62 64 161 164 165 168 173 Portamento Bm Jaa naam 11 Positional Cross fade 45 Programi BOB u u aa 1 Programi GalepOryvr asas 2 Prop ram Came u a au a Sus 171 MADLE ege 64 Program change message 42 164 PROP LAI TOE uu awas 1 Programi Selecly essa 2 25 38 57 EE nee 6 Pure Eege 6 Eltere 6 R REALTIME CONTROLS 25 27 34 44 50 65 90 149 153 157 162 163 166 168 172 173 174 176 178 Release Level 12 19 e cel ic e ere 12 Release Time 12 205 23 POU Te oU 29 ENEE ECL Su a UK ME 19 20 Ee 12 Ia COD dme arabice os cadi nns 26 Resonance 17 44 87 155 162 163 168 169 175 Return level eege 30 agetrueden
6. Timbre 8 Track 16 2 Dynamic modulation Dmod Dynamic modulation Dmod is a function that lets you use the controllers of this instrument or MIDI messages to con trol specific effect parameters allowing realtime control while you play The BPM MIDI Sync function is provided as another way to control effect parameters This allows parameters such as the LFO speed of modulation type effects or the delay time of delay type effects to be synchronized to the tempo of the arpeggiator For details on these two functions refer to Dynamic Modu lation Source Dmod p 157 1 These effect parameters are marked with DZ v p 104 The effect parameters marked with ce support this function rx p 108 3 Effect UO To achieve the best tonal quality signals sent to the Insert Effect and the Master Effects should be output at the maxi mum level without clipping Also use the W D wet dry parameter for the Insert Effect and the Output Level or Rtn Return1 2 parameter for the Master Effects to adjust the effect output level A This instrument does not have an input level meter that monitors the input level of the effect If the input level is insufficient the S N signal to noise ratio will decrease If the input level is excessive distortion may occur The following table shows the parameters related to the level settings EFFECT Program mode Input OSC1 2 High Low Level PROG 1
7. 6 2a Top Slope Bottom Slope Top Slope 000 120 Specifies the number of velocity steps over which the origi nal volume will be reached starting from the Top Velocity 0 The volume will be at the original value from the top velocity 120 The volume will decrease as the velocity approaches the top velocity Bottom Slope 000 120 Specifies the number of velocity steps over which the origi nal volume will be reached starting from the Bottom Veloc ity 0 The volume will be at the original value from the bottom velocity 120 The volume will decrease as the velocity approaches the bottom velocity How volume will change according to key velocity Volume Velocity Bottom Slope Top Slope Bottom Velocity Top Velocity m6 2 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 6 3 Review COMBI b Ed Uel Zone Review Ti 6 3a uc T sp I 6 3a Velocity Zone Map All T1 T8 Displays the range of velocities that each timbre will respond to The range of velocities sounded is shown as a line and the slope portion is shaded B 6 3 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 COMBI 7 Ed Arp Ctris Arpeggiator Controls These parameters specify how the arpeggiator will function within the combination Two arpeggiators can run simulta neously X50 The B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs and the functions of a
8. Octave Sort Latch Key Sync Keyboard and J Tempo can also be set in the Arp Play page of 0 Play 7 1 Setup Arpeg Setup FROG fis W ld L E Pattern Masis ni Octave 2 Gate 146 rjsort d Velocity Key e Latch SW LDDDSC Setup Pattern D Key Sync z Keyboard 7 1a Arpeggiator Setup t Refer to OG X50 p 91 microX p 91 Pattern Preset O Preset 4 U000 U250 Selects the arpeggio pattern Preset Arpeggio Pattern Preset 0 Preset 4 are preset arpeggio patterns U000 U250 are user arpeggio patterns User arpeggio patterns can be created in GLOBAL 5 Arp Pattern Preset 3 ALT2 X50 Arpeggio patterns U000 U250 can be selected using the numeric buttons 0 9 and the ENTER button a n 25 26 Octave 1 2 3 4 Specifies the number of octaves in which the arpeggio will be played A If a user arpeggio pattern is selected the range of the arpeggio will depend on the Octave Motion GLO BAL 5 1c setting Reso Resolution 5 5 25 2 4 2 Specifies the timing resolution of the arpeggio The notes of the arpeggio will be played at the interval you specify ds 2 Js 0r J The speed of the arpeggio pattern is determined by the Tempo and the Resolution Gate 000 100 Step Specifies the length gate time of each note in the arpeggio 000 100 Each note will be played with the speci
9. 2 Input Level D mod Input Level D mod Right o i Ut d i Wet Dry Tempo ra BPM ET BPM 6 t Base Note x Times Adjust Base Note x Times Adjust BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo v Fx 49 QS L Bs L Delay Base Note bs 2 45 4 45 dy 0 Selects the type of notes to specify the left channel delay time Fx 49 eer Times 1 16 Sets the number of notes to specify the left channel delay time gt Fx 49 Aqj Adjust 2 50 2 50 Fine adjust the left channel delay time R Bs R Delay Base Note J 45 2 45 4 45 d Selects the type of notes to specify the right channel delay time we Fx 49 exer Times 1 16 Sets the number of notes to specify the right channel delay time ix Fx 49 2 50 2 50 Adj Adjust Fine adjust the right channel delay time L Fb L Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount for the left channel Dai Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of feedback amount Amount L Sets the modulation amount of the left channel feedback R Fb R Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount for the right channel Dyer Amount R 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the right channel feedback 100 100 Time Over L gt OVER Display the error message if the left channel delay time exceeds the upper limit S R gt OVER Display the error me
10. mark for the tracks that are routed to the corresponding Insert Effect All Rt is a typical option If you wish to control the parameters on a channel select one from Ch01 16 Master Effects wrx 2 1 In Out The I Os of Master Effects MFX1 and MFX2 are mono in stereo out Send Level 1 and Send Level 2 determine the send level to the Master Effects es Routing and Mixer Stereo signals will be combined to a mono signal automatically and sent to the effects The Master Effects do not output any Dry signals signals that are not processed by the effects Therefore they output only Wet signals that are processed by the effects signals set via the W D of the MFX1 and MFX2 page The output signals from the Master Effects are routed to the L R bus with the output level specified by Rtn Return1 Return2 These output signals are mixed with the output signals from the bus specified by BUS page L R or with the output signals from the bus specified by BUS Select Setup page in each mode L R then routed to the Master EQ PROG O Ed HasterFz Setup Master Effect 2 Master E aainLdE1 HEEE ETUR ETUR Low Mid High setup TDEEDTDHERETDTMEQT Selecting 00 No Effect will mute the output The pro cessed signal will be output in one of the following ways according to the type of effects 01 89 Mono In Stereo Out eme rm Y r Effect Stereo In
11. B2 Intensity 12 06 AHS Velocity 2 1b Intensitu LD BE 2 1c Tweet Ice lor ee ER _ 2 la Pitch Pitch Slope Normally you will leave this at 1 0 Positive values will cause the pitch to rise as you play higher on the keyboard and negative values will cause the pitch to fall as you play higher on the keyboard With a value of 0 there will be no change in pitch and the C4 pitch will sound regardless of the keyboard location you play How the Pitch Slope and pitch are related 1 0 2 0 Pitch I I C4 C5 Key Ribbon 16 12 12 Specifies in semitone units how the pitch will change when CC 16 is received or when the ribbon controller is pressed on an instrument such as the TRITON Extreme connected via the MIDI IN connector 12 half steps equal one octave With positive 4 values the pitch will rise when you press the right half of a ribbon con troller With negative values the pitch will fall For example with a setting of 12 pressing the far right edge of the ribbon controller will raise the pitch one octave With a setting of 12 pressing the far right edge of the rib bon controller will lower the pitch one octave At the center of the ribbon controller the original pitch will remain so you can use this in conjunction with pressing the ribbon at its right edge to simulate the hammering on techniques used by guitarists X50 PBend 60 12
12. PROG 1 Ed Basic O5C1 Multizample OSC 1 Hiah Multis ample Welocity SL L H BB 1 Octave 1 157 Tranzpose 488 469 Click TURE ADDDD ist Rev Level 127 Delag G ppmz facic jl ose f oste f zone dition 1 2c The following illustration shows the display when Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a has been set to Drums PROG 1 Ed Basic OSC E Drum kit 0501 Drum kit Sg di TA cuir Kit 1 ctaue 1 SI LOT Transpose 68 TUME 4688 Maen ix iDelau goag ms aurcm M ER cc RR RR WEE 1 2a 0SC1 Multisample Velocity SW LH 001 127 The oscillator 1 High and Low multisamples that you spec ify in High Low 1 2b will be switched at the velocity value that you specify here Notes played with a velocity stronger than this value will be sounded by the High multi sample 1 2b High Low Here you can select a multisample You can select different multisamples for High and Low and use velocity to switch between the two multisamples Start Offset Reverse and Level can be adjusted independently for the High and Low multisamples High High Multisample X50 000 469 microX 000 641 Specifies the bank and multisample number of the High multisample The multisample you select here will sounded by velocities greater than the value of the Velocity SW LH 12a parameter If you do not wish to use velocity switching set the value to 001 and select only the High
13. To write the program press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CANCEL button Select by Category Here you can select a program by category r p 2 0 2 P Edit Performance Editor 000 Portamento Pad Ferform nzz Editor 0 2a Bank Program Select Tempo Select a program The bank number and name of the pro gram will be displayed rp 1 J sets the tempo 0 2b Performance Editor The Performance Editor lets you edit major program param eters without moving to the PROG 1 9 Ed Edit pages This edits multiple program parameters within the currently selected program allowing you to make broad adjustments easily You can use the Performance Editor when you wish to adjust the depth of effects etc while you are playing or to make the initial rough settings to begin the process of creat ing a new sound Editing that you do here will affect the values of the pro gram parameters in the edit buffer If you wish to keep the results of your editing you must write save the program 1 OG p 45 C amp Editing done using the Performance Editor will occur within the range of the corresponding parameter If after using the Performance Editor to modify a value you move to another page or mode and then return the sound will remain in its edited state but the value shown in the LCD screen by the Performance Editor will be 00 You may do further editing from this state if you wish Si
14. 100 Sets the envelope curve shape of the input sig nal LFO Wave LFO Waveform Selects LFO Waveform Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed i Fx 20 LFO Phase 180 180deg Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right e Fx 32 0 02 20 00Hz Tri Sine Vintg Freq LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Envelope Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the changes of the LFO speed according to the input signal level Depth Sets the depth of LFO modulation Envelope Amount 100 100 Sets the changes of the modulation depth according to the input sig nal level 1S W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dyer Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance e Freq e Envelope Amount f Depth f Envelope Amount These parameters set the modulation via an envelope input sig nal level The LFO speed is obtained by adding the Freq value to the Envelope Amount value multiplied by the input signal The LFO modulation depth is obtained by adding the Depth value to the Envelope Amount value multiplied by the input signal level The following example indicates that the Depth is 0 with an LFO Frequency of 1 0Hz and the maximum input and that the Depth is 100 with a Frequenc
15. 106 07 Get Para AFC Stereo Parametric 4 Band EQ 107 08 St Graphic7EQ Stereo Graphic 7 Band EQ 108 09 St Wah AutoW Stereo Wah Auto Wah 108 10 St Rndm Filter Stereo Random Filter 109 11 St Exct Enhcr Stereo Exciter Enhancer 110 12 St Sub OSC Stereo Sub Oscillator 110 13 Talking Mod Talking Modulator 111 14 St Decimator Stereo Decimator 112 15 St AnalogRecd Stereo Analog Record 112 Pitch Phase Mod e 113 16 SEC horus Stereo Chorus 113 17 St HarmnicCho Stereo Harmonic Chorus 113 18 MltTap ChoDly Multitap Chorus Delay 114 19 Ensamble u uuu u luz masukan 114 20 St Flanger Stereo Flanger 115 21 St Rndm Flang 5tereo Random Fanger uu uu 115 22 St Env Flanger Stereo Envelope Flanger 116 23 St Phaser Stereo Phaser 116 24 St RGndm Phasr Stereo Random Phaser 117 25 St Env Phaser Stereo Envelope Phaser 117 26 St BiphaseMod Stereo Biphase Modulation 118 27 St Vibrato Stereo Vibrato 118 28 St AutoFd Mod Stereo Auto Fade Modulation 119 2
16. D Decay Time With positive values of T AMS Intensity a setting of will cause the time to be lengthened and a setting of will cause the time to be short ened With a setting of 0 there will be no change B 2 5 UTILITY i Write Program 0 1 Copy Oscillator Swap Oscilla tor 1 1 13 14 PROG 3 Ed LFOs Here you can make settings for the LFO that can be used to cyclically modulate the Pitch Filter and Amp of oscillators 1 and 2 There are two LFO units for each oscillator By setting the LFO1 or LFO2 Intensity to a negative value for Pitch Filter or Amp you can invert the LFO waveform 3 1 OSILFOTL 0sc1 Lro1 mm Indicates settings for the OSC1 LFO1 which is the first LFO that can be used for oscillator 1 PROG 3 Ed LF s 3 1a Haveform M I 5c1 LFO1 Waveform 3 1b Kafe bara DIER leLr le oraz 3 la OSCILFO1 Waveform Triangle 0 Random6 Vect Selects the LFO waveform The numbers that appear at the right of some of the LFO waveforms indicate the phase at which the waveform will begin Step Triangle 4 Li Step Triangle 6 gt Sawtooth down J d Random1 S H Triangle 0 A Triangle 90 A Triangle wave Triangle Ge Phase will change Random eO randomly at each key in Saw 0 T Saw 180 Conventional sample amp hold S H in which the level changes randomly at fixed intervals of Square TM Square wave time
17. If the Status MULTI 2 1a 2a of the track selected by Control Track is EXT EX2 or BTH a control change mes sage will be transmitted on the MIDI channel specified by MIDI Channel MULTI 2 12a 2a If the Status is INT or BTH operating one of the X50 microX s controllers will affect only that track Simulta neously the same effect will also apply to any track with the same MIDI Channel setting A In the case of Master Volume the universal exclusive message Master Volume will be transmitted A You can make settings for MIDI Filter MULTI 3 4 to enable or disable control changes and controllers for each track When checked the operations effective for a Status of INT or BTH will be enabled Tracks whose Status is EXT EX2 or BTH will transmit control changes regardless of this setting Effect dynamic modulation can be controlled when the Control Ch Control Channel MULTI 8 1b setting for IFX MFX1 2 or MEQ matches the MIDI channel of the track selected by Control Track In the case of All Rt control is possible on the MIDI channel of all routed tracks If one of the X50 microX s controllers is operated during realtime recording the corresponding or assigned control change will be recorded on the external MIDI seuencer etc The following table shows the relation between the MIDI source or DMS dynamic modulation source that corre messages that are transmitted when the X50 microX s con
18. Random S H Sine A Sine wave Both the levels and the time intervals will Guitar O C Guitar vibrato change randomly Exp Triangle A Step Saw 4 Step Saw 6 Random3 S H The maximum level and minimum level will alternate at random intervals of time i e a square wave with random period Random Vect Exp Saw Down K Random5 Vect Random6 Vect Exp Saw U These types cause Random 1 3 to change n p smoothly They can be used to simulate the instability of acoustic instruments etc Frequency 00 99 Sets the LFO frequency A setting of 99 is the fastest Ofs Offset 99 99 Specifies the central value of the LFO waveform For example with a setting of 0 as shown in the following diagram the vibrato that is applied will be centered on the note on pitch With a setting of 99 the vibrato will only raise the pitch above the note on pitch in the way in which vibrato is applied on a guitar Offset settings and pitch change produced by vibrato offset 0 offset 99 Pitch offset 99 Pitch at note on When Waveform is set to Guitar the modulation will occur only in the positive direction even if you set Off set to 0 Key Sync Off On On checked Key Sync will be On The LFO will start each time you play a note and an independent LFO will operate for each note Off unchecked Key Sync will be Off and the LFO effect that was starte
19. Specifies the amount of pitch change in semitones that will occur when you move the PITCH wheel up from the center position For example if this is set to 12 moving the PITCH wheel up from the center position will raise the pitch by one octave microX JS X 60 12 Specifies how the pitch will change when the joystick is moved all the way to the right A setting of 12 produces 1 octave of change For example if you set this to 12 and move the joystick all the way to the right the pitch will rise one octave above the original pitch X50 PBend 60 12 Specifies the amount of pitch change in semitones that will occur when you move the PITCH wheel down from the center position For example if this is set to 12 moving the PITCH wheel down from the center position will raise the pitch by one Octave microX JS X 60 12 Specifies how the pitch will change when the joystick is moved all the way to the left A setting of 12 produces 1 octave of change For example if you set this to 60 and move the joystick all the way to the left the pitch will fall five octaves below the original pitch This can be used to simulate the downward swoops that a guitarist produces using the tremolo arm AMS Pitch AMS Off FEG AEG EXT Selects the source that will modulate the pitch of oscillator 1 p 152 AMS List Intensity AMS Intensity 12 00 412 00 Specifies the depth a
20. 1000 and 1000 respectively then the result will be 1200 The sum is 3000 but the value is limited at the maximum of 1200 for the Detunel parameter Settings of 1000 1000 and 1000 would produce a result of 1000 Hold Reverse The last of the multiple Destination settings will be valid n D MULTI 59 60 Destination 1 6 and Value 1 6 The parameters that can be controlled and their range of val ues are as follows LPF Fc Low Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency 99 00 99 Adjusts the low pass filter cutoff frequency of program OSC 1 2 This will affect the brightness of the sound The param eter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 74 is received p 175 Reso HP Resonance High Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency 99 00 99 Adjusts the resonance level of the low pass filter or the cut off frequency of the high pass filter for program OSC 1 2 The parameter that is controlled will depend on the filter type specified for the program The parameter will be con trolled in the same way as when CC 71 is received p 175 F EG Int Filter EG Intensity 99 00 99 Adjusts the filter EG intensity the depth of the filter EG for program OSC1 2 The parameter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 79 is received r gt p 175 A Vel I Amp Velocity Intensity 99 00 99 Adjusts the amp velocity intensity the degree to which velocity will affect the amp
21. 38 High 88 Filter EG Int to A App to E App i AMS Off 4 2b Wel to RB 437 to B 488 flint to 488 BE 488 Euzie ns MMed rented EG T 4 2a Keyboard Track memes These settings specify keyboard tracking for the cutoff fre quency of filter 1 The way in which the cutoff frequency is affected by the position of the key on the keyboard that you play can be specified by the Key Low and High Ramp Low and High parameters Key Specifies the note numbers at which keyboard tracking will begin to be applied and set the Int to A and Int to B parameters to specify the depth and direction of the change applied to filter 1 A and B For the range of notes between Low KBDTrk Key Low and High KBDTrk Key High the cutoff frequency will change according to the key location pitch X50 You can also input a value by playing a note on the keyboard while you hold down the ENTER button Low KBDTrk Key Low C 1 G9 Keyboard tracking will apply to the range below the speci fied note number High KBDTrk Key High C 1 G9 Keyboard tracking will apply to the range above the speci fied note number Ramp Ramp Setting Specifies the angle of keyboard tracking Low KBDTrk Ramp Low 99 99 High KBDTrk Ramp High 99 99 If Int to A KBDTrk Int to A and Int to B KBDTrk Int to B are set to 50 Low KBDTrk Ramp Low is set to 62 and High KBDTrk Ramp
22. C064 C064 L032 e o L032 L001 U L001 R096 A e Ro R127 R127 Center Right Center Right 2 OSC1 Amp1 Pan C064 OSC2 Amp2 Pan C064 Center Right Pan CC 10 C064 L032 L001 R096 R127 Center Right If a mono type insertion effect is inserted the setting you make here will be ignored In this case the Pan CC 8 parameter in 8 Ed InsertFX Setup page will adjust the pan ning of the sound after the insertion effect p 99 3 Mixer RND The oscillator pan will change randomly at each note on MIDI If Status 2 1a has been set to INT MIDI control change 10 panpot messages can be received to con trol the setting CC 10 values of 0 or 1 will place the sound at far left 64 at center and 127 at far right Pan can be controlled by messages received on the MIDI Channel 2 1a This parameter can also be set from the 1 Ed Tone Adjust Mixer page Volume Adjusts the volume of each timbre 1 8 000 127 DI The volume of each timbre is determined by summing this volume value with the MIDI volume CC 7 and expression CC 11 If Status 2 1a has been set to INT incoming MIDI CC 7 or CC 11 messages will con trol the volume of a timbre However these messages will not affect the setting of this parameter If Status is EXT or EX2 the value of this parameter will be transmitted as MIDI CC 7 when the combina tion i
23. Change in cutoff Low setting High setting JS Y Int to A LFO1 J S Y Int to A 99 99 X50 If 7 3a Knob 1 B is set to MIDI CC 02 you can turn REALTIME CONTROL B mode knob 1 to control how OSC1 LFO1 will modulate the cutoff frequency of filter 1A This parameter specifies the depth and direction of this effect As you increase this value moving knob 1 toward the right will allow OSC1 LFOI to have a greater effect on filter 1 microX By moving the joystick in the Y direction down you can control the depth at which OSC1 LFO1 modulates the cutoff frequency of filter 1A This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the control For example as this value is raised OSC1 LFOI will have a correspond ingly greater effect on filter 1 when the joystick is moved in the Y direction JS Y Int to B LFO1JS Y Int to B 99 99 X50 If 7 3a Knob1 B is set to MIDI CC 02 you can turn REALTIME CONTROL B mode knob 1 to control how OSC1 LFOI will modulate the cutoff frequency of filter 1B This parameter specifies the depth and direction of this effect ee JS Y Int to A LFO1 JS Y Int to A microX By moving the joystick in the Y direction down you can control the depth at which OSC1 LFO1 modulates the cutoff frequency of filter 1B This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the control JS Y Int to A LFO1 JS Y Int to A AMS LFO1 AMS Off PEG FEG AEG KT EXT Sel
24. Medium and Slow preserves tonal quality You can also create an effect in which the pitch is gradually raised or dropped using the Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Input Level High Damp gt Wet Dry Detune x Delay N Feedback Input Level Sft Pitch Shift Sets the pitch difference from the input signal Source Selects the modulation source of the pitch shift Amount Sets the modulation amount of the pitch shift Delay Delay Time Sets the delay time Feedback Sets the feedback amount High Damp Sets the damping amount in the high range InLvi Mod Input Level Dmod Sets the modulation amount of the input level Src Source Selects the modulation source for the input level W D Wet Dly A o Wet Dry 100 100cent D gt Off Tempo 100 4100cent 0 1000ms 100 100 0 100 100 100 S Dine Off Tempo IS Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance e InLvl Mod e Src Off Tempo 100 100 delay with feedback Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Input Level High Damp Pitch Shifter Feedback Position Feedback Input Level Right o l Mode Switches Pitch Sh
25. Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 71 Limit Cho Fl Limiter Chorus Flanger 72 Limit Phaser Limiter Phaser This effect combines a mono type limiter and a chorus flanger You can change the order of the effect connection This effect combines a mono type limiter and a phaser You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Routing Limiter Y x Chorus Flanger Limiter ge Lor Chorus Flanger umm EQ Trim LEQ HEQ Gain Adjust Feedback Wet Dry Output Mode Wet Invert g Wet Dry iCho FIn Righto Lal Envelope Control LFO Tri Sine LMT Ratio Sets the signal compression ratio Threshld Threshold G Adj Gain Adjust Sets the limiter output gain Attack Sets the attack time Release Sets the release time CH FL LFO LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform of the chorus flanger F LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Dly Delay Time Sets the delay time Dep Depth Sets the depth of LFO modulation Feedback Sets the feedback amount F EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level F Pre LEQ Gain dB Sets the gain of Low EQ Pre HEQ Gain dB Sets the gain of High EQ F Cho Flng W D Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger Output Mode Selects the output mode fo
26. Send 1 2 MULTI 8 1 2 a 8 3a CC 93 send level CC 91 send 2 level e Pan CC 8 83a CC 8 post insert effect pan Bank Map KORG GM Specifies the mapping of programs and combinations rela tive to Bank Select control change messages CC 0 upper byte and CC 32 lower byte X50 The bank select messages shown in the following table can be received R or transmitted T corresponding to Program banks A D banks G g d and Combination banks A C Bank BankMap KORG Bank Ver OH Bank G 121 00 121 01 09 R T 121 00 121 01 09 R T 56 00 R 56 00 R 00 00 00 01 XG R 00 00 01 00 GS R Bank g d 120 00 R T 120 00 R T 62 00 R 62 00 R Sg Ges MUT Value decimal R Receive T Transmit microX The bank select messages shown in the following table can be received R or transmitted T corresponding to Program banks A E banks G g d and Combination banks A C Bank Bank Map KORG Bank Map GM 121 00 121 01 09 R T 121 00 121 01 09 R T 56 00 R 56 00 R 00 00 00 01 XG R 00 00 01 00 GS R Bank g d 120 00 R T 120 00 R T 62 00 R 62 00 R fa 127R Kor Mure Value decimal R Receive T Transmit Power On Mode Specifies the condition at power on Reset This instrument will be in Combination mode COMBI 0 Play and Combination A000 will be selected Memorize The location mode and page where you were when the power was last turned off a
27. T ug J 81420 ICIN d qouy TI 0 sodind FIT AA AA 81 ZI ug q H a H X H K FE dous HENRI GERD SOS EEN A LT TT ug ueuM peaarusuedj uoradr3os q parur puoo s snqeqs 2 91420 IGIW g8 qOUM II43D esodang TT AA 91 OT ug a 1 2 zT023uOD X3 g dOUM IPd VX Z lOo4243UuO essa AA AA T GO ud Teuro q q xeg H S SVSS W NOWWOO WHLSAS Z I 2 TTOt4UOCD XA d qOUM IPd VX T TO43uO D 32973j3 AA AA ZT 20 ug 2 uorss zdxq g qouy IpPd V uorssegdxs AA AA II 80 ug el 5yo Wued g qoux TpPd VX 3odueg AA AA OT VO uq Teuueyo s YOeCTL Toto epou TATNW ur u uM 9 buo w ued XAI gH QOUM IPd V qodued XJI 3sod AA AA 80 80 ug euueuo eqorq9 epou uor3eurquoo ueaboad ur ueuM 2 BYD 5 W eunToA g qoux TPd VX SUNTOA AA AA LO LO ug 4L 00 uu uu oo ug o0 zo ud 00 co ud cqoux O STOHINOO UWIITVUSM HISNSTI duV o l HISNSTI ALIOOTSNA SIVO 33O NO dWuV HSW Azquq_ eed A AA 90 90 ug 4L 00 uu uu go ug go zo ug o0 co ud zqoux O STOHLNOO SWIITIVHH ALIOOTSA dWuV 2 6yo w eurl eizod g qoux Tpa v Surr oqu ueq2od AA sss SO SO uq 4L 00 uu uu 990 ug vo zo ud 00 co ua TACUMA O STOHINOO SWIITVSN SIlV5 dWuv 2 Teped 3004 IPd V Teped 1004 Aa AA v0 O ug u0 AL 330 00 uu uu 9o ug zo zoug oo co ug 130 NO dWV x 9 a SP TPd V 0SX A XoT3s Aop XozoTu guoT3eTnpo AA AA 20 Sg ug o T
28. TI 80SWimoddaionOovOf Jew 81 SW2 modulation On Off ew j j 82 Footswitch On Off J j jj d 83 Controller CC 83 f j L j j j j j O jj j d j Lp udi 91 Effectdepth 1 send Zoe j l j 92 Effect depth 2 insertion effect O O f 9 j l Ir 98FEfecdeph3 send leve j f S4Ffetdeph4 maserefettOvO f o SI III d S S So 95 Effectdepth 5 master effect2 On Off f III TI 96Daainremnt f j j S j LP Dale decisiment SO SOO E et j j jj j SS ET BEE 388 NRPN LSB CTE j j TI E Ameggiatorovoffswich S L Jaf 1O Arpeggiator gate control ST TI ftAmeggatrveloityconrol f fo L Ir TI 99 NRPNM 80 J TT ri f 100 RPN LSB LI j j Jj Jj j LL CBendrnge J J J j j j j j j tFnete LL Jj j j j Coarsetune j j Jj Jj j j TI 10
29. WA You can use the Utility Detune BPM Adj 2 5 6 to make a calculation in BPM units and set Detune auto matically DI Transpose and Detune settings do not affect the note data that is transmitted via MIDI Transpose and Detune are controlled by received MIDI RPN mes sages The Mode Oscillator Mode PROG 1 12 of the programs selected for tracks 1 16 will be controlled as follows e f Mode Oscillator Mode is Single or Double MIDI RPN Coarse Tune messages can be received to control and change the Transpose setting and Fine Tune messages to control and change the Detune setting e If Mode Oscillator Mode is Drums MIDI RPN Coarse Tune and Fine Tune messages can be received to control and change the Detune setting The range of control will be 1 octave when Coarse Tune and Fine Tune are added These messages will be received on the MIDI channel that is specified for each track by MIDI Channel 2 1a 2a Bend Range PRG 24 24 Specifies the range of pitch change that will occur when the MIDI Pitch Bend Change message is received PRG The pitch range specified by the program will be used 24 424 Regardless of the setting of the program pitch bending will use the range you specify here DI This setting can be controlled and changed by received MIDI RPN Pitch Bend Range messages These mes sages will not be received if the setting is PRG This is cont
30. Wet Dry L LFO Phase L Delay L Delay Time Sets the delay time for the left channel R Delay R Delay Time Sets the delay time for the right channel L Feedback Sets the feedback amount for the left channel R Feedback Sets the feedback amount for the right channel 0 0 680 0ms 0 0 680 0ms 100 100 100 100 0 100 t Fx 43 0 100 t Fx 43 Tri Sine HiDamp High Damp Sets the damping amount in the high range LoDamp Low Damp Sets the damping amount in the low range LFO Wave LFO Waveform Selects LFO Waveform Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed w Fx 20 LFO Phase 180 180deg Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right ee Fx 34 Pan Freq Panning Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the panning speed 0 100 ze mod eg Off w iit Pan Dep Panning Depth Sets the panning width Source w iit Ge modulation source for the panning width c d 100 100 c d the EE amount of the panning width W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Deu Source Off Do eM ndi Do eM ndi tis modulation source of the effect balance EE n 100 100 EE n the amount of the effect balance 49 LCR BPM Delay L C R BPM Delay The L C R delay enables you to match the delay time with the song tempo You can also synchronize the delay time with
31. knob MIDI control change message will be received Knob4 Off On Specifies whether or not the A mode 4 knob MIDI control change message 72 the release time of the filter and amp EG s and the B mode 4 knob MIDI control change mes sage will be received B 4 3 4 UTILITY is Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 X50 4 5 2 3 8 MiDIFilter2 3 T01 08 X50 4 6 2 3 16 MIDI Filter2 3 T09 16 I peel X Ie tts SUR T8 eis samt a 1 Sus eru Ch Bie GES PE OESCH 4 5 6 a SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2 Off On Specifies whether the operations of SW1 and SW2 will be received These correspond to the control change messages assigned in the 7 Ed Arp Ctrls page This setting is valid if you have selected SW1 Mod CC 80 SW2 Mod CC 81 or Porta SW CC 65 E 4 5 6 UTILITY i Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 X50 4 7 2 4 8 MIDI Filter2 4 T01 08 microX 4 5 2 3 8 Mibi Filter2 3 T01 08 X50 4 8 2 4 16 MIDI Filter2 4 T09 16 microX 4 6 2 3 16 MIDI Filter2 3 T09 16 X50 MULTI 4d HID Filter uitu oe Da eee Ce J FootPedal switch Se See AO FootPedal switch Se See AO i i a i i POI oi B i Bg oi bd Bg oi Bg hd i bd CAE Seng Standard hit 1 Statuz BTH Ch ES X50 4 7 8 a microX 4 5 6 a Foot Pedal Switch Other Control Change Foot Pedal Switch Off On Specifies whether or not the effect of the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL SWITCH will b
32. 1 4 will transmit when SELECT A B C is selected B 6 1 2 3 UTILITY For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Write Ext Control Setups Here s how to write external control setups 00 63 G CD Select Write Ext Control Setups to access the dialog box Write Ext Control Setups tantel OK 2 Press the MENU OK button to write the data If you decide not to execute press the EXIT CANCEL button Reset Ext Control Setup Here s how to rename the selected external control setup You can enter up to sixteen characters OG X50 p 112 microX p 114 Rename Ezt Control Setup sr ss um Reset Ext Control Setup Here s how to initialize an external control setup All settings of the selected setup will be initialized as fol lows e MIDI Channel Gch e CC Assign Off CD Select the external setup that you want to initialize 2 Select Reset Ext Control Setup to access the dialog box Reset Ext Control Setup 00 cancel OK Press the MENU OK button to initialize the settings If you decide not to execute press the EXIT CANCEL button 93 94 5 Demo Song Demo Song The X50 microX contains demo songs Here s how to listen to the demo songs CD Hold down the CATEGORY button and press the AUDITION button to enter the Demo Song Player page 2 Press the AUDITION button to start the demo
33. 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D zs Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Mode a Src b LFO Sync The Mode parameter switches LFO operation mode When Loop is selected the Doppler effect will be created repeatedly If LFO Sync is set to On the LFO will be reset when the modula tion source specified with the Src parameter is turned on When Mode is set to 1 Shot the Doppler effect is created only once when the modulation source specified in the Src field is turned on At this time if you do not set the Src parameter the Doppler effect will not be created and no effect sound will be out put MIDI The effect is off when a value for the modulation source specified for the Src parameter is smaller than 64 and the effect is on when the value is 64 or higher The Doppler effect is triggered when the value changes from 63 or smaller to 64 or higher e Pitch Dep With the Doppler effect the pitch is raised when the sound approaches and the pitch is lowered when the sound goes away This parameter sets this pitch variation f Pan Dep This parameter sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound With larger values the sound seems to come and go from much further away With positive values the sound moves from left to right with negative va
34. 158 About the BPM MIDI SYNC function 160 X50 SW1 2 ASSIGN LOL SWI VV ASS IH LisSI u uskasauakaaasuykaskunha 161 Knob 1 4 B Assign l I T I T T T I S I S S S S U T T T T I Ni 162 Realtime Control Knobs B Assign List 162 Foot Switch Assign BERR I RRR RRR RRR RRR 164 Foo SWIC Asson eege 164 Foot Pedal Assign BERBER RRR 165 Foot Pedal Ansi n Ciiis 165 MIDI transmission when the X50 microX s controllers are operated 166 X50 microX operations when control changes are transmitted received 168 MIDI applications 171 E Messages transmitted and received by this EE 171 Various messages 180 X50 microX MUSIC SYNTHSIZER MIDI IMPLEMENTATION 181 Index es LOG Apple Mac and Audio Units are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc registered in the US and other countries e Windows XP is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and other counties e VST is a trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH HTAS is a registered trademark of Avid Technology Inc or its subsidiaries or divisions All other product and company names are trademarks or regis tered trademarks of their respective holders 1 Program mode PROG PAGE MENU Use the following procedure to select the desired page from within the cu
35. 2 4 OS2lfo OSC2 LEO 12 2 5 EG Pitch EG HUES 12 PROG 3 Ed LFOS 14 3 1 OSILFOI OSC1 LFO1 HUE 14 3 2 1 LFO2 OSC1 LEO 15 3 3 2 LFO1 OSC2 LEO 15 3 4 2 LFO2 OSCH LEO 15 PROG 4 Ed Filter1 16 d mibi nde 16 4 2 Mod 1 Filter1 Modulationl 17 4 3 Mod 2 Filter1 Modulation2 18 4 4 lfoMod LFO Modulation 18 4 5 EG Filter EG GZ oo 19 PROG 5 Ed Filter2 21 Ee 21 5 2 Mod 1 Filter2 Modulationl 21 5 3 Mod 2 Filter2 Modulation2 21 5 4 lfoMod LFO Modulation 21 5 5 EG Filte2 EG GZ 21 PROG 6 Ed Amp1 2 21 6 1 Lvl Pan Amp1 Level Pan 21 6 2 Mod Amp1 Modulation 22 6 3 EG Ampl EG RRMA sss 23 6 4 Lv1 Pan Amp2 Level Pan 25 6 5 Mod Amp2 Modulation 25 6 6 EG Amp2 EG HE 25 PROG 7 Ed Arp Ctrls Arpeggiator CONOIS uuu ricco annoa Cuvier un 20 Z Setup APCS SEMID E 25 7 2 Zone Scan Zone 27 z O E 27 PROG 8 Ed InsertFX 28 EE 28 SOD ieee eee
36. 35 45 4 5 J y de Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed ix Ex 09 Times 1 16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed r Fx 09 Step Base Step Base Note A A A Js A J3 J J3 J Selects the type of notes to specify the LFO step speed Fx 10 t Times 1 32 Sets the number of notes to specify the LFO step speed ix Ex 10 Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount t Fx 20 HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the feedback damping amount in the high range w Fx 20 W D Wet Dly Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds i Fx 10 20 Des Off Tempo Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 115 EFFECT 116 22 St Env Flanger Stereo Envelope Flanger This Flanger uses an envelope generator for modulation You will obtain the same pattern of flanging each time you play You can also control the Flanger directly using the modula tion source Stereo In Stereo Out anger J x Es H High Damp Feedback Wet Dry Right o d ez SS EG Attack Decay Es Sweep Mode 0 0 50 0ms t Fx 09 0 0 50 0ms t Fx 09 L Dly Bottom L Delay Bottom Sets the lower limit of the delay time on the left channel L Dly Top L Delay Top Sets the upper limit of the delay time on the left c
37. 5 p 179 Example 1 On tracks 1 and 2 set MIDI Channel 2 1 2 a to 01 and Status 2 1 2 a to INT Assign arpeggiator A to track 1 and arpeggiator B to track 2 and check Arpeggiator Run A P 7 1a In Control Track 0 1a choose Track01 With the front panel ARP ON OFF button is off play the keyboard and tracks 1 and 2 will sound simulta neously MULTI When you turn on the front panel ARP ON OFF button and play the keyboard arpeggiator A will operate for track 1 and arpeggiator B will operate for track 2 Arpeggiator Assign omg eS Tracki MIDICh 1ch Status INT Pattern A Track MIDI Ch 1ch Status INT Pattern B Trigger Arpeggiator Chi B Pattern B Example 2 For tracks 1 2 and 3 set the MIDI Channel 2 1 2 a to 01 02 and 03 respectively and set Status 2 1 2 a to INT Assign arpeggiator A to tracks 1 and 2 and arpeggiator B to track 3 Check the Arpeggiator Run A P 7 1a setting e n Control Track 0 1a choose Track01 Playing the keyboard when the front panel ARP ON OFF button is off will play the sound assigned to track 1 Playing the keyboard when the front panel ARP ON OFF button is on will cause arpeggiator A to operate for tracks 1 and 2 and produce sound for both tracks e n Control Track 0 1a choose Track02 Playing the keyboard when the front panel ARP ON OFF button is off will play the sound assigned to track 2 Playing the keyboard when the f
38. 91 will control the Send 2 level for OSC 1 and 2 These are controlled on the global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 1a The actual send level is determined by summing these values with the send level setting of each oscillator 8 1b Use DKit Setting The LCD screen shown below is for when Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a is set to Drums PROG Ed InsertFx BUS BUS Select 8 1b Lise Dkit Setting BUS Select BUS Select call OSCE AFA send UGC Send 127 Send2 127 J setup re Use DKit Setting Off On This will be available when Mode Oscillator Mode is set to Drums If the Mode Oscillator Mode is Single or Double this setting has no effect On checked The BUS BUS Select GLOBAL 4 3a set ting for each key of the selected drum kit will be used Check this when you want to apply an insert effect to an individual drum instrument or to output an individual drum instrument to one of the INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT jacks Off unchecked The setting of the BUS Select MFX Send 8 1a parameter described below will be used All drum instruments will be sent to the specified bus B 8 1 UTILITY is Write Program 0 1 For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Copy Insert Effect This command copies effect settings from Program Combi nation Multi set CD Select Copy Insert Effect to access the dialog box Copy Inser
39. 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D s Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance b LFO Freq Mod f AUTOFADE Src g Fade Rate g Dly When LFO Freq Mod is set to AUTOFADE you can use the modulation source selected in AUTO FADE Src as a trigger to automatically fade in the modulation amount When BPM MIDI Sync is set to On you cannot use this The Fade Rate parameter specifies the rate of fade in The Dly parameter determines the time from AutoFade modulation source ON until the fade in starts The following is an example of fade in where the LFO speed is increased from 1 0Hz to 4 0Hz when a note on message is received AUTOFADE Src Gatel Freq 1 00 Hz LFO Freq Mod AUTOFADE Amount 3 00 MIDI The effect is off when a value for the dynamic modulation source specified for the AUTOFADE Src parameter is smaller than 64 and the effect is on when the value is 64 or higher The AutoFade function is triggered when the value changes from 63 or smaller to 64 or higher AUTOFADE AutoFadef AUTOFADE Src Gate1 LFO Frequency Hz 1 00 Gate1 Signal LFO Freq Mod AUTOFADE Amt 3 00 t l Note On di All Note Off i LFO Frequency Fade In Rate 1 0 3 0 4 0Hz Fade In Delay 4 4 mer LFO Frequency 1
40. Bank EX2 MSB and Bank EX2 LSB 2 1a will be enabled Instead of the bank numbers for A G d that can be selected on this instrument the bank numbers you specify here will be transmitted via MIDI In other respects this is the same as EXT MIDI IN Tone generator EXT EX2 MIDI Channel 01 16 Gch Set the MIDI transmit receive channel for each timbre 1 8 Gch The timbre will use the channel that has been selected as the global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 1a When Status is INT MIDI messages will be received on the channel you specify here If this setting is the same as the global MIDI channel the internal tone generator will sound according to the internal settings If this is set to EXT or EX2 playing this instrument will transmit MIDI messages on the MIDI channel specified here Messages will also be trans mitted simultaneously on the global MIDI channel Bank EX2 MSB 000 000 127 127 Bank EX2 LSB 000 000 127 127 Specifies the bank number that will be transmitted when Status is set to EX2 If Status is not set to EX2 this set ting has no effect 2 2a Force OSC Mode OSC Select Porta mento Force OSC Mode PRG Poly Mono LGT Specifies the Mode Voice Assign Mode PROG 1 1b of the program selected for each timbre 1 8 PRG The settings of the program will be used Poly The timbre will play polyphonically regardless of the settings of the program Mono
41. Bn 05 vv When the above CC is assigned as a B mode function for one of the REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs rotating that knob will transmit Portamento Time messages and will modify the speed at which the portamento pitch changes When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated Portamento switch CC 65 Bn 41 vv When the above CC is assigned to ASSIGNABLE SWITCH etc operating that switch will transmit vv 127 7F for ON or vv 0 00 for OFF and the portamento effect will be switched on off When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated vv of 63 3F or less will be OFF and 64 40 or greater will be ON p 161 SW1 SW2 Assign List e n Combination and Multi modes transmission reception of this message can be turned on off independently for each timbre track Portamento SW CC 65 COMBI 32a MULTI 3 3 4 a In Multi mode portamento time switch messages will be transmitted by each track whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 when you set Portamento MULTI 3 3 4 a re select a multi set when MULTI mode GLOBAL 0 2a is for Master 1 p 62 Controlling the volume Volume CC 07 Bn 07 vv When the above CC is assigned to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL or as the B mode function of a REALTIME CON TROL knob 1 4 operating that controller will transmit Volume messages and the volume will change When this message
42. CATEGORY button and PROGRAM COMBINATION buttons to select by category r p 2 Use the foot switch r p 80 164 e Receive a MIDI program change p 171 Category 00 15 name This is the combination category display All combinations are organized into sixteen categories You can select a category and then select from combinations that belong to that category To select a combination by category use the procedure described below PROG 0 1a WA To specify the category for a combination use Utility Write Combination 0 1 To modify a category name use Category Name Comb 00 07 08 15 GLOBAL 3 3 4 Select by Category Use the utility Select by Category to select a combination by category Ss PRO 0 1a microX Category amp Bank Use the CATEGORY button and PROGRAM COMBINA TION buttons to select by category r p 2 X50 Cat HOLD Press the HOLD button and the display will indicate tat HOLD The category will be held fixed rx PROG 0 1a To cancel press the HOLD button twice to turn off the tat HOLD display X50 105 HOLD When you press the HOLD button a second time the dis play will indicate 1 z HOLD and the first digit of the combi nation number will be fixed PROG 0 1a To cancel press the HOLD button to turn off the display J Tempo 040 240 EXT Sets the tempo of the arpeggiator This can be adjusted by the REALTIME CONTROLS C mod
43. Envelope is set to Input the input signal will be recorded only when its level exceeds the Threshold level When recording is completed reverse playback starts immedi ately 43 LCR Delay L C R Delay This multitap delay outputs three Tap signals to the left right and center respectively You can also adjust the left and right spread of the delay sound Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Wet Dry Gage Level D mod gt Wet Dry L Delay L Delay Time Sets the delay time of TapL 0 1360ms 90 C Delay C Delay Time Sets the delay time of TapC 0 1360ms 50 R Delay R Delay Time Sets the delay time of TapR 0 1360ms aiU C Fb C Delay Feedback Sets the feedback amount of TapC 100 100 Das Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the TapC feedback amount Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the TapC feedback amount HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range par LoDamp Low Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the low range InLvl Mod Input Level Dmod 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the input level i Fx 37 Dose Off Tempo i Fx 37 0 50 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound par W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D Off Tempo Src Source Selects the
44. F EG S Filter EG Sustain Level 99 00 99 F EG R Filter EG Release Time 99 00 99 These adjust only the filter parameter as in A Attack Time D Decay Time S Sustain Level or R Release Time respectively rx PROG 4 5a A EG A Amp EG Attack Time 99 00 99 A EG D Amp EG Decay Time 99 00 99 A EG S Amp EG Sustain Level 99 00 99 A EG R Amp EG Release Time 99 00 99 These adjust only the amp parameter as in A Attack Time D Decay Time S Sustain Level or R Release Time respectively PROG 6 3a 6 6a LFO1 Sp LFO1 Speed 199 00 199 Adjusts the LFO1 speed of program OSC 1 2 The parame ter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 76 is received v p 175 PLFO1 I Pitch LFO1 Intensity 12 00 00 00 12 00 Adjusts the program OSC 1 2 pitch LFO1 intensity the depth of pitch modulation produced by LFO1 The parame ter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 77 is received rs p 175 LFO1 Fd LFO1 Fade 99 00 99 Adjusts the program OSC 1 2 LFO1 Fade parameter the time from when the LFO begins to take effect until it reaches the maximum level 3 1a vs p 14 LFO1 DI LFO1 Delay 99 00 99 Adjusts the program OSC 1 2 pitch LFO1 delay the time from note on until the LFO begins to take effect The parameter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 78 is receive
45. Filter1 2 Trim PROG 4 5 Amp1 2 Level PROG 6 OSC1 2 Send1 2 PROG 8 Effect Trim parameter PROG 8 9 Output Effect W D parameter PROG 8 9 Rtn1 2 Returnt 2 PROG 9 Combination mode Input Volume 1 2 Send1 2 Effect Trim parameter Output Effect W D parameter Rtn1 2 Return 2 Multi mode Input Volume MULTI 0 S1 2 Send1 2 MULTI 8 Effect Trim parameter MULTI 8 9 MULTI 8 9 MULTI 9 Output Effect W D parameter Rtn1 2 Return 2 l Some effects may not have these parameters 97 98 Insert Effect ur 1 In Out Insert Effect IFX have a stereo input and a stereo output If you select Dry no effect for the W D parameter the stereo input signal will be output in stereo without being processed by the effect If you select Wet effect applied the processed signal will be output in one of the following ways Mono In Mono Out mes We t Mono In Stereo Out gt Effect Effect reo In r XIIe SEM If you select 00 No Effect stereo input signals are output in stereo without being processed The possible routing of effect inputs and outputs is indi cated in the upper left corner of the block diagram These can be switched on off by the On Off settings in 8 Ed InsertFX or InsertFX Setup pages IFX in each mode When off the effect will be bypassed In the same way as for 00 No Effect the stereo input sound will be output in stereo without m
46. I AMS Intensity is set to a value of 8 17 25 33 41 or 49 the corresponding time can be multiplied by a maximum of 2 4 8 16 32 or 64 times or divided by 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 16 1 32 1 64 e X50 Suppose that you set AMS to Mod Whl 01 I AMS Intensity to 8 A to D to and S and R to 0 Moving the MOD wheel up will lengthen the attack time to a maximum of double its original length The Decay Time will be shortened by a maximum of 1 2 The Slope and Release times will not change e microX select JS Y 01 for AMS and set I AMS Intensity to 8 A to D to and S and R to 0 When you move the joystick in the Y direction the Attack Time will be lengthened by a maximum of 2 times The Decay Time will be shortened by a maximum of 1 2 The Slope and Release times will not change LFO Frequency PROG 3 1b The frequency of LFO 1 or 2 can be controlled by EG key board tracking controllers or tempo etc You can even use the LFO2 frequency to modulate the LFO1 frequency If Int AMS 1 2 Intensity is set to a value of 16 33 49 66 82 or 99 the corresponding frequency can be multiplied by a maximum of 2 4 8 16 32 or 64 times or divided by 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 16 1 32 1 64 e X50 1r you set AMS 1 2 Freq AMS 1 2 to Mod Whl 01 and set Int AMS 1 2 Intensity to 16 moving the MOD wheel in the up direction will lengthen the LFO cycle to a ma
47. L R is a common setting to send signals to the Master EQ before they are routed to the OUTPUT L R outputs Select 1 2 or 1 2 to route the signals to INDIVIDUAL OUT PUT 1 or 2 p 103 Individual Outputs Select Off so that no signals will be output to L MONO R 1 or 2 In this case the signals are routed from the Master Effects to MAIN OUTPUT This setting is used when you are connecting the Insert Effect with the Master Effects in series using 51 Send1 MFEX1 and S2 Send2 MFPX2 3 3 Send level These parameters enable you to set the send level of the sig nals routed to Master Effects MFX1 and MEX2 These set tings are effective only when BUS Select is set to L R or Off If you are not using insert effect set the PROG 8 1 MFX Send Send 1 and Send 2 parameters the COMBI 8 1 51 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 parameters or the Multi mode MULTI 8 1 2 51 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 parameter to set the send levels to master effects MFX1 and MEFX2 D Send Level 1 can be controlled by MIDI Control Change CC 93 and Send Level 2 can be controlled by MIDI Control Change CC 91 4 Controlling the Insert Effects via MIDI Using the Dynamic Modulation Dmod function enables you to control all effect parameters in real time during per formance from the controllers of this instrument or a con nected MIDI sequencer You can also control the Pan CC 8 S1 Send 1 MFX1 and
48. Level Output Level Sets the output level Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the output level Amount 50 50 Sets the modulation amount of the output level Lo Low Cutoff 20 1 0kHz Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type G Gain 18 18dB Sets the gain of Low EQ M1 Mid1 Cutoff 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 ps G Gain 18 18dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 M2 Mid2 Cutoff 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type h Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 Gg G Gain 18 418dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 Direct Mix 0 50 Sets the amount of the dry sound mixed to the distortion SpSim Speaker Simulation Off On Switches the speaker simulation on off W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D zs Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Wah The Wah parameter switches the wah effect on off a Sw This parameter sets how the wah effect is switched on and off via the modulation source When Sw Mmnt Moment the wah effect is usually turned off It is turned on only when you press the pedal When a value for the modulation source is less
49. Mixer Multi select Pee o Ae C bdi oedi aed adac END P GC OO T di Ba2e Standard kit 1 Status ETH Chal Hult Tipos zero a 368 Mix 2 his 16 0 4 5 a Pan Volume Pan RND L001 C064 R127 Sets the pan of tracks 1 16 L001 C064 R127 A setting of L001 is far left and R127 is far right A setting of C064 will reproduce the pan setting of the oscillator in Program mode OSC1 Amp1 Pan L001 i O OSC2 Amp2 Pan R127 e O Leckeren Center Right Center Right OSC1 Amp1 Pan L032 OSC2 Amp2 Pan R096 Pan CC 10 Pan CC 10 C064 C064 L032 Le O L032 L001 L001 R096 8 R127 Center Right Center Right OSC1 Amp1 Pan C064 OSC2 Amp2 Pan C064 Center Right Pan CC 10 C064 L032 L001 R096 Center Right If a mono type insertion effect is inserted this setting will be ignored In this case the 8 InsertFX Setup page Pan CC 8 setting will adjust the pan of the sound following the insertion effect RND The sound will be panned randomly at each note on MIDI If Status 2 1a 2a is INT or BTH CC 10 Panpot can be received to control the panning When receiving CC 10 a value of 0 or 1 is far left 64 is center and 127 is far right If Multi Mode GLOBAL 0 2a is set to for Master the pan setting you specify here will be trans mitted via MIDI for tracks whose Status is EXT EX2 or BTH when you switch th
50. Pitch can be controlled by the filter amp EG controllers or tempo etc If you select Filter EG or Amp EG as the AMS Pitch AMS and set Intensity AMS Intensity to 412 00 the pitch will change up to 1 octave in synchronization with the EG e f you select Tempo as the AMS Pitch AMS and set Intensity AMS Intensity to 412 00 doubling the tempo based on J 120 will raise the pitch one octave and halving the tempo will lower the pitch one octave Pitch EG Intensity PROG 2 1b Pitch EG intensity can be controlled by keyboard tracking controllers or tempo e X50 Ifyou set AMS Pitch EG AMS to Mod Wh1 01 and set Intensity AMS Intensity to 12 00 moving the MOD wheel up will gradually increase the effect of the Pitch EG up to a maximum of 1 octave Setting Intensity AMS Intensity to a negative value will invert the effect of the Pitch EG e microX If you select JS Y 01 as the AMS Pitch EG AMS and set Intensity AMS Intensity to 12 00 moving the joystick in the Y direction will gradually increase the effect of the Pitch EG to a maximum of 1 octave If Intensity AMS Intensity has a negative value the effect of the Pitch EG will be inverted Pitch LFO1 2 Intensity PROG 2 2a Pitch modulation intensity of the LFO1 2 can be controlled by an EG keyboard tracking controllers or tempo etc e f you select EG as the AMS LFO1 2 AMS the pit
51. Select the bank and number of the data you want to dump and then press the center of the ClickPoint Dump Program Programs of all banks programs of the specified bank one program Dump Combination Combinations of all banks combinations of the specified bank one combination Dump Multi All multi sets Dump Drum Kit All drum kits One drum kit Dump Arpeggio Pattern All arpeggio patterns One arpeggio pattern microX Dump Ext Control All external control sets or one external con Setup trol set Dump Global Global settings except for the Drum Kits and User Arpeggio Patterns of Global mode Dump All All banks of programs combinations drum kits arpeggio patterns global set tings Transmission amp Do not touch this instrument s switches or turn off the power while data is being transmitted Data dump transmission procedure D Connect this instrument to the device that will receive the data dump If you re using a computer that is able to receive MIDI exclusive messages connect the computer s USB connec tor to the X50 microX s USB connector Alternatively connect the MIDI IN connector of your computer s MIDI interface to the X50 microX s MIDI OUT connector v p 171 If you are using a MIDI data filter etc connect this instrument s MIDI OUT connector to the MIDI IN con nector of the MIDI data filter A Some USB MIDI interface devices may not be able to transmit or receive the X50 microX s M
52. Selects the modulation source for the wah when Sweep Mode D XCT Blend Exciter Blend Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect 100 100 r gt Fx 11 Emphatic Point 0 70 GG Ex 11 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet D Off Tempo Sets the frequency range to be emphasized W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance mod IfoF LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Res Resonance Sets the resonance amount LPF Low Pass Filter Switches the wah low pass filter on and off Routing 0 02 20 00Hz 0 100 Of On PEQ WAH WAH PEQ Changes the order of the parametric equalizer and wah connection W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Dimes Off Tempo 100 100 135 136 60 PAEQ Cho Fl Parametric 4 Band EQ Chorus Flanger This effect combines a mono type four band parametric equalizer and a chorus flanger Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left drame 4Band EQ Chorus Flanger X ot Output Mode Feedback Wet invert Cho Fing Wet Dry LFO Tri Sine
53. Status 2 1a of EXT or EX2 MIDI note on off messages will not be transmitted by that timbre Select by Category Selects a combination by category For the procedure refer to Select by Category esp 2 X50 Set EE HA 1 AB16 Session E P BAZAS ICY River Piano Baia Lush Layers jd AGS FUREY Keys Combi Category 46 Keyboard microX 0A 1 A6 16 S6250 E P BAZAS ICY River Piano aaxina4da Lush Layers HAd ABS 1 FUREY Keys 0 2 Prog Timbre Program Indicates the program that will be used by each timbre 0 2a J zuo 0 2b RI H El El A n ble E flew A combi JL Frog dL His fL Are AIi Arp E 0 2a Bank Combi Select Cat Hold 10 s Hold J Tempo Bank Bank A C Combi Select Combination Select 0 127 name X50 Cat Cat HOLD X50 10 s 10 s HOLD Tempo 040 240 EXT In the same way as in the Combi page select a combination and set the tempo of the arpeggiator 0 1a 0 2b Timbre Number amp Category Timbre Number amp Category 1 8 This displays the timbre number and an abbreviated cate gory name 0 2c Program Select Program Name Program Select A000 9128 Indicates the program that will be used by each timbre Choose this parameter and use one of the following meth ods to select a program X50 e Turn the VALUE dial Use the INC DEC buttons e Use numeric buttons 0 9 to enter the program number and press the ENTER button t
54. SuM dOW 0SX A AOFIS OC XOIO U uorae npo AA AA 10 TO ug dL 00 00 8L iL 00 00 9 oct TOO p 5 dd Z ebueuo tqwop borgq sien MNNV8 ESN 399T9S yueg wu ww 00 00 ug 3L 00 1066 GL 3L 00 00 6L 8ZT I00 5 V It uo LZT T A4A UO SON AA AA CODD AA u6 xozOTu YUATM p Tqeus AL 00 WIES 4L 00 70 00 LZI 000 q V It 330 Aan J30 939N v9 Ov CDD AA ug AL 00 0 3 AL 00 0 00 LTT 000 q 4L 00 20 dE 4L 00 20 00 KZer p00 9 LET 000 2 a H a H xen dL 00 l0 3 AL 00 10 00 fo ECL DOO LET 000 d VNA rr Aq p gqrusueIr uoradiaoseq PATUL puooss np 4L 00 00 d 4L 00 00 00 dd qq uu ZT 000 vuued LZT 000 vxueg Z WD st dew yueg DHOM st dew xueg xeH ano IGINW uorqeurquoo weziborlg y reuroeq d xeH H SHOVSSHN I4NNVHO T I SAHA NMOd d HAVLOO esodsuezy s excgz XoO34OTUu LZT 00 uoraequ u rTrdur SATSNTOXY uejs g IGIN UO uorjeuagogur STOW oi de eep Hzoy TeooT azanoA aqaTnsuoo esodsuezy S YT9 OSX 80T PZ AX Tx S00z Daa ZT NOLIVLNS3IAH Id IAIN HAZISH TNAS DISNIN NODRU OSX 181 ejep peaarusuez se owes YNA wopuey x ST 0 ON euueu TeqoTD sAemIv 6 HIH ZO INI ST snqjeqs Teuueyo s yoerq s ezquty uoee epou r3TnW uorqeurquoo ur ueuM euueuo TeqoTo Attensn rr ST 0 ON TeuueyD IGIW Uu oznos uorae npow otweudg 3432 jjJq98 2027S poug X4
55. Tei hRaafj 5tereoPiano mtet th ach EON COMBI d Ed HIDI Filter2 Reub Strin Drum Mie H pe deerit ont Edd JTFnaatPesgal swuitch 4 3a i i i i i i i i Eois ims im i E m 5 Lu ld i E ER ach Tai Bei stereoPiano mf f I Lez 1 X50 4 4a FootPedal Switch Other Con trol Change microX 4 3a FootPedal Switch Other Control Change FootPedal Switch Off On Specifies whether or not the effect of the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL SWTICH will be transmitted and received The function is assigned in GLOBAL 0 3 System Foot page This setting is valid when a MIDI control change is assigned Other Ctrl Change Off On Specifies whether or not MIDI control change message not covered in the preceding items MIDI Filter1 1 2 4 will be transmitted and received E X50 4 4 microX 4 3 UTILITY t Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 COMBI 5 Ed Key Zone These settings specify the keyboard range in which each timbre will sound The top bottom key parameters specify the range of notes in which timbres 1 8 will sound and the top bottom slope parameters specify the range over which the original vol ume will be reached By setting timbres of different sounds to ranges that do not overlap you can play different sounds in different ranges of the keyboard Key Split By setting the ranges to overlap you can play two or more sounds with a single note Layer If you set the
56. VALUE dial to select a program 4 Press the MENU OK button to execute or press the EXIT CANCEL button if you decide not to execute microX Category amp Bank CD Press the CATEGORY button to access the category menu Prog Category 2 Note the categories shown below the PROGRAM buttons or COMBINATION buttons and press the corresponding button for the desired category You can also use the PAGE PAGE buttons to step through the categories one by one Use the VALUE dial to select a program 4 Press the MENU OK button to execute or press the EXIT CANCEL button if you decide not to execute X50 10 s HOLD Press the HOLD button to make the indi cation appear The ten s place of the program number will be fixed 2 Now you can press a numeric button 0 9 to enter the one s place in a single action 3 You can use the INC DEC buttons to change the ten s place 4 To defeat 10 s HOLD press the HOLD button to make the indication disappear J Tempo 040 240 EXT This sets the tempo of the arpeggiator The tempo can also be adjusted by the REALTIME CONTROLS C mode TEMPO knob EXT is shown if MIDI Clock GLOBAL 1 1a is set to Ext MIDI or Ext USB or if it is set to Auto and the unit is oper ating as a slave The arpeggiator will synchronize to MIDI clock messages from an external MIDI device You can also set this parameter from 7 Ed Arp
57. Y amp After Touch 2 microX Joystick Y axis down and aftertouch received from the MIDI connector p 153 EXT Pedal 04 Foot Pedal CC 04 assignable foot pedal CC 04 v p 153 EXT Ribbon 16 Ribbon CC 16 MIDI CC 16 controller ribbon controller realtime control knob 1 in B mode knob modulation 1 CC 17 es p 153 realtime control knob 2 in B mode knob modulation 2 CC 19 t p 153 realtime control knob 3 in B mode knob modulation 3 CC 20 rz p 153 realtime control knob 4 in B mode knob modulation 4 CC 21 p 153 realtime control knob 1 in B mode rz p 153 Ti EXT Knob rob Mods Ger EXT KnobM4 Knob Mod4 CC 21 realtime control knob 4 in B mode rz p 153 X50 Assignable switch 1 SW1 modulation CC 80 t p 153 X50 Assignable switch 2 SW2 modulation CC 81 t p 153 microX CC 81 received from the MIDI connector assignable foot switch CC 82 v p 153 In the above table the parentheses indicate the type of source that can be used for each AMS For example the AMS Pitch AMS value for OSC1 Pitch PROG 2 1a can be Off FEG AEG EXT x p 10 This means that you can select Off and FEG AEG or EXT sources C C This is the control change number This indicates a controller not present on the X50 microX that can be received via MIDI such as the ribbon controller on the TRITON Extreme etc The controller and the type of MIDI messages it transmits will de
58. and the send levels to master effects MFX1 and MFX2 for the signals that have passed through the insert effect 3 1 Pan CC 8 Specifies the pan after passing through the insert effect If the insert effect is a Stereo In Stereo Out type rs In Out setting this parameter to C064 will allow the Pan settings of the oscillator PROG 6 1b PROG 6 4 timbre COMBI 0 3a 1 2a track MULTI 0 4 5a to be used If the insert effect is a Mono In Stereo Out or Mono In Mono Out type In Out the Pan of the oscillator timbre or track will be ignored and the sound will always be panned to the center In this case the Pan CC 8 8 1 that follows the insert effect will determine the final pan ning L001 is far left and R127 is far right Insert Effect Stereo In Stereo Out OSCH O OSC1 Amp1 Pan L001 OSC2 Amp2 Pan R127 Center Right Center OSC1 Amp1 Pan L032 OSC2 Amp2 Pan R096 Post IFX Pan CC 8 Post IFX Pan CC 8 C064 I C064 L032 La L032 L000 L000 R096 R127 Insert Effect Mono In Stereo Out Mono In Mono Out 2 O OSC1 Amp1 Pan L001 OSC2 Amp2 Pan R127 Center Post IFX Pan CC 8 C064 L032 L000 R096 R127 D You can control these parameters via MIDI Control Change CC 8 99 EFFECT 100 3 2 BUS Select This parameter enables you to specify the destination bus for the post IFX signals
59. is set to Continue to next song On checked All songs will be played endlessly in succes sion To stop the playback press the AUDITION button Off unchecked Playback will stop automatically after the last demo song has finished playing E 0 1c START STOP Start or stop the demo song playback start Demo song playback is stopped The demo song will start when you press AUDITION but ton El The demo song is playing The demo song will stop when you press AUDITION but ton amp You can t change the playback tempo of the demo songs Also the instrument will not respond to incoming MIDI clock data system realtime messages Playback will use the tempo specified by each demo song regardless of the MIDI Clock setting in the GLOBAL 1 MIDI page Song position song select system com mon messages start continue and stop system real time messages will not be transmitted or received 95 DEMO 96 6 Effect Guide Overview The effects section of X50 microX consists of a single chan nel Insert Effect two channel Master Effects a single chan nel Master EQ stereo three band EQ and a Mixer section that controls the effect routings The insert effect and master effects can be chosen from 89 types of full digital effect grouped into the categories listed below Classification of 89 effects 00 15 Filters and dynamics effect such as EQ and compression 16 31 Pitch modulation
60. l PEQ Trim 0 100 Sets the parametric EQ input level B1 Band1 Cutoff Sets the center frequency of Band 1 20 1 00kHz 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 18dB Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 G Gain SAM me gain of Band 1 B2 Band2 Cutoff E the center frequency of Band 2 50 5 00kHz 0 5 10 0 Sc the bandwidth of Band 2 t Fx 06 G Gain 18 418dB a e gain of Band 2 B3 Band3 Cutoff ate the center frequency for Band 3 300 10 00kHz 0 5 10 0 Sc the bandwidth of Band 3 t Fx 06 G Gain 18 418dB ae gain of Band 3 B4 Band4 Cutoff E the center frequency for Band 4 500 20 00kHz 0 5 10 0 A the bandwidth of Band 4 t Fx 06 G Gain 18 418dB a s gain of Band 4 Tri Sine 0 02 20 00Hz F LFO Frequency Ae the LFO speed Dly Delay Time Sets the delay time 0 0 50 0ms Dep Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Fb Feedback Sets the feedback amount 100 100 t Fx 20 Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet i Fx 10 20 C F W D Cho Flng Wet Dry Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger Out Output Mode Normal Wet Inv Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Ds Off Tempo W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance CH FL LFO L
61. multisample A Each multisample has an upper limit and may not pro duce sound when played above that limit S Ofs High Start Offset Off On This specifies the point at which the multisample will begin sounding For some multisamples this parameter will have no effect On checked The sound will start from the start offset loca tion that is pre determined for each multisample Off unchecked The sound will start from the beginning of the multisample waveform Rev High Reverse Off On The multisample will be played in reverse If the multisam ple was originally set to reverse it will playback without change On checked The multisample will playback in reverse Off unchecked The multisample will playback normally Level High Level 000 127 Specifies the level of the multisample amp Depending on the multisample high settings of this parameter may cause the sound to distort when a chord is played If this occurs lower the level Low Specifies the OSC1 Low multisample The Low multisample will sound when the velocity is less than the Velocity SW LH 1 22 setting Low Multisample X50 000 469 microX 000 641 S Ofs Low Start Offset Off On Rev Low Reverse Off On Level Low Level 000 127 t Refer to the corresponding item in High 1 2c Octave Transpose Tune Delay Octave 2 32 1 16 0 8 1 4 Adjusts the pitch in octave units
62. or Effect 3 Depth Send 1 messages and the send level 1 or 2 to the master effects MFX1 or MFX2 will be controlled respectively When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated On the corresponding MIDI channels this will simulta neously control the timbre track setting as well as the set ting following the insertion effect e n Combination and Multi the actual send level of the timbre track is determined by summing this value with the send 1 2 settings for each oscillator PROG 8 12 p 28 OSC Send 1 2 p 51 p 72 S1 Send1 MFX1 S2 Send2 MFX2 e When you adjust S1 Send1 MFX1 or S2 Send2 MFEX2 MULTI 8 1 2 a in Multi mode or when you re select a multi set when Multi mode GLOBAL 0 2a is for Master in Multi mode Send 1 2 will be transmitted by each track whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 gt p 72 Effect 2 depth IFX on off CC 92 Bn 5C vv Effect 4 depth MFX1 on off CC 94 Bn 5E vv Effect 5 depth MFX2 on off CC 95 Bn 5F vv Separately from the effect on off settings in each mode FX SW GLOBAL 0 1b allows you to turn off insert effect IFX and master effects MFX1 and MFX2 If you check IFX Off MEX1 Off or MFX2 Off the corresponding message will be transmitted with vv 0 00 If you uncheck these settings the corresponding message will be transmitted with vv 127 7F If you check these setting
63. t Fx 10 20 0 680ms 0 680ms 0 100 t Fx 45 100 100 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet 0 100 t Fx 43 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet mee Off Tempo 100 100 147 EFFECT 148 88 Phasr Cho Fl Phaser Chorus Flanger This effect combines a mono type phaser and a chorus flanger Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Jo Wet Dry Phaser l Chorus Flanger Resonance Cho Fing Wet Dry Right o QI 5 S i gt Wet Dry LFO Tri Sine LFO Tri Sine B A i Output Mode Wet Dry Feedback Wet PHS LFO LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform of the phaser F LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Manu Manual Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Dep Depth Sets the depth of LFO modulation Tri Sine 0 02 20 00Hz 0 100 0 100 100 100 t Fx 23 Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet t Fx 10 23 Tri Sine Res Resonance Sets the resonance amount Phs W D Phaser Wet Dry Sets the phaser effect balance CH FL LFO LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform of the chorus flanger F LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Dly Delay Time Sets the delay time Dep Depth Sets the depth of LFO modulation Fb Feedback Sets the feedback amount Pre EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain Sets the gain o
64. that is transmitted and received When using this instrument s keyboard to play the internal tone generator the Transpose and Velocity Curve will always take effect regardless of this setting PreMIDI Velocity Curve and Transpose will be applied to the data that is transmitted from this instrument s keyboard This setting affects the data that is transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector or USB connector when you play the keyboard of the X50 microX It does not affect the MIDI data received via MIDI IN MIDI IN Velocity Curve Note number change Tone generator MIDI OUT O USB PostMIDI Velocity Curve and Transpose will be applied to data before it enters the tone generator This setting affects the data that is sent from MIDI IN to the tone generator of the X50 microX It does not affect the data that is sent from the MIDI OUT connector or USB connector when you play the keyboard of the X50 microX MIDI IN Velocity Curve Pitch change Tone generator Local Control On Off On On checked Local Control On The controller of this instrument will controls its internal tone generator Off unchecked Local Control Off The controller of this instrument will be disconnected from the internal tone gen erator This means that operating this instrument using the key board or controller will not produce sound Uncheck this setting if the echo back from an external sequencer cau
65. the arpeggiator or sequencer If you program the tempo before performance you can achieve a delay effect that syn chronizes with the song in real time Delay time is set by notes Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o 2 muri o Wet Dry 2 Input Level D mod ep Z A Level Feedback gt High Damp Low Damp Se D Input Level D mod Level Right o Z o Wet Dry veal Base Note x Times e Base Note x Times m Base Note x Times MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo r gt eje L Bs L Delay Base Note J 45 2 Jo J do J Selects the type of notes to specify the delay time for TapL S QS Level Sets the output level of TapL C Bs C Delay Base Note 45 D 3 J do J Selects the type of notes to specify the delay time for TapC S Aoa Level Sets the output level of TapC R Bs R Delay Base Note 3 45 2 d3 J do d 0 Selects the type of notes to specify the delay time for TapR Sets the number of notes to specify the delay time for TapR Level Sets the output level of TapR C Fb C Delay Feedback Sets the feedback amount of TapC 100 100 prz Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the TapC feedback Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the TapC feedback Time Over gt OVER Displays an error message when the delay time exceeds the upper limit
66. 0 680 0ms Sets the Tap2 delay time Tap1 Level 0 100 Sets the Tap1 output level ps Fb T2 Tap2 Feedback 100 100 Sets the Tap2 feedback amount D s Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the Tap2 feedback amount Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the Tap2 feedback amount 0 100 t Fx 43 0 100 t Fx 43 100 100 i FX 37 Der Src Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level w Fx 37 Spread 100 100 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound t Fx 43 D ms Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect sound s stereo image width Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect sound s stereo image width W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D zs Off Tempo HiDamp High Damp Sets the damping amount in the high range LoDamp Low Damp Sets the damping amount in the low range InLvi Mod Input Level Dmod Iech Sets the modulation amount of the input level Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Mode You can change how the left and right delay signals are panned by modifying the routing of the left and right delay as shown in the figure above You need to input different sounds to each channel in order for this parameter to b
67. 0 1 GLOBAL 1 MIDI 1 1 MIDI Here you can make MIDI related settings that affect this instrument HIDI HiO channel MIDI Filter Hote Receive All rJEnabTe Program change 1 134 MIDI Clock Internal pinti rJBank fe Combi i AfterT z Ctr1 change CI Esclusive GLOBAL 1 HIDI MIDI ChanneT Convert Position PrebllDl r Local Control Op 1 1a MIDI Setup MIDI Channel Sets the global MIDI channel 01 16 The global MIDI channel is used in the following cases When transmitting and receiving performance data in Program mode PROG 0 Play When selecting combinations via MIDI in Combination mode COMBI 0 Play When controlling timbres or effects that have been set to Gch in various modes e When transmitting and receiving system exclusive messages About MIDI reception In Program mode PROG 0 Play MIDI data is received on the global MIDI channel but in Combination mode COMBI 0 Play or Multi mode MIDI data is received on the MIDI channel specified for each timbre or track In Combination mode COMBI 0 Play and Multi mode MULTI 0 Play program changes received on the global MIDI channel will switch the combination or multi set Use the global MIDI channel to switch IFX MFX1 and MEX2 on off To control the pan following IFX sends 1 2 MFX 1 2 and MEQ use the global MIDI channel in Program mode in Combination or Multi mode use the channel specified sep
68. 06H CC 6 34H 52 corresponds to 12 and BO 26 00 26H CC 38 OOH 0 2 The volume of the X50 microX is determined by sum ming the Volume CC 07 with the Expression CC 11 3 Avalue of 64 will correspond to the value specified by the program parameter 0 will be the minimum and 127 will be the maximum Changing from 63 1 or from 65 126 will adjust the effect from the program parameter setting toward the minimum value or maximum value The internal program parameters listed in 3 4 will be con trolled 4 If the filter type of the corresponding program is Low Pass Resonance the filter resonance level will be con trolled If the filter type is Low Pass amp High Pass the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter will be controlled 3 4 CC 70 79 correspond to the following program parame ters of the X50 microX In Program mode when CC 70 79 is received on the global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 12 or when a REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knob is oper ated in A mode or in B mode when the function is assigned to CC 70 79 the corresponding program parameter will be edited temporarily You can execute Write Program PROG 0 1 to save that state except for some parameters When you execute Write Pro gram the values of the corresponding program param eters will be rewritten A In Combination Multi modes the program parameters of the program for the timbre and track of the corre sponding MIDI chann
69. 0Hz AUTOFADE 28 St AutoFd Mod Stereo Auto Fade Modulation This stereo chorus flanger effect enables you to control the LFO speed and effect balance using auto fade and you can spread the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from each other Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Wet Dry A LFO Phase LFO Tri Sine LEO Shape AutoFadeg EE Ke LFO Frequency Wet Dry LFO Wave LFO Waveform Selects LFO Waveform Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed w Fx 20 LFO Phase 180 180deg Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 10 0 02 20 00Hz Dues Off Tempo Tri Sine Freq LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Source Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed L Dly L Pre Delay Sets the left channel delay time R Dly R Pre Delay Sets the right channel delay time Dep Depth Sets the depth of LFO modulation Fb Feedback Sets the feedback amount HD High Damp Sets the feedback damping amount in the high range AUTOFADE Src AUTOFADE Source Selects the modulation source that starts AutoFade i Fx 27 D ms 1 100 r gt Fx 27 00 2000ms 0 0 500 0ms 0 0 500 0ms 0 200 100 100 t Fx 20 0 100 t Fx 20 Off Tempo Fade Rate Fade In Rate Sets the rate of fade in Dly Fade In D
70. 1 99 99 1 Wet D Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Blend This parameter sets the depth intensity of the Exciter effect Pos itive values give a frequency pattern to be emphasized different from negative values b Point This parameter sets the frequency to be emphasized Higher val ues will emphasize lower frequencies c Enh Dly L d Enh Dly R These parameters set the delay time for the Enhancer left and right channel Specifying a slightly different delay time for the left and right channel will add a stereo image depth and width to the sound 12 St Sub OSC Stereo Sub Oscillator This effect adds very low frequencies to the input signal It is very useful when simulating a roaring drum sound or emphasizing powerful low range This effect is different from the equalizer in that you can add very low range harmonics You can also adjust the oscillator frequency to match a partic ular note number for use as an octaver Stereo In Stereo Out Left Envelope Sens Pre LPF D zez7 Fixed Frequency E Note ull Note Interval Fine Note Key Follow Envelope Sens Pre LPF OSC Mode Note Key Follow Fixed Determines whether the oscillator frequency follows the note number or whether it is fixed us Note Interval 48 0 Sets the pitch difference from the note number when O
71. 1 volume Negative values will invert the LFO waveform LFO2 Mod LFO2 Modulation Intensity LFO2 Intensity 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that OSC1 LFO2 3 2 will have on the volume of oscillator 1 Negative values will invert the LFO waveform 6 2c AMS Int AMS Amp AMS Off PEG FEG EXT Indicates the source that will control the volume of amp 1 p 152 AMS List EXT Velocity cannot be selected Int AMS Intensity 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS Amp AMS will have The actual volume will be determined by summing the value of the changes produced by the amp EG with the val ues of Alternate Modulation etc and if the levels of the amp EG are low the modulation applied by Alternate Modula tion will also be less For example if you set AMS to Pedal 04 and set Global 0 3a Foot Pedal Assign to Foot Pedal CC 04 positive settings of this parameter will make the volume increase when you advance a foot pedal connected to the ASSIGN ABLE PEDAL jack However if the volume is already at the maximum because of the EG settings etc it cannot be increased any farther With negative settings of this parameter advancing the pedal will decrease the volume AMS LFO1 AMS Off PEG FEG AEG KT EXT Indicates the source that will control the depth by which OSC1 LFO1 3 1 will modulate the volu
72. 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance e Hi Lo Split This parameter sets the frequency that splits the high and low range Only the high range will be sent to the chorus block 113 EFFECT g Feedback Sets the feedback amount of the chorus block Increasing the feed back will allow you to use the effect as a flanger 18 MitTap ChoDly Multitap Chorus Delay This effect has four chorus blocks with a different LFO phase You can create a complex stereo image by setting each block s delay time depth output level and pan individually You can also fix some of the chorus blocks to combine the chorus and delay effects Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Feedback Tap1 Delay Tap2 Delay Tap3 Delay Tap4 Delay eme Right Gi O degree r 7j 180 degree T 90 degree pa r 2270 degree LFO Triangle 4 e LFO Freq LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed T1 000 Tap1 Delay Sets the Tap1 LFO phase 0 degrees delay time D Depth 390 Sets the Tap1 chorus depth L Level 0 30 Sets the Tap1 output level 6 P Pan L6 L1 C R1 R 0 02 13 00Hz 0 570ms Sets the Tap1 stereo image T2 180 Tap2 Delay Sets the Tap2 LFO phase 180 degrees delay time D Depth 30 Sets the Tap2 chorus depth C L Level 0 30 Sets the Tap2 output level 6 P Pan L6 L1 C R1
73. 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Type This parameter selects the decay curve for the early reflection Early Reflections Type Loose D Of Modulated Reverse pech Pre Delay ER Time 127 EFFECT 128 42 Auto Reverse This effect records the input signal and automatically plays it in reverse the effect is similar to a tape reverse sound Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Rec Reverse Play 5 Control i Wet Dry D mee D mod a 9 Envelope Control Input Envelope Select Rec Mode Sets the recording mode Single Multi IS Reverse Time 20 1320ms Sets the maximum duration of the reverse playback Envelope Envelope Select Dmod Input Selects whether the start and end of recording is controlled via the modulation source or the input signal level v Dyer Src Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls recording when Enve lope is set to Dmod Threshold 0 100 Sets the recording start level when Envelope is set to Input 0 100 r gt Fx 31 Response Sets the speed of the response to the end of recording Direct Mix Selects how a dry sound
74. 2 Off e EO mono x 2 Post IFX Insert Effect Pan CC 8 BUS Select BUS Select LR Select from L R 1 2 1 2 Ott COMBI MULTI 9 Master Effect L R BUS MAIN OUTPUT MONO R Post IFX Send1 2 Chain Master Effects Return 2 A MFX1 stereo MFX2 stereo INDIVIDUAL UTPUT 1 2 103 EFFECT 104 Filter Dynamic Filter and dynamics control effects 00 No Effect Select this option when you do not wish to use any effects The Insert Effect section outputs unprocessed signals and the Master Effect section mutes the output 01 St Amp Sim Stereo Amp Simulation This effect simulates the frequency response characteristics of guitar amplifiers It is also effective for organ and drum sounds Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Ao Wet Dry Amp Simulation Filter Amp Simulation Filter Right o A 9 Wet Dry Amplifier Type SS EL84 6L6 Select between three types of guitar amp simula tors W D Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dyer Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance 100 100 Amount Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 02 St Compressor Stereo Compressor This effect compresses the input signal to regulate the level and give a punchy effect It is useful for guitar piano and drum sounds This is a ste
75. 2 Prog 5 Track Program T01 08 57 0 3 Prog 16 Track Program TO09 16 B 0 4 Mix 8 Mixer T01 08 58 O 5 MIXTO Mixer TOO T6 u L tette 58 microX 0 6 Ext Control 59 MULTI 1 Tone Adjust 59 l k TALS Tone Adjusti serere 59 1 2 TA1 16 Tone Adjust1 59 1 5 1 42 0 Tone AUS enisinia 59 1 4 T A2 16 Tone Adjust n ones 59 1 5 TA3 8 Tone Adjust3 seseessesserseseseesee 59 1 6 TA3 16 Tone Adjust9 59 MULTI 2 Track Paranm OL 2 1 MIDI 8 MIDI T01 08 61 2 2 MIDI 16 MIDI T09 16 61 2 3 OSC 8 OSC T01 08 62 2 4 OSC 16 OSC T09 16 62 2 5 Ptch 8 Pitch T01 08 62 2 6 Ptch 16 Pitch T09 16 62 2 7 Othr 8 Other T01 08 63 2 8 Othr 16 Other T09 16 63 MULTI 3 MIDI Filter1 64 3 1 M1 1 8 MIDI Filter1 1 T01 08 64 32 1 1 16 MIDI Filter1 1 T09 16 64 3 3 1 2 8 MIDI Filter1 2 T01 08 64 3 4 1 2 16 MIDI Filter1 2 T09 16 64 3
76. 4 Parametric 4EQ Band1 Band4 Type Band4 Type Shelving High Band4 Type Peaking 7 g p Band Type Shelving Low N 4 Band Type Peaking Band1 Cutoff Band4 Cutoff 107 EFFECT 108 d B2 Dyn G Src d Amount f G You can control the gain of Band 2 using the modulation source Parametric 4EQ Band2 Dynamic Gain Control Band2 Cutoff Band2 Cutoff Band2 Gain dB 6 0 Band2 Dynamic Gain Amt dB 9 0 Band2 Gain dB 6 0 Band Dynamic Gain Amt dB 15 0 08 St Graphic7EQ Stereo Graphic 7 Band EQ This is a stereo 7 band graphic equalizer The bar graph of the gain setting for each band gives you a clear visual idea of fre quency responses You can select a center frequency setting for each band from twelve types according to the sound Stereo In Stereo Out Sc Wet Dry e s cda EP els Lee Trim Bandi Band2 Band3 Band4 Band5 Band6 Band7 Trim es Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4 Band5 Band6 Band7 Right Type 1 Wide 1 2 Wide 2 3 Wide 3 4 Half Wide 1 5 Half Wide 2 6 Half Wide 3 7 Low 8 Wide Low 9 Mid 10 Wide Mid 11 High 12 Wide High Selects a combination of center frequencies for each band Trim 0 100 Sets the input level Band1 Sets the gain of Band 1 Band2 Sets the gain of Band 2 Bands Sets the gain of Band 3 Band4 Sets the gain of Band 4 Band5 Sets the gain of Band 5 Band6 Sets the gain of Band 6 Band Sets the gain o
77. 5 1 3 8 MIDI Filter2 1 T01 08 64 3 6 1 3 16 MIDI Filter2 1 T09 16 64 3 7 1 4 8 MIDI Filter2 2 T01 08 65 3 8 1 4 16 MIDI Filter2 2 T09 16 65 MULTI A MIDI Filter2 65 4 1 M2 1 8 MIDI Filter2 1 T01 08 65 4 2 2 1 16 MIDI Filter2 1 T09 16 65 4 3 2 2 8 MIDI Filter2 2 T01 08 66 4 4 2 2 16 MIDI Filter2 2 T09 16 66 X50 4 5 2 3 8 MIDI Filter2 3 T01 08 66 X50 4 6 2 3 16 MIDI Filter2 3 T09 16 66 X50 4 7 2 4 8 MIDI Filter2 4 T01 08 66 microX 4 5 2 3 8 MIDI Filter2 3 T01 08 66 X50 4 8 2 4 16 MIDI Filter2 4 T09 16 66 microX 4 6 2 3 16 MIDI Filter2 3 T09 16 66 MULTI 5 Key Zone 67 5 1 Key 5 Key Zone T01 08 67 5 2 Key 16 Key Zone T09 16 67 5 3 Slp 8 Key Slope TOT 08 67 5 4 Slp 16 Key Slope T09 16 67 uod iur M 67 MULTI 6 Vel Zone Velocity Zone 68 6 1 Vel 8 Velocity Zone T01 08 68 6 2 Vel I6 Velocity Zone T09 16 68 6 3 SIp 8 Velocity Slope T01 08 68 6 4 Slp 16 Velocity Slope T09 16 68 O EEN ee eebe 6
78. 77 Bn 4D vv LFO 1 delay CC 78 Bn 4E vv These messages are transmitted when assign the above CC to the REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs in B mode and operate them When you operate these the corresponding program parameters will be controlled and the sound and envelope will change When these messages are received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated When the message has a value vv 64 40 the setting will have the value that was set by the program parameter e n Combination and Multi modes transmission reception can be turned on off independently for each timbre track Realtime Control Koob 2 3 4 COMBI 4 1 2 a MULTI 4 1 2 3 4 a note In Program mode the corresponding program parame ters will be temporarily edited by these messages You can Write the program to save the modified state except for certain parameters The Write operation can also be performed by a MIDI exclusive Program Write Request message in addition to the usual method of using the X50 microX s switches When you write the data the values of the corresponding program parame ters will be rewritten fq The results of receiving these messages will depend on the instrument The operation may be different when a device other than the X50 microX is connected Silencing all notes on a specific channel All note off CC 123 Bn 7B 00 value 00 When this is received all currently sounding notes o
79. 8 2a S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 parameters that follow IFX determine the send levels to the master effects The PROG 8 1a MFX Send Send 1 and Send 2 settings are used when BUS Select is set to L R or Off Each can be set for oscillator 1 and 2 The PROG 8 2a S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 settings that follow IFX are used when BUS Select is set to IFX If the insert effect are chained connected in series the S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 that follows the last connected IFX will be used If BUS Select is 1 2 or 1 2 the oscillator will be directly output to INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1 2 p 103 Individ ual Outputs Send levels 1 2 will be ignored and the mas ter effects will not be applied PROG EE d IL REL EA BUS 05C1 Send BUS Select BUS Select All sSrz LAR HES Send OSC1 Sendi 127 OSC2 Sendi 127 Sendz EER Sendz 127 d ilTlIE TIS T IE1 i Ri BUS BUS Select BUS Select GUS Select AT OSCE MEN Send 453 pes PITO i SEA Sengr ta ABUSO OUT d Dorcel FROG EE d ILE ET3 UT EET ula Off B1 5t Hmp Sim rubd L R 51 ERN 57 127 CATT 026 WER GET AE Sim DI Send Level 1 can be controlled by MIDI Control Change CC 93 and Send Level 2 can be controlled by MIDI Control Change CC 91 on global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 1a At this time the actual send level uses the value of the Send 1 and 2 settings for Oscillators 1 and 2 multipli
80. 86 29 ug x Zpues pues aey unaq it ss aq o 31Tpe Odd 393 queueagoeq Sid 00 00 L6 I9 ug 2 jodueg umaq XX 21 SEI 5 3rTp Ody 393 queuegouI eaed 00 00 96 09 ug x eun oA unig YA YT ss 33 2 u0 33O ZX4 293S W 103 qaded e 399333 1 000 i 00 00 i 00 S6 as bg x eunj eura umaq XX 6T SsS 33 3 UO FFO IX4 FEe4sSeW 303 uadegq yp 3586333 000 i 00 00 i 00 l v6 ge bg x eun szeoo umad X3X gI Ss q3 3 TOozquoo 9A9T T puss 107 uad q 399333 AA AL 6 GG uq T eurj Aeoeq OF wnaq MM ALI Ss 33 o uO JJO XA J3 SUI 403 uaded z 398333 000 i 00 00 i 00 26 OS bq x urL xoeaqav OW umaq X3X 9T ss qq 2 TO23UOO 9A9T Z puss 4103 yjded I 399333 AA AL I6 S uq y 9oueuoseu TeqTta unaq X3 ST Se233 9 8 00 93g Doud x4 9 SWV S at sodind TITNW AA AA E8 G ug x JJO adeadT r4 unzq yy PT Ss 33 J MS 3oo j 92S Doud X4 9 SWV S LTI esodandg TITAN AA AA z8 ZS ug SUTL esee eH Sq 99 I 0 Sei S Z MS 07S Doug X3 9 SWV S 914320 esodang TITON A AA 18 TS ug eurj Aeosq 99 9 T0 ss 3123 3 T MS 07S powq xa 9 SWV S GTI esodang TITON AA AA 08 0G ug SUTL Op OW 9 TO ss 33 3 T330 arsu qur OF ZOATTA FOF OT X TT01I7u09 punos AA AA 6L dP ug eoueuoseuy TeqTta IZ IO SSJ 3 Totquos Aeqed TOAT 403 6 X TTO0I737U09 punog A AA 8L HP ug ioun Zantt OZ IO SSV 3 Tozquoo uadeq YyO4td IO4T 403 8 ae odauop punos AA AA LL Op ug AeqQe
81. 99 99 1 Wet Envelope Envelope Select Dmod Input Switches between modulation source control and input signal control Src Source Off G2 Dmp Selects the modulation source that controls the gate when Envelope is set to Dmod Threshold Sets the gate threshold level Polarity Switches between non invert and invert of the gate on off state ix Ex 05 1 100 t Fx 05 1 100 t Fx 05 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet D Off Tempo Sets the attack time Release Sets the release time W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance g Envelope g Src f In Rev Mix h Threshold The Envelope parameter enables you to select whether turning the gate on and off is triggered by the input signal level or con trolled directly by the modulation source You can select from Off to G2 Dmp for the Source parameter to specify the modulation source When Envelope is set to Input the gate is controlled by the level of signals that are the combination of the dry sound and the reverb sound When the signal level exceeds the threshold the gate opens and the reverb sound is output Normally set In Rev Mix to Dry the gate is controlled only by the dry sound If you wish to extend the gate time set the In Rev Mix value higher and adjust the Threshold
82. A Pat J Tempo Oct Reso Sort Latch K Sync and Kbd are parameters that can be set in Program Combination multi set but you can also set them here If you move here from Program or Combination mode and set these parameters you must return to the origi nal mode and write them These parameters cannot be written by the Write Arpeggio Patterns command in this page 5 1c Arpeggio Pattern Setup amp These parameters are not valid for preset patterns Pre set 0 Preset 4 Type Arpeggio Type As Played Up amp Down This specifies the correspondence between the arpeggio notes specified from the keyboard and the Tone at each step As Played If there are more Tones in a step than arpeggio notes specified notes played on the keyboard those steps will not sound As Played Fill If there are more Tones in a step than arpeggio notes specified notes played on the keyboard the last arpeggio note the last played note if Sort is Off or the highest note if Sort is On will sound for those steps Running Up If there are more Tones in a step than arpeggio notes specified notes played on the keyboard the arpeggio will return to the first note the first pressed note if Sort is Off or the lowest note is Sort is On and sound it Up amp Down If there are more Tones in a step than arpeggio notes specified notes played on the keyboard the arpeggio will return in r
83. ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack Tempo Modulation sources other than Tempo are internally pro cessed as a value of 0 127 128 127 In contrast Tempo uses the tempo data BPM value of the internal clock or the external MIDI clock This means that when J is 127 BPM it will have the same result as the maximum value 127 of other modulation sources 159 Appendices 160 About the BPM MIDI SYNC function BPM MIDI SYNC can be used for most effects that have an LFO such as 09 St Wah Auto Wah and for some delay type effects such as 49 L C R BPM Delay You can apply modulation that is synchronized to the tempo or specify the delay time in terms of a note value so that the effect will syn chronize to the tempo of the arpeggiator during a live per formance even if you change the tempo Parameters that allow BPM MIDI SYNC to be used are marked bya AJ symbol at their right in the list of param eters for each effect Example 1 LFO BPM MIDI Sync On Base Base Note J Times 1 In this case each cycle of the LFO will be as long as one quarter note BPM MIDI Sync LFO If BPM is set to MIDI the effect will synchronize to the tempo of the arpeggiator or to an external MIDI clock If BPM is in the range of 40 240 the specified value will be used Example 2 Delay Time L Bs Base Note J Times 1 R Bs Base Note Times 3 In this case the delay time
84. Adj Gain Adjust nf 38 24dB Sets the limiter output gain i Ex 03 Attack 1 100 Sets the attack time t Fx 03 Release 12 100 Sets the release time t Fx 03 Routing XCT LMT LMT XCT Switches the order of the exciter and limiter connection W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D Off Tempo 1 0 1 50 0 1 Int t Fx 03 Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 76 Exct Cho Fl Exciter Chorus Flanger This effect combines a mono type limiter and a chorus flanger Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left 77 Wet Dry Exciter oo Output Mode H 2 Feedback Wet Invert Cho FIng Wet Dry o Wet Dry LFO Tri Sine l XCT Blend Exciter Blend 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect i Ex 11 Emphatic Point 0 70 Sets the frequency range to be emphasized i Ex 11 Pre EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain 15 15dB Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain 15 15dB Sets the gain of High EQ CH FL LFO LFO Waveform Tri Sine Selects the LFO waveform of the chorus flanger F LFO Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Dly Delay Time 0 0 50 0ms Sets the delay time Dep Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of
85. Band4 Wet Diy PEQ PEQ PEQ PEQ A H H CHA LEQ Trim HEQ N PEQ Det Dry 0 100 B1 Type Band1 Type Peaking Shelving Low Selects the type of Band 1 B4 Type Band4 Type Peaking Shelving High Selects the type of Band 4 par B2 Dyn G Src Band2 Dynamic Gain Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the Band 2 gain us Amount 18 418dB Sets the modulation amount of Band 2 gain us B1 Band1 Cutoff 20 1 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 1 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 t Fx 06 G Gain 18 0 18 0dB Sets the gain of Band 1 B2 Band2 Cutoff 50 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 t Fx 06 G Gain 18 0 18 0dB Sets the gain of Band 2 i Dims B3 Band3 Cutoff 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 3 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 t Fx 06 G Gain 18 0 18 0dB Sets the gain of Band 3 B4 Band4 Cutoff 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 4 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 t Fx 06 G Gain 18 0 18 0dB Sets the gain of Band 4 W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dose Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance b B1 Type c B4 Type Selects a filter type for Band 1 and
86. Detune BPM Adjust to access the dialog box Detune BPM Adjust CTimbred3 From ERENT To 128 bpm 2 In From specify the original BPM value In To spec ify the desired BPM value The appropriate Detune value will be calculated automatically from these two values For example if you set From to 60 bpm and To to 120 bpm the Detune parameter will be set to 1200 one octave up 3 To execute the Detune BPM Adjust command press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CAN CEL button amp The detune value that is calculated when you execute this command will be added to Detune 0000 You must set the From BPM value when Detune is 0000 For example if you execute From 60 bpm To 120 bpm and then execute From 120 bpm To 60 bpm this will not return the original result Rather this will set Detune 1200 which is one octave down MA This command is valid when Detune 2 3a is selected COMBI CI 41 42 2 4 Other Specifies the delay from note on until sound is produced for each timbre Also specifies the scale KK zi Ed Timbre Param Other Delay ms a und am GC ane ee Im 2 4a Delay ms Use Prog s Scale Delay ms 0000 5000 KeyOff Specifies a delay time from note on until the sound begins for each timbre KeyOff The note will begin sounding at note off In this case the sound will n
87. Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds 0 100 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Done Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance Chorus Flanger Cho Fing 1 Wet Dry High Damp Wet Dry CH FL LFO LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform of the chorus flanger F LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Dly Delay Time Sets the delay time Dep Depth Sets the depth of LFO modulation Fb Feedback Sets the feedback amount Pre EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain Sets the gain of High EQ Tri Sine 0 02 20 00Hz 0 0 50 0ms 0 100 100 100 te Fx 20 0 100 15 15dB 15 15dB C F W D Cho Flng Wet Dry Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger DLY T1 Tap1 Delay Sets the Tap1 delay time T2 Tap2 Delay Sets the Tap2 delay time T1 Level Tap1 Level Sets the Tap1 output level T2 Fb Tap2 Feedback Sets the Tap2 feedback amount Div W D Delay Wet Dry Sets the multitap delay effect balance HiDamp High Damp Sets the damping amount in the high range W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet
88. Ed MIDI Filter MIDI message transmission reception fil ter settings for each timbre such as Prog Change JS Ribbon and After Touch v p 42 MIDI Filter 2 CG Ed MIDI Filter 2 MIDI message transmission reception fil ter settings for each timbre such as REALTIME CONTROL Knob SW and Other Ctrl Change r p 44 Key Zone 5 Ed Key Zone Key zone settings for each timbre p 45 Velocity Zone 6 Ed Vel Zone Velocity zone settings for each timbre p 46 Arp Controls 7 Ed Arp Ctrls Arpeggiator settings Same as the 0 Play parameters can be edited from either page Controller settings p 47 Tone Adjust 8 Ed InsertFX Bus and master effect send level settings for each timbre Insert effect routing selection and set tings r p 50 Master Effect 9 Ed MasterFX Master effect selection and settings Master EQ settings r p 52 Insert Effect In this display page you can select and play Combinations A Combi allows you to use up to 8 programs at one time COMBI 0 Play 0 1 Combi Combination n COMBI Combination combi select Category BA Keyboard BEIS Wie 000 Stereophonickeys wunumunuunuunanaanaananaanmanaananunana SSC SH cetaue Down BnobiE Attack BnobzE Hhdods 0 1a Bank Combi Select Category Cat Hold 10 s Hold J Tempo Bank Bank Select Bank A C This is the Combination bank display On this instrument there are a total of 384 combination pro
89. Envelope Control CMP Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity Attack 1 100 Sets the attack level t Fx 02 0 100 t Fx 02 0 100 Level Output Level Sets the compressor output level Pre EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain Sets the gain of High EQ DLY T1 Tap1 Delay Sets the Tap1 delay time T2 Tap2 Delay Sets the Tap2 delay time T1 Level Tap1 Level Sets the Tap1 output level T2 Tap2 Delay Sets the Tap2 feedback amount Dly W D Delay Wet Dry Sets the multitap delay effect balance 15 415dB 15 415dB 0 680msec 0 680msec 0 100 t Fx 45 100 100 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet 0 100 te Fx 43 Routing CMP gt DLY DLY gt CMP Switches the order of the compressor and multitap delay connection W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D Off Tempo HiDamp High Damp Sets the damping amount in the high range Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 70 Limit PAEQ Limiter Parametric 4 Band EQ This effect combines a mono type limiter and a four band parametric equalizer You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left A 35 Routing Wat Dry Limiter V N Parametric 4Band EQ Limi
90. Filter resonance level 0 127 resonance level of the filter 4 High pass filter cutoff frequency cutoff frequency of the high pass filter a 3 3 3 3 17 Knob modulation 1 19 Knob modulation 2 20 Knob modulation 3 21 Knob modulation 4 72 Release time 73 Attacktime 74 Low pass filter cutoff frequency 75 Decay time 76 LFO1 speed 80 Panel switch1 On Off 0 63 Off 64 127 On X50 Corresponds to On Off when the SW1 function is set to SW1 Mod microX Used to control Alternate Modulation and Effect Dynamic Modulation 81 Panel switch2 On Off 0 63 Off 64 127 On X50 Corresponds to On Off when the SW2 function is set to SW2 Mod microX Used to control Alternate Modulation and Effect Dynamic Modulation 82 Foot switch On Off 0 63 Off 64 127 On 83 Controller CC 83 0 127 for controlling Alternate Modulation same as AMS MIDI CC 8 Effect Dynamic Modulation same as Dmod Src CC 83 send 2 level 0 127 send 2 level corresponds to on off when the function of the assignable foot switch is set to Foot SW 91 Effect depth 1 X09 1 12700 94 Effect depth 4 master effect 1 On Off O Off 1 127 On 95 Effect depth 5 master effect 2 On Off O Off 1 127 On 96 Data increment 97 Data decrement 98 NRPN LSB corresponds to the arpeggiator on off switch 6 corresponds to the arpeggiator Gate control knob corresponds to the arpeggiator Velocity control knob MSB of NRPN select the p
91. Gch ff Gch ff run JrreacsleendeEHM 2 rin sr O 0 6a External Control Ext Control Setup Select Selects an external control set 00 63 i This setting is not written saved in the combination Select A B C Shows the settings assigned to each knob of the external control set The currently enabled set is highlighted Use the SELECT button to switch between groups A B C MIDI Channel 01 16 Gch Indicates the MIDI channel Gch The message will be transmitted on the global MIDI channel you specify in Global mode The channel of all knobs that are set to Gch can be changed simply by chang ing the global MIDI channel setting instead of having to change the channel of each knob individually CC Assign Off 000 119 Indicates the MIDI control change number transmitted by the knob E 0 6 UTILITY ws Write Multi Copy From Combi GM Initialize 0 1 Select by Category 0 2 3 MULTI 1 Tone Adjust 1 1 TA1 8 Tone Adjust1 1 2 TA1 16 Tone Adjust1 1 3 TA2 8 Tone Adjust2 1 4 TA2 16 Tone Adjust2 1 5 TA3 8 Tone Adjust3 1 6 TA3 16 Tone Adjust3 Here you can adjust certain synthesis parameters of the indi vidual programs that are assigned to each track These edits can be saved as part of the multi set While creating a multi set you might use this function to make a bass sound more mellow or to speed up the attack of a strings sound so that it fits
92. If BUS Select is set to DKit you will be able to select DKit IFX Patch This temporarily patches the BUS Select IFX settings to send them to L R For example suppose you have assigned a drum program to timbre 1 and a conventional program to timbre 2 and set BUS Select to DKit for timbre 1 and to IFX for timbre 2 Since timbre 1 is set to DKit the BUS Select GLOBAL 4 3a setting of the drum kit will be used COMBI HE E KIT ad 8 BUS BUS Select Drum D hes ElF lt ub Eiteap BDrteap rest Reap Hlteap I Pires LOB OR CAR OR LOB LR i pinin D BOB 100085 1 0005 1 0005 1 800 1 006 If for example you have specified IFX for snare type sounds use DrumKit IFX Patch when you do not want the insert effect used by timbre 2 to be used for the drum program Select the Utility DKit IFX Patch and tempo rarily send the drum kit IFX to L R Press the MENU OK button to execute and the snare sounds will be sent to L R When you want to return to the original sounds select IFX gt IFX DrumKit IFX Patch dialog box Drumkit IFZ Patch CTimbred Drumkit ES Cancel After settings are made COMBI Ed InsertFx Setup insert Effect Ort See ae Cd L R 51 6600 S2 BBB i Ch IEN Oct Lutter 1H345Bh7 H 3 Mixer For each mode use 8 Ed InsertFX or InsertFX Setup page parameters Pan CC 8 BUS Select S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MPX2 to specify the pan bus select
93. If this parameter is set to a higher value lower level sounds will be boosted With a higher Sensitivity the overall volume level is higher To adjust the final volume level use the Level parame ter Compressor Sensitivity Louder c Attack This parameter controls the attack level Compressor Attack D Attack 80 Ww Attack 20 03 St Limiter Stereo Limiter The Limiter regulates the input signal level It is similar to the Compressor except that the Limiter compresses only signals that exceed the specified level to lower unnecessary peak sig nals The Limiter applies a peaking type EQ to the trigger sig nal which controls the degree of the Limiter effect allowing you to set any band width to be covered This effect is a stereo limiter You can link left and right channels or use each chan nel individually Wet Dry Gain Adjust Limiter I Stereo In Stereo Out Side PEQ Limiter GC Gain Adjust 2 Wet Dry Envelope Envelope Select L R Mix L Only R Only L R Individually Selects from linking both channels controlling only from left channel only from the right channel or controlling each channel individually Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio Threshold Sets the level above which the compressor is applied Attack Sets the attack time Release Sets the release time Side PEQ Insert Toggles between on off of the trigger signa
94. Kirnberger Kirnberger III 6 L Eege 45 46 CDS te 79 E M MP 6 11 Level POE RI TR 23 AP EE 4 21 Attack Level 19 Filter EG 19 Level Chain Level 30 52 WELD SAILS scsssesessesorsaccearsansinsentaies 8 OSC Bal OSC Balance 4 na A E E cates 12 Rtn 1 2 Return 1 2 30 52 DING EEEE c EA 28 51 89 ert criss perc semuis a Pau dE 58 Level Modulation 13 20 23 JB o 6 14 Qo 11 14 l E 12 LFO Modulation 18 EE 14 FO wavefori seseriai 14 Load Preload Data 77 Local Control 82 Local Control On 82 Low pass filter 16 21 44 163 168 175 M Master Effect 4 30 52 73 74 Eege 30 52 73 Master EQ 31 53 74 149 Master EQ Gain dB 30 102 Master Fine Tuning message 75 Master TUNE siqa 75 Memory Protect u a asas 79 MIDI Channel 1 35 37 40 51 52 62 81 171 NIIDI COC met 34 81 90 MIDI Filter 4 42 44 64 65 82 Ee 16 42 64 MIDI RPN coarse tune message 75 MIDI RPN fine tune message 76 MIDI universal system exclusive ah E 75 Modulation 154 155 156 160 161 172 Monop e 6 Multi mode
95. Knob modulation i amp Cowoergons I komon j T LI 20 Knob modulations J 21 Knob modulationa J T T T T Te zmA3G3 x T Baksa 1 1 LL I L L l x 33 s T _3sDaaeny S j T T 35 j T jJ RE CO P T T j T T T P E ebam T T Tea T Tee 65 Portamentoonwon ERAI 66 Sostenuto Ovo j J L I J LII GS _ _ LI Ur T 3 amp 69 A Susan O 1 71 Filter resonance level High k Knobg Tee 4 1 j 72 Releasetime ew 78S Attacktime j j TI 74 Lowpassfilter cutoff frequency sms l i 7eDeay me j j j j 76tFOtsped o J J J s j j j j j 77 LFO1 depth pitch j j TI 7etFOtdely f j j j l j 79 FilterEGintensity sm
96. L Depth 0 200 Sets the depth of the left LFO modulation R Depth Sets the depth of the right LFO modulation L Dly L Delay Time Sets the left delay time R Dly R Delay Time Sets the right delay time L Fb L Feedback Sets the feedback amount of left delay R Fb R Feedback Sets the feedback amount of right delay W D Wet Dly Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds ix Ex 10 Due Off Tempo 0 200 0 0 500 0 0 0 500 0 100 100 100 100 j Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance b Dmod When the modulation source is used for control this parameter reverses the left and right modulation direction e LFO Sync e Src f L Phase f R Phase The LFO can be reset via a modulation source The Src parameter sets the modulation source that resets the LFO For example you can assign Gate as a modulation source so that the sweep always starts from the specified point L Phase and R Phase set the phase obtained when the left and right LFOs are reset In this way you can create changes in pitch sweep for the left and right channels individually MIDI The effect is off when a value of the modulation source spec ified in the Src parameter is 63 or smaller and the effect is on when the value is 64 or higher The LFO is triggered and res
97. LFO modulation Fb Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount t Fx 20 C F W D Cho FIng Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger r Ex 10 20 Out Output Mode Normal Wet Inv Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger t Fx 60 W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds ye Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance Exct Phaser Exciter Phaser This effect combines a mono type limiter and a phaser Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o gt o e Wet Dry Exciter f Phaser EQ Trim LEQ HES B lt m I oo Output Mode Resonance Wet Invert Phaser Wet Dry LFO Tri Sine XCT Blend Exciter Blend 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect i Ex 11 Emphatic Point 0 70 Sets the frequency range to be emphasized i Ex 11 Pre EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain 15 15dB Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain 15 15dB Sets the gain of High EQ PHS LFO LFO Waveform Tri Sine Selects the LFO waveform of the phaser F LFO Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Manu Manual 0 100 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Dep Depth 0 100 Sets
98. MFX1 16 Stereo Chorus is added to MFX2 52 Reverb Hall input COMBI 9 Ed HasterFZ Setup Chain Level I 1 0 f BE Ao Effect Ath BRB G ch i Master EQ aninLdE Off BB No Effect Btn BDA g ch EHS Chain errr iris anat LR Fix ELIO i MEG CHT Arer Low Mid High setup Fa J MFR TIMER 3 3 Chain Direction Specify the direction of the connection when the signal is routed between MFX1 and MFX2 3 4 Chain Signal This parameter enables you to select signals routed between MFX1 and 2 If the chain direction order is from MFX1 to MFX2 selecting LR Mix will cause the stereo L R outputs from MFX1 to be mixed and input to MFX2 This setting is useful when you wish to serially connect delays that are panned to L and R e g 43 LCR Delay Selecting L Only or R Only will cause only one channel of stereo outputs from MFX1 to be input to MFX2 This setting is suitable for a chain connection of a reverb effect and a modulation effect such as 16 St Chorus 3 5 Chain Level This parameter determines the level of signals routed from one MFX to the other MFX in a chain connection 3 6 Master EQ Gain dB These parameters are used to set the gain of the Low Mid and High stereo three band EQ that is located right before MAIN OUTPUT L MONO and R Low and High EQs are of the shelving type and Mid EQ is a band type equalizer These settings are linked with the Low Mid and High Gain parameters of the MEQ
99. MiIDI Filter ge Hip 2 Knobs 4 2a 4 2a Real time ControlKnob3 4 Knob3 Off On Specifies whether MIDI control change message 79 inter nal filter EG intensity for the A mode of knob 3 and the MIDI control change message assigned to the B mode of knob 3 will be transmitted and received Knob4 Off On Specifies whether MIDI control change message 72 inter nal filter and amp EG release time for the A mode of knob 4 and the MIDI control change message assigned to the B mode of knob 4 will be transmitted and received B 4 2 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 X50 4 3 MIDI 2 3 MIDI Filter2 3 COMBI 4 Ed MIDI Filter 3 su 1 4 3a d i H i We i A i E i B LE i Ca o Rp oi B i Ca i D CAE oer StereaPianao iH Gr ch mme 1 zz T 1 4 3a SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2 Off On Specifies whether the operations of SW1 and SW2 will be transmitted and received These correspond to the control change messages assigned in 7 Ed Arp Ctrls This filter setting is valid for settings of SW1 Mod CC 80 SW2 Mod CC 81 or Porta SW CC 65 B 4 3 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 X50 4 4 MIDI 2 4 MIDI Filter 2 4 microX 4 3 MIDI 2 3 Mibi Filter2 3 X50 COMBI d Ed HIDI Filters Reub Strin Drum Mie H KSE KAES ont eda J FootPedal switch Other d r i i i d i i i i el T UED al b i Eoi kb in 5 BENI ld i E
100. Mod AMS is Velocity setting S AMS SW Start A AMS SW Attack and B AMS SW Break to and setting Intensity to a positive 23 24 value will cause the amp 1 EG volume levels to increase as you play more strongly Setting Intensity to a negative values will cause the amp 1 EG volume levels to decrease as you play more strongly With a setting of 0 the levels will be as specified in Amp 1 EG 6 3a S AMS SW Start 0 Specifies the direction in which AMS Level Mod AMS will change S Start Level If I AMS Intensity is set to a positive value setting this parameter to will allow AMS to increase the EG level and setting this parameter to will allow AMS to decrease the EG level With a setting of 0 no change will occur A AMS SW Attack 0 Specifies the direction in which AMS Level Mod AMS will change A Attack Level If I AMS Intensity is set to a positive value setting this parameter to will allow AMS to increase the EG level and setting this parameter to will allow AMS to decrease the EG level With a setting of 0 no change will occur B AMS SW Break 0 Specifies the direction in which AMS Level Mod AMS will change B Break Point Level If I AMS Intensity is set to a positive value setting this parameter to will allow AMS to increase the EG level and setting this parame ter
101. Normally you can make effective use of this with a drum program m 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 UTILITY re Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 MULTI 2 Track Param 2 1 MIDI 8 MiDI T01 08 2 2 MIDI 16 MiDi T09 16 Here you can make MIDI related settings for each track MULTI 2 Track Param MIDI Status EJ quita ion ppaurtu gd uuita Iz trin 2 la BAA Standard Fit 1 Status 67TH Ch 816 unt ETT ETERNI EN EE SUR othr 2 othr_46 2 1 2 a Status MIDI Channel Bank EX2 MSB LSB Status INT Off BTH EXT EX2 This sets the status of MIDI and the internal tone generator for each track INT The tone generator will sound in response to incoming MIDI messages from a connected external MIDI device MIDI messages will not be transmitted If the arpeggiator are assigned to a track that is set to INT only the X50 microX will sound MIDI data will not be transmitted to an external device i e the external MIDI device will not sound If the X50 microX s controllers are operated on the track specified as the Control Track 0 1a only the X50 microX will be controlled and MIDI messages will not be transmitted Off The track will not sound nor will MIDI data be trans mitted BTH The operations of both INT and EXT will be per formed If the arpeggiator is specified for a track set to BTH the X50 microX will sound and MIDI messages will also be transmitted If the X50 microX s controllers are operated on t
102. Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off Softly played note with S Strongly played note with A and B set to setting S A and B set to of 4 5a Filter 1 EG Strongly played note with S A and B set to 4 5c Time Mod Time Modulation These settings let you use alternate modulation to control the T Time parameters of the filter 1 EG AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 Off KT EXT Indicates the source that will control the T Time parame ters of the filter 1 EG p 152 AMS List I AMSI Intensity 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 will have With a setting of 0 the times specified by Filter1 EG 4 5a will be used For example if AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 is set to Flt KTr the EG T Time parameters will be controlled by the Keyboard Track 4 2a settings With positive values of this parameter positive values of Ramp Ramp Set ting 42a will lengthen the EG times and negative values of Ramp Ramp Setting will shorten the EG times The direction of change is specified by A AMS1 SW Attack D AMS1 SW Decay S AMS1 SW Slope and R AMSI SW Release If AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 is set to Velocity positive values of this parameter will cause EG times to lengthen as you play more strongly and negative values will
103. Off Tempo Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Envelope b Env Dmod Src The Envelope parameter selects whether the gate on off is trig gered by the level of the input signal or controlled directly by the modulation source The Src parameter specifies the modulation source selected from Off to G2 Dmod With Envelope L R Mix the left and right channel signal mix ture will trigger the gate on off When L Only or R Only is selected the gate is controlled by either of the channel signals f Polarity This parameter reverses the Gate on off operation With a nega tive value the gate is closed when the input signal level exceeds the Threshold The gate operation controlled by the modulation source is also reversed c Threshold d Attack e Release This parameter sets the signal level below which Gate is applied when Envelope is set to L R Mix L Only or R Only The Attack and Release parameters set the Gate attack time and release time Gate Threshold Output Level Louder Input Level Gate Attack Release EE Threshold tel Attacke Release 1 Attack 100 Release 100
104. Off On This setting protects the internal program memory On checked Internal program memory will be protected and the following write operations cannot be performed e Writing a program e Receiving program data via MIDI data dump Off unchecked Data can be written to internal program memory Combi Combination Off On This setting protects the internal combination memory On checked Internal combination memory will be pro tected and the following write operations cannot be per formed e Writing a combination e Receiving combination data via MIDI data dump Off unchecked Data can be written to internal combina tion memory Multi Off On This setting protects the internal multi set memory On checked Internal multi set memory will be protected and the following write operations cannot be performed e Writing to the a multi set e Receiving multi set data via MIDI data dump Off unchecked Data can be written to internal multi set memory Drum Kit Off On This setting protects the internal drum kit memory On checked Internal drum kit memory will be protected and the following write operations cannot be performed e Writing a drum kit e Receiving drum kit data via MIDI data dump Off unchecked Data can be written to internal drum kit memory Arp UsrPat Arp User Pattern Off On This setting protects the internal user arpeggio pattern memory On checked Internal us
105. PROG 7 3a COMBI 7 5a MULTI 7 6a The 12 o clock position of the knob corresponds to the Low Gain value here e High Gain Mod Src For example when this parameter is set to Kb2 19 you can con trol the EO gain in the range from 18dB to 18dB during perfor mance using the REALTIME CONTROLS knob At this time set Knob 2 B to Knob Mod2 CC 19 for Knob B Assign PROG 7 3a COMBI 7 5a MULTI 7 6a The 12 o clock position of the knob corresponds to the High Gain value here 149 EFFECT 150 7 Appendices Alternate Modulation Source AMS About Alternate Modulation An Alternate Modulation Source can be specified for each of the 55 Alternate Modulation destinations shown in the dia gram below Pitch EG is common to OSC 1 and 2 The AMS Alternate Modulation Source and amount can be selected independently for each of these destinations Alternate Modulation Frequency Mod 1 Frequency Mod 2 Frequency Mod 1 Frequency Mod 2 About Alternate Modulation Sources There are 42 Alternate Modulation sources AMS that can control Alternate Modulation destinations If you select two or more Alternate Modulation destinations to be controlled by the same AMS a single source will apply modulation to each of the specified destinations Frequently used assignments such as using the joystick X or PITCH wheel to control pitch are already provided as dedicated parameters so it is not necessary to
106. Plate Reverb Wet Plate 133 55 Rev Dry Plate Reverb Dry Plate 133 56 Rev Room Reverb Room 134 57 Rev Brt Room Reverb Bright Room 134 Mono Mono Chailn 135 58 PAEQ Exciter Parametric 4 Band EQ Exciter 135 59 PAEQ Wah Parametric 4 Band EQ Wah Auto Wah 135 60 PAEQ Cho Fl Parametric 4 Band EQ Chorus Flanger 136 61 PAEQ Phaser Parametric 4 Band EQ Phaser 136 62 PAEQ M Dly Parametric 4 Band EQ Multitap Delay 137 63 Comp Wah Compressor Wah Auto Wah 137 64 Comp AmpSim Compressor Amp Simulation 138 65 Comp OD HG Compressor Overdrive Hi Gain 138 66 Comp P4EQ Compressor Parametric 4 Band EQ 138 67 Comp Cho Fl Compressor Chorus Flanger 139 68 Comp Phaser Compressor Phaser 139 69 Comp M Dly Compressor Multitap Delay 140 70 Limit PAEQ Limiter Parametric 4 Band EQ 140 71 Limit Cho Fl Limiter Chorus Flanger 141 72 Limit Phaser Limiter Phaser 141 73 Limit M Dly Limiter Multitap Delay 142 74 Exct Comp Exciter Compressor 142 75 Exct Limiter Exciter Limiter 142 76 Exct Cho FI Exciter Chorus Flanger
107. RPNMSBO f j Jj Jj j TI HORE leu j C E je j a a Proramchage f o j 1 1l j j Sr j Chnamelaftertuch Ir j j j Bederchage HX j j j j jj j j Saja Universal exclusive CT To S S LE j j Maservlume daf 1l 1l 1 1 l Mestrbadane LI J j T j p o Pp j pJq j j j j Meserfieetwme III Ir j j Jj j Jj j S Mastercoarsetune OT j S I j j j 167 Appendices 168 X50 microX operations when control changes are transmitted received The following table shows the operations that the X50 received and the relation between settings and controller microX will perform when control change messages are movements on this instrument 0 Bank select MSB 0 127 bank select message MSB 1 Modulation 1 0 127 X50 Corresponds to MOD wheel movement in the up direction microX Corresponds to joystick movement in the Y up direction 2 Modulation 2 0 127 X50 Used to control Alternate Modulation corresponds to AMS JS Y 02 or Effect Dynamic Modulation corresponds to Dmod Src JS Y 2 microX Corresponds to joystick movement in the Y direction down 0 127 corresponds to when the assignable pedal function is set to Foot Pedal 4 Foot controller 5 Portamento time 6 Data entry MSB 7 Volume 0 127 portamento time 0 127 MSB of RPN
108. Sets the Tap1 output level ps T2 Fb Tap2 Feedback Sets the Tap2 feedback amount Div W D Delay Wet Dry Sets the multitap delay effect balance HiDamp High Damp Sets the damping amount in the high range Routing Switches the order of the limiter and multitap delay connection W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 100 100 Wet Dry 50 0 1 Inf 1 Fx 03 40 0dB Fx 03 Inf 38 24dB Fx 03 100 Fx 03 100 Fx 03 0 680ms 0 680ms 0 100 Fx 45 100 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet 0 100 Fx 43 LMT DLY DLY OLMT Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Dyer Off Tempo 100 74 Exct Comp Exciter Compressor This effect combines a mono type exciter and a compressor You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Routing Exciter V N Compressor H Exciter f i Output Level Right o Envelope Control XCT Blend Exciter Blend Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Emphatic Point Sets the frequency range to be emphasized Pre EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level 100 Wet Dry Wet Dry 100 Fx 11 0 70 Fx 11 0 100 75 15 15dB LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain Sets the
109. The normal octave of the multisample is 8 feet Transpose 12 12 Adjusts the pitch in semitone steps over a range of 1 octave Tune 1200 1200 Adjusts the pitch of the sample in one cent steps a semitone is 100 cents over a range of 1 octave Delay 0000ms 5000ms KeyOff Specifies a delay time from note on until the note will sound With a setting of KeyOff the sound will begin when note off occurs This is used to create sounds such as the click that is heard when a harpsichord note is released In this case set the Amp1 EG Amp2 EG 6 3 6 6 S Sustain Level parameter to 0 1 2d O0SC1 Drum Kit Drum Kit X50 OO INT 1 5 INT 16 User 39 User 40 GM 48 GM microX OO INT 31 INT 32 User 39 User 40 GM 48 GM Select a drum kit X50 00 INT 15 INT Preload drum kits 16 User 39 User foruserdumis I 40 GM 48 GM ROM preset drum kits compatible with GM2 microX 00 INT 31 INT Preload drum kits 32 User 39 User 40 GM 48 GM ROM preset drum kits compatible with GM2 Octave 2 32 1 16 0 8 1 4 Adjusts the pitch in octave units When using a drum kit set the Octave to 8 amp When editing a drum program you must set this parameter to 8 With other settings the sounds of the drum kit will be assigned to the wrong notes of the key board Transpose 12 12 This adjusts the locat
110. To cancel press the EXIT CANCEL but ton Rotate Step This command rotates the step settings CD Select Rotate Step to access the dialog box Rotate Step Direction Forward Cancel 2 Select the type Direction of rotation For example suppose there is a pattern of Length 4 If you select Forward the settings of Step 1 will be rewritten to 2 Step 2 3 Step 3 4 Step 4 1 If you select Backward the settings of Step 1 will be rewritten to 4 Step 2 1 Step 3 2 Step 4 gt 3 To execute the Rotate Step operation press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CANCEL but ton microX GLOBAL 6 Ext Control External Control lets you use the REALTIME CONTROL knobs to control external MIDI devices You can assign a MIDI control change and MIDI channel to each of the four knobs and switch between three such settings A B C to control an external device This means that each set up lets you transmit twelve 4 x 3 different MIDI control changes re p 5 You can select and use these setups if EXT CONTROLLER is turned on in Program Combination or Multi Set modes You can create 64 different external control setups For example you might use one setup to control one of the KORG Legacy Collection soft synthesizers and another setup to control the level or pan parameters of your DAW Digital Audio Workstation External Control gives you a set of independent control func
111. Write Multi 0 1 DKit IFX Patch COMBI 8 1 Copy Insert Effect PROG 8 1 amp However the MIDI control channel specified in Con trol Channel of the 8 InsertFX Setup page will not be copied 8 3 Setup Here you can select the type of the insert effects turn them on off etc 8 3b 8 3a Insert FX Setup IFX1 Off On Insert Effect 00 89 name Chain Ge Off i ON Pan CC 8 L00O C064 R127 BUS Select L R 1 2 1 2 Off S1 Send 1 MFX1 000 127 S2 Send2 MFX2 000 127 These parameters are the same as in Program mode PROG 8 2 However this differs from Program mode in that insert effect dynamic modulation Dmod and the Pan CC 8 Send 1 MFX1 and Send2 MFX2 which follow the insert effect are controlled on the MIDI channel specified by Control Channel 8 1b The control changes used are the same as in Program mode HI If the Status 2 1 2 a is INT or BTH receiving CC 8 93 or 91 will cause the post insert effect pan and send 1 2 to be controlled changing the settings If Multi Mode GLOBAL 0 22 is set to for Master and you switch the multi set number these settings will be transmitted via MIDI on the Control Channel 8 1a for tracks whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 8 3b Control Channel Control Channel Ch01 16 All Rt MIDI Indicates the MIDI channel that will control effect dynamic modulation Dmod pan following
112. Y CC 02 Off On X50 Specifies whether MIDI control change CC 2 REAL TIME CONTROLS B mode assignment or the GLOBAL 0 3 Foot page Foot Pedal Assign set to JS Y CC 02 to spec ify the function of a foot controller connected to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack will be transmitted and received microX Specifies whether MIDI control change CC 2 the Y direction of the microX s joystick or a REALTIME CON TROLS B assign setting will be transmitted and received B 3 3 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 3 4 MIDI 1 4 MIDI Filter 1 4 COMBI 3 Ed HIDI Filter i 15 Bros 3 PBeBnd az AMS 3 4a JSX PBend as AMS Ribbon CC 16 JSX PBend as AMS Off On X50 Specifies whether MIDI pitch bend messages move ment of the X50 s PITCH wheel will apply the AMS p 152 Alternate Modulation Source assigned to Pitch Bend This is not a filter for MIDI pitch bend messages microX Specifies whether or not MIDI pitch bend mes sages the X axis of microX s joystick will be received to control the AMS rs p 152 Alternate Modulation Source effect assigned to JS X This is not a filter for MIDI pitch bend message reception Ribbon CC 16 Off On MIDI control change message CC 16 realtime control knob B assign or the assignment of a ribbon controller on a TRI TON Extreme or other instrument connected to the MIDI IN connector will be transmitted and received B 3 4 U
113. a function that includes a CC that MIDI control change message will be transmitted each time the switch is turned on off Off 0 On 127 Foot Switch Assign List Off Foot SW CC 82 Portamento SW CC 65 Sostenuto CC 66 Soft CC 67 Arpeggio SW Program Up Program Down X50 Mod Wheel CC 01 microx JS Y CC 01 JS Y CC 02 After Touch Knob 1 4 X50 SW1 2 microX SW1 CC 80 SW2 CC 82 TAP TEMPO Portamento SW CC 65 When the Mode Oscillator Mode PROG 1 1a is Single turning the switch on will apply portamento regardless of the Enable Porta Enable PROG 2 1c setting and turn ing the switch off will not apply portamento If Mode Oscillator Mode is Double and if the Enable Porta Enable setting is the same for OSC1 and 2 i e The connected foot switch will not function Alternate Modulation or Effect Dynamic Modulation can be controlled To control these select Foot SW 82 for AMS or FSW 82 for Dmod Src Control portamento on off Control the sostenuto effect which holds only the keys Note No that were being held at the moment that the pedal switch was turned on Turn the soft pedal effect on off Turn the arpeggiator on off The NRPN message Bn 63 00 Bn 62 02 Bn 06 00 off or 7F on will be transmitted each time this is turned on off The switch can be used to select programs or combinations When in PROG 0 Play the program th
114. a greater amount of pitch modulation will be applied by OSC1 LFO1 when you move the MOD wheel up away from yourself With a setting of 12 00 a maximum of 1 octave of pitch modulation will be applied Negative values will invert the polarity of the LFO microX JS Y Int LFO1 JS Y Int 12 00 12 00 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that joystick movement in the Y direction up will have on the pitch modulation applied by the OSC1 LFOI As this value is increased moving the joystick in the Y direction will cause the OSC1 LFO1 to produce deeper pitch modulation With a setting of 12 00 a maximum of 1 octave of pitch modulation will be applied Negative values will invert the LFO waveform AMS LFO1 AMS Off PEG FEG AEG KT EXT Indicates the source that will control the depth of pitch mod ulation produced by the OSC1 LFOI rx p 152 AMS List 11 12 Intensity AMS Intensity 12 00 12 00 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS LFO1 AMS will have With a setting of 0 modulation will not be applied With a setting of 12 00 the OSC1 LFO1 will apply a maximum of 1 octave of pitch modulation Negative settings will invert the LFO waveform For example if AMS LFO1 AMS is set to Pedal 04 Glo bal 0 3a Foot Pedal Assign is set to Foot Pedal CC 104 and you advance a foot pedal connected to the ASSIGN ABLE PEDAL jack the
115. a positive value moving the PITCH wheel in the up direction will raise the cutoff and moving it in the down direction will lower the cutoff Negative settings will produce the opposite effect e miCroX 1f you set AMS1 Filter A AMS1 to JS X and set Intensity A AMS1 Intensity to a positive value moving the joystick toward the right will raise the cutoff frequency and moving it toward the left will lower the cutoff frequency Negative settings will have the opposite result e If you select the same controller for AMS and set the Filter A Low Pass Filter Intensity A AMS 1 2 Intensity parameter and Filter B High Pass Filter Intensity B AMS 1 2 Intensity parameter to different values a single controller operation will simultaneously control the cutoff frequencies of the two filters Resonance PROG 4 1b This can be used when the Type Filter1 2 Type is Low Pass Resonance The resonance level can be controlled by EG LFO keyboard tracking controllers or tempo etc If you select Filter KT or Amp KT as the Reso AMS Resonance AMS you can use the filter or amp keyboard tracking settings to control the resonance level For example if the amp keyboard tracking parameters Low KBDTrk Ramp Low and High KBDTrk Ramp High are set to positive values Amp KT is selected as the Reso AMS Resonance AMS and Intensity AMS Intensity it set to a positive value play
116. amount of the output level Hot LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Source Selects the modulation source of LFO speed 0 02 20 00Hz prar Off Tempo Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of the sampling frequency LFO modulation Dm Source Off Tempo Selects the LFO modulation source of the sampling frequency Amount 100 100 Sets the LFO modulation amount of the sampling frequency W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dyer Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Pre LPF If a sampler with a very low sampling frequency receives very high pitched sound that could not be heard during playback it could generate pitch noise that is unrelated to the original sound Set Pre LPF to ON to prevent this noise from being generated If you set the Fs to about 3kHz and set Pre LPF to OFF you can create a sound like a ring modulator d Resolution e Output Level If you set a smaller value for the Resolution parameter the sound may be distorted The volume level may also be changed Use Level to adjust the level 15 St AnalogRecd Stereo Analog Record This effect simulates the noise caused by scratches and dust on analog records It also reproduces some of t
117. an EG or controller that changes with a positive value Amp EG EXT EXT SW is selected as the AMS Amp AMS setting the Int AMS Intensity to 99 will allow you to increase the volume to a maximum of eight times that of the current volume If an EG LFO or controller that changes with a value Pitch EG Filter EG LFO KT EXT 4 is selected as the AMS Amp AMS setting the Int AMS Intensity to 99 will allow you to increase the volume to a maximum of eight times that of the current volume for positive changes of the AMS or to decrease the volume to zero for negative changes of the AMS e In addition to the time variant changes in volume produced by the amp EG you can also make the volume change in synchronization with the pitch filter EG Select PitchEG or FilterEG as the AMS Amp AMS and adjust Int AMS Intensity If you wish to cancel the effect of the AmpEG and use the pitch filter EG to control the volume set all levels of the AmpEG to 99 Amp LFO 1 2 Intensity PROG 6 2 5 b The amp modulation intensity of LFO 1 2 can be controlled by EG keyboard tracking controllers or tempo etc If you select EG as the AMS LFO1 2 AMS the depth of the tremolo effect produced by LFO modulation will change in synchronization with the changes in EG level If you set Int AMS Intensity to a positive value the tremolo effect will deepen as the EG l
118. as arpeggiated notes Off unchecked Only the arpeggiated notes will be heard These parameters can also be set in 0 3 Arp Play 7 1b Arpeggiator Tempo J Tempo 040 240 EXT Sets the tempo s p 3 Tempo 0 1a B 7 1 UTILITY i Write Program 0 1 Copy Arpeggiator This command copies arpeggio settings CD Select Copy Arpeggiator to access the dialog box Copy firpeggiator Hane Portamento Pad z Cancel 2 In From specify the copy source arpeggio settings mode bank number X50 You can press a PROG BANK button to select a bank You can also use numeric buttons 0 9 and the ENTER button to select a number 3 If you are copying from Combination or multi set specify whether you wish to copy from A or B 4 To execute the Copy Arpeggio operation press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CAN CEL button 7 2 Zone Scan Zone PROG f Ed ArpCtris ScanZone Bottom Key Me Bim oo key Btm EN Top Go et Tap 127 7 2a Scan Zone Zone Map This shows the Scan Zone setting Key Btm Bottom Key C 1 G9 Top Top Key C 1 G9 These parameters specify the range of notes keys for which the arpeggiator will function Top is the upper limit and Btm is the lower limit Vel Btm Bottom Velocity 001 127 Top Top Velocity 001 127 Specifies the range of velocities for which the arpeggi
119. assigned Keys to which the same group number is assigned will be treated as a single group and will be played monophonically with last note priority For example you might assign closed and open hi hat sounds to the same group so that two or more hi hat sounds can not sound simultaneously Off Keys will not be grouped Normally you will set this Off Enable Note On Note On Receive On checked Note on messages will be received Normally you will check this but you can uncheck it if you do not want specific notes to sound Enable Note Off Note Off Receive On checked Note off messages will be received Normally you will uncheck this This parameter is valid when Hold PROG 1 1b is checked Hold On In the case of a drum program you will normally select Hold On In this case if Enable Note Off is checked note off mes sages will be received and the sound will stop the release segment of the EG will begin when the key is released Mixer Pan Rndm L001 C064 R127 Specifies the panning for each Key With a setting of Rndm Random the panning of the drum sample will change randomly for each note on BUS Bus Select L R IFX 1 2 1 2 Off Specifies the bus to which each key will be sent For example you can send snare type sounds to IFX to apply the insert effect and send the other sounds to L R without applying the insert effect S1 Send1 MFX1 000 127 S2 Send2 MFX2 000
120. be controlled To use this select KnobM1 17 for AMS or Kb1 17 for Dmod Src Simultaneously CC 17 will be transmitted Knob Mod 2 CC 19 General purpose controller Alternate Modulation or Effect Dynamic Modulation can be controlled To use this select KnobM2 19 for AMS or Kb2 19 for Dmod Src Simultaneously CC 19 will be transmitted Knob Mod 3 CC 20 General purpose controller Alternate Modulation or Effect Dynamic Modulation can be controlled To use this select KnobM3 20 for AMS or Kb3 20 for Dmod Src Simultaneously CC 20 will be transmitted Eh Knob Mod 4 CC 21 General purpose controller Alternate Modulation or Effect Dynamic Modulation can be controlled To use this select KnobM4 21 for AMS or Kb4 21 for Dmod Src Simultaneously CC 21 will be transmitted Master Volume Control the volume Simultaneously the universal system exclusive message Master Volume FOH 7FH nn 04 01 vv mm F7H will be transmitted to adjust the volume of all tracks or timbres while preserving the volume bal ance between tracks or timbres FX Ctrl 1 CC 12 Control Effect Dynamic Modulation When controlling this set Dmod Src to FX1 12 Simultaneously CC 12 will be transmitted FX Ctrl 2 CC 13 Control Effect Dynamic Modulation When controlling this set Dmod Src to FK2 13 Simultaneously CC 13 will be transmitted Fit Cutoff CC 74 Control the cutoff frequency of the Filter low
121. better within a particular song without having to return to Program mode and edit the pro gram itself For each track you can assign and adjust up to six parameters such as the filter cutoff resonance filter EQ and amp EG MULTI 1 Tone Adjust TA 1 Destination 1 Drur El n HB i i Mts Fe LFF Fe LFF Fe LPF Fe LPF Fe LFF Fe LFF Fe 400 00 00 too 00 foo 4D d n Rego HP Rozo HF Razo HF RHP Razo HF Razo HF Reso HF ia 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Taie Ie 36 Taze ITaz 6 Taz ITA 46 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 a Destination 1 6 Value 1 6 Destination 1 6 LPF Fc Reverse Selects the parameter that you want to adjust Value 1 6 99 199 12 00 12 00 1200 1200 Off On Specifies the value for the parameter you selected in Desti nation 1 6 If you set this to 00 or PRG the setting of the program will be used Ki Normally you should not select the same parameter for more than one Destination in the same track How ever if you do so the parameters will operate as fol lows If you select other than Hold or Reverse The Value of each Destination set to the same parameter will be summed for each track However the Value of the parameter being controlled by the Des tination will not exceed the allowable range of set tings For example if you have assigned three Detunel settings for the same track and their Value settings are set to 1000
122. but sounds only when the arpeggiator is on Arpeggiator Assign Ba Timbre 1 MIDI Ch Gch Status INT Trigger Arpeggiator Pattern A Timbre 2 MIDI Ch Gch Status Off Gch Ch2 A A Timbre 3 MIDI Ch 2ch Status INT Trigger Arpeggiator Pattern B EZE Timbre 4 MIDI Ch Gch Status Off Gch Ch3 B Ed Timbre 5 MIDI Ch 3ch Status INT Sounded by normal keyboard playing Does not sound Pattern A Does not sound Pattern B B 7 1 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 Copy Arpeggiator This command copies arpeggiator settings CD Select Copy Arpeggiator to access the dialog box Copy firpeggiator Cancel 2 In From select the copy source mode bank number arpeggiator If you are copying from Combination or Multi select either A or B to if you wish to copy settings from only one arpeggiator or select A amp B if you wish to copy the settings of both arpeggiators If you are copying from a Program or are copying either A or B from Combination or Multi set select either A or B as the To copy destination 4 To execute the Copy Arpeggiator command press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CAN CEL button 7 2 Arp A Arpeggiator A 7 3 Arp B Arpeggiator B The Arp A pages you make settings for arpeggiator A The Arp B pages you make settings for arpeggiator B iq You can also use Utility Copy Arpeggiator 7 1 to copy se
123. can be turned on by the ARP ON OFF button However it is not possible to turn on an arpeggiator for which the A or B parameter is unchecked in Arpeggiator Run COMBI 0 4 5 a COMBI 7 1a Also the arpeggiator will not run unless it has been assigned to a timbre in Assign COMBI 7 1b If you entered the Global mode from Multi mode Your editing will apply to the arpeggio pattern specified for the selected multi set Even if you entered Global mode from a mode in which the arpeggiator was turned off you can use the ARP ON OFF button to turn it on However it is not possible to turn on an arpeggiator for which the Arpeggiator Run MULTI 7 1 2 a parameter A or B is not checked Also the arpeggiator will not operate if it has not been assigned to a track in Assign MULTI 7 1 2 b G In each of the above cases you can modify the settings of the arpeggio pattern even if the arpeggiator is not turned on When editing a pattern it is a good idea to turn on the arpeggiator and make sure that it is the pattern that you wish to edit A If you want the edited user arpeggio pattern settings to be backed up even when the power is turned off you must write them into memory Select the Utility Write Arpeggio Pattern to access the Write Arpeggio Pattern dialog box t For details on creating an arpeggio pattern OG p 91 5 1 Setup GLOBAL 5 fHrp Fattern Setup Pattern 5 i c__L Tyre As Played Lied Mote ess
124. change number transmitted by the knob E 0 6 UTILITY is Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre Select by Category 0 1 37 S gt 9 c3 38 COMBI 1 Ed Tone Adjust 1 1 Prog Timbre Program Indicates the bank and program for each timbre 1 8 These parameters can also be set from the 0 Play Prog page COMBI 1 Ed Tone Adjust Prog Program Select 1 1a zw i 1b HETTEE Cees i ciag na28 BOOG Baa napa nana 1 1c istergoPistilowZPercuszittuanduribia Swei eouztisFortam Peortam 1 1d res Tru J LI Hore tas SS 1 1a Program Select Program Name Program Select Indicates the program that will be used by each timbre est Zei Program Name This displays part of the program name selected for each timbre 0 2c B 1 1 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 Select by Category Combi Category Prog T1 T8 Cate gory 0 2 1 2 MIX Mixer Specifies the pan and volume for each timbre 1 8 These parameters can also be set from the 0 Play Mixer page COMBI 1 Ed Tone Adjust Fixer Volume 1 2a tai Im Ime J 1 2a Pan Volume Pan Sets the pan of each timbre 1 8 est Aa Volume Sets the volume of each timbre 1 8 0 3a B 1 2 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 1 3 TA1 Tone Adjust 1 1 4 TA2 Tone Adjust 2 1 5 TA3 Tone Adjust 3 You can also use the Tone Adjus
125. ete 29 8 3 IFX Insert Effect 29 PROG 9 Ed MasterFX 2 30 Ce 7o 30 9 2 MFX 1 Master Effect1 31 9 3 MFX 2 Master Effect2 31 9 4 MEO Master EQ 31 2 Combination mode 33 COMBI PAGE MENU 33 COMBI0 Pp u uuu 33 0 1 Combi Combination 33 0 2 Prog Timbre eessen 35 0 3 Mix MIXET J P eben 36 0 4 Arp A Arpeggio Play A o 0 5 Arp D Arpeggio Play Du aya eti 37 microX 0 6 Ext Control 97 COMBI 1 Ed Tone Adjust 38 LI Prog Timbre Program u p te 38 2 Mix IIT E 38 132 TAL CLoOBDe AOIUSE E 38 194 PAZ CTone Ad USt 2 oiccsssonsstasisscienenieescconntxe 38 1 5 FAS lone Adjust D secccsiecescnvasencctopiestaancniens 38 COMBI 2 Ed Timbre Param 40 VIII m 40 DD o QR 40 2 X a EE 41 2 4 Other 42 COMBI 3 Ed MIDI Filter1 42 3 1 MIDI 1 1 MIDI Filter 1 1 42 3 2 MIDI 1 2 MIDI Filter 1 2 43 3 3 MIDI 1 3 MIDI Filter 1 3 43 3 4 MIDI 1 4 MIDI Filter 1
126. external MIDI device You can assign a MIDI control change and MIDI channel to each of the four knobs and switch between three such settings A B C to control your external device One set lets you transmit a total of twelve 4 x 3 different MIDI control changes These are called external control sets and you can choose from 64 such sets p 5 WA This page only displays the settings that are assigned to knob sets A B and C Use Global mode to make exter nal control assignments 000 Groovy Monsters St Control BB ELE M1 Bch IR ach ClHATS CIE TTE ee ch CC Ho GCHCCHOTS Gh CHES Gch Cp Gch CC 091 Gch ClRAB Gch ott ach Ott Gch OFt combi Ji Proa M min Mare aarp E Enteral 0 6a External Control Ext Control Setup Select Selects an external control set 00 63 WA This setting is not written saved in the combination Select A B C Shows the settings assigned to each knob of the external control set The currently enabled set is highlighted Use the SELECT button to switch between groups A B C MIDI Channel 01 16 Gch Indicates the MIDI channel Gch The message will be transmitted on the global MIDI channel you specify in Global mode The channel of all knobs that are set to Gch can be changed simply by chang ing the global MIDI channel setting instead of having to change the channel of each knob individually CC Assign Off 000 119 Indicates the MIDI control
127. for program OSC 1 2 This con trols the Amp Modulation Velocity Intensity parameter e p 22 6 2b F A EG A Filter Amp EG Attack Time 99 00 99 Adjusts the EG attack times of the program OSC 1 2 filter and amp To maximize the result of this adjustment the Amp EG sustain level attack level start level modulation and attack time modulation will also be adjusted at the same time The parameter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 73 is received p 175 F A EG D Filter Amp EG Decay Time 99 00 99 Adjusts the EG decay time and slope time of the program OSC 1 2 filter and amp The parameter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 75 is received v p 175 F A EG S Filter Amp EG Sustain Level 99 00 99 Adjusts the EG sustain level of the program OSC 1 2 filter and amp The parameter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 70 is received 1 p 175 F A EG R Filter Amp EG Release Time 99 00 99 Adjusts the EG release time of the program OSC 1 2 filter and amp The parameter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 72 is received r p 175 F EG A Filter EG Attack Time 99 00 99 F EG D Filter EG Decay Time 99 00 99 F EG S Filter EG Sustain Level 99 00 99 F EG R Filter EG Release Time 99 00 99 These adjust only the filter parameter as in A Attack Time D Decay Time S Sustain Lev
128. if MIDI Clock is Ext MIDI Ext USB or Auto and the X50 microX is being controlled from the external device the performance of the arpeggiator performance will still be transmitted via MIDI In Combination and Multi modes the arpeggiator performance will be trans mitted from timbres tracks whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 Recording the MIDI output of this instru ment s controllers arpeggiator and internal sequencer to an external sequencer computer If you wish to record the MIDI output of the X50 microX s controllers arpeggiator and internal sequencer on an exter nal sequencer or computer and use the X50 microX as the monitoring and playback tone generator while you record you must turn off the X50 microX s Local Control setting Local Control On GLOBAL 1 12 and set your external sequencer computer for echo back a function by which the data received at the MIDI IN is retransmitted without change from the MIDI OUT so that the data from the X50 microX s controllers arpeggiator and internal sequencer will not be applied in duplicate to the tone generator Using the REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs to record MIDI control changes on an external MIDI sequencer computer Set the X50 microX to Local Control Off Set the external MIDI sequencer computer to Echo Back On With these set tings recording and playback will occur correctly and the control changes will not be applied to the tone generator in duplicat
129. incoming program change messages on a channel that corresponds to a track whose Status MULTI 2 1 2 a is set to INT or BTH will switch programs on that track When you select a multi set will be transmitted on the channels of tracks whose Status is set to BTH EXT or EX2 Off unchecked Program changes will not be transmitted or received Bank Bank Change Off On On checked The Bank Select control change message will be transmitted together with program change messages This is valid when Enable Program Change is checked Off unchecked Bank Select messages will not be transmit ted or received Combi Combi Change Off On On checked When in COMBI 0 Play an incoming pro gram change message on the global MIDI channel set by MIDI Channel 1 1a will switch combinations This is valid when Enable Program Change is checked An incoming program change on a channel other than the glo bal MIDI channel will switch the program of any timbre that matches that MIDI channel Off unchecked An incoming program change message on the global MIDI channel will switch the program of any tim bre whose MIDI Channel COMBI 2 1a matches the glo bal MIDI channel The combination will not be switched The program changes for each timbre will be affected by the setting of the Program Change parameter COMBI 3 12 AfterT After Touch Off On On checked MIDI after touch messages will be transmit ted
130. is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated Expression CC 11 Bn OB vv When the above CC is assigned to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL or as the B mode function of a REALTIME CON TROL knob 1 4 operating that controller will transmit Expression messages and the volume will change When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated The volume of the X50 microX is determined by summing the value of the Volume message with the value of the Expression message If adjusting the Volume message does not increase the vol ume as you expect or if there is no sound transmit MIDI messages from an external device to reset the value of the Expression message set vv to 127 n Combination mode Volume messages will be transmitted by each timbre whose Status is EXT or EX2 when you re select the combination e When you change the Volume setting MULTI 0 4 5 in Multi mode or when you re select the multi set when Multi mode GLOBAL 0 2a is for Master in Multi mode volume messages will be transmitted by each track whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 ee Regardless of the Status settings re selecting a multi set or returning to the beginning will reset the internal Volume value to the value specified by each track and will reset the Expression value to the maximum fq You can control the volume independently for each track You will normally
131. is turned on timbre 1 will be played by arpeggiator A and timbre 2 will be played by arpeggiator B Arpeggiator Assign ds d aw ES Timbre1 MIDI Ch Gch Status INT Pattern A ES Timbre 2 MIDI Ch Gch Status INT Pattern B Trigger Arpeggiator Gch B Pattern B Example 2 The MIDI Channel 2 1a of timbres 1 2 3 4 and 5 are set respectively to Gch Gch 02 Gch and 03 Their Sta tus 2 1a is set respectively to INT Off INT Off and INT Assign arpeggiator A to timbres 2 and 3 assign arpeggiator B to timbres 4 and 5 and check Arpeggiator Run A B 0 4a 5a 7 1a When the front panel ARP ON OFF button is off playing the keyboard will sound only timbre 1 Timbres 2 and 4 are receiving the Gch but they will not sound since their Status is Off When you turn on the front panel ARP ON OFF button arpeggiator A will operate for timbres 2 and 3 and arpeggiator B will operate independently for timbres 4 and 5 Arpeggiators A and B are triggered by receiving note data on any MIDI channel of an assigned timbre but in this example they are being triggered from the Gch When you play the keyboard arpeggiator A will operate for timbres 2 and 3 but only timbre 3 whose Status is INT will sound Similarly arpeggiator B will operate for timbres 4 and 5 but only timbre 5 whose Status is INT will sound In this way you can make settings so that a timbre does not sound when the arpeggiator is off
132. item to the program of the corresponding timbre The effect dynamic modulation function is not affected by this setting When Status is EXT or EX2 operations of the built in con trollers will transmit MIDI data on the channel of that tim bre MIDI transmission and reception settings for this instrument are made in MIDI Filter GLOBAL 1 1b The MIDI Filter 1 3 and MIDI Filter 1 4 pages contain MIDI filters for assignable controllers whose function can be set by the user and if these are assigned to MIDI control changes the filter settings will affect those control changes In this case if the assignable controllers have been set to control changes that are also found in the MIDI Filter 1 1 or MIDI Filter 1 2 pages the settings in the MIDI Filter 1 and MIDI Filter 2 pages will take priority Also if the same con trol change is assigned to two or more controllers in the MIDI Filter 1 3 and MIDI Filter 1 4 pages checking any one of them will enable that control change Off unchecked Transmission and reception of MIDI data is disabled 3 1 MIDI 1 1 MIDI Filter 1 1 COMBI 31 Ed HIDI Filter 1 T1 Proaram Change d i A i i E i lois oi kb oi e M ro EN d M Lal z m ma Nu ABA 1 CUereoPiHo ger EI 3 la Program Change After Touch Program Change Off On Specifies whether or not MIDI program change messages will be transmitted and received After Touch Off On Specify whether or not MIDI after
133. low harmonics are added Adjust this parameter if you do not want to add lower harmonics to the higher range 13 Talking Mod Talking Modulator This effect adds an unusual character like a human voice to the input signal Modulating the tone via dynamic modula tion you can create an interesting effect that sounds as if the guitar or synthesizer is talking Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left oc gt o Wet Dry Talking Modulator A U E O X Wet Dry Sweep Mode Dmod LFO Switches between modulation source control and LFO control Das Voice Control Bottom 1 49 Center 51 99 Top Voice pattern control Control Src Control Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls the voice pattern Top Voice Top A U E O Selects a vowel sound at the top end of control Center Voice Center A U E O Selects a vowel sound in the center of control c Bottom Voice Bottom A U E O Selects a vowel sound at the bottom end of control EN Formant Shift 100 100 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied par Hot LFO Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed c Fx 09 Dee Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes ve Fx 09
134. off H E 9 2 3 UTILITY iz Write Multi 0 1 74 9 4 M EQ Master EQ The master EQ is a three band stereo EQ It is used to per form overall equalizing tonal adjustment on the sound from the L R bus immediately before it is output to MAIN OUTPUT L MONO and R r p 149 Haster ER iai B BdE baih 8 0dE Gain 8 80E MULTI 3 HasterFZ E 9 4 UTILITY Write Multi 0 1 4 Global mode In Global mode you can make settings that affect the entire instrument such as master tuning MIDI and memory pro tect You can also edit user scales drum kit setups and user arpeggio patterns amp If you want the settings you make in Global mode to be backed up when the power is turned off you must write them into memory To write your settings use the Utility Write Global Setting Write Drum Kits or Write Arpeggio Patterns GLOBAL PAGE MENU For details on selecting pages and parameters refer to Pro gram mode PROGRAM PAGE MENU p 1 X50 Global PAGE MENUX Arpeggio Pattern microX System Global PAGE MENU LD Category Name Arpeggio Pattern Eet Control 0 System Basic settings for the entire X50 microX and controller settings such as the pedals connected to the rear panel r p 75 MIDI 1 MIDI MIDI settings for this instrument p 81 2 User Scale Scale settings created by the user You can specify 16 types of octave scale an
135. or Double MIDI RPN Coarse Tune can be received to control and change the setting of Transpose and RPN Fine Tune can be received to control and change the setting of Detune When Mode Oscillator Mode is Drums MIDI RPN Coarse Tune and Fine Tune can be received to control and change the setting of Detune The controllable range is 1 octave for coarse tune and fine tune together Bend Range PRG 24 24 Specifies the amount of pitch change that will occur when the pitch bender is operated in semitone units PRG The pitch range specified by the program will be used 24 424 This setting will be used regardless of the setting in the program DI The MIDI RPN Pitch Bend Change message can be received to control this and change the setting How ever it will not be received if this parameter is set to PRG This message is received on the MIDI channel for each timbre set by MIDI Channel 2 1a E 2 3 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 Detune BPM Adjust If the program of a timbre uses a phrase or rhythm loop multisample is matched to a specific BPM you can use this Utility to modify its BPM value Detune BPM Adjust changes the BPM of a phrase or rhythm by modifying its pitch This is valid for a track when timbre Detune is selected When this Utility is executed the selected Detune value will be set automatically PROG 1 2c 1 3 GLOBAL 4 1b 4 2 CD Select
136. os mi Octave Potion Up KEERDEN Trnem MID DEE 5 la Arp Pat Pattern Tempo Arp Arpeggio Select A B If you have moved from Combination mode or Multi mode and edit an arpeggio pattern you must select either arpeggiator A or B as the pattern to edit Your editing will apply only to the selected one B will not be displayed if you moved here from Program mode 89 90 Pat Pattern Preset 0 Preset 4 U000 U250 Selects the pattern that you wish to edit Preset 0 Preset 4 Preset Arpeggio Patterns U000 250 Preload user Arpeggio Patterns 040 240 EXT J Tempo This specifies the tempo This can also be adjusted by the REALTIME CONTROLS C mode TEMPO knobs If MIDI Clock 1 1a is set to Ext MIDI or Ext USB or set to Auto and operating as a slave this will indicate EXT and the arpeggiator will synchronize to MIDI clock messages from an external MIDI device 5 1b Lgth Reso Oct Sort Latch K Sync Kbd Lgth Length 01 48 This specifies the length of the arpeggio pattern After the note value specified by Reso occurs for the number of times specified here the pattern will return to the beginning This parameter is not valid for preset patterns Preset 0 Pre set 4 Reso Resolution 55 5 25 2 45 a Oct Octave 1 2 3 4 Sort Off On Latch Off On K Sync Key Sync Off On Kbd Keyboard Off On t PROG 7 Ed Arp Ctrls Setup Arpeg Setup
137. p 107 4 1 High High sample Here you can select a drum kit assign High and Low drum samples to each key and set parameters for the High and Low drumsamples GLOBAL HU au High Sample Drurn kit Drum Fit SINT Standard Fit 1 4 1a FIASssigh Level H 33 L 33 We SL L H 375 4 1b High 517 Cannan Lo jj Trans App Tumne 58 FC App Reso App At App c H3 4 1a Drum Kit Key Assign Level H Level L Vel SW LH Drum Kit X50 OO INT 15 INT 16 User 39 User microX OO INT 31 INT 32 User 39 User Selects the drum kit that you wish to edit If you wish to modify the drum kit name use the Rename Drum Kit Utility menu command X50 OO INT 15 INT preload drum kits for user drum kits 16 Uson 39 Usen microX OO INT 31 INT preload drum kits for user drum kits Steel tee Key C 1 69 Indicates the key to which you will assign a drumsample and its settings All 4 DKit parameters except for Drum Kit will apply to the key you assign here Two drumsamples High and Low can be assigned to each key and you can switch between them by velocity as you play X50 You can also select a key by holding down the ENTER button and playing a note on the keyboard Assign Off On On checked The drumsamples you assigned for High 4 1b and Low 4 2a will sound Normally you will check this parameter Off unchecked The selected drumsamples w
138. page Use this MEQ page to set the center frequency band width for Mid and dynamic modulation of the EQ bands 4 Controlling the Master Effects via MIDI You can use the Dynamic Modulation Dmod function to control all Master Effects parameters in real time from this instrument s controllers or from an external MIDI sequencer In Program mode the parameters are controlled on global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 1a In Combination mode and Multi mode you can set the control channels for MFX1 and MFX2 using the Setup page Control Channel parameters of the MFX1 2 tabs Select the desired option from Ch01 16 and Gch Ch01 16 Select this option if you wish to control the param eters for each Master Effect on different channels Gch Select this option if you wish to control the parameters on global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 12 This is the normal setting Master EQ The Master EQ stereo three band EQ is located right before MAIN OUTPUT L MONO R Low and High EQs are of the shelving type and Mid EQ is a peaking type equalizer You can control the Low Gain and High Gain parameters using the Dynamic Modulation function The Master EQ stereo three band EQ is applied to the sig nal input from the L R bus For more information on the parameters p 149 Program mode Effect Mixer Block Diagram in Program Mode Individual Outputs The X50 microX is equipped with two individual IND
139. pitch LFO is applied microX When you move the microX s joystick in the Y direction up Modulation 1 Depth messages will be trans mitted When these messages are received the same effect will be applied as when the microX s joystick is operated Normally this will apply a vibrato effect pitch LFO e n Combination and Multi modes transmission reception can be switched on off for each timbre track es JS Y M Whl CC 01 COMBI 3 5 6 a Modulation 2 depth CC 02 Bn 02 vv X50 If you assign the above CC as the function of the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL or a REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knob B mode function operating that control of the X50 will transmit Modulation 2 Depth messages If these messages are received the result will be the same as when the X50 s joystick is operated Normally a wah effect filter LFO is applied microX When you move the microX s joystick in the Y direction down Modulation 2 Depth messages will be transmitted When these messages are received the same effect will be applied as when the X50 microX s joystick is operated Normally this will apply a wah effect filter LFO e n Combination and Multi modes transmission reception can be switched on off for each timbre track e JS Y CC 02 COMBI 32a MULTI 3 5 6 a fe Other manufacturers use this message for other pur poses e g breath controller etc Controlling the portamento effect Portamento time CC 05
140. play backward If you turn this Off all multisamples and drum samples will play normally If you set this to PRG the settings of the program or the drum kit used by the pro gram will be used Normally you can make effective use of this with a drum program B 1 3 4 5 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 COMBI 39 40 COMBI 2 Ed Timbre Param 2 1 MIDI Here you can make MIDI settings for each timbre COMBI 2 Ed Timbre Param el E Status Dteup Ballou Slou Off Off 2 14 E 2 Sch Gch B 2 1 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 2 2 0SC These settings specify how each timbre will be sounded COMBI 2 Ed Timbre Param OSC Force OSC Mode PRG PRG F PRG PRG Beth Both Both Both x Both Both x Both i Both PRG PRG RG PRG PRG PRG F LHERI mm 2 la Status MIDI Channel Bank EX2 MSB LSB Status INT Off EXT EX2 Specifies the status of MIDI and the internal tone generator for each timbre INT When you play this instrument the internal tone gen erator will sound and will also sound in respond to MIDI messages received from an external MIDI device MIDI data will not be transmitted Off The program will not sound Nor will MIDI data be transmitted EXT Playing this instrument will not cause it to sound but it will transmit data via MIDI to control external MIDI devices EX2
141. programs and combinations WA The category names you edit here can be specified when you write data in the Write Program dialog box PROG 0 1 UTILITY or Write Combination dialog box COMBI 0 1 UTILITY and used in the respective Select by Category function to select programs or combinations by category GLOBAL 3 Categor GB ET Keyboard 3 1a Di organ 82 M Bell Mallet B5 M Strings Bd Wi Uncal Riru B5 M Brass BG Wi Woodwind Reed aT WW auitar Plucked nor HF z3s en sasr CCC GLOBAL Category Hame Comb 00 07 aa ET Keyboard d M BrazsReed 3 34 81 M organ 85 n Orchestral 82 M Bell Hallet Perc BG WM World 85 M Strings ar W auitar Plucked KANDAS AAE CCC C A If you want the edited user categories to be backed up when the power is turned off you must write them into memory Select the Utility Write Global Setting to access the Write Global Setting dialog box and press the MENU OK button to write the edited settings 3 1 4 a Category Select the category name you want to edit and edit it Use the ClickPoint 4 5 A V to select a category press the center of the ClickPoint to open the text dialog box and enter a category name of up to sixteen characters For the editing procedure OG X50 p 112 microX p 114 B 3 1 4 UTILITY is Write Global Setting 0 1 GLOBAL 4 DKit prum kit Here you can create a drum kit by assigning a drum instru
142. set to L R or Off DI Control change CC 93 will control the Send 1 level and control change CC 91 will control the Send 2 level These messages are received on the global MIDI chan nel specified by MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 12 8 2b Routing This displays the status of the insert effect ATT OSs FR St Grophicred St oraphictes This displays the routing of the insert effect the specified effect name and the on off status You can select All OSCs and use the VALUE controller to specify BUS Select 1 8 1a E 8 2 UTILITY re Write Program 0 1 Copy Insert Effect 8 1 For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY D Select by Category Selects insert effect by category For the procedure refer to Select by Category p 2 IFS Category 66 Filter Dynamic Filter D unalER LeTau ARADA Ho Effect Pitch Phzl Reuerb SBE 1 STAMP Sim Reverb BB2 B2 ST C omprezzar Mad P Shft B83 85 St Limiter aad aad mtbana Limit set BERLE MA This command is valid when the 8 2 parameters are selected 8 3 FX Insert Effect Here you can set the effect parameters for the IFX that was selected in the Setup page r p 104 PROG Ed InsertFi IFA MitTap Chol LF Freq P ITER 8 Noten 48 Ticaam 15 0 36 L 38 P Le T2 188x amp 8 D i8L 5 P L3 T2 Bamy z218 0 5 L 18 FP Lo Tdczramx deas D 13 L 17 P Rb iD dd re ZER
143. setting GLOBAL 0 2a With the factory settings this will be GM re p 78 Bank Map Simply receiving a Bank Select message will not cause the program or bank to change The program or bank will actually change when a Program Change message is received Program mode e In PROG 0 Play program change and bank select messages are transmitted and received on the global MIDI channel These messages are not received in PROG 1 Ed Basic PROG 9 Ed MasterFX Combination Multi mode Program change and bank select messages can be received on the MIDI channel specified for each timbre track to select programs on that timbre track e When you select a combination program change and bank select messages will be transmitted by timbres whose Status is EXT or EX2 In Multi mode when you change the Program Select MULTI 0 2 3 a setting or reselect a multi set Multi Mode GLOBAL 0 22 set to for Master program change and bank select messages are transmitted on tracks whose Status is set to BTH EXT or EX2 i p 57 Program Select HI e n Combination and Multi modes transmission reception can be switched on off for each timbre track resp A7 64 Program Change 171 Appendices 172 Selecting combinations You can use program change and bank select messages to select combinations in the same way that you select programs e Combinations 000 127 in banks A B and C correspond to program changes Cn
144. simulate the type of walls in the room That is a larger ER Level simulates a hard wall and a larger Reverb Level simulates a soft wall Reverb Room Type Level Dry ER Early Reflections Reverb o o 2 o l Pre Delay Thru Pre Delay Reverb Time 59 PAEQ Wah Parametric 4 Band EQ Wah Auto Wah This effect combines a mono type four band parametric equalizer and a wah You can change the order of the connec tion Mono Mono Chain Effects that combine two mono effects con nected in series Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o g 2 Wet Dry 58 PAEQ Exciter Parametric 4 Band EQ Exciter This effect combines a mono type four band parametric equalizer and an exciter Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left C Parametric 4Band EQ PEQ Trim Sets the parametric EQ input level B1 Band1 Cutoff Sets the center frequency of Band 1 Q Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 1 B2 Band2 Cutoff Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Q Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 2 B3 Band3 Cutoff Sets the center frequency for Band 3 Q Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 3 B4 Band4 Cutoff Sets the center frequency for Band 4 Q Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 4 Ao Wet Dry Jo Wet D
145. spond to each MIDI message indicates a fixed function trollers are operated and the AMS alternate modulation and indicates an assignable function Malae Wala Joy PITCH MOD R T C R T C R T C Valve Gate Velocity SW1 2 ARP Damper Switch Pedal for AMS Vor DMOD Stick Wheel Wheel A B Value On Off Knob Knob X50 On Off microX X50 X50 Mircamemesagss L J T TL TT OTT TL T TL T T TL TL T TP Neo Note on noterumba j J I II I T lt Note on velocity E Poarou O _ BOR c eS G dE E EE OO BaksdenMS8 j j 1 T T T 1 Modulation e sj ISI 2 Modulation EE J e T e lt E E CR j j E 4Fwicmwl O jJ J CrP ELE ILI S5Potmeno ms j O ILL 6 Dataentyywse e O T T 7wWume L IL d 8 Postinserionefectpan T _ BCEE EECH ES T BEER s THE J T T T T igEfdcmwi J T T I Te T T lt Beacon j j l J Te 48 REES s T 16 ibboncontoler J J T e 17
146. that is specified by MEFX1 2 Control Ch 9 1a will not be copied Swap Master Effect p 31 PROG 9 1 A Note the MIDI control channel that is specified by MFX1 2 Control Ch 9 1a will not be swapped 9 2 MFX1 Master Effect1 9 3 MFX2 Master Effect2 Here you can set the parameters of the Master Effect1 and Master Effect2 effects that were selected in the Setup page rs p 104 LUMBIO Ed MasterFz2 7 HFZT 5t Chorus OUER Diu 25 8ms ROY 28 8mz 4168 deg Depth 61 Fbz 137 53 Freq 8 48H2z PFrt 8 65 48 24 Pre EQ Trim 188 BPMFMIO Sync Off BPM 128 LoED 9 60B HiEG 6 0dE Bate J Times 1 WO 4 96 kb542B8 Z 51 E 9 2 3 UTILITY r Write Combination 0 1 9 4 M EQ Master EQ The master EQ is a three band stereo EQ It is located imme diately before the MAIN OUTPUT L MONO and R from the L R bus and adjusts the overall tonal character of the sound 1 p 149 The MEO High Gain and the MEQ Low Gain can be controlled by assigning a modulation source to the Low Gain Mod Src and High Gain Mod src func tions on this page CUHEBI 9 Ed THasterFZz Master ER Low Cutoff 188Hz Gain Mid Cutotf z BBlkHz pg lai A3 DOP High Cutatf 14 58KH2 Gain td Ddb Low Gain Mod Sre Off High Gain Mod Sre Off E 9 4 UTILITY i Write Combination 0 1 SE COMBI 54 In Multi mode the X50 microX functions as a 16 part multi timbral MIDI tone generator that can recei
147. that you wish to produce The default factory setting for this parameter is 4 microX OCTAVE Keys Y A Use Prog Combi Multi s Octave Off On On checked When you switch programs combinations or multi sets the OCTAVE Y A button settings saved with the selected program combination or multi set will be used Off unchecked The OCTAVE V A button settings will not change when you switch programs combinations or multi sets 0 1b FX SW IFX Off On checked Insert effect IFX will be disabled Off unchecked The Setup page PROG COMBI 8 2a MULTI 8 3a IFX On Off setting of Program Combina tion and Multi modes will be valid MFX1 Off On checked MFX1 will be disabled Off unchecked The Master Effect Setup page 9 1 MFX1 On Off settings of Program Combination and Multi mode will be valid MFX2 Off On checked MFX2 will be disabled Off unchecked The Master Effect Setup page 9 1 MFX2 On Off settings of Program Combination and Multi modes will be valid Off On Off On Off On DI When IEN On Off or MFX1 On Off MFX2 On Off settings are switched control change messages CC 92 effect control 2 CC 94 effect control 4 and CC 95 effect control 5 will be transmitted respectively The transmitted data will be 0 for off and 127 for on 0 1c Auto Arp Auto Arpeggiator Program Auto Arp Program Off On On checked Whe
148. the REALTIME CONTROLS C mode TEMPO knob ARP GATE knob ARP LENGTH knob and ARP VELOCITY knob OG p 91 000 Stereo rhonickeug 0 4a RrPessiator Run A B LAPE inini WW M Te cate Be Ud eel CEE eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 0 4b Pattern l138 Dr Percuzsion ctave 1 r amp ort FlLatch OKey Sync Keyboard 0 4 5 a Arpeggiator Run Timbre assign Arpeggiator Run A B Run A B Off On When the ARP ON OFF button is on any arpeggiator that is checked here will run if it is assigned to a timbre in Assign 7 1b Even if the arpeggiator is on you can turn A and B on off independently This parameter can also be set from the 7 Ed Arp Ctrls Setup page Timbre assign This displays the timbres 1 8 to which arpeggiators A and B are assigned This can be set in Assign 7 1b 0 4 5 b Arpeggiator A B Pattern Preset 0 Preset 4 U000 U250 Reso Resolution 55 25 25 25 25 JI Octave 1 2 3 4 Sort Off On Latch Off On Key Sync Off On Keyboard Off On Sets the various parameters of the combination arpeggiator es PROG Ed Arp Ctrls These parameters can also be set in COMBI 7 Ed Arp Ctrls Arp A Arp B page B 0 4 5 UTILITY is Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre Select by Category 0 1 microX 0 6 Ext Control External control lets you use the REALTIME CONTROLS knobs to control an
149. the envelope generator will start when the note on message is received When Swp Mode Dmod the modulation source can control the flanger directly Select the modulation source using the Sre parameter MIDI The effect is off when a value for the modulation source specified for the Src parameter is smaller than 64 and the effect is on when the value is 64 or higher The Envelope Generator is triggered when the value changes from 63 or smaller to 64 or higher f EG Attack g EG Decay Attack and Decay speed are the only adjustable parameters on this EG 23 St Phaser Stereo Phaser This effect creates a swell by shifting the phase It is very effective on electric piano sounds You can add spread to the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from each other Stereo In Stereo Out Left o High Damp Wet Dry Giro Phase LFO Tri Sine gt LFO Shape LFO Wave LFO Waveform Tri Sine Selects LFO Waveform Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed t Fx 20 LFO Phase 180 180deg Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 10 0 02 20 00Hz t Fx 09 Der Off Tempo Freq LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Source Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequenc
150. the moment of note on Unlike the case when this parameter is set to L R the pan of a sounding note will not change in real time If you wish to move the pan of a sounding note in real time and output it from INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1 2 you must set BUS Select to IFX select 00 No Effect for IEX 82a and then set BUS Select 8 2a to 1 2 S1 Send1 MFX1 000 127 S2 Send2 MFX2 000 127 For each timbre 1 8 these parameters set the send level to master effects 1 and 2 These settings are valid when BUS Select is set to L R or Off When IFX is selected the send levels to master effects 1 and 2 are set by the S1 Send1 MFX S2 Send2 MFX parameters of the Setup page 8 22 after the sound has passed through IFX If BUS Select is set to 1 2 or 1 2 these settings are ignored HI Control change 93 can be used to control the Send 1 level and 91 to control the Send 2 and modify their respective settings These messages will be received on the MIDI channel specified for each timbre in the 2 Ed Track Param MIDI page The actual send levels are determined by summing this value with the send level S1 Send1 MFX S2 Send2 MFX PROG 8 2a for each oscillator of the program selected for the timbre E 8 1 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 Copy Insert Effect PROG 8 1 amp However the MIDI control channel specified for Con trol Channel of t
151. the sweep curve of auto wah Hot LFO Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed i Drar Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes s cy BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo par Base Base Note dn E ll r d o Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed Resonance 0 100 Sets the resonance amount LPF Low Pass Filter Switches the Wah Low Pass Filter on and off W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Off On Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet D Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a FreqBottm a FreqTop The sweep width and direction of the wah filter are determined by the FreqBottm and FreqTop settings Sweep Mode D mod Frequency A Frequency Top 75 Bottom 60 Bottom 25 Top 30 Dz Higher Max Sweep Mode Auto Frequency Frequency Top 75 Bottom 75 Wah d Envelope Higher gt o Bottom 25 Envelope Envelope b Swp Mode This parameter changes the wah control mode Setting Swp Mode to Auto will select an auto wah tha
152. the temperature or other reasons the LCD screen is unreadable when the power is turned on use the following procedure to adjust the contrast CD While holding down the EXIT CANCEL button press the UTILITY button The GLOBAL button will blink and the Global mode Update Global Setting dialog box will appear Update Global Setting LCD Contrast RI fire you sure 7 Press ESIT CHHCEL or FIERI UE A If you are unable to read the display or if the Update Global Setting dialog box does not appear check whether the GLOBAL button is blinking If the GLO BAL button is lit or dark the X50 microX may be writ ing data that was received from an external connected MIDI device or may be responding to a request for out put If so make sure that the X50 microX is not writing data from an external connected MIDI device or trans mitting data in response to a request or that any such operation has been completed Then turn the power of the X50 microX off and on again and repeat this proce dure from step 1 2 Use the VALUE dial to adjust the LCD contrast 3 Press the MENU OK button The LCD contrast setting will be memorized WE Other global settings will also be memorized at this time 0 2b Memory Protect A This setting also applies to Load Preload Data 0 1 Loading will not be possible if protect is specified for even one of the types of data selected for loading in Kind rs p 77 Program
153. these messages are received the result will be the same as if the controller had been operated For SW1 modulation CC 80 Foot switch CC 82 vv of 63 3F or less will be OFF and 64 40 or greater will be ON Damper pedal CC 64 Bn 40 vv This message is transmitted when you operate a damper pedal separately sold Korg DS 1H etc connected to the DAMPER jack and the damper effect will be turned on off If the DS 1H is used a half damper effect can be applied e n Combination and Multi modes transmission reception of this message can be turned on off independently for each timbre track Damper CC 64 COMBI 3 2a MULTI 3 3 4 a Sostenuto CC 66 Bn 42 vv If the above CC is assigned as the function of the ASSIGN ABLE SWITCH operating the switch will transmit this mes sage with vv 127 7F for ON and vv 0 00 for OFF and the sostenuto effect will be turned on off When this mes sage is received the result will be the same as when the con troller is operated OFF for vv 63 3F or below and ON for vv 64 40 or above Soft pedal CC 67 Bn 43 vv If the above CC is assigned as the function of the ASSIGN ABLE SWITCH the soft pedal effect will be turned on off When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated Using the controllers of a connected MIDI instrument such as the TRITON Extreme Ribbon Controller CC 16 Bn 10 vv W
154. to will allow AMS to decrease the EG level With a set ting of 0 no change will occur Amp 1 EG changes Level AMS Velocity Intensity a positive value Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off Softly played note when S 0 Strongly played note and A and B are set to when S z0 and A and settings of 63a Amp 1 EG B are set to Strongly played note when S 0 and A and B are set to 6 3c Time Mod Time Modulation You can use two AMS sources to control the Amp 1 EG times that were specified in Amp 1 EG 63a AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 Off EXT KT Selects the source that will control the Time parameters of Amp 1 EG p 152 AMS List I AMSI Intensity 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 will have For example if AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 is Amp KT the Amp Keyboard Track settings 6 2a will control the EG Time parameters With positive values of this parameter positive 4 values of Ramp Ramp Setting will cause EG times to be lengthened and negative val ues of Ramp Ramp Setting will cause EG times to be shortened The direction of the change is specified by A AMS1 SW Attack D AMS1 SW Decay S AMS1 SW Slope and R AMS1 SW Release When AMSI Time Mod AMS1 is Velocity positive values will cause EG times to lengthen as
155. to change them back to different banks Be careful that the change destination banks do not overlap Half Damper Calibration If a damper pedal that supports half damper the separately sold DS 1H option is connected to the rear panel DAMPER jack here s how you can adjust the sensitivity if the damper effect is not applied appropriately CD Connect the half damper pedal to the DAMPER jack 2 Select Half Damper Calibration to access the dialog box Half Damper Calibration Set MINH PHz then press Done ee 3 Press the half damper pedal and then release the pedal 4 Press the MENU OK button If the adjustment could not be performed correctly an error message will appear Please repeat the procedure A Since the operation of the half damper pedal is delicate please use the separately sold DS 1H option If any other pedal is used the correct effect may not be obtained or adjustment may not be possible 77 78 0 2 Pref System Preference X50 Preference Multi Mode System Preference Hemory Protect Muti Mode Bank Map Gh Power OF Mode Reset Page Menu Style Icon RES DAME Cl Broar am Drum kit Arp Usrbat Combi hutti LCD Contrast 28 0 2b microX Memory Protect GET iProaram Drum kit Combi hRrp UsrPat Ext contro C Muti LCD Contrast 28 0 2a System Preference Multi Mode for Ext Seq for Master This specifies how MIDI data
156. toggles between rotation and stop par Speed Speed Switch Slow Fast Switches the speaker rotation speed between slow and fast D zs Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that toggles between slow and fast Sw Tggl Mmnt Selects switching mode of the modulation source that toggles between slow and fast us H R Bal Horn Rotor Balance Rot 1 99 Hrn Sets the level balance between the high range horn and low range rotor ManuSp Manual Speed Control Off Tempo Selects the modulation source in case the rotation speed is changed directly Does Horn Accel Horn Acceleration 0 100 How quickly the horn rotation speed in the high range is switched IS Ratio Horn Ratio Stop 0 50 2 00 Adjusts the high range side horn rotation speed Standard value is 1 00 Selecting Stop will stop the rotation Rotor Accel Rotor Acceleration 0 100 Determines how quickly the rotor rotation speed in the low range is switched us Ratio Rotor Ratio Stop 0 50 2 00 Adjusts the low range side rotor rotation speed Standard value is 1 00 Selecting Stop will stop the rotation MicDistance 0 100 Sets the distance between the microphone and rotary speaker re Spread Mic Spread 0 100 Sets the angle of left and right microphones W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D sse Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance
157. touch messages will be transmitted and received If you set the GLOBAL 0 3 Foot page Foot Pedal Assign parameter to After Touch you can transmit aftertouch mes sages using a foot controller connected to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack A The keyboard of the X50 microX does not transmit aftertouch messages B 3 1 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 3 2 MIDI 1 2 MIDI Filter 1 2 i A HES A i E J _ i ei ei koi 0 l J i ld i NF ERACE La a l4 3 2a Damper CC 64 Portamento SW CC 65 Damper CC 64 Off On Specifies whether or not MIDI control change message 64 hold damper pedal messages will be transmitted and received Portamento SW CC 65 Off On Specifies whether or not MIDI control change message 65 portamento on off messages will be transmitted and received Bl 3 2 UTILITY w Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 3 3 MIDI 1 3 MIDI Filter 1 3 A N TET NE H i i z iu m i ig i Ca ii kl i ld i NF HaB1 s5tereoPiano mr fiz T 1 3 3a J S Y M Whl CC 01 J S Y CC 02 JS Y M Whl CC 01 Off On X50 Specifies whether MIDI control change CC 1 the X50 s MOD wheel or a REALTIME CONTROLS B assign setting will be transmitted and received microX Specifies whether MIDI control change CC 1 the Y direction of the microX s joystick or a REALTIME CON TROLS B assign setting will be transmitted and received JS
158. use Alternate Modulation to accomplish this type of modulation routing LFO2 Intensity Mod Intensity Mod OSC Intensity Mod to A Intensity Mod to A Filter1 A Pitch Mod Resonance Mod Cutoff Mod 1 Cutoff Mod 2 Intensity Mod Intensity Mod to A Level Mod Time Mod 1 Time Mod 2 Level Mod 1 Level Mod 2 Time Mod Intensity Mod to B Intensity Mod Intensity Mod to B Intensity Mod L CutoffMod1 Amp Mod a Pan Mod I Cutoff Mod 2 Intensity Mod to B Level Mod Time Mod 1 Time Mod 2 151 Appendices 152 gt n gt e D 3 Y F D Q D 3 n c e H Q do not use Alternate Modulation pitch EG filter EG within the same oscillator 5 EG Pitch EG EG Filter EG Amp EG LFO1 LFO2 LFO2 within the same oscillator Fit KT Fit KT a amp EG within the same oscillator n LFO1 within the same oscillator T 9 KT KT KT T gt T gt O o Filter Keyboard Track Filter Keyboard Track Fit KT 0 Filter Keyboard Track 0 FIt KT 0 Filter Keyboard Track 0 Amp KT Amp KT Amp Keyboard Track Amp KT 0 Amp Keyboard Track 0 Amp KT 0 Amp Keyboard Track 0 Note No Note Number filter keyboard tracking within the same oscillator iz p 153 filter keyboard tracking within the same oscillator r p 153 ii p 153 ii p 153 filter keyboard tracking within the same o
159. use Volume messages to set the initial volume level for each track and use Expression messages to create changes in dynamics within the musical data of the song By using the universal exclusive Master Volume message you can adjust the overall volume without changing the vol ume balance between timbres or tracks rx p 176 About system exclusive messages Controlling panning stereo position Pan CC 10 Bn 0A vv vv value where 00 is far left 64 is center and 127 is far right When the above CC is assigned to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL or as the B mode function of a REALTIME CON TROLS knob 1 4 operating that controller will transmit Pan messages and the panning will change When this mes sage is received the result will be the same as when the con troller is operated e When you set the Pan MULTI 0 4 5 in Multi mode or when you re select the multi set when Multi mode GLOBAL 0 2a is for Master in Multi mode Pan messages except for RND will be transmitted by each track whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 r p 58 Post insert effect pan CC 08 Bn 08 vv vv value where 00 is far left 64 is center and 127 is far right When the above CC is assigned to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL or as the B mode function of a REALTIME CON TROLS knob 1 4 operating that controller will transmit Post Insert Effect Pan messages and the panning of the sound following the insert effect will change When this me
160. value Master EQ Master EQ Use the 9 4 MasterFX MEO page in the Program Combina tion and Multi modes You cannot use the Master EQ as the Insert Effect or as one of the Master Effects Low Mid High d LD lt gt L Mono LEQ PEQ HEQ LEQ PEQ HEQ Riiie SEES eg E h A Low Gain Mod High Gain Mod High Gain Mod Src Low Cutoff 20 1 00KHz Sets the cutoff frequency of Low EQ shelving type Gain 18 0 18 0 0 5step dB Sets the gain of Low EQ Dae Mid Cutoff 300 10 00KHz Sets the cutoff frequency of Mid EQ peaking type Q 0 5 10 0 0 1step Sets the band width of Mid EQ With a higher value the band become narrower Gain 18 0 18 0 0 5step dB Sets the gain of Mid EQ High Cutoff 500 20 00KHz Sets the cutoff frequency of High EQ shelving type Gain 18 0 18 0 0 5step dB Sets the gain of High EQ Dae Low Gain Mod Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for Low Gain High Gain Mod Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for High Gain a Gain b Gain c Gain These parameters are linked with the Master EQ Gain dB 9 1c parameter of the MasterFX d Low Gain Mod Src For example when this parameter is set to Kb1 17 you can con trol the EQ gain in the range from 18dB to 18dB during perfor mance using the REALTIME CONTROLS knob At this time set Knob 1 B to Knob Modi CC 17 for Knob B Assign
161. volume will be at the original level from the top key 12 The volume will increase gradually as you play down ward and will reach the original volume one octave below the top key 60 The volume will increase gradually as you play down ward and will reach the original volume five octaves below the top key Bottom Slope 00 72 Specifies the range of keys 12 is one octave over which the maximum programmed volume level will be reached start ing from the bottom key 0 The volume will be at the original level from the bottom key 12 The volume will increase gradually as you play upward and will reach the original volume one octave above the bot tom key 60 The volume will increase gradually as you play upward and will reach the original volume five octaves above the bottom key E 5 2 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 5 3 Review Review Ti 5 3a 5 3a Key Zone Map All T1 T8 This displays the range of notes that will sound for each of the timbres 1 8 The range of notes sounded is shown as a line and the slope portion is shaded BH 5 3 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 COMBI 6 Ed Vel Zone Velocity Zone Sets the Top Bottom Velocity parameters to specify the range of velocities that will sound each timbre 1 8 and sets the Top Bottom Slope parameters to specify the range over which the volume will change By setti
162. will be loaded Single Data for one multi set drum kit or arpeggio pat tern will be loaded In this case move the cursor down to select the data that you want to load If you are loading in units of Bank or Single use the To field to select the loading destination 4 To load the data press the MENU OK button To can cel press the EXIT CANCEL button iq If you turn on the power while holding down the MENU OK button and the EXIT CANCEL button the Load All operation will be executed automati cally the LCD will display a message of Now Writing Internal Memory and all data be loaded Change all bank references This command changes all program banks specified for tim bres in combinations or tracks of multi sets CD Select Change all bank references to access the dialog box X50 Change all bank references Ficombination ll Multi Program Bank Hab B C CoD microX Change all bank references combination Cl Multi Program Bank A G B4B Cat Dan E E 2 To execute this command for combinations check Com bination To execute this command for multi sets check Multi 3 Specify the banks to be changed Program Bank 4 To execute the Change All Bank References command press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CANCEL button amp If you change two or more different banks to the same bank it will not be possible to use this function
163. with the X50 microX s internal arpeggiator Internal The internal arpeggiator will synchronize to the X50 microX s own internal clock Select the Internal setting when using the X50 microX by itself or when you want the X50 microX to be the master controlling device so that another connected external MIDI device will synchronize to the MIDI Clock messages trans mitted from the X50 microX Ext MIDI The arpeggiator of the X50 microX will synchro nize to MIDI Clock messages transmitted from an external MIDI device connected to the MIDI IN connector Ext USB The X50 microX will synchronize to the MIDI Clock messages transmitted by an external MIDI device con nected to the USB connector and the internal arpeggiator of the X50 microX will operate as a slave device Use the Ext MIDI or Ext USB setting when you are using this instrument as a slave controlled device that synchro nizes to the MIDI Clock messages received from an external MIDI device This instrument will respond to MIDI real time messages Start Stop Continue Song Select Song Position Pointer from an external sequencer Auto Normally operation will be the same as Internal If you choose this setting and the X50 microX receives MIDI clock messages from an external device it will automatically switch to the same operation as the Ext MIDI or Ext USB settings WA If you have chosen the Auto setting when using an external sequencer the X50 microX will autom
164. 00 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Ctrl Target This parameter selects no level control delay output control effect balance or feedback amount control a Pol b Threshold b Offset c Attack d Release The Offset parameter specifies the value for the Ctrl Target parameter that is set to None expressed as the ratio relative to the parameter value the W D value with Ctrl Target Out or the Feedback value with Ctrl Target FB When Pol is positive the Ctrl Target value is obtained by multiplying the parameter value by the Offset value if the input level is below the threshold or equals the parameter value if the input level exceeds the threshold When Pol is negative Ctrl Target value equals the parameter value if the input level is below the threshold or is obtained by multiplying the parameter value by the Offset value if the level exceeds the threshold The Attack and Release parameters specify attack time and release time of delay level control Dynamic Delay Threshold Release Level 4 Envelope Ty Attack Wet Ducking Delay Control Target Out Polarityz Delay Time Wet Control Target Out Polarityz 4 Time 48 St AutoPanDly Stereo Auto Panning Delay This stereo delay effect pans the delay sound left and right using the LFO Stereo In Stereo Out Left o High Damp Low Damp
165. 00 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Pitch Shift cent e Depth These parameters set the amount of pitch shift and amount of modulation by means of the LFO Pitch Shift Mod Pitch Shift Depth LFO Waveform Triangle Depth value Pitch Shift value Original Pitch LFO Waveform Square Depth value Lower f Pan g W D The Pan parameter pans the effect sound and dry sound to the left and right With L the effect sound is panned left and the dry sound is panned right With a W D Wet setting the effect and dry sound will be output in a proportion of 1 1 40 Rotary SP Rotary Speaker This effect simulates a rotary speaker and obtains a more real istic sound by simulating the rotor in the low range and the horn in the high range separately The effect also simulates the stereo microphone settings Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Dr Horn J Rotary Speaker Horn Rotor Mic Distance Balance Mic Spread Speaker Simulation Right i Dine Mode Switch Rotate Stop D ze27 Speed Switch Slow Fast D ze27 Manual Speed Control Mode Mode Switch Rotate Stop Switches between speaker rotation and stop Dyer Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that toggles between rotation and stop Sw Tggl Mmnt Selects switching mode of the modulation source that
166. 00 Cn ZF e Similarly as for program banks the internal banks that correspond to each bank select number will depend on the Bank Map setting GLOBAL 0 22 p 78 Bank Map e In COMBI 0 Play program change and bank select messages are transmitted received on the global MIDI channel They are not received in COMBI 0 Ed Prog Mixer COMBI 9 Ed MasterFX K All program changes can be turned off in MIDI Filter GLOBAL 1 1b As needed you can independently turn all program changes on off specify whether or not incoming messages will be able to change combinations and turn reception transmis sion of bank select messages on off If Combi Combi Change GLOBAL 1 1b is unchecked the combination will not change even if a program change on the global MIDI channel is received in COMBI 0 Play In this case the program of the timbre that matches the MIDI channel of the received message will change If Bank Bank Change GLOBAL 1 1b is unchecked bank select messages will not be transmitted or received After touch Channel after touch Dn vv n channel vv value When you apply pressure to the keyboard after playing a note an after touch effect will be applied and Channel After Touch messages will be transmitted When these messages are received an after touch effect will be applied e After touch for the entire X50 microX can be turned off in AfterT After Touch GLOBA
167. 00 No Effect on off will produce the same result Off On D Separately from this setting you can use control change 92 to turn off insert effect A value of 0 will be off and a value of 1 127 will be the original setting This mes sage is received on the global MIDI channel specified by MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 12 Insert Effect 00 89 name Indicates the type of insert effect For Insert Effect you can select from 89 types of effect 01 St Amp Sim 89 Reverb Gate You can use the utility Select by Category 8 2c to select these effects by category Pan CC 8 Post IFX Pan CC 8 L000 C064 R127 Sets the pan after the sound has passed through the insert effect This setting is valid only when the BUS Select from the IFX output is set to L R rs p 99 D CC 8 will control the pan amount BUS Select L R 1 2 1 2 Off Specifies the bus to which the sound will be sent after pass ing through the insert effect Normally you will set this to L R If you wish to output to INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT set this to 1 2 or 1 2 The Off setting is used when you wish to use S1 Send1 MFEX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 and in addi tion connect to the master effects in series S1 Send1 MFX1 000 127 S2 Send2 MFX2 000 127 Sets the send levels to the master effects 1 and 2 for the sound that has passed through the insert effect These set tings are valid when BUS Select 8 1a has been
168. 06 mm Drum EG Decay Time Bn 63 17 Bn 62 kk Bn 06 mm Drum Coarse Tune Bn 63 18 Bn 62 kk Bn 06 mm Drum Fine Tune Bn 63 19 Bn 62 kk Bn 06 mm Bn 63 1A Bn 62 kk Bn 06 mm Bn 63 1C Bn 62 kk Bn 06 mm Bn 63 1D Bn 62 kk Bn 06 mm Bn 63 1E Bn 62 kk Bn 06 mm Hesonance EG Attack Time EG Decay Time Drum Volume Drum Pan Drum Rev Send Send2 Drum Cho Send Send1 kk Drum Inst No OC 6C corresponds to CO C8 J 00 01 7f corresponds to Random LOOO R127 About standard MIDI files Standard MIDI files SMF make it possible for different computer programs or musical instruments made by differ ent manufacturers to exchange time based MIDI data When playing back SMF data the program bank that is selected will depend on the Bank Map setting GLOBAL 0 2a If you are playing back SMF data that complies with the GM GS XG specifications set Bank Map to GM 179 Appendices 180 Various messages A Are you sure Meaning This message asks you to confirm execution To executepress the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CANCEL button C Can t calibrate Meaning Calibration could not be performed correctly Action Try again Completed Meaning Execution of the command ended normally M Memory protected Meaning The internal program combination multi set or drum kit is protected Action In Global mode tu
169. 1 or AMS2 Freq AMS2 of Freq Mod 3 3 2 LFO1 osc2 Lro1 This can be used when Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a is set to Double Here you can make settings for the OSC2 LFOI which is the first LFO that can be applied to oscillator 2 17 3 OSILFOI OSC1 LFO1 c 3 4 2 LFO2 osc2 Lro2 This can be used when Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a is set to Double Here you can make settings for the OSC2 LFO2 which is the second LFO that can be applied to oscil lator 2 3 1 OSILFO1 OSC1 LFO1 and 3 2 1 LFO2 OSC1 LFO2 15 16 PROG 4 Ed Filter1 Indicates settings for filter 1 which controls the tone of oscil lator 1 You can select either a 24 dB oct low pass filter with resonance or a 12 dB oct low pass filter and 12 dB oct high pass filter connected in series When Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a is Single Drums you can use filter 1 When it is Double you can use filters 1 and 2 In the case of Single and Drums the filter 2 pages cannot be selected 4 1 Basic Here you can specify the basic filter type used by oscillator 1 and set the cutoff frequency and resonance Frequency BB pacis TF eei Testa Tu CT SCS 4 la Filter1 Type Filter1 Type Low Pass Resonance Low Pass amp High Pass Indicates the type of filter 1 RA a SZ Trim 00 99 Adjusts the level at which the audio signal output from OSC1 is input to filter 1A Low Pass Resonance 24 dB oc
170. 1 2 00 89 name Rtn 1 2 Return 1 2 000 127 These are the same as in Program mode Refer to PROG 9 1 Setup However the master effects will be controlled on the MFX 1 2 Control Ch MIDI channel unlike in Program mode The control changes used are the same as in Program mode MFX 1 2 Control Ch Ch01 16 G ch HI Selects the MIDI channel that will control dynamic modulation Dmod for the master effects G ch The global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 1a will be used for control Normally you will set this parameter to G ch 9 1b MasterFX Chain MFX Chain Direction Chain Direction MFX1 gt MFX2 MFX2 5MFX1 Signal Chain Signal LR Mix L Only R Only Level Chain Level 000 127 These are the same as in Program mode PROG 9 1 Setup Off On 9 1c Master EQ Gain dB Low 18 0 18 0 Mid 18 0 18 0 High 18 0 18 0 These are the same as in Program mode PROG 9 1 Setup 9 1d MEQ Ctrl MEQ Ctrl MEQ Control Ch Ch01 16 G ch DI Selects the MIDI channel that will control dynamic modulation Dmod for the master EQ G ch The global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 1a will be used for control Normally you will set this parameter to G ch B 9 1 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 Select by Category PROG 9 1 Copy Master Effect rop 20 PROG 9 1 amp Note the MIDI control channel
171. 1 28 treier 87 Duni up 59 177 Dynamic modulation 29 31 42 51 52 72 73 74 97 100 157 158 166 171 174 175 E Effect control 173 EG ATD Mei 29 Filter rem T 19 Ee Eegeregie 12 Equal Temperament sx eese 6 External Control 5 37 59 93 External control set 5 37 59 External MIDI clock 152 159 160 F lu uu E E 16 ill r CO PTT 18 Filter LFO Modulation 18 Filter Modulation 17 18 Foot Pedal Assien u 2 a 165 Foot Switch Assign 164 Foot Switch Polanty u u aasan 80 Frequency Modulation 14 G Gain MEO e 30 102 149 Gate time 26 Global MIDI channel 21 28 29 30 31 35 36 40 41 52 53 74 75 81 82 84 158 166 169 170 171 173 174 177 Global Eegeregie 75 GM Initialize 57 GM System On message 179 po E E T u 78 179 H Half Damper Calibration 77 High pass filter 16 21 44 162 163 168 169 175 Insert Effect 28 36 50 51 72 158 173 DOU aient E 29 91 72 K ICY 87 S DOi ananas 26 37 48 90 Keyboard Track 17 22 152 154 155 156 157 Ses p atate beue 45 Key LransDOSE aeneis equeedb 75 BOW ZONG usa asasesniaaisakhussa 45 67
172. 1 set to 064 Send2 set to 127 a Combinations Send1 set to 064 and Send2 set to 127 the actual send levels of the combination are calculated as follows OSC1 Send1 127 100 064 50 064 50 OSC1 Send2 064 50 127 100 064 50 OSC2 Send1 064 50 064 50 032 25 OSC2 Send2 127 100 127 100 127 100 If IFX is selected for BUS Select use the S1 Send1 MFEX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 parameters for the post IFX signals If 1 2 or 1 2 is selected instead these settings are ignored and the Master Effect is not applied DI Send Level 1 responds to MIDI Control Change CC 93 and Send2 Level responds to MIDI Control Change CC 91 If Send1 MFX1 and Send2 MFX2 for each timbre track are effective the parameter will be con trolled on the MIDI channels set for the corresponding timbres and tracks If the Send1 MFX1 and Send2 MFX2 parameters for the post IFX signals are effective they can be controlled on the MIDI channels assigned to IFX The following screens are examples in Combination mode The BUS Select setting in screen shot 1 sends timbre 1 to IFX and the remaining timbres to L R In this case the send levels from timbre 1 to the master effects are set by S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 after the signal has passed through IFX 01 St Amp Simulation as shown in screen shot 2 In this example these are set to 032 and 127 respectively O
173. 10 00 10 This adjusts the level balance between oscillators 1 and 2 At the 00 setting the value of the program parameters will be unchanged Positive settings will lower the oscillator 2 level With an adjustment of 10 the oscillator 2 level will be 0 The oscillator 1 level will not change Negative settings will lower the oscillator 1 level With an adjustment of 10 the oscillator 1 level will be 0 The oscillator 2 level will not change A For programs whose Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a setting is Single oscillator 2 will not sound Only the level of oscillator 1 will change For a Drums program this performance editor will have no effect Level Amp Level 10 00 10 This adjusts the amp level With an adjustment of 00 the value of the program param eters will be unchanged Positive settings will increase the amp level above the value that was set With an adjustment of 10 the amp level will be 127 maxi mum Negative settings will lower the amp level below the value that was set With an adjustment of 10 the amp level will be 0 Attack Attack Time 10 00 10 This adjusts the attack times of the filter EG and amp EG With an adjustment of 00 the value of the program param eters will be unchanged Positive 4 settings will lengthen the attack times beyond the values that were set With an adjustment of 10 the attack times will be 90 Negativ
174. 127 For each key specify the send levels to master effects 1 and 2 These settings are valid when BUS Select 43a is set to L R or Off If BUS Select is set to IFX the send level to master effects 1 and 2 will be determined by the Program Combination or Multi mode Setup pages PROG COMBI 8 2 MULTI 8 3 S1 Send1 MFX1 S2 Send2 MFX2 which are located after the sound passes through IFX A Drum kits will sound using the settings of the program that is selected in Program mode These settings are valid only if Use DKit Setting PROG 6 1b 8 1b are checked Be aware that the results of editing a drum kit will not be reflected unless these settings have been made in the program B 4 3 UTILITY is Write Drum Kits Rename Drum Kit Copy Drum Kit Copy Key Setup 4 1 GLOBAL 5 Arp Pattern Here you can create user arpeggio patterns In this page the X50 microX will sound as it did in the mode you were in before entering Global mode If you entered the Global mode from Program mode Your editing will apply to the arpeggio pattern that is selected by the program Even if you moved from a program in which the arpeggiator is turned off it can be turned on by the ARP ON OFF button If you entered the Global mode from Combination mode Your editing will apply to the arpeggio pattern that is selected by the combination Even if you moved from a com bination in which the arpeggiator is turned off it
175. 2 to spec ify the function of a foot controller connected to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack will be received microX Specifies whether MIDI control change CC 2 the Y direction of the microX s joystick or a REALTIME CON TROLS B assign setting will be received E 3 5 6 UTILITY re Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 3 7 1 4 8 MIDI Filter2 2 T01 08 3 8 1 4 16 MIDI Filter2 2 T09 16 HULTI 3 HIDI Filteri Gita E Tou I ER a m Js PE erd as Als ALES LESE ae CENTS Cees ESI DER IER 3 7 8 a SX PBend as AMS Ribbon CC 16 JSX PBend as AMS Off On X50 Specifies whether MIDI pitch bend messages move ment of the X50 s Pitch wheel will apply the AMS te p 151 Alternate Modulation Source assigned to Pitch Bend This is not a filter for MIDI pitch bend messages microX This parameter specifies whether the effect of the AMS p 151 Alternate Modulation Source assigned to JS X will be received when MIDI pitch bend messages the X axis are received This is not a reception filter for MIDI pitch bend messages Ribbon CC 16 Off On MIDI control change message CC 16 REALTIME CON TROLS B assign or the assignment of a ribbon controller on a TRITON Extreme or other instrument connected to the MIDIIN connector will be received E 3 7 8 UTILITY Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 MULTI 4 MIDI Filter2 Specifies whether the A and B mode operations of REAL TIME CONTRO
176. 2 drums bank the variation bank 1 9 or drums bank d will be shown Choose this parameter and use one of the following meth ods to select a program X50 e Turn the VALUE dial e Use the INC DEC buttons Use the numeric buttons 0 9 to enter the program number and press the ENTER button to confirm Femme nam Taxe PowamSeed GOAesicPano UGXGTSTANDARDKR U U Mame wm wm S i ss Use Program s Scale Arpeggiator Assign Other Arpeggiator parameters Send1 MFX1 Send2 MFX2 L R 40 BUS Select Other Insert Effect parameters Other Master Effect and Master EQ parameters p ator Assi S PXindwOutBUSSeect Jm 68 N 4 dE IEN 2 lt s EE ss DE 2 The setting remains unchanged The setting remains unchanged The setting remains unchanged nn x 57 D MULTI 98 Press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight the field in the display use A Y to make your choice and press the center to confirm e Use PROG BANK A GM to select a bank rz p 1 Use Select by Category to choose from the desired category p 36 e Receiving a MIDI program change message can also be used to select a program r p 171 microX e Turn the VALUE dial Press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight the field in the display use A V to make your choice and press the center to confirm Use S
177. 240 EXT Specify the tempo of the arpeggiator This can also be adjusted by the REALTIME CONTROLS C mode TEMPO knob p 56 Tempo 0 1a 7 1 2 b Assign Assign Off A B This assigns arpeggiator A or arpeggiator B to each track 1 8 9 16 When the ARP ON OFF button is turned on the arpeggiator specified for each track will run subject to the Arpeggiator Run settings and setting here Off The arpeggiator will not operate A Arpeggiator A will operate Use the Arp A page to select the arpeggio pattern and set the parameters B Arpeggiator B will operate Use the Arp B page to select the arpeggio pattern and set the parameters If you wish to realtime record the arpeggio pattern into a pattern assign either arpeggiator A or B to the track DI If a track 1 16 to which arpeggiator A or B has been assigned is set to a track Status 2 1a 2a of INT or BTH the note data generated by the arpeggiator will sound the X50 microX without regard to the MIDI Channel 2 1a 2a setting of each track If the Status is BTH EXT or EX2 MIDI note data will be transmit ted on the MIDI Channel of each track At this time the arpeggiator can be triggered by the MIDI Channel of any track 1 16 assigned to arpeggiator A or B respectively A The X50 microX s arpeggiator can be controlled from an external sequencer and the note data generated by the arpeggiator can be recorded on an external sequencer
178. 3 500 20 00kHz G Gain Sets the gain of Band 4 18 18dB DLY T1 Tap1 Delay Sets the Tap1 delay time 0 680ms T2 Tap2 Delay Sets the Tap2 delay time 0 680ms T1 Level Tap1 Level Sets the Tap1 output level T2 Fb Tap2 Feedback Sets the Tap2 feedback amount Dly W D Delay Wet Dry Sets the multitap delay effect balance Dry 2 98 98 2 Wet 0 100 t Fx 43 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Dus Off Tempo HiDamp High Damp Sets the damping amount in the high range W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Source Sanne es modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Ge the alton amount of the effect balance B4 Band4 Cutoff a the center frequency for Band 4 Q Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 63 Comp Wah Compressor Wah Auto Wah This effect combines a mono type compressor and a wah You can change the order of the connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o ge Wet Dry Routing Compressor a Wah Auto Wah Output Level Righto U i gt 4 s Dry Envelope Control CMP Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity Attack 1 100 Sets the attack level t Fx 02 0 100 t Fx 02 0 100 Level Output Level Sets the compressor output level Pre EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain Sets the
179. 3 66 9 ug To ON PIIhg qq Seit ua yI o HLONWTI ALIOOTHA SIVO 340 NO dHV g8ST ON wezeg NdWuN ss ss 86 29 ug TO UOTSTeA eseeqouH II 93 q UIST 86 00422 ICIN d qouy S6 0 99 Tor UCD AA AA 99 99 ug 00 uorsz A IOUTW UU 93 q YIAZT 2 uO 3JO ZX4 493S W yaded G 40937374 LZT 00 4L 00l S6 4S bg TO uotszeq Zoe AA 3 q UAII o uO J33O TXA 493S N uad q p 329333 LZ1 00 4L 00l v6 HS bg 60 2 uu XOIoTU al PYD W rpues XAW gH qOUM TIPd V uaded 329333 AA AA 6 GG uq To wu DCH o uO 33O X4 I SUI uad q 329333 L T 00 4iL 00l z6 OS bg pop zequew rzeztseyqudAs orsny XOJ21U 0GSX uu eqhq ua36 si BUD W zpues XJW g qouyxX TDpbd V uadeq I 4093774 AA AA 16 8G uq qr zs zrs uqu s orsnw XOISTUu 0SX VL 934q uq e 8 00 ICIN d qouy 81432 esodandg TITAN AA AA 8 G ug dI oo zp 9a3 q u39 Si MS 3004 g qouy MS W LITIO esodang TITOW LZT 00 4L 00 28 ZS ug euueuo TeqoT5 6 ea Aq pag La aq aa uu AA oo uu oo YL zy Z0 90 0 H 04 o DON ZMS q qQOUM ZMS 91430 sodind TITOW LZT 00 3L 00l l I8 TS ug L1SunOsW eech AMINONI peAreoed ueu SJTUSULIL AIGHY AUTNONI SOIASG o Do IMS g qQOUM IMS ST43O2 esodang TIATOW LZT 00 3L 00l 08 OS ug GNILIVEY NON SHOVSSHW BAISNIOXY WALSAS IWSUHAINOA T P T D QUI 54 393TIT4 d qouy ve qouy OT I TTO7I7U09 punog AA AA 6L ap ug AAISAIOXY WHLSAS P L o Ata TOaT yO4t
180. 4 43 COMBI 4 Ed MIDI Filter2 44 4 1 MIDI 2 1 MIDI Filter 2 1 44 4 2 MIDI 2 2 MIDI Filter 2 2 44 X50 4 3 MIDI 2 3 MIDI Filter2 3 44 X50 4 4 MIDI 2 4 MIDI Filter 2 4 44 microX 4 3 MIDI 2 3 MIDI Filter2 3 44 COMBI 5 Ed Key Zone 45 SE TO RZ Oe rarer toO UIS 45 po DIODE REY SIOPE u u u saetussusuqssaqhasa 46 cc Mul 46 COMBI 6 Ed Vel Zone Velocity Zone 46 6 1 Vel Velocity Zoneb 46 6 2 Slope Velocity Ope E 47 ore ROVIO eR a tet eee 47 COMBI 7 Ed Arp Ctris Arpeggiator CONTOS EE 47 Eelere 47 TDi Arp A Arpepolalor E 48 k UP EE D ear 48 7 4 Zone Scan Zone 49 Eden 50 COMBI 8 Ed InsertFX 50 6 1 BU c 50 Eege ol 8 3 IFX Insert Effect 52 COMBI 9 Ed MasterFX 52 O6l 02 A 52 9 2 MFX1 Master Effect1 53 9 3 MFX2 Master Effect2 SS 9 4 MEQ Master EFO 53 3 Multi mode 55 MULTI PAGE MENU 99 MULTI 0 VV RL II E ek 0
181. 4 The functions you specify here will operate when you rotate the REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 in B mode Knob1 B Knob1 B Assign TET Off MIDI CC 95 Knob2 B Knob2 B Assign RES Off MIDI CC 95 Knob3 B Knob3 B Assign RES Off MIDI CC 95 Knob4 B Knob4 B Assign RES Off MIDI CC 95 X50 7 6b SW1 2 Assign Assigns functions to SW1 and SW2 p 161 SW1 SW2 Assign List Since the SW1 and SW2 function assignments of the pro gram assigned to each track are ignored when the program is used in a multi you must make new assignments here for the multi SW1 SW1 Assign RES Off Pitch Bend Lock SW1 Mode Toggle Momentary SW2 SW2 Assign MESS Off Pitch Bend Lock SW2 Mode Toggle Momentary s PROG 7 3b B 7 6 UTILITY is Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 71 MULTI 72 MULTI 8 InsertFX t For details on insert effects refer to p 97 6 Effect Guide 8 1 BUS 8 BUSTO1 08 8 2 BUS 16 BusrToo 16 Specifies the bus to which the program oscillator s of each track 1 8 9 16 will be sent You can also set the amount of signal that will be sent to the master effects MULTI Fi insertha BUS BUS Select E auta ion guita RJ auta Strin A LAR LAR L R LAR LER 8 1a 151 BB tS 15S 1T B57 51 113 5 1 12 7 5 1 85 4 5 1 060 52 1 275 Ls SIBb552 83952 115 52 843 52 8438 52 12T BbazH Standargd Kit 1 Status BTH Ch AiG pus s
182. 4 Rog ne osa 29 51275 55 101 TT eegene 1 5 185 Appendices 186 C ee 6 42 63 75 85 JXTODIC eege 6 dejo C i 85 Equal Temperament u 6 KIMPE eege 6 Ir 6 Pure Ee EE 6 Pure Minor 6 yi TOTIS e 6 CO EN 6 E EE 6 User All Notes Scale 85 User Octave Scale 85 User Scale ceterae otn trea 85 Werkmestster 6 Scan EEN 27 49 70 Select by Category 2 9 29 31 36 Gerd E 28 29 50 72 98 Send level 28 50 72 89 98 99 100 101 Setup PUPCE AOE soros 25 47 69 Insert Effect 29 51 72 Master Effect 30 52 73 SEn O einna 6 Slope TUNE ssn 20 23 Eege 23 Filetr EG 20 Solo function 34 Start Level 12 1923 AMD EG E 23 Filter EG sessies 19 Piem E Gecenin 12 Aa E EE 6 Sustain Level 19 23 AMD ol Gm 23 Filter E 19 owap SW a LPO TS ostende Pasa 15 Swap Master Effect 91 95 Swap Oscillator eege 7 System exclusive messa e 176 T TAP TEMDO 164 Tempo 3 15 25 26 34 47 49 56 69 90 Timbre Parameter 40 Time AMD Eege 23 Jill f 19 i LIT E 12 l o
183. 6 Effect Guide 8 1 BUS COMBI amp Ed InzertFz BUS BUS Select Koup Estrin El trum El orum A Fast 352u6 El 1 El stow LAR DES DES CAR CAR LAR LAB 8 1a SS AnS 1 127 5 1 0660 51 127 51 600 5 1 88 51 BB B 5 1 600 8 1a BUS Select Send1 MFX1 Send2 MFX2 Here you can specify the output bus for each timbre 1 8 You can also specify the send level to the master effects BUS Select DKit L R IFX 1 2 1 2 Off Specifies the output bus for the program oscillator of each timbre 1 8 The current setting status can be viewed in the 6 2c Routing Map DKit This can be selected only if the program for which set tings are being made is a drum program Mode Oscillator Mode Drums PROG 1 12 With a setting of DKit the BUS Select GLOBAL 4 3a setting made for each key of the drum kit will be used For example if you have made BUS Select settings for each key of a drum kit so that the Snare sounds are sent to IFX and the other sounds are sent to L R selecting Dkit will send the Snare sounds to IFX and the other sounds to L R If you want to re specify these routings use Utility DKit IFX Patch 8 1b A If this is set to 1 2 the programs of timbres 1 8 will be sent in stereo from INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1 2 If the pan of the program oscillator is controlled by MIDI con trol change 10 pan or AMS Alternate Modulation Source the sound will be output with the pan setting that is in effect at
184. 8 MULTI 7 Arp Ctrls Arpeggiator Controls 69 Z eto Setup T01 06 uu siku 69 Z 2 585 16 Setup IO09 16 u u a aasawa 69 Or ATP A Arpergiafor A k u u uuu 70 7 4 Arp B Arpeggiator B 70 7 5 Zone Scan Zone 70 7 0 EE 71 MULTI OI ge ke 8 1 BUS 8 BUS T01 05 uuuu aa aasawa 72 8 2 BUS 16 BUS T09 16 u a 72 O PN H 72 8 4 IFX Insert Pitect 73 MULTI 9 MasterFX e 73 Cl 73 9 2 MFX1 Master Effect 74 9 3 MFX2 Master Effect2 74 9 4 MEO Master EQ 74 4 Global mode 75 GLOBAL PAGEMENU 75 GLOBAL 0 System 75 la a s sss E 75 0 2 Pref System Preference 78 n H E 80 GLOBAL 2 User Scale 85 2I fas EE 85 2 2 All Not s Seen ere re gege 85 GLOBAL 3 Category Name 86 pete PL Eege 86 pd T 5 15 PEG odo saspe nem rte 86 3 3 C 0 7 Comb 00 7 u 86 3 4 C 8 15 Comb 08 15 86 GLOBAL 4 DKit Drum Kit 86 tk Eet erte yusayusa 86 4 2 Low LOW Sample
185. 9 2Voice Reso 2Voice Resonator 119 E Rer 120 SX Eis SI ToU E 121 Mod P ShITE uuu usasuakapasawayaa ataqu aaa L2 2 32 St Tremolo Stereo Tremolo 122 33 St Env Tremlo Stereo Envelope Tremolo 122 34 St Auto Pan Stereo Auto Pan 125 35 St Phasr Trml Stereo Phaser Tremolo 123 36 St Ring Mod Stereo Ring Modulator 124 Yee Dia abi gegen eee ree ene ere een een rete eee 125 38 Pitch BE E 125 39 PitchShft Mod Pitch Shift Modulation 126 40 Rotary SP Rotary Speaker 126 ER DELAY vssszccoimondoenamnon ke e 41 Early Reflect Early Reflections 127 42 Auto Reverse ene 128 43 LCR Delay L C R Delay 128 44 St Cross Div Stereo Cross Delay 129 45 St MltTap Dly Stereo Multitap Delay 129 46 St Mod Delay Stereo Modulation Delay 130 47 St DynamicDly Stereo Dy manic Delay E 130 48 St AutoPanDly Stereo Auto Panning Delay 191 49 LCR BPM Delay L C R BPM Delay 131 50 St BPM Delay Stereo BPM Delay 132 51 Sequence Diy Sequence Delay ssis 152 Reverb EENG LOD 52 Rev Hall Reverb Hlall 133 53 Rev Smth Hall Reverb Smooth Hall 133 54 Rev Wet
186. A 8S1 enteA Teuueyo TIeqoI5 Teuueyo Auy Teuueyd TeqoT9 4 0 TeuueYD Teuueyg Auy AL Teuueuo Teqo to 4 0 Tag dL dL 00 00 AA um uu e Aq ua AA 2a hq 439 6 aqkq puc L wusana zo po BO AL OA ooueTeg I SLeN uu e34q ua 2a hq u39 6 e3Aq pac L4 uu AA T10 v0 b0 a3L 03 SunTOA Zoe pk HNILIVEY SHOVSSHN HAISQTIOX WHLSAS TIVSUHAINN 7 7 2 uu eqdq pre La TO 60 UU aL 03 epou TITAN ur UeUuM eatesey uo weqsds WO uu ao pag L3 t0 90 uu 3 03 A1dHH uge AMTNONI Siiusuez3 ebesseu s y peAreoez ueuM AHTD NI SOIASG WHNILIVHH NON SHOVSSSN AAISNIOXA NWHISAS IVSHHAINDQ I v Z AAISNIOXY WHLSAS p Z yOOTO Teuzeyxe Aq butjezedo st uojs s uouM 9SAI9SO9M Gx xo9euo 32euuo IGIW Hbutsues eat IOV ad Gy IToz3uoo zaoaerbbeday dois od Gx Tozq3uoo AZO VeTHhhedazy nur3uoo qa Gx ITOoz3uoo zaoa3erb6beday qzeas Wa Gx 938 Doud x 9 SWV odu rL xoorto bututL 84 eee 103 esp uora driaoseq xeg snaeas S459VSSHW HWIIIVHH WHLSAS Z pou TATNW ur UeuM 3oe es buos Ar o su ON LZI 0 TATUN SS qoeTes uos ss ss L Qu 103 esf H I X H a a puooeg snaeasg H uoradraoseq reuroeq q xeH H T T T T SHOVSSHN NOWNOO WHLISAS Z Z 183 184 Index Num
187. AMS SW Start A AMS SW Attack and B AMS SW Break to and set I AMS Intensity to a posi tive 4 value the EG levels will rise as you play more strongly If Intensity is set to a negative values the EG levels will fall as you play more strongly S AMS SW Start 0 Specifies the direction in which AMS Level Mod AMS will affect S Start Level When I AMS Intensity has a positive value a setting of for this parameter will allow AMS to raise the EG level and a setting of will allow AMS to lower the EG level With a setting of 0 there will be no change A AMS SW Attack 0 Specifies the direction in which AMS Level Mod AMS will affect A Attack Level When I AMS Intensity has a positive value a setting of for this parameter will allow AMS to raise the EG level and a setting of will allow AMS to lower the EG level With a setting of 0 there will be no change B AMS SW Break 0 Specifies the direction in which AMS Level Mod AMS will affect B Break Point Level When I AMS Inten sity has a positive value a setting of for this parame ter will allow AMS to raise the EG level and a setting of will allow AMS to lower the EG level With a setting of 0 there will be no change Filter 1 EG changes level AMS Velocity Intensity a positive value
188. Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Sw This parameter sets how the modulation source switches between rotation and stop When Sw Tggl Toggle the speaker rotates or stops alter nately each time you press the pedal MIDI Each time the value for the modulation source exceeds 64 the speaker rotates or stops alternately When Sw Mmnt Moment the speaker is rotating It stops only when you press the pedal MIDI Rotation will occur when the value of the modulation source is less than 64 and will stop when the value is 64 or greater b Sw This parameter sets how the rotation speed slow and fast is switched via the modulation source When Sw Tggl Toggle the speed is switched between slow and fast each time you press the pedal MIDI Slow fast will alternate each time the value of the modula tion source exceeds 64 When Sw Mmnt Moment the speed is usually slow It becomes fast only when you press the pedal When a value for the modulation source is less than 64 slow speed is selected and when the value is 64 or higher fast is selected c ManuSp If you wish to control the speaker rotation speed manually not switching between Slow and Fast select the modulation source in the ManuSp field If manual control is not necessary set this field to Off d Horn Accel e Rotor Accel On a real rotary speaker the r
189. Amp1 Pan Random L001 C064 R127 Sets the pan stereo location of oscillator 1 A setting of L001 places the sound at far left C064 in the center and R127 to far right Random The sound will be heard from a different location at each note on DI This can be controlled by CC 10 panpot A CC 10 value of 0 or 1 will place the sound at the far left a value of 64 will place the sound at the location specified by the Pan setting for each oscillator and a value of 127 will place the sound at the far right This is con trolled on the global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 12 Use DKit Setting Off On This is valid when Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a is set to Drums On checked The sound will be output at the Pan setting that has been made for each key of the drum kit GLOBAL 4 3a When Mode Oscillator Mode is Drums you will normally use this setting Off unchecked All notes will be output as specified by the Pan Amp Pan setting 21 22 6 1c AMS Intensity AMS Pan AMS Off PEG FEG AEG LFO KT EXT Indicates the source that will modify pan p 152 AMS List This change will be relative to the Pan Ampl Pan setting Intensity 99 99 Specifies the depth of the effect produced by AMS Pan AMS For example if Pan Amp1 Pan is set to C064 and AMS Pan AMS is Note Number positive values of this parameter will cause t
190. Both EGs The amp 1 EG and the amp 2 EG can be edited simulta neously Editing either one will cause the other to change Choose Sync Both EGs from the utility menu and press the center of the ClickPoint a check mark will appear at the left of Sync Both EGs 4 5 UTILITY W 6 4 Lvl Pan Amp2 Level Pan 6 5 Mod Amp2 Modulation 6 6 EG Amp2 EG S These will appear when Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a is Double PROG 6 Ed Amp1 2 PROG 7 Ed Arp Ctris Arpeggiator Controls Here you can make settings for the arpeggiator used in the program You can also assign the functions of the following control lers X50 The B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs and the functions of SW1 and SW2 microX The B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs These arpeggiator settings can be linked when you switch programs To link check the Program item in Auto Arp Program GLOBAL 0 16 On The arpeggiator can be switched on off by the ARP ON OFF button When on the LED will light The settings of the REALTIME CONTROLS C mode ARP GATE knob ARP VELOCITY knob ARP LENGTH knob TEMPO knob and ARP ON OFF button can be saved for each program A These settings will be valid when Auto Arp Program is On D You can control the arpeggiator from an external sequencer or record arpeggio note data on an external sequencer p 178 note Pattern Resolution
191. Ctrls X50 You can tap the ENTER button several times to set the tempo to the corresponding interval Alternatively if you set the GLOBAL 0 3 Foot page Foot SW Assign parameter to Tap Tempo you can specify the tempo by tap ping your foot on a pedal switch connected to the ASSIGN ABLE SWITCH jack microX If you set the GLOBAL 0 3 Foot page Foot SW Assign parameter to Tap Tempo you can specify the tempo by tapping your foot on a pedal switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack 0 1b Program Information X50 This area shows the functions that are assigned to the assignable switches SW1 and SW2 and to the REALTIME CONTROLS B mode ASSIGNABLE 1 ASSIGNABLE 4 knobs of the selected program microX This area shows the functions that are assigned to the REALTIME CONTROLS B mode ASSIGNABLE 1 ASSIGNABLE 4 knobs B 0 1 UTILITY Write Program Select by Category Use the following procedure to select the desired utility D Press the UTILITY button to access the utility menu 2 Use the ClickPoint to select the utility that you want to execute 3 Press the center of the ClickPoint to access the dialog box X50 Utilities up to number 10 can also be selected by hold ing down the ENTER button and pressing the correspond ing numeric button 0 9 to access the dialog box Write Program If you wish to save a program be sure to write it into the memory of the X50 microX An edi
192. Direction MFX1 gt MFX2 MFX2 5MFX1 Signal Chain Signal LR Mix L Only R Only Level Chain Level 000 127 This is the same as in Program mode Refer to PROG 9 1 Setup Off On 9 1c Master EQ Gain dB Low 18 0 18 0 Mid 18 0 18 0 High 18 0 18 0 This is the same as in Program mode PROG 9 1 Setup MULTI 73 9 1d MEQ Ctrl MEQ Ctrl MEQ Control Ch Ch01 16 G ch D Specifies the MIDI channel that will control dynamic modulation Dmod for the master EQ G ch The effect will be controlled on the global MIDI chan nel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 12 E 9 1 UTILITY is Write Multi 0 1 Select by Category PROG 9 1 Copy Master Effect p 30 PROG 9 1 A Note the MIDI control channel specified in Control Channel of the MFX 1 and 2 pages will not be copied Swap Master Effect p 31 PROG 9 1 amp Note the MIDI control channel specified in Control Channel of the MFX 1 and 2 pages will not be swapped 9 2 MFX1 Master Effect1 9 3 MFX2 Master Effect2 Here you can set the parameters of the Master Effect1 and Master Effect2 effects that were selected in the Setup page resp IO A MULTI 9 MasterFs __ HFZ1 STI Ehorus LF Wane Triangle L Dlu 25 8mz ROW Z0 pm LF Phase 1 158 deg Depth dp Gatel 8 Freq 1 88H2 G2t Omp 8 88 Pre EG Trim 1848 BPM MIO Sync Off BPM 128 L0EG 68 60B HIER 3 BdB Fate J Times 1 WO 56 56
193. Ed LFOs OSC1 2 LFO1 page CC 77 LFO1 depth pitch LFO1 intensity Corresponds to Pitch LFO1 Intensity PROG 2 Ed Pitch OSCILFO page CC 78 LFO1 delay Corresponds to LFO1 Delay PROG 3 Ed LFOs OSC1 2 LFO1 page CC 79 Filter EG intensity Corresponds to Filter EG Intensity to A B PROG 4 5 Ed Filter1 2 Mod 1 page 169 Appendices 5 Controlled on the global MIDI channel 6 NRPN Non Registered Parameter Number and Data Entry can be used to control the following parameters Arpeggiator on off Bn 63 00 Bn 62 02 Bn 06 nn nn 00 3F off 40 7F on Arpeggiator gate control Bn 63 00 Bn 62 0A Bn 06 nn nn 00 7F Arpeggiator velocity control Bn 63 00 Bn 62 0B Bn 06 nn nn 00 7F 170 MIDI applications ll Messages transmitted and received by this instrument indicates hexadecimal notation MIDI channels MIDI messages can be exchanged when the transmitting and receiving devices are set to the same MIDI channel MIDI uses sixteen channels numbered 1 16 The way in which channels are handled will differ depending on the mode Program mode e Transmission reception is performed on the global MIDI channel The global MIDI channel is the basic channel that this instrument uses for MIDI transmission reception and is set by MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 13 Combination mode e The global MIDI channel is used to transmit receive messages for selecting a combination an
194. FO Step Tri Random oe LFO Wave LFO Waveform Selects LFO Waveform LFO Phase 180 180deg Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right ua 0 02 20 00Hz Step Tri Random IS Freq LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed is Dae Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source used for both LFO speed and step speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed Step LFO Step Frequency 0 05 50 00Hz Sets the LFO step speed speed that changes in steps D ms Amount 50 00 50 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO step speed Manual 0 100 Sets the filter center frequency Resonance 0 100 Sets the resonance amount BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes t Fx 09 yer BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo i Ex 09 ee Base Base Note Vide Ds eid Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed r Fx 09 Times X1 at Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed ix Ex 09 StepBase Step Base Note A Js Ji Js D J3 J J3 J 5 Selects the type of notes to specify the LFO step speed s QZ Times x1 x32 Sets the number of notes to specify the LFO step speed par Depth 0 100 Sets the modulation depth of filter center frequency Diniz Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of filter modula tion Amount 100 100 Sets th
195. FO Waveform Selects the EC waveform of the chorus flanger h Out When Wet Inv is selected the right channel phase of the chorus flanger effect sound is inverted This creates pseudo stereo effects and adds spread However if a mono input type effect is connected after this effect the left and right sounds may cancel each other eliminating the chorus flanger effects 61 PAEQ Phaser Parametric 4 Band EQ Phaser This effect combines a mono type four band parametric equalizer and a phaser Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Z Wet Dry I A Output Mode Resonance l Wet Invert Phaser Wet Dry LFO Tri Sine D Trim B the parametric EQ input level Band1 Cutoff SCH the center Se SE of Band 1 0 100 20 1 00kHz eee E the bandwidth of Band 1 GE ee G ESSE 18 418dB GE ee G ESSE e gain of Band 1 B2 Band2 Cutoff Sd the center frequency of Band 2 Q Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 2 B3 Band3 Cutoff Sets the center frequency for Band 3 Q Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 3 B4 Band4 Cutoff Sets the center frequency for Band 4 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 4 50 5 00kHz 18 18dB 300 10 00kHz 18 18dB 500 20 00kHz PHS LFO LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform of the phaser F LFO Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz Sets th
196. Freq LFO Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed r gt Fx 09 Dime Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 09 eye BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo ix Fx 09 Base Base Note A 45 D 35 J 45 J Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed r Fx 09 Times 1 16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed r Fx 09 Diy Delay Time 0 0 50 0ms Sets the delay time from the original sound Hi Lo Split High Low Split Point 1 100 Sets the frequency split point between the high and low range Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation D s Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the LFO modulation depth Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth Feedback 100 100 Sets the feed back amount of the chorus block S HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the high range damping amount of the chorus block Lo Level Low Level 0 100 Sets the low range output level Hi Level High Level 0 100 Sets the high range chorus output level W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D s Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount
197. H MIDI control change CC 05 Portamento Time and CC 65 Portamento Switch can be received to con trol this and change the setting If the setting is PRG CC 05 Portamento Time will not be received When you adjust these values the settings will be transmitted via MIDI for tracks whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 If Multi Mode GLOBAL 0 2a is set to for Master these settings will be transmitted via MIDI when you switch the multi set number If this is Off CC 65 with a value of 0 will be transmitted If this is 001 127 a CC 65 of 127 and CC 05 of 001 127 will be transmitted If this is set to PRG nothing will be transmitted This data is transmitted on the MIDI channel specified for each track by MIDI Channel 2 1a 2a E 2 3 4 UTILITY is Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 2 5 Ptch 8 Pitch T01 08 2 6 Ptch 16 Pitch To9 16 Here you can make pitch related settings for each track Byoup BE quita Ed sow Ef cuita Rl cuit I tnn BE pp 08 EHH THR op HDD HIBBB 10000 R BDBBD 10000 R BBBB Sp tH tH D t62 14072 Ta BnzB Standard kit 1 i2 TIL 36 Loc 2 Tog 36 Tl teh IFteh Tel pothr 2 othr 36 2 5 6 a Transpose Detune Bend Range Transpose 24 24 Adjusts the pitch of each track in semitone steps 12 steps are one octave Detune BPM Adj 1200 1200 Adjusts the pitch of each track in one cent steps from the normal pitch 0 Normal pitch
198. High is set to 62 the angle of the change in cutoff frequency will correspond to the key location pitch This means that the oscillation that occurs when you increase the Resonance A Resonance 4 1b will correspond to the keyboard location If you set Low KBDTrk Ramp Low to 43 and High KBDTrk Ramp High to 43 the cutoff frequency will not be affected by keyboard location Use this setting when you do not want the cutoff frequency to change for each note How cutoff frequency is affected by keyboard location and the Ramp setting Int to A Int to B 50 Cutoff frequency High Ramp 99 High Ramp 62 High Ramp 0 High Ramp 43 Low Ramp 99 Low Ramp 43 High Ramp 99 Low Ramp 0 Low Ramp 62 Key Low Key High Key Low Ramp 99 Int to A KBDTrk Int to A 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect on filter 1A produced by keyboard tracking settings Low KBD Drk Key Low High KBDTrk Key High Low KBDTrk Ramp Low and High KBDTrk Ramp High With positive settings the effect will be in the same direction as the keyboard tracking settings With negative settings the effect will be in the opposite direction Int to B KBDTrk Int to B 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect on filter 1B produced by keyboard tracking r Int to A KBDTrk Int to A 4 2b Filter EG Int to A Intensity to A 99 99 Speci
199. IDI exclusive messages 2 Select GLOBAL 1 MIDI In the Utility menu select the data that you wish to dump Shown below the Dump Program screen If you wish to dump all program data set Program to All If you wish to dump data for an individual bank set Program to Bank and specify the bank number below it If you wish to dump data for an individual program set Program to Single and specify the program num ber below it Dump Program Program BERA hii s ABBE Partamento Pad To MIDI OUT 4 Use the To field to specify the output destination of the data Choose MIDI OUT if you want to send the data from the MIDI OUT connector Choose USB if you want to send the data from the USB connector Press the MENU OK button to transmit the data While the data is being transmitted the display will indi cate Now transmitting data The data size and the time required for transmission will depend on the type of data For the size and the time required to dump each type of data refer to the table below Program All Combinaion Single os o 83 G microX Ext Control Setup All microX Ext Control Setup Single Global Setting a All amp When you save data dumps from this instrument to a MIDI data filer do not save multiple data dumps together If this data is saved together there will be insufficient time for this instrument to write each received por
200. ILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 2 3 Pitch Here you can make pitch related settings for each timbre Drum Elrazt ElF2ub Ed cres Dlzieu l HHO 80 AG 00 eo 2 3a 8888 0008 48000 i 1288 140808 i anao 0008 i 8000 PRG PRG PPG PPG PRG PRG FRG PRG 2 3a Transpose Detune Bend Range Transpose 24 24 Adjusts the pitch of each timbre in semitone steps 12 units equal one octave DI When Status 2 1a is INT this parameter will affect the pitches sounded by the X50 microX When Status is EXT this parameter will affect the note numbers of the MIDI note messages that are transmitted For example if you make settings of 04 and 07 respectively for two timbres that are set to EXT playing the C key will transmit a C note number on the global MIDI channel and at the same time will also transmit E and G note numbers on the MIDI channels of those tim bres Detune BPM Adj 1200 1200 Adjusts the pitch of each timbre in one cent units 0 Normal pitch note You can also use the Utility Detune BPM Adj 2 3b page menu command to automatically make a detune setting from a calculation in BPM units M Transpose and Detune can be controlled via MIDI RPN messages Depending on the Mode Oscillator Mode PROG 1 1a settings of the programs used by timbres 1 8 they can be controlled as follows When Mode Oscillator Mode is Single
201. INDI VIDUAL OUTPUT 1 2 When the oscillator pan is controlled by CC 10 pan or AMS Alternate Modula tion Source the sound will be output with the pan set ting that is in effect at note on Unlike the case when this is set to L R to output the sound from MAIN OUT PUT L MONO and R the pan of a sounding note will not change in real time If you wish to adjust the pan in real time while playing a note and output the sound from INDIVIDUAL OUT PUT 1 2 set BUS Select to IFX set IFX to 00 No Effect and set the BUS Select 8 2a after passing through IFX to 1 2 MFX Send OSC1 Send1 000 127 Sets the volume send level at which the output of OSC1 will be sent to master effect 1 This is valid when BUS Select is set to L R or Off If BUS Select is set to IFX the send levels to master effect 1 and 2 are set by S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 82a after passing through IFX of the Setup page OSC1 Send2 000 127 Sets the volume send level at which the output of OSCI will be sent to master effect 2 es OSC1 Send1 OSC2 Send1 000 127 OSC2 Send2 000 127 Sets the volume send level at which the output of OSC2 will be sent to master effects 1 and 2 These parameters will be valid when Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a is set to Double and BUS Select is set to L R or Off r OSC1 Send1 MIDI CC 93 will control the Send 1 level for OSC 1 and 2 and control change
202. IVID UAL OUTPUT You can route the oscillator Program timbre Combina tion and track Multi output or the post IFX signals to these two individual outputs Use BUS Select 8 1a in Program Combination or Multi mode to route the oscillators Program timbres Combina tion or tracks Multi to INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT If you are using the Insert Effects use BUS Select of the 8 Ed InsertFX or InsertFX and Setup page to route the post IFX signals 1 2 Monaural signals are routed to INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1 2 Stereo signals are routed to INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT PROG 8 Insert Effect _ nv M PROG 9 Master Effect IFX Indiv Out BUS Select Oscillator 1 Oscillator 2 Select from L R IFX Post IFX 1 2 stereo Off e O mono x 2 Combination Multi mode Effect Mixer Block Diagram in Combination Multi Mode Insert Effect Pan CC 8 BUS Select BUS Select LR Select from L R BUS Send1 Send2 Post IFX Send1 2 MAIN OUTPUT MONO R Chain Master Effects Return 2 MFX1 e stereo MFX2 stereo mono x2 INDIVIDUAL UTPUT 1 2 COMBI MULTI 8 Insert Effect IFX Indiv Out Pan BUS Select BUS Select L R BUS Select IFX Timbre Track 3 BYS Select yo Timbre Track 4 Pu Select BUS Select 21 2 Timbre Track 1 G Timbre Track 2 1 Select from DKIT IFX 1 2 1
203. J Js J SE ee w niea ely s m 23 prez Selects the type of notes to specify the LFO step speed di ALMA r Fx10 eye j Source Off Tempo Times 1 32 Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Sets the number of notes to specify the LFO step speed i Fx 10 Amount 100 100 Resonanc Resonance 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance Sets the resonance amount r gt Fx 23 HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the resonance damping amount in the high range i Fx 23 W D Wet Dly Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds i Ex 10 23 Dine Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 117 EFFECT 118 26 St BiphaseMod Stereo Biphase Modulation This stereo chorus effect adds two different LFOs together You can set the Frequency and Depth parameters for each LFO individually Depending on the setting of these LFOs very complex waveforms will create an analog type unstable modulated sound Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Right E e p Wet Dry 180 degree LFO1 Tri Sine 342 LFO2 Tri Sine 17 LFO1 Wave LFO1 Waveform Selects LFO1 waveform LFO2 Wave LFO2 Waveform Selects LFO2 waveform LFO Phase Sw 0 180degree Switches the LFO phase difference between left and right F1 LFO1 Fre
204. L 1 1b e n Combination and Multi modes after touch can be switched on off independently for each timbre track v p 42 64 After Touch COMBI MULTI 3 1 2 a Polyphonic key pressure An kk vv n channel kk note number vv value There is another type of after touch called Polyphonic Key Pressure which allows after touch to be applied indepen dently for individual keys You can use this message as an Alternate Modulation Source but it is not transmitted from the keyboard of the X50 microX the same is true for Chan nel Aftertouch In order to use this message it must be received from an external device The after touch mentioned in this manual refers to Channel After Touch Pitch bender Pitch bend change En bb mm n channel bb lower byte of the value mm upper byte of the value together expressing a value of 16 384 steps where 8 192 bb mm 00H 40H is the center value X50 When you move the X50 s PITCH wheel in the up direction pitch bend will be applied and pitch bend change messages will also be transmitted If these messages are received pitch bend will be applied microX When this instrument s joystick is moved in the X axis left right a pitch bend effect will be applied and pitch bender messages will also be transmitted When these messages are received a pitch bend effect will be applied IE The range of pitch change that is produced by pitch bend messages can also be adjus
205. LS knobs 1 4 will be received MIDI con trol messages are fixed as the A mode operation of each knob In B mode the knobs correspond to the messages you assign in the 7 Arp Ctrls Controls page X50 Specifies whether the effects of SW1 and SW2 will be received The assignable switches SW1 and SW2 corre spond to the messages that are assigned to the 7 Arp Ctrls Controls page 4 1 M2 1 8 MIDI Filter2 1701 08 4 2 2 1 16 MIDI Filter2 1T09 16 MULTI 4 MIDI Filters S Elan x ane T nobi ag nuit AO 4 1 2 a Realtime Control Knob 1 22 Knob1 Off On Specifies whether or not the A mode 1 knob MIDI control change message 74 low pass filter cutoff frequency and the B mode 1 knob MIDI control change message will be received Knob2 Off On Specifies whether or not the A mode 2 knob MIDI control change message 71 low pass filter resonance or high pass filter cutoff frequency and the B mode 2 knob MIDI con trol change message will be received B 4 1 2 UTILITY Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 65 MULTI 66 4 3 2 2 8 MIDI Filter2 2 701 08 4 4 2 2 16 MIDI Filter2 2 T09 16 2 Knobs Gita uitu sinn MULTI 4 HIDI Filter Guitd Elan SE el Ee DEE e Ee e EE EE 4 3 4 a Realtime Control Knob3 4 Knob3 Off On Specifies whether or not the A mode 3 knob MIDI control change message 79 filter EG intensity and the B mode 3
206. MEWS te J setup Jp FE 8 1 2 a BUS Select Send 1 MFX1 Send2 MFX2 BUS Select DKit L R IFX 1 2 1 2 Off Specifies the output bus for the program oscillators of tracks 1 8 and 9 16 The state of the settings can be viewed in the Setup page t COMBI 8 1a S1 Send1 MFX1 000 127 S2 Send2 MFX2 000 127 Here you can adjust the send levels from tracks 1 8 9 16 to master effects 1 and 2 This is valid when BUS Select is set either to L R or Off If IFX is selected the send level to the master effects 1 and 2 is set by the S1 Send1 MFX1 and 52 Send2 MFX2 parameters located in the Setup page after the signal passes through IFX These settings have no effect if BUS Select is set to 1 2 or 1 2 MIDI If Status 2 1 2 a is either INT or BTH CC 93 and 91 can be received to control send 1 and 2 respectively and change their settings If Multi Mode GLOBAL 0 2a is set to for Master and you switch the multi set number these settings will be transmitted via MIDI for tracks whose Status is EXT EX2 or BTH The set tings are transmitted and received on the MIDI channel specified for each track by the MIDI Channel 2 1a 2a setting The actual send level is determined by sum ming the value of these parameters with the send level settings of the oscillator s of the program used by the track S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 PROG 8 22 E 8 1 2 UTILITY
207. O1 or LFO2 Intensity to a negative value for Pitch Filter or Amp you can invert the LFO waveform OSCI LF l uavetrorm B 3 1 UTILITY Utilty menu command name re Write Program 0 1 For details on how to to PROG 0 1 UT Swap LFO 1 amp 2 This exchanges the settings of LFO 1 and 2 If LFO2 is selected in AMS1 Freq AMS1 or AMS2 Freq AMS2 of LFO1 Freq Mod 3 1b then these settings will be invalid for LFO2 after LFO1 and 2 have been exchanged If you select this from the OSC1 LFO1 or OSC1 LFO2 page LFO1 and LFO2 of OSC1 will be exchanged CD Select Swap LFO 1 amp 2 to access the dialog box dlect the desired utility function refer E Y JH Triangle 0 Random6 Vect Range of possible parameter values Table of Contents 1 Program mode 1 PROG PAGE MENU 1 PROG 0 Play 1 Eeer 1 0 2 P Edit Performance Editor 3 USE ATP CAEDIS EE 9 microX 0 4 Ext Control 5 PROG 1 Ed Basic 6 1 1 Basic Prog Basic 6 ES E 7 9 OT E E TETT 9 1 4 V Zone Velocity Zoneb 9 T ACL ORI seee 9 PROG 2 Ed PItCh LO 2 1 BUT ME 10 2 2 OS1lfo OSC LEO 11 2 3 OS OP 12
208. Porta Time 000 127 This parameter is available when Enable Porta Enable is checked This sets the portamento time Increasing the value will pro duce a slower change in pitch B 2 1 UTILITY i Write Program 0 1 Copy Oscillator Swap Oscilla tor 1 1 2 2 QOS1Ifo osciLro Specifies the amount of pitch change produced by LFO1 and LFO2 for oscillator 1 X50 PROG Z Ed FPitch OSCI LF LrF 1 Intensity Pitch LEOIZA Hodulation AMS MIDI AtterT und Hod Wh Int rB d8 i Intenzitu 10018 LFO Intensity 06 65 AMS MIDI AtterT Hod Mhl Int App Dp Intensity App dn AMS MIDI AtterT ntensitu App 18 Mamanmanmusnuusnuunuunuuuunueuunansansansennsennsensensuseuasnuannannensenso ILL J5 4 Int 58 48 LF z Intensity 00 05 JE Iht 58 58 Loser Mosito osc Moseo EG J AMS MIDI AtterT ntensitu rmn 2 2a Pitch LFO1 2 Modulation LFO1 Intensity LFO1 Intensity 12 00 12 00 Specifies the depth and direction of the pitch modulation applied by the OSC 1 LFOI settings you made in OSILFOT page 3 1 With a setting of 12 00 a maximum of 1 octave of pitch modulation will be applied Negative values will invert the LFO waveform X50 Mod Whl Int LFO1 Mod Whl Int 12 00 12 00 Specifies the depth of pitch modulation that will be applied by OSC1 LFO1 when you move the MOD up As you specify a higher value for this parameter
209. Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 r Fx 06 G Gain 18 418dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 M2 Mid2 Cutoff 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 r Fx 06 G Gain 18 18dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 AMP Amplifier Type Selects the type of guitar amplifier 18 18dB SS EL84 6L6 Routing OD AMP AMP gt OD Switches the order of the overdrive and amp simulation connection W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dese Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 80 OD HG Cho Fl Overdrive Hi Gain Chorus Flanger This effect combines a mono type overdrive high gain dis tortion and a chorus flanger You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Ao Wet Dry Routing Chorus Flanger Overdrive Hi Gain 3Band PEQ E 2 Chorus Flanger V lt f Noma Output Level Ss 9 9 Output Mode OF Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Feedback Wet Invert Drive Cho Fing Wet Dry Wet Dry LFO Tri Sine OD Mode Drive Mode Switches between overdrive and high gain distortion OverD Hi Gain Level Output Level Sets the overdrive output leve
210. QS BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo w Ex 09 Base Base Note 35 45 45 4554 455 d a Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed i Fx 09 Times 1 16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed ix Fx 09 Resonance 0 100 Sets the Level of resonance of the voice pattern ua W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D s Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance d Top d Center d Bottom These parameters assign vowels to the top center and bottom position of the controller Example Suppose that Top is set to A Center to I and Bot tom to U If Sweep Mode is set to Dmod and Control Src to PBEND microX JSX moving the PITCH wheel from the lowest down position to the highest up position microX moving the joystick from the right edge toward the left edge will change the vocal character through the range aah iih and uuh If Sweep Mode is set to LFO the sound will change cyclically MI 448 I dd I dd vt from a to i u L then a Talking Modulator Control Voice Bottom A i PBEND mode JS X Dz Rbn 16 Max M WhlH JS Y 1 JS Y 2 etc e Formant Shift This parameter adjusts the frequency level to which the effect is applied I
211. R 0 570ms Sets the Tap2 stereo image 0 570ms 0 P Pan L6 L1 C R1 R6 Sets the Tap3 stereo image T4 270 Tap4 Delay Sets the Tap4 LFO phase 270 degrees delay time D Depth 30 Sets the Tap4 chorus depth L Level 0 30 Sets the Tap4 output level 6 P Pan L6 L1 C R1 R Sets the Tap4 stereo image 0 570ms T1 Fb Tap1 Feedback 100 100 Sets the Tap1 feedback amount D s Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of Tap1 feedback amount and effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the Tap1 feedback amount and modulation amount W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D zs Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance T3 090 Tap3 Delay Sets the Tap3 LFO phase 90 degrees delay time D Depth 30 Sets the Tap3 chorus depth L Level 0 3 Sets the Tap3 output level 19 Ensemble This Ensemble effect has three chorus blocks that use LFO to create subtle shimmering and gives three dimensional depth and spread to the sound because the signal is output from the left right and center Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Ensemble Wet Dry 1 100 Sets the LFO speed Drez Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed 0 100 D z Source Off T
212. R Fb R Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount for the right channel Dyer Amount R 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the right channel feedback 100 100 0 100 t Fx 43 0 100 t Fx 43 100 100 r gt Fx 37 Drez Off Tempo w Fx 37 HiDamp High Damp Sets the damping amount in the high range LoDamp Low Damp Sets the damping amount in the low range InLvi Mod Input Level Dmod Sets the modulation amount of the input level Src Source Selects the modulation source for the input level Spread 50 50 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound ix Ex 43 W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D zs Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 45 St MIitTap Div Stereo Multitap Delay The left and right Multitap Delays have two taps respectively Changing the routing of feedback and tap output allows you to create various patterns of complex effect sounds Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Wet Dry Tap1 1 Tap2 2 Righto Mode Cross Feedback Mode Cross Pan1 Mode Cross Pan2 we mh Normal Cross Feedback Cross Pan1 Cross Pan2 Switches the left and right delay routing us 0 0 680 0ms Mode Normal Sets the Tap1 delay time 0
213. S2 Send 2 MFX2 of the post IFX signals in the same way 4 1 Program mode You can control the parameters on global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 12 4 2 Combination mode Use Setup page Control Channel to set up the control channel for IFX Select an appropriate option from Ch01 16 Gch and All Rt Ch01 16 Select one of these settings when you want to use a single channel for control An asterisk will be displayed at the right of the channel number of timbres routed to the insert effect Gch Selects this option if you wish to control the parame ters on global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 1a This is a common setting All Rt Select this option to control the parameters on the channels Ch01 16 that have a mark for the timbres that are routed to the corresponding Insert Effect 4 3 Multi mode Use Setup page Control Channel to set up the control channel for IFX Select an appropriate option from Ch01 16 and All Rt Ch01 16 Select one of these settings when you want to use a single channel for control An asterisk will be displayed at the right of the channel number of timbres routed to the insert effect This option is suitable if multiple tracks on dif ferent MIDI channels are sent to the Insert Effects and you wish to control the parameters using one of the tracks All Rt Selects this option to control the parameters on the channel numbers Ch01 16 that have a
214. SC ModezNote Key Follow Fine Note Fine 100 100 Fine adjustment of the oscillator frequency pa 10 0 80 0Hz D Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode Fixed Amount 80 80Hz Sets the oscillator frequency modulation amount when OSC Mode Fixed Fixed Fixed Frequency Sets the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode Fixed Envelope Pre LPF 1 100 Sets the upper limit of the frequency range for which very low har monics are added Envelope Sens Envelope Sensitivity 0 4100 Sets the sensitivity with which very low harmonics are added Envelope Shape 100 100 Sets the oscillator s volume envelope curve W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D zs Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a OSC Mode b Note Interval c Fine The OSC Mode parameter selects the oscillator operation mode When Note Key Follow is selected the oscillator s frequency is determined based on the note number allowing you to use it as an octaver The Note Interval parameter sets the pitch offset from the original note number by semitone steps The Fine parameter allows you to fine tune in steps of cents e Envelope Pre LPF This parameter sets the upper limit of the frequency range to which very
215. SW1 is set to SW1 Mod CC 80 turning SW1 on will change the Pitch EG Level Increasing the absolute value of I AMS1 Intensity will produce a greater change in the pitch EG level when SW1 is turned on The direction of the change is specified by S AMS1 SW Start and A AMS1 SW Attack If SW1 is off the levels specified by the pitch EG settings will be used microX For example if AMS1 Level Mod AMS1 is set to FootSW 82 and Global 0 3a Foot SW Assign is set to Foot SW CC 82 receiving CC 82 or turning on the pedal switch will change the Pitch EG Level Increasing the absolute value of I AMS1 Intensity will produce a greater change in the pitch EG level when the pedal switch is turned on The direction of the change is specified by S AMS1 SW Start and A AMS1 SW Attack If the pedal switch is off the levels specified by the pitch EG settings will be used Pitch EG change level AMS SW1 Velocity Intensity positive value Note on VAL n off coU n off y n off A note played softly with S A note played strongly with A note played strongly with set at 0 A set to and S set to 0 A set to and S set to 0 A set to and SW1 turned off the settings SW1 turned on SW1 turned on of 2 5a Pitch EG S AMS1 SW Start 0 Specifies the direction of change in S Start Level caused by AMSI Level Mod AMS1 If I AMSI Int
216. Selects the modulation source of the depth of modulation 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the depth of modulation W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dyer Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance 100 100 Amount Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a LFO Wave This parameter selects the LFO waveform Vintg Vintage wave simulates the characteristics of the tremolo created on a guitar amplifier Combining this effect with the Amp Simulation will make a realistic vintage tremolo amplifier sound Tremolo LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Vintage Up Down MAIL UIA b LFO Phase This parameter determines the difference between the left and right LFO phases A higher value will simulate the auto pan effect in which the sound is panned between left and right 33 St Env Tremlo Stereo Envelope Tremolo This effect uses the input signal level to modulate a stereo tremolo You can simulate a tremolo effect that becomes deeper as it fades out while the level gets lower Stereo In Stereo Out Left 4 Wet Dry Tremolo Tremolo Righto gt o H A l io LFO Phase Wet Dry LFO Tri Sin Vintage LEO Shape Envelope f gt Envelope Shape Envelope Sens Envelope Sens Envelope Sensitivity Sets the envelope sensitivity of the input signal Envelope Shape 100
217. Stereo Out The possible routing of effect signal inputs and outputs is indicated in the upper left corner of the block diagram MFX1 and 2 are switched on off by the On Off parameter in the 9 Ed MasterFX or MasterFX Setup page On Off of each mode When off is selected the output will be muted in the same way as for 00 No Effect ID Separately from this On Off setting MIDI control changes CC 94 MFX1 and CC 95 MFX2 can be received to turn each master effect off A value of 0 is off and a value of 1 127 restores the original setting You can also use FX SW GLOBAL 0 1b to turn off MFX1 and MFX2 in the same way This is controlled on the global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 la 2 Routing Two master effects MFX 1 and 2 can be used in any mode If you are not using the Insert Effect in any mode the Master Effects send levels are determined by the Send Level 1 2 MFX2 parameters specified independently for the oscilla tors Program timbres Combination tracks Multi set For example you can apply substantial reverberation to a piano sound assigned to the timbre and tracks a small amount of reverberation to the strings sound and no rever beration to the bass sound If you are using the Insert Effect set the 51 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 param eters for the post IFX signals 2 1 Program mode The PROG 8 1a MFX Send parameters Send 1 and Send 2 or the PROG
218. TILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 COMBI 43 44 COMBI 4 Ed MIDI Filter2 Specifies whether the A and B mode effects of REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 2 3 and 4 will be transmitted and received The A mode of each knob is fixed as a MIDI control change message For B mode you can assign a MIDI control change message in 7 Ed Arp Ctrls X50 Specifies whether the effects of SW1 and SW2 will be received The assignable switches SW1 and SW2 corre spond to the messages that are assigned to the 7 Arp Ctrls Controls page 4 1 MIDI 2 1 Mibi Filter 2 1 COMBI 4 Ed MIDI Filter _ 1 Knobi iE iis i I ra 4 1a i ect contre Hn pte c PEL i Boi poi i moi HHA 1 s5tereoPianmao ger ZE 4 1a Real timeControlKnob1 2 00 Knobl Off On Specifies whether MIDI control change message 74 inter nal low pass filter cutoff frequency for the A mode of knob 1 and the MIDI control change message assigned to the B mode of knob 1 will be transmitted and received Knob2 Off On Specifies whether MIDI control change message 71 inter nal low pass filter resonance or high pass filter cutoff fre quency for the A mode of knob 2 and the MIDI control change message assigned to the B mode of knob 2 will be transmitted and received B 4 1 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 4 2 MIDI 2 2 mip Filter 2 2 COMBI 4 Ed
219. Td q qouy 6 XJ TTOI7U09 punos AA AA 8L Hv ug J ded TOdT uoS3rd g qouy 8 49e O424UuO punos AA AA LL Op ud pds TOdT uo3rd g qouy L 49 O443UO punos AA AA 9L OP ud Teuz qur sr epou TeqoT5 ur YOOTD IdIW u um sebesseu ago SJT UWSULIL x 2 amp eoed V 3 g qoUM 9 I TT017U09 punos AA AA GL gp ug D J3goano AdT g qouM VI qouM G F9TTOAAUOD punog AA AA VL WP ud sXemtyw bursues sat joy qa o Op V 4 d qouy p deT O243uO punos AA AA L et ug x epou TeqoTD bes tquog Horg ut sAemty YOOTD Brutt ga o esee eu V 4 d QoUuM NXy dOUM 4e O43UuO D punos A AA ZL 8v ug 2 3dH 9oueuoseWd q qouy v7 qouy Z 4J9 O443UO punos AA AA IL L ud ueuM peqatwsuezy uoradizoseq xeu snaeas 2 uteqsns V 4 d QouM T de9 lO43UuO punos AA 0L ot ug 2 3308 MS X Teped 370S AA AA L9 V ug SHOVSSHW SWNIITVZN W3ISAS T 2 oanu 3sos MS V uo 33o oanueasos LZT 00 aL 00l 99 ZP ug 2 BYO N MS e3auod MS V ZMS IMS UO 33O oqu ueqzod LZT 00 AL 00 S9 TY ug 2 zedweq TPTOH AA A v9 Ob ug epou TATNW ur ueuM Bess u 3oe es Buos sarusueazIL dd Z ebueyo tTquop borq sien YNVd gs i qo l s xueg qq qq ZE OZ ug o PPOW qouM g qouM AA AA TZ SI ug ON LZI O TAINW SS 9 poW qoux g qouy AA A 02 VI uq p 3ao2 rT s sr TATAN joe es Buos ss ss a 2 ZPOW doux gd qoux PI esodung TITOW AA AA 6T
220. The routing the spec ified effect name and the on off status are shown T01 8 BUS Sel DKit L R IFX 1 2 1 2 Off While viewing the map you can specify the bus where each timbre 1 8 will be sent Use the ClickPoint Tall A V to select the timbre and use the VALUE dial to set BUS Select 8 12 These settings can also be made in BUS Select 8 1a E 8 2 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 Copy Insert Effect PROG 8 1 Dkit IFX Patch 8 1 Select by Category PROG 8 2 51 8 3 FX Insert Effect Here you can adjust the parameters for the IFX that was selected in the Setup page p 104 COMBI F Ed InsertrF Z IFX15t Graphic E 0 1TEDH2 32UH2 B H2 zhH2 322EH2 ZhH2 t ll 8 3a UTILITY i Write Combination 0 1 COMBI 9 Ed MasterFX t For details on master effects refer to p 97 6 Effect Guide 9 1 Setup Here you can select the type of each master effect turn it on off and make chain and master EQ settings With the exception of MFX1 Control Ch MFX2 Control Ch and MEO Control Ch this is the same as in Program mode amp PROG 9 Ed MasterFX COMBI 9 Ed THasterFZz Setup Master Effect 1 9 1a 1 GT Gee ee Rtn B amp 5 m G ch Master E ainDdEl zd S3 Feu Smth Hall Ath 127 G ch 9 1b Low Mid Hi3h 9 1a MasterFX Setup MFX1 On Off MFX2 On Off Off On Master Effect
221. The timbre will play monophonically regardless of the settings of the program LGT Legato The timbre will play monophonically with single triggering legato With settings of Mono or LGT the note priority will be according to the Priority PROG 1 1b setting of the pro gram OSC Select Both OSC1 OSC2 Specifies the Mode Oscillator Mode PROG 1 12 of the program selected for each timbre 1 8 If the Mode Oscilla tor Mode is Double you can specify that either or both oscillators sound Both OSC1 and 2 will sound as specified by the settings of the program OSC1 Only OSC1 will sound OSC2 Only OSC2 will sound If Mode Oscillator Mode is Single or Drums there will be no sound Portamento PRG Off 001 127 Indicates portamento settings for each timbre 1 8 PRG Portamento will be applied as specified by the pro gram settings Off Portamento will be off even if the original program set tings specified for it to be on 001 127 Portamento will be applied with the portamento time you specify here even if it is turned off by the program settings MIDI If the Status 2 1a is set to INT CC 05 portamento time and CC 65 portamento switch messages will be received to control and change this setting If the set ting is PRG CC 05 portamento time will not be received These messages will be received on the MIDI channel specified for each timbre by MIDI Channel 2 1a B 2 2 UT
222. VP 10 or EXP 2 option sold separately con nected to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack p 165 Foot Pedal Assign List Damper Polarity KORG Standard Set this to match the polarity of the damper pedal connected to the rear panel DAMPER jack If a Korg DS 1H sold separately damper pedal is con nected the pedal switch polarity will be 1 so select KORG Standard for this setting If you have connected a damper pedal with a positive T polarity select for this setting 1 is open type T is closed type If the polarity does not match operating the damper pedal will not pro duce the correct result If no damper pedal is connected set this to KORG Standard Foot Switch Polarity KORG Standard Set this to match the polarity of the pedal switch connected to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack If a Korg PS 1 sold separately pedal switch is connected the pedal switch polarity will be J so select KORG Standard for this setting If you have connected a pedal switch with a positive T polarity select for this set ting is open type T is closed type If the polarity does not match operating the pedal switch will not produce the correct result If no pedal switch is connected set this to KORG Standard B 0 3 UTILITY c Write Global Setting Load Preload Data Change all bank references Half Damper Calibration
223. Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dames Off Tempo T Dep Tremolo Depth Sets the tremolo modulation depth Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Type b LFO Phase Select the type of phaser LFO and tremolo LFO for the Type parameter How the effect sound moves or rotates depends on the type of LFO Selecting LFO Phase enables you to offset the tim ing of the phaser peak and control a subtle movement and rota tion of the sound f P W D i W D The P W D parameter sets the balance between the phaser out put and the dry sound The W D parameter sets the balance between the final phaser and tremolo output level and the dry sound 36 St Ring Mod Stereo Ring Modulator This effect creates a metallic sound by applying the oscillators to the input signal Use the LFO or Dynamic Modulation to modulate the oscillator to create a radical modulation Match ing the oscillator frequency with a note number will produce a ring modulation effect in specific key ranges Stereo In Stereo Out Left o B Pre LPF Ring Modulator OoOo Mme X js x Wet Dry Fixed Frequency Note ud Note Offset Fine Note Key Follow Pre LPF 0 100 Sets the damping amount of the high range input to the ring modula tor S OSC Mode Fixed No
224. Z 78 82 164 168 179 Bank Bank Select 1 33 Bank select 172 E E 10 41 62 BPM MIDI Sync function 97 160 Break Point Level 19 23 Eege 23 Filter c C 19 BUS Select 26 29 30 50 72 89 98 99 100 101 103 C Cat HOLD Category Hold 2 34 Category 2 3 9 34 36 58 86 87 88 Category name Setup a 86 CPA E E E 30 72 102 Combination category 34 Combination mode 33 Combination Select 33 172 EE ee 79 Control change 76 78 168 172 Control Channel la d E 51 73 MasterEQ 53 74 MasterFX 52 73 Control TracK aaa 56 Convert Position 75 76 82 Sos c 7 Copy Arpeggiator 26 48 Copy Drom Kitu saa qasasanas 88 Copy From Combi 56 Copy Insert Effect 28 72 Copy Key DBIU Da ated 88 Copy Master Effect 30 53 74 eelerer 7 Eeer 85 Cutoff airs 38 87 155 162 163 Cutoft Megu eee tenere 16 87 D Data RI tee 177 Pecar Ti NS 4 12 19 23 AJOD E ranr 23 Filter CR 19 l LI C 12 CHV E 95 Drum kit 0 0 9 50 5L 25 77 79 83 86 88 177 Succ M 86 Drum program 6 8 50 51 73 89 Drums uuu 4 6 16 2
225. ZK SO MUSIC SYNTHESIZER SYNTHESIZER CONTROLLER Parameter Guide Hea HYPER INTEGRATED SYNTHESIS SYSTEM 9 About this manual This Parameter Guide contains explanations and other information regarding the operations of the parameters and settings on the X50 microX The explanations are organized by mode page and tab Explanations and other information on the effects and their parameters are also provided for each effect Refer to this guide when an unfamiliar parameter appears in the display or when you need to know more about a partic ular function Conventions in this manual Abbreviations for the manuals OG PG References to the manuals included with the X50 microX are abbreviated as follows OG Operation Guide PG Parameter Guide included in the CD ROM Explanations specific to the X50 or microX This parameter guide is written for both the X50 and the microX Explanations that apply only to one or the other model are preceded by an indication of X50 or microX in the text Switches and knobs References to the buttons dials and knobs on the X50 microX s panel are enclosed in square brackets Parameters in the LCD display screen Parameters displayed in the LCD screen are enclosed in double quotation marks Boldface type Parameter values are printed in boldface type Content that is of particular importance is also printed in boldface type Proc
226. al GM GS XG compatible sequencer or to load it into a pattern multi set Bank Map GLOBAL 0 2a to GM Converting the GS XG bank program maps to the GM2 bank program map e When bank select program change messages used by GS XG are received they will automatically be converted to the G g d bank program map of this instrument A For banks that are used in common by GS XG GS Reset XG System ON will be received to automatically convert to the optimal bank program map for each Support for GS XG part mode exclusive mes Sages n Multi mode when GS XG part mode exclusive messages Drum or MDrm 1 4 are received bank g d GM drum bank will be selected for the specified track Until this part mode state is defeated bank select mes sages will no longer be received for the specified track Support for NRPN messages used in GS XG music data The following NRPN messages can be received to modify the sound Vibrato Rate Bn 63 01 Bn 62 08 Bn 06 mm Vibrato Depth Bn 63 01 Bn 62 09 Bn 06 mm Vibrato Delay Bn 63 01 Bn 62 OA Bn 06 mm Filter Cutoff Bn 63 01 Bn 62 20 Bn 06 mm Bn 63 01 Bn 62 21 Bn 06 mm Bn 63 01 Bn 62 63 Bn 06 mm Bn 63 01 Bn 62 64 Bn 06 mm EG Release Time Bn 63 01 Bn 62 66 Bn 06 mm Drum Filter Cutoff Bn 63 14 Bn 62 kk Bn 06 mm Drum Filter Resonance Bn 63 15 Bn 62 kk Bn 06 mm Drum EG Attack Time Bn 63 16 Bn 62 kk Bn
227. al pitch A setting of 99 raises the pitch approximately a semitone above normal pitch G l In the case of the User All Notes Scale you can select Stretch in the Utility menu command Copy Scale 2 1b to set CE 2 Use the ClickPoint lt 4 gt to select the note that you wish X50 You can also select the note by holding down the ENTER button and playing a note on the keyboard Key Select C 1 G9 This indicates the location of the key displayed in Tune You can use the ClickPoint A V to select a key graphic and use lt 4 b to move it in one octave units Tune Indicates that there A Cd Dia Fd uta Afd Indicates that there are keys to the left are keys to the right td Dd Ed Fd od d Ed RE pp d 88 00 ale Tm Key Select B 2 2 UTILITY s Write Global Setting 0 1 Copy Scale 2 1 85 86 GLOBAL 3 Category Name 3 1 P 0 7 Prog 00 07 3 2 P 8 15 Prog 08 15 3 3 C 0 7 Comb 00 07 3 4 C 8 15 comb 08 15 Here you can rename the categories for programs and com binations Use the ClickPoint lt 4 A V to select the category you want to rename press the center of the Click Point to open the text dialog box and enter the desired name You can enter up to sixteen characters OG X50 p 112 microX p 114 With the factory settings these are classified by type of instrument You can specify sixteen categories each for
228. alance e Low Offset f Mid Offset g High Offset These parameters set the gain of the trigger signal For example if you do not want to apply compression to the high range reduce the High Offset value down below the Thresh old level In this way the high range limiter will not respond and compression will not be applied 05 St Gate stereo Gate This effect mutes the input signal if its level is lower than the specified level It also reverses the on and off operation of the gate and uses Note On and Off messages to turn the gate on and off Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Wet Dry e Cale S I Envelope Control Envelope Control s Dela Gate Envelope Select Right x o Wet Dry Gate Dmpllll Envelope Envelope Select Dmod L R Mix L Only R Only Selects from Control via the modulation source mixing the left and right signals Only left and Only right Dae Env Dmod Src Envelope Dmod Source Off G2 Dmp Selects the modulation source that controls the gate when Envelope Dmod Threshold Sets the level to which the Gate is applied Attack Sets the attack time Release Sets the release time Polarity Switches between non reversed and reversed Gate on off Delay Delay Time 0 100ms Sets the delay time of the gate input W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D
229. ameter to will allow AMS1 to lengthen the time and setting it to will allow AMSI to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no effect Amp 1 EG changes Time AMS Amp KTrk Intensity a positive value When Amp Keyboard Track 6 2a Low Ramp a positive value and High Ramp a positive value Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off WA M cl SS of 6 3a Amp 1 Low pitched note played High pitched note played with A D S and R with A D S and R at at Amp 1 EG changes Time AMS Velocity Intensity a positive value Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off M AA li Softly played note with A SE played note with SNE played note with D S and R at settings A D S and R at S and R at of 6 3a Amp 1 EG AMS2 Time Mod AMS2 Off EXT KT I AMS2 Intensity 99 99 A AMS2 SW Attack 0 D AMS2 SW Decay 0 S AMS2 SW Slope 0 R AMS2 SW Release 0 These parameters specify how AMS2 Time Mod AMS2 will control the amp 1 EG Time parameters AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 R AMSI1 SW Release B 6 3 UTILITY is Write Program 0 1 Copy Oscillator Swap Oscilla tor 1 1 For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Sync
230. amper This is essentially the same as for Gate 1 or G1 Dmp How ever when Gate 2 or G2 Dmp are used as a dynamic modu lation source for the EG of 22 St Env Flanger etc or the AUTOFADE of 27 St Vibrato a trigger will occur at each note on In the case of Gate 1 and G1 Dmp the trigger occurs only for the first note on Gate2 G2 Dmp 1 Dmpr m Note Y Damper Pedal On Gate2 Y Off G2 Dmp Time Pdl 4 Foot Pedal CC 04 If you wish to use the assignable foot pedal as a dynamic modulation source set Foot Pedal Assign GLOBAL 0 3a to Foot Pedal CC 04 p 165 Foot Pedal Assign A foot controller etc connected to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack can be used to control an effect Kb1 17 Knob Mod1 CC 17 Kb2 19 Knob Mod2 CC 19 Kb3 20 Knob Mod3 CC 20 Kb4 21 Knob Mod4 CC 21 If you want to use the REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs as dynamic modulation sources in Pattern Combination Multi modes access the 7 Ed Arp Ctrls page and in Knob B Assign set Knob1 B to Knob Mod 1 CC 17 Knob2 B Assign to Knob Mod 2 CC 19 Knob3 B Assign to Knob Mod 3 CC 20 and Knob4 B Assign to Knob Mod 4 CC 21 p 162 Knob 1 4 B Assign When you set REALTIME CONTROLS to B mode and oper ate knobs 1 4 the effect will be controlled Moving the knob to the 12 o clock position will produce a effect of 0 as the dynamic modulation source If A
231. and NRPN data i 0 127 pan after the insertion effect 2 8 Post insertion effect pan 10 Pan 11 Expression 0 127 for controlling Effect Dynamic Modulation same as Dmod Src FX1 12 12 Effect control 1 13 Effect control 2 0 127 for controlling Effect Dynamic Modulation same as Dmod Src EX2 13 16 Controller CC 16 0 127 for controlling Modulation Alternate Modulation same as AMS Ribbon 16 Effect Dynamic Modulation same as Dmod Src Rbn 16 0 127 corresponds to when Knob Mod 1 is assigned as the B mode function of a REALTIME CONTROLS knob 18 Controller CC 18 0 127 for controlling Alternate Modulation same as AMS Slider 18 Effect Dynamic Modula tion same as Dmod Src Sld 18 0 127 corresponds to when Knob Mod 2 is assigned as the B mode function of a REALTIME CONTROLS knob 0 127 corresponds to when Knob Mod 3 is assigned as the B mode function of a REALTIME CONTROLS knob 0 127 corresponds to when Knob Mod 4 is assigned as the B mode function of a REALTIME CONTROLS knob 32 Bank select LSB 0 127 LSB of bank select message 38 Data entry LSB 0 127 LSB of RPN or NRPN data 64 Damper 0 127 damper effect 65 Portamento On Off 0 63 Off 64 127 On turn the portamento effect on off 66 Sostenuto On Off 0 63 Off 64 127 On turn the sostenuto effect on off 67 Soft 0 127 soft pedal effect 70 Sustain level 0 127 sustain levels of the filter EG and amp EG KR 3 71
232. and direction of the effect that velocity will have on the time varying changes created by the filter 1 EG to control the filter 1B cutoff frequency r Vel to A Velocity to A Changes in cutoff frequency Note on Note on Note on 1 Pu Note off Softly played Strongly played Strongly played The setting of Intensity to A 4A 2b Setting to Setting to 17 18 4 2c AMS Into to A Int to B AMS Filter EG AMS Off EXT Indicates the source that will control the depth and direction of the effect that the time varying changes produced by the filter 1 EG will have on the cutoff frequency of filters 1A and 1B v p 152 AMS List Int to A AMS Int to A 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS Filter EG AMS will have on filter 1A For details on how this will apply refer to Int to A Inten sity to A Int to B AMS Int to B 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS Filter EG AMS will have on filter 1B Int to A Inten sity to A note The sum of the settings for Int to A B Vel to A B and Int to A B AMS Int to A B will deter mine the depth and direction of the effect produced by the filter EG B 4 2 UTILITY s Write Program 0 1 Copy Oscillator Swap Oscilla tor 1 1 4 3 Mod 2 Filter1 Modulation2 Indicates settings for the controller that will mo
233. and phase modulation effects such as cho rus and phaser 32 40 Other modulation and pitch shifting effects such as rotary speaker and pitch shifter 41 51 Early reflection and delay effects 52 57 Reverb effects 58 89 Mono effects and mono chain effects in which two mono effects are internally connected in series 1 Effects in each mode In Program mode you can process sounds using Insert Effect This is something like processing an oscillator OSC output sound using a filter and an amplifier Then you can apply a modulation and reverb effect or other Master Effect to the processed sound to add ambience and space Finally before the sound is output from the MAIN OUTPUT L MONO and R connectors you can fine tune the tonal qual ity using the stereo three band Master EQ You can adjust these settings for each Program individually seng Master Effect 1 2 Return Oscillator _ Filter Amplifier Insert Effect Master EQ Di ONG L MONO R In Combination mode and Multi mode you may process Program sounds for each timbre and track using the Insert Effect add ambience and space to the entire sound using the Master Effects and adjust the overall tonal quality using the Master EQ You can make these settings for each Combination in Com bination mode and for each Multi set in Multi mode indi vidually Send Return Ee OUTPUT ee ee Master EQ mono R Timbre 1 Track 1 Timbre 2 Track 2
234. and received Off unchecked MIDI after touch messages will neither be transmitted nor received ie This setting affects the operation when GLOBAL 0 3 Foot Foot SW Assign or Foot Pedal Assign is set to After Touch Ctrl Change Control Change Off On On checked Control change messages will be transmitted and received Off unchecked Control change messages will not be transmitted or received Exclusive Off On On checked System exclusive data will be transmitted and received Check this setting when you wish to use a connected computer etc to edit this instrument or vice versa Off unchecked System exclusive data will neither be transmitted nor received Normally you will leave this unchecked However system exclusive data will be transmitted and received while the page menu commands Dump Pro gram Dump All of this page are displayed B 1 1 UTILITY w Write Global Setting 0 1 For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Dump Program Dump Combination Dump Multi Dump Drum Kit Dump Arpeggio Pattern microX Dump Ext Control Setup Dump Global Setting Dump All These commands allow this instrument s data to be trans mitted to another connected X50 microX MIDI data filer or computer in the form of system exclusive data Selects the data to be dumped from the Utility menu see the table below to access the dialog box
235. anning of Tap3 Tap4 Pan L 1 99 R Sets the panning of Tap4 Fb Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount Dims Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of feedback amount Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the feedback HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range i Fx 43 LoDamp Low Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the low range t Ex 43 Int vl Mod Input Level Mod Sets the modulation amount of the input level 100 100 Fx 37 Dime Src Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level w FX 37 W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Doe Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a BPM a Rhythm With the tempo specified by the BPM parameter or the MIDI Clock tempo if BPM is set to MIDI the length of one beat equals the feedback delay time and the interval between taps becomes equal Selecting a rhythm will automatically turn the tap outputs on and off When BPM is set to MIDI the lower limit of the BPM is 44 Reverb Reverb effects These effects simulate the ambience of reverberation in con cert halls 52 Rev Hall Reverb Hall This hall type reverb simulates the reverberation of mid size concert halls or ens
236. applied to neither OSC when the switch is turned off LED off Pitch Bend Lock The state of the PITCH wheel will alternate between Lock and Unlock Lock when the LED is lit While the PITCH wheel is being operated turning Lock on will lock fix the effect at the current position of that con troller For example if you move the PITCH wheel in the up direc tion and turn Lock on the PITCH wheel movement will be locked held at that position so that modulation will con tinue to be applied even if you return the PITCH wheel to its original position By continuing to operate the PITCH wheel you can apply both types of modulation simulta neously Each time you press SW1 or SW2 the pitch will alternate between 1 octave higher and the origi nal octave setting 1 octave up when the LED is lit Lock the effect of PITCH wheel DI When you Lock the PITCH wheel will be halted but reception will still occur 161 Appendices Knob 1 4 B Assign The following functions can be assigned to the REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs in B mode For program combination or multi set make these settings in 7 Ed Arp Ctrls page Knob B Assign Z8 This can be set for each program in Program mode each combination in Combination mode and each multi set in Multi mode Realtime Control Knobs B Assign List Knob Mod 1 CC 7 General purpose controller Alternate Modulation or Effect Dynamic Modulation can
237. arately by Control Channel for IFX MFX1 MFX2 and MEO By setting Control Channel to Gch you can control these parameters from the global MIDI channel MIDI transmission when this instrument controllers are operated In Program mode this data will be transmitted on the global MIDI channel In Combination mode data will be transmit ted simultaneously on the global MIDI channel and on the MIDI channels of timbres whose Status COMBI 2 1 is set to EXT or EX2 In Multi mode musical data will be transmitted on the chan nel of the track Status BTH EXT or EX2 specified by Control Track MULTI 0 1 Note Receive All Even Odd This setting specifies which of the note messages played on this instrument s keyboard or received via MIDI will be sounded If you connect another X50 microX unit to this instrument in order to increase the total polyphony set one unit to Even and the other to Odd and set both units to sound All All note numbers will be received Normally you will leave this set to All Even Even numbered notes C D E F G A will sound Odd Odd numbered notes C D F G A B will sound MIDI IN USB Another X50 microX ODD EVEN DI This setting has no effect on the MIDI data that is received MIDI Clock Internal Ext MIDI Ext USB Auto Set this parameter when you wish to synchronize an exter nal MIDI device sequencer or rhythm machine etc
238. at follows the currently selected program will be selected When in COMBI 0 Play the combina tion that follows the currently selected combination will be selected Simultaneously a Bank Select message and Program Change message will be transmitted The switch can be used to select programs or combinations When in PROG 0 Play the program that precedes the currently selected program will be selected When in COMBI 0 Play the combi nation that precedes the currently selected combination will be selected Simultaneously a Bank Select message and Program Change message will be transmitted X50 The switch will control the effect of the up direction of the MOD wheel microX The switch will control the effect of the Y up direction of the joystick X50 The switch will control Alternate Modulation or Effect Dynamic Modulation To control these choose JS Y 2 for AMS or JS Y 2 for Dmod Src microX The switch will control the effect of the Y down direction of the joystick The switch will control aftertouch The switch will control the effect of REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 On produces the same effect as when the knob is rotated fully right and Off as when it is rotated fully left X50 The switch will control the effect of SW1 or SW2 microX The switch will control Alternate Modulation or Effect Dynamic Modulation To control these choose SW1 80 or SW2 81 This switch can be used to contr
239. atch COMBI 8 1 Select by Category PROG 8 2 8 4 IFX Insert Effect Sets the parameters for the effects selected for IFX in the Setup page r p 104 IFA 5t Compressor Pre EQ Trim EI Lou A D HE Ap pd 8 Mat Wet Oort 740 Eusa Meus te Ep es E 8 4 UTILITY iz Write Multi 0 1 MULTI 9 MasterFX t For details on the master effects refer to p 97 6 Effect Guide 9 1 Setup Here you can select the type of master effects turn them on off and make chain and master EQ settings This is the same as Program mode with the exception of MFX1 Control Ch MFX2 Control Ch and MEQ Ctrl ee DROCK 9 Ed MasterFX 9 1a Rtn 1883 TT Master EQ nainLdE vas 2 Wich o2 Reu Sith Hall Rin 864 0 Ga m m zam 9 1a Master FX Setup MFX1 On Off MFX2 On Off Off On Master Effect 1 2 00 89 name Rtn 1 2 Return 1 2 000 127 This is the same as in Program mode Refer to PROG 9 1 Setup However unlike Program mode the master effects will be controlled by the MIDI channel specified by MFX 1 2 Control Ch The control changes used are the same as in Program mode MFX1 2 Control Ch Ch01 16 G ch DI Specifies the MIDI channel that will control dynamic modulation Dmod for the master effects G ch The effect will be controlled on the global MIDI chan nel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 12 9 1b Master FX Chain MFX Chain Direction Chain
240. atically switch to the same operation as Internal if the external sequencer is not transmitting MIDI clock WA If no new MIDI clock messages are received from the MIDI IN or USB connector for an interval of 500 ms after receiving MIDI clock start or continue messages or if the X50 microX s arpeggiator has been started without receiving MIDI clock start or continue mes sages from the MIDI IN or USB connector it will switch to the same operation as the Internal setting A Audition playback will occur at the pre specified tempo regardless of the MIDI Clock setting o 81 82 RT Realtime Command Off On Off unchecked MIDI common messages and realtime messages Start Stop Continue Song Select Song Position Pointer will not be received if MIDI Clock is set to Ext MIDI or Ext USB or if it is set to Auto and MIDI clock mes sages are being received from an external source Song select messages will be received ff Use this setting if the X50 microX s multi set parame ters are being unnecessarily reset due to these messages being received from an external MIDI sequencer On Checked The above common messages including Song Select and realtime messages will be received A This setting is not available if MIDI Clock is set to Internal Convert Position PreMIDI PostMIDI This setting specifies the location at which the Transpose and will be applied This setting will affect the MIDI data
241. ator will function Top is the upper limit and Btm is the lower limit X50 The note number and velocity can also be specified by holding down the ENTER button and pressing a note on the keyboard B 7 2 UTILITY ts Write Program 0 1 Copy Arpeggiator 7 1 7 3 Controls X50 PROG T Ed Hrp Ctris Controls knobi 6 assign Knob E ASSIGN Sif nzsign teen Orta El EN EUH Porta sli hnabz B hnab Mod CCC34A 193 CCCHES o Toggle Knab35 B Rnob Mod CC 2A PSS 502 Mod Krobd B Knob Mod cCCH21 Toggle Leo Mone J CCCHS 1 microX PROG Ed Hrp Ctris Controls knobi 6 assign Knob B ASSIGN eee Ok Pod 7 knobz E khnob Mod z CET 125 CCRA CCCH 15 hnab5 B Rnab od 5 Hnabd B Rnab Mod d setup Dens TSS Contra 7 3a Knob B Assign Here you can assign functions mainly various types of con trol change to the B mode of the REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 p 162 Realtime Control Knobs B Assign List The functions you set here will take effect when you operate the REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 in B mode Knob1 B Knob1 B Assign Mi Off MIDI CC 95 Knob2 B Knob2 B Assign T Off MIDI CC 95 Knob3 B Knob3 B Assign HUET Off MIDI CC 95 Knob4 B Knob4 B Assign HUET Off MIDI CC 95 X50 7 3b SW1 2 Assign These settings assign functions to SW1 and SW2 v p 161 SW1 SW2 Assign List SW1 Assign MEB Off Pitch Bend Lock Here you can ass
242. bueu werborg e qeug ueuM peiqeug d pexoeuo sr epou TeqoT5 ur ebueu odquo e qeug ueuM peiqeug O perqeug sAemTy V VN ST 0 oN T uueuO eqoro skemTy P HIH JO ZXS LXH snqeqs Teuueyo s yoerq s ezquty uoee epou ra3Tng uotiaeurquoj ur ueuM euueu TeqoTS irensQ rr GT 0 ON T uueyo IAIN u HId ZXH LXH snqeqs s xoeagr ON TATNW I0 uor3qeurquooS e ebueuo u um pe3arusuei buo W 2 HLH ZXH LXH snqeqs S xoe4I ON TITNW ebueuo ueuM peaarusuezg buo W yo tms e qeubrssy MS V xew UTW aL 3aL 00 00 AA uu Teped e qeubrssy IPd V ASW enTeA uu ea4q ua i i H H gsT nTeA AA 2344 439 o T uM HOLId 0SX XXorasAop xozoru ebueuo xepueg qq qq qq qq Ug T uueuoS TeqoTo P o34Aq pic L3 uu AA T0 g0 50 aL 03 L yonoL Zait TPd Y MS Y eansseig Teuueyo AA AA uq unToA Zeien d Zx ebueuo tquwop 6ozgd bueuo werborg dd dd uo SWILTWHY SHOVSSSN HAISnTOXH WHLSAS TVSMHAINnD Z P T XH FREE TOSQqUOD Sou XOXOTIM aII geieo orsus AA m o2 tag ug o HIONSI ALIOOTHA 4IVO 330 NO duV ASW ON wezed NdWuN 33 3
243. butor Universal system exclusive Certain of the system exclusive messages are publicly defined for a specific use and these are called universal sys tem exclusive messages The X50 microX uses the following six universal system exclusive messages Inquiry message request FO 7E nn 06 01 F7 Inquiry message FO 7E nn 06 02 nine bytes F7 When an inquiry message request is received this instrument will respond by transmitting an inquiry message that means Tam a Korg Future instrument with system version GM system on FO 7E nn 09 01 F7 When this message is received in Multi mode this instru ment will be initialized for GM playback Master volume FO 7F nn 04 01 vv mm F7 vv lower byte of the value mm upper byte of the value together indicating 16384 steps This message is transmitted if you assign Master Volume as the function of the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL or as a B mode function of a REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knob and operate the controller This will adjust the overall volume balance without changing the relative volume balance between timbres tracks When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated Master balance FO 7F nn 04 02 vv mm F7 vv lower byte of the value mm upper byte of the value together indicating 16384 steps where 8192 is the default position and lower values will move the sound toward the left When this is re
244. c Eeuboard Reza wf 7 3 4 a Arpeggiator A B Setup Pattern Preset 0 Preset 4 U000 U250 Octave 1 2 3 4 Reso Resolution 55 5 55 5 Jo J Gate 000 100 Step Velocity 001 127 Key Step Swing 100 100 Sort Off On Latch Off On Key Sync Off On Keyboard Off On These are the arpeggiator parameters for the multi set es PRO 7 Ed Arp Ctrls B 7 3 4 UTILITY Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 Copy Arpeg giator COMBI 7 1 7 5 Zone scan Zone Specifies the range of notes and velocities that will trigger each arpeggiator A and B 7 5a A Key Etm OE Top Go A Ue Btm amp a1 Top 127 B Key Btm C 1 Top B We Btm Be1 Top 1i2r 7 5a Scan Zone A B Zone Map This shows the Scan Zone settings for arpeggiators A and B COMBI 7 4a A Key Btm A Bottom Key C 1 G9 Top A Top Key C 1 G9 Specifies the range of notes keys that will trigger arpeggiator A Top is the upper limit and Btm is the lower limit A Vel Velocity Btm A Bottom Velocity 001 127 Top A Top Velocity 001 127 Specifies the range of velocities that will trigger arpeggiator A Top is the upper limit and Btm is the lower limit B Key Btm B Bottom Key C 1 G9 Top B Top Key C 1 G9 B Vel Velocity Btm B Bottom Velocity 001 127 Top B Top Velocity 001 127 Specifies the range of notes keys and v
245. c MIDI Tempo Sync is checked these parameters specify a note length Base Note Sync Base Note relative to J Tempo and the multiple Times Sync Times that will be applied to it These parameters will determine the frequency of the OSC1 LFOI For example if Base Note Sync Base Note is J quarter note and Times Sync Times is 04 the LFO will perform one cycle every four beats Even if you change the J Tempo setting of the arpeggiator the LFO will always complete one cycle every four beats B 3 1 UTILITY i Write Program 0 1 For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Swap LFO 1 amp 2 This exchanges the settings of LFO 1 and 2 If LFO2 is selected in AMS1 Freq AMS1 or AMS2 Freq AMS2 of LFO1 Freq Mod 3 1b then these settings will be invalid for LFO2 after LFO1 and 2 have been exchanged If you select this from the OSC1 LFO1 or OSC1 LFO2 page LFO1 and LFO2 of OSC1 will be exchanged CD Select Swap LFO 1 amp 2 to access the dialog box Swap LEO 152 of SCI tantel OK 2 To execute press the MENU OK button To cancel without executing press the EXIT CANCEL button 3 2 1LFO2 osc1 Lro2 Here you can make settings for the OSC1 LFO2 which is the second LFO that can be applied to oscillator 1 3 1 OS1LFO1 OSC1 LFO1 However it is not possible to use the LFO to apply modulation in AMS1 Freq AMS
246. cause EG times to shorten as you play more strongly With a setting of 0 the times specified by Filterl EG will be used A AMS1 SW Attack 0 Specifies the direction in which AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 will affect the attack time With positive values of I AMS1 Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMSI to lengthen the time and setting this parameter to will allow AMS1 to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no change D AMS1SW Decay 0 Specifies the direction in which AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 will affect the decay time With positive values of I AMS1 Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMSI to lengthen the time and setting this parameter to will allow AMS1 to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no change S AMS1 SW Slope 0 Specifies the direction in which AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 will affect the slope time With positive values of I AMS1 Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMSI to lengthen the time and setting this parameter to will allow AMS1 to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no change R AMS1 SW Release 0 Specifies the direction in which AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 will affect the release time With positive values of I AMS1 Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMSI to lengthen the time and setting this parameter to wi
247. ce Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 09 yer BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo r Ex 09 Base Base Note Did ied 545 3 05 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed ix Ex 09 Times 1 16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed ix Fx 09 Delay Delay Time Sets the delay time from the original sound Depth Sets the depth of LFO modulation Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount p High Damp 0 100 Sets the feedback damping amount in the high range W D Wet Dly Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds r gt Ex 10 Dune Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Shape Changing the LFO waveform shape controls the peak sweep of flanging effects LFO Shape LFO Shape 0 100 LFO Shape 0 100 z LFO Waveform Sine X z g Feedback i W D The peak shape of the positive and negative Feedback value is different The harmonics will be emphasized when the effect sound is mixed with the dry sound if you set a positive value for both Feedback and W D and if you set a negative value for b
248. ce intensity control via LFO Dmod Trim 0 100 Sets the input level at the resonator V1 Pitch Voice1 Pitch Sets the voice1 Pitch for resonance Fine 50 50cent Fine adjusts the voice 1 pitch for resonance CO B8 V1 Reso Voice1 Resonance 100 100 Sets the intensity of resonance when Control Mode Manual HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount of resonant sound in the high range V1 Level Voice1 Level 0 100 Sets the Voice1 output level Pan L6 H5 Sets the Voice1 stereo image V2 Pitch Voice2 Pitch Sets the Voice2 Pitch for resonance Fine 50 50cent Fine adjusts the voice 2 pitch for resonance CO B8 100 100 V2 Reso Voice2 Resonance Sets the intensity of resonance when Control Mode Manual HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount of resonant sound in the high range par V2 Level Voice2 Level 0 100 Sets the Voice2 output level Pan L6 R6 Sets the Voice2 stereo image W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet D s Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 119 EFFECT 120 a Ctrl e V1 Reso h V2 Reso This parameter determines the resonance intensity When Ctrl Manual the Reso parameter sets the intensity of resonance If the Reso parameter has a ne
249. ceived the overall panning will be adjusted without changing the relative panning between timbres tracks Master fine tuning FO 7F nn 04 03 vv mm F7 A value of 8192 mm vv 40 00 is center 4096 mm vv 20 00 is 50 cents and 12288 mm vv 60 00 is 50 cents When this is received Master Tune GLOBAL 0 1a parameter will be set Master coarse tuning FO 7F nn 04 04 vv mm F7 Normally only the upper byte mm is used A value of 8192 mm vv 40 00 is center 6656 mm vv 34 00 is 12 semi tones and 9728 mm vv 4C 00 is 12 semitones When this is received Key Transpose GLOBAL 0 1a parameter will be set Transmitting sound settings data Data Dump Data for programs combinations multi sets drum kits user arpeggio patterns and global settings can be transmitted as MIDI exclusive messages The operation of sending this sys tem exclusive data to an external device is called a data dump By performing a data dump you can store the X50 microX s sounds and settings on an external device or rewrite the sounds and settings of another Future instrument There are the following three types of data dump e When you use the utility menu command Dump GLOBAL 1 1c to dump data various types of internal memory data will be transmitted If this data is received by the X50 microX the data will be written directly into internal memory and it will not be necessary to perform the Write o
250. ch change width of LFO modulation etc can be controlled in synchronization with the level changes of the EG With positive settings of Intensity AMS Intensity the vibrato effect will gradually deepen as the EG level rises or gradually lessen as the EG level decreases With negative settings of Intensity AMS Intensity the LFO phase will be inverted X50 1f you select a controller such as SW1 or SW2 as the AMS LFO 1 2 AMS you can press when desired to turn on the vibrato effect microX If you set AMS LFO1 2 AMS toa controller such as Foot SW 82 you can apply a vibrato effect on when desired by simply stepping on a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack AMS gt PEG FEG AEG AMS Value 99 0 99 0 4 99 AMS Intensity Parameter Filter Frequency Resonance Filter EG Int Filter LFO1 2 Int Pitch 12 00 1 0 41 Octave 0 1 Octave Pitch EG Int 12 00 Pitch LFO1 2 Int 412 00 1 0 1 Octave 0 1 Octave 6 0 0 value x 0 1 8 99 0 99 63 0 63 EG Level EG Time LFO Frequency Filter Cutoff Frequency PROG 4 1b 5 1b The cutoff frequency of filter A B can be controlled by the pitch amp EG controllers or tempo Set AMS 1 2 Filter A B AMS1 2 and AMS 1 2 Intensity for Filter A or B e X50 1f you set AMS1 Filter A AMS1 to Pitch Bend and set Intensity A AMS1 Intensity to
251. cillator 1 LFO to speed up as you play higher notes Negative values will cause the oscillator 1 LFO to slow down as you play higher notes This change will be centered on the C4 note X50 If AMS1 Freq AMS1 is set to Mod Whl 01 speci fying a higher value for this parameter will let you increase the OSC1 LFO speed more greatly by moving the MOD wheel With a setting of 99 moving the MOD wheel all the way up will increase the LFO speed by approximately 64 times microX If AMS1 Freq AMS1 is set to JS Y 01 rais ing the value of this parameter will cause the oscillator 1 LFOI speed to increase as the joystick is moved up With a setting of 99 moving the joystick all the way up will increase the LFO speed by approximately 64 times AMS2 Freq AMS2 Off PEG FEG AEG LFO2 KT EXT Int AMS2 Intensity 99 99 Indicates settings for a second alternate modulation source that will adjust the frequency of the oscillator 1 LFO1 c AMS1 Freq AMS1 Int AMS1 Intensity 3 1c MIDI Tempo Sync Frequency MIDI Tempo Sync Sync MIDI Tempo Sync Off On On checked The LFO frequency will synchronize to the tempo MIDI Clock In this case the values you specified for Frequency 3 1a and Freq Mod 3 1b will be ignored Base Note Sync Base Note S 354 DAA MEPE PEPP Times Sync Times 01 16 When Sync MIDI Tempo Sync is checked these When Syn
252. ck level is reached When this parameter is set to values of 16 33 49 66 82 or 99 the specified EG times will speed up as much as 2 4 8 16 32 or 64 times respectively or slowed down to 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 16 1 32 or 1 64 of the original time For example if AMS Time Mod AMS is set to Velocity increasing the absolute value of I AMS Intensity will allow strongly played notes to increase the changes in pitch EG T Time parameters values The direction of the change is specified by A AMS SW Attack and D AMS SW Decay As you play more softly the pitch EG times will more closely approach the actual settings of the pitch EG Pitch EG changes Time AMS Velocity Intensity positive value Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off A note played softly with A A note played strongly with A note played strongly with set to and D set to A set to and D set to A set to and D set to settings of 2 5a Pitch EG A AMS SW Attack 0 Specifies the direction in which AMS Time Mod AMS will affect the A Attack Time With positive values of T AMS Intensity a setting of will cause the time to be lengthened and a setting of will cause the time to be short ened With a setting of 0 there will be no change D AMS SW Decay 0 Specifies the direction in which AMS Time Mod AMS will affect the
253. cond Approximately 1 second Approximately 3 seconds Approximately 2 seconds Less than 1second Approximately 1 second One Combination Bank Less than 1second Less than 1second All Multi Less than 1second Less than 1second One Multi Less than 1second Less than 1second second second A While this instrument is writing the data into memory transmission of Active Sensing FEh messages from the MIDI OUT connector or USB connector will stop Data dump reception procedure D Connect this instrument and the device that will receive the data dump If you re using a computer that is able to transmit MIDI exclusive messages connect the computer s USB connec tor to the X50 microX s USB connector Alternatively connect the MIDI OUT connector of your computer s MIDI interface to the X50 microX s MIDI IN connector rz p 171 If you are using a MIDI data filer connect the MIDI OUT connector of the data filer to the MIDI IN connector of this instrument A Some USB MIDI interface devices may not be able to transmit or receive the X50 microX s MIDI exclusive messages 2 Set the MIDI channel of the MIDI device to match the global MIDI channel MIDI Channel 1 1a of this instrument If data that was previously transmitted to the MIDI device is now going to be received again by this instrument set the global MIDI channel of this instru ment to the same global MIDI channel setting that was used when transmitting t
254. croX J S Y amp AT 2 J oy Stick Y amp After Touch 2 X50 The effect is applied by MOD wheel movement in the up direction and by aftertouch received from the MIDI IN or USB connector In this case the aftertouch will pro duce half of the specified intensity microX The effect is applied by joystick Y up move ment and by aftertouch received from the MIDI IN USB connector In this case the aftertouch will produce half of the specified intensity JS Y amp AT 2 Joy Stick Y amp After Touch 2 X50 The effect is applied by CC 02 and by aftertouch received from the MIDI IN USB connector In this case the aftertouch will produce half of the specified intensity microX The effect is applied by joystick Y down move ment and by aftertouch received from the MIDI IN USB connector In this case the aftertouch will produce half of the specified intensity Pedal 04 Foot Pedal CC 04 If you wish to use the assignable foot pedal as an AMS set Foot Pedal Assign GLOBAL 0 3a to Foot Pedal CC 04 p 165 Foot Pedal Assign A foot controller etc connected to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack will control the effect KnobM1 17 Knob Mod1 CC 17 KnobM2 19 Knob Mod2 CC 19 KnobM3 20 Knob Mod3 CC 20 KnobM4 21 Knob Mod4 CC 21 If you wish to use a REALTIME CONTROLS knob 1 4 as an AMS make settings in program combination or multi set to set the Ctrls tab parameter Knobs B Assign to the followi
255. d S2 Send2 MFEX2 PROG 8 2 for the post IFX signal 2 3 Mixer DI Send Level 1 can be controlled by MIDI Control Change CC 93 and Send Level 2 can be controlled by MIDI Control Change CC 91 At this time the actual send levelis determined by multiplying the Send Level 1 or2 value of the oscillator with the Send Level 1 or 2 value received via MIDI Settings for drum programs If you have selected Drums for Oscillator Mode PROG 1 1a of a Program the Use DKit Setting PROG 8 1b box becomes available If you check this box BUS Select GLOBAL 4 32 for each key of the selected DrumKit becomes effective For example you can send snare type sounds to IFX to apply a gate effect and send the other sounds to MAIN OUTPUT L MONO and R without applying the insert effect If you de select the box all drum instrument outputs are sent to the bus specified by BUS Select PROG 8 1a You may apply the Insert Effect to all drum instruments regardless of the DrumKit settings 2 2 Combination Multi mode Use the BUS Select settings COMBI 8 1a MULTI 8 1 2 a settings of the Timbre Combination Track multi set to specify whether the insert effect will be applied to a tim bre track In the same way as for Program mode you can select from L R IFX 1 2 1 2 or Off for each timbre track S1 Send1 MFX1 S2 Send2 MFX2 become available if BUS Select has been set to L R or Off If IFX is selec
256. d r p 175 P Strch Pitch Stretch 12 00 12 Simultaneously adjusts the program OSC 1 2 Transpose and Tune parameters This lets you create a rich variety of tonal changes without impairing the character of the origi nal sound This controls the same parameters as Performance Editor Stretch Pitch Stretch 0 2b esp Ai Dtune 1 Detune 1 1200 0000 1200 Adjusts the tuning of program OSC 1 This controls the OSC1 Multisample Tune parameter 1 2c p 8 Dtune 2 Detune 2 1200 0000 1200 Adjusts the tuning of program OSC 2 This controls the OSC2 Multisample Tune parameter 1 2c v p 8 A This is valid only if the program s Oscillator Mode 1 1a v p 6 is set to Double Hold Off PRG On Controls the program s Voice Assign Hold parameter 1 1b p 6 If you turn this Off the OSC1 2 Amp EG Release Time parameter will be set to 0 in order to make full use of the effect Normally you can make effective use of this with a drum program When you turn this Off the key off timing will be valid letting you use the key on off timing to control the gate time Sometimes you can obtain an interesting effect by turning this Off for a previously created drum track Reverse Off PRG On Controls the Rev Reverse parameter 1 2b p 8 GLO BAL 4 1b p 87 for each Multisample or Drumsample of program OSC1 2 If you turn this On all multisamples and drum samples will
257. d is checked It selects the Tone Fixed Note No C 1 G9 Specifies the note number for the selected Tone X50 You can also input this value by holding down the ENTER button and pressing a note on the keyboard E 5 1 UTILITY For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Write Arpeggio Patterns This command writes user arpeggio patterns U000 U250 D Select Write Arpeggio Patterns to access the dialog box Write Arpeggio Patterns tantel OK 2 To execute the Write command press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CANCEL button A Pat J Tempo Oct Reso Sort Latch K Sync and Kbd are parameters that are set in Pro gram Combination and Multi modes The Write opera tion executed here does not save these parameters If you move here from Program or Combination mode and set these parameters you must return to the origi nal mode and write them Rename Arpeggio Pattern This command renames the selected user arpeggio pattern Up to sixteen characters can be input Preset patterns Preset 0 Preset 4 cannot be selected OG X50 p 112 microX p 114 Rename Arpeggio Pattern W Dr Percussion Copy Arpeggio Pattern This command copies the settings of another user arpeggio pattern to the currently selected arpeggio pattern It is not possible to copy from a preset arpeggio pattern Pr
258. d Strongly played with Intensity Pitch EG setting a positive value Strongly played with a negative value note Intensity and AMS Pitch EG AMS will be summed to determine the depth and direction of the pitch modulation applied by the pitch EG 2 lc Portamento This turns the portamento effect smooth change in pitch from one note to the next on off and specifies how it will be applied If you set Global 0 3a Foot SW Assign to Portamento SW CC 65 and turn a pedal switch connected to the ASSIGN ABLE SWITCH jack on off the portamento effect will be applied according to these settings p 164 Foot Switch Assign List Portamento SW CC 65 X50 If SW1 or SW2 is set to Porta SW CC 65 using SW1 or SW2 to turn portamento on off will apply the set tings you specify here p 152 AMS List v p 161 SW1 SW2 Assign List Prta SWCC E65 MIDI Portamento will also be switched when CC 65 Porta mento SW is received Enable Porta Enable On checked Portamento will be applied Off unchecked Portamento will not be applied Fingered Porta Fingered Off On This parameter is available when Enable Porta Enable is checked On checked Portamento will be applied when you con tinue holding the previous note as you press the next note legato playing Off unchecked Portamento will always be applied regardless of how you play Off On Time
259. d be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be disqualified from the manufacturer s or distributors warranty 2005 KORG INC KORG INC 4015 2 Yanokuchi Inagi city Tokyo 206 0812 Japan
260. d by the first played note will continue to be applied to each newly played note In this case Delay and Fade will be applied only to the LFO when it is first started Fade 00 99 Specifies the time from when the LFO begins to apply until it reaches the maximum amplitude When Key Sync is Off the fade will apply only when the LFO is first started How Fade affects the LFO when Key Sync is On Note on Note off Fade Delay Dly Delay 00 99 Specifies the time from note on until the LFO effect begins to apply When Key Sync is Off the delay will apply only when the LFO is first started 3 1b Freq Mod Frequency Modulation You can use two alternate modulation sources to adjust the speed of the OSC1 LOL AMS1 Freq AMS1 Off PEG FEG AEG LFO2 KT EXT Indicates the source that will adjust the frequency of the oscillator 1 LFO1 p 152 AMS List OSC1 LFO1 can be modulated by OSC1 LFO2 Int AMS1 Intensity 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS1 Freq AMS1 will have When this parameter is set to a value of 16 33 49 66 82 or 99 the LFO frequency being can be increased by a maxi mum of 2 4 8 16 32 or 64 times respectively or decreased by 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 16 1 32 or 1 64 respectively For example if AMS1 Freq AMS1 is Note No positive values of this parameter will cause the os
261. d one full range scale p 85 Category Name 3 Category Name Edit category names for programs and combinations rs p 86 DrumkKit 4 DKit Edit drum kits vx p 86 Arpeggio Pattern 5 Arp Pattern Edit user arpeggio patterns p 89 microx Ext Control 6 Ext Control External control settings CC assign ments for the REALTIME CONTROLS knobs p 93 User Scale GLOBAL 0 System 0 1 Basic X50 GLOBAL 0 5 Basic Master Tunelcernty Basic FA SU Auto AFP Master Tune EE 446 66H2 IFs Off lelProaram Key Transpose 488 UIMESI Off fi Combi Velocity Curve d Normali iO MFZ off basie Pret Foot TT Basic Master Tunetcent FA SU Auto AFP Master Tune E 446 66H2 IFs Off lelProaram Key Transpose 488 UIMESI Off fi Combi Velocity Curve d Horma MFE2 off OCTAVE keys ra F Use Prog Combis Multis Octave Easit 0 1a Basic Master Tune Master Tune Cent 5Ocent 427 47Hz 50cent 452 89Hz This adjusts the overall tuning of this instrument in one cent units semitone 100 cents over a range of 50 cents With a setting of 0 the frequency of A4 will be 440 Hz amp The A4 pitch given here is when Equal Temperament is selected as the scale If a different scale is selected A4 may not be 440 Hz Key Transpose 12 12 his adjusts the pitch in semitone steps over a 1 octave range This setting is applied at the location PreMIDI or Post MIDI specified by Conv
262. d turning effects on off and to transmit receive exclusive data e The MIDI channel specified for each timbre in COMBI 2 1a is used to transmit receive MIDI data for each timbre e The MIDI channel specified for the insert effect and master effects in MIDI channel Control Ch control Channel COMBI 8 2b is used to control dynamic modulation and to control the pan and send 1 2 after the sound has passed through the insert effects When you operate the keyboard or controllers of the X50 microX messages will be transmitted on the global MIDI channel and will also be transmitted on the MIDI channel of any timbre whose Status COMBI 2 1a is set to EXT or EX2 e Channel messages will be received if they match the MIDI channel of a timbre whose Status is set to INT rp 40 Status and MIDI Channel Multi mode e The global MIDI channel is used to transmit receive exclusive data and for messages that switch effects on off e MIDI data of each track is transmitted received on the MIDI channel specified for each track In Multi mode this will be the settings of MULTI 2 1 2 a e The MIDI channel specified for the insert effect and master effects in MULTI 8 3b is used to control dynamic modulation and to control the pan and send 1 2 after the sound has passed through the insert effect e When you operate the keyboard or controllers of the X50 microX messages will be transmitted on the MIDI channel select
263. des banks G capital programs for GM and bank g d drums X50 Bank List Bank A for preloaded programs for user programs GM capital program Bank g d GM drums program Bank G will toggle between the GM and g d banks each time you press the PROG BANK GM button Gog d 2G g d G microX Use the PROGRAM A GM buttons to select the bank The microX provides rewritable banks A B C D and E each containing 128 programs total 640 As for non rewritable program areas it provides banks G capital pro grams for GM and bank g d drums If you press a PRO GRAM A GM button you will automatically enter Program mode even if you had been in a different mode microX Bank List Bank A for preloaded programs for user programs GM capital program Bank g d GM drums program Bank G will toggle between the GM and g d banks each time you press the PROGRAM GM button G g d G og d CG Program Select X50 A D O 127 name G g d 1 128 name microX A E 0 127 name G g d 1 128 name Here you can select a program Choose this parameter and use one of the following meth ods to select a program X50 e Turn the VALUE dial e Use the INC DEC buttons Use the numeric buttons 0 9 to enter a program number and press the ENTER button to finalize the number Press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight the field then use V to
264. device Conversely you can switch to other types of external MIDI control without changing programs iq This page only displays the settings that are assigned to knob sets A B and C Use Global mode to make exter nal control assignments Eat Control Ba KLE M1 Gr ach CC AT Gch CCHATARGCh E Gch CCHAPS Gen CCHATS Gcech CCHB7TZ Gch CCcHa31 Gch Con Goh ott Gch Off Gch Off FrogromIibP edit a EK 0 4a External Control Ext Control Setup Select Selects an external control set 00 63 iq This setting is not written saved in the program Select A B C Shows the settings assigned to each knob of the external control set The currently enabled set is highlighted Use the SELECT button to switch between groups A B C MIDI Channel 01 16 Gch Indicates the MIDI channel Gch The message will be transmitted on the global MIDI channel you specify in Global mode The channel of all knobs that are set to Gch can be changed simply by chang ing the global MIDI channel setting instead of having to change the channel of each knob individually CC Assign Off 000 119 Indicates the MIDI control change number transmitted by the knob PROG 1 Ed Basic Here you can make basic settings for the oscillator s 1 1 Basic Prog Basic PROG 1 Ed Basic Prog Eee ee Mode 1 1a Mode Voice ASSIGN Mode Poly 5inale Trigger 1 1b Hold r Legata Priority Last 1 ic4Scale Type Equal Temperame
265. dify the tone by applying modulation to the filter 1 cutoff frequency Fre quency A B Frequency If Type Filter Type 4 1a is Low Pass Resonance the fil ter B parameters will not be displayed PROG d Ed Filter 1 Filter Hodulation Aris 1 te ae AMS2 MIDI porter Intensity 86 AMS 1 Pitch Bend Intensity B AMS2 MIDI porter Intensity 66 RSR BEIS Mod Z Eiter A obs Intensity rau 4 3a Filter A Modulation AMS1 Filter A AMS1 Off PEG AEG EXT Indicates the source that will control modulation of the filter 1A cutoff frequency p 152 AMS List Intensity A AMS1 Intensity 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS1 Filter A AMS1 will have X50 If AMS1 Filter AAMS1 is set to PitchBend setting a positive value for this parameter and moving the PITCH wheel up will raise the cutoff frequency while moving the wheel down will lower the cutoff frequency With negative values the opposite will occur This set ting is summed with the value of the Filter A Frequency A Frequency 4 1b parameter microX When AMS1 Filter A AMS1 is JS X a positive value for this parameter will cause the cutoff frequency to rise when the joystick is moved toward the right and fall when the joystick is moved toward the left With a negative value for this parameter the opposite will occur This value is added to the setting of t
266. ding to the keyboard pitch that is played e Pitch tone EG or LFO can be controlled by the tempo of the arpeggiator Notes for the table on the lower right 1 If Note No is selected as an AMS the base value will be C4 2 EXT Velocity MIDI Poly AT MIDI AfterT Mod Whl 01 JS Y 01 JS Y 02 JS Y amp AT 2 M Whl amp AT 2 JS Y amp AT 2 Pedal 04 Slider 18 KnobM1 KnobM2 KnobM3 KnobM4 Damper 64 Porta SW 65 Soste 66 Soft 67 SW 1 80 SW 2 81 MIDI CC 83 3 EXT KnobM1 17 KnobM2 19 KnobM3 20 KnobMA 21 4 If Tempo is selected as an AMS the base value will be J 120 For example if the AMS for Pitch is set to Tempo and AMS Intensity is set to 12 00 doubling the tempo value J 120 240 will raise the pitch one octave and halving the tempo J 2120 60 will lower the pitch one octave 5 A dedicated parameter is also provided 6 This will be added to the Filter Frequency value As the Filter Frequency value increases by 10 the cutoff frequency will double rise one octave 7 This will be added to the Pan setting 8 Itis possible to control LFO Frequency by using Tempo and AMS Intensity However if you use the Sync MIDI Tempo Sync function PROG 3 16 the LFO frequency can be synchronized to the tempo and note value The effect of alternate modu lation on various parameters and example applications Pitch PROG 2 1a
267. dulation or Effect Dynamic Modulation To control these choose JS Y 2 for AMS or JS Y 2 for Dmod Src microX The pedal will control the effect of the Y down direction of the joystick After Touch The pedal will control aftertouch Knob 1 4 Pedal operation will control the effect of REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 14 amp Even if you set Foot Pedal Assign to Knob1 4 you cannot use a connected foot switch to control the REAL TIME CONTROLS C mode arpeggiator effect Nor will it transmit MIDI control messages Appendices 165 166 MIDI transmission when the X50 microX s control lers are operated The following table shows the relation between the MIDI messages that are transmitted when the X50 microX s con trollers are operated and the AMS alternate modulation source or DMS dynamic modulation source that corre spond to each MIDI message indicates a fixed function and indicates an assignable function When one of the X50 microX s controllers is operated the corresponding or the assigned control change will be trans mitted Pitch bend messages are transmitted only when you operate the X axis of the joystick microX or the PITCH wheel X50 Operation in each mode is described below The explanation mentions only control changes but the same applies to pitch bend messages Program mode When one of the X50 microX s controllers is operated a control change message will be tra
268. e WA Sync Both EGs cannot sync the filter EG and amp EG independently For example if you sync in 63d it will be synced here as well note This can be selected only if Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a is Double PROG 5 Ed Filter2 5 1 Basic 5 2 Mod 1 Filter2 Modulation1 5 3 Mod 2 Filter2 Modulation2 5 4 IfoMod LFO Modulation 5 5 EG Filter2 EG IET Indicates settings for filter 2 which controls the tone of oscil lator 2 You can select either a 24 dB oct low pass filter with resonance or a 12 dB oct low pass filter and 12 dB oct high pass filter connected in series Filter 2 can be used when Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a is Double r PROG A Ed Filter 1 PROG 6 Ed Amp1 2 Here you can make settings for amp 1 which controls the volume of oscillator 1 and amp 2 which controls the volume of oscillator 2 You can also specify the panning of each oscil lator 6 1 Lvl Pan Amp1 Level Pan These parameters control the volume and pan of oscillator 1 FROG b Ed Hmpl 2 LeueliPan Rp 1 Level Pan Pan C064 P AMS Ott use Dkit Setting Intensity aa 6 1a Amp1 Level Level Amp1 Level 000 127 Sets the volume of oscillator 1 HI The volume of a program can be controlled by CC 7 volume and CC 11 expression The resulting level is determined by summing the values of CC 7 and CC 11 The Global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 1a is used for control 6 1b Pan Pan
269. e Recording the arpeggiator on an external MIDI sequencer computer When the arpeggiator is on playing the keyboard or operat ing the controllers of the X50 microX will operate and con trol the arpeggiator The arpeggiator will operate and be controlled in the same way in response to MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN The MIDI messages generated from the arpeggiator will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT according to the Local Control setting Local Control On GLOBAL 1 12 as described below Local Control On Notes from the arpeggiator will be trans mitted from the MIDI OUT Normally you will use this set ting Local Control Off Notes from the arpeggiator will not be transmitted from the MIDI OUT The arpeggiator will only sound the notes on this instrument Setting example 1 Record the note messages generated by the arpeggiator on the external MIDI sequencer computer Turn on this instrument s arpeggiator Set this instrument to Local Control On Turn Local Control On for this instrument Turn Echo Back Off on your external sequencer computer By turning echo back off you will prevent the arpeggiator from performing duplicate processing on the monitored notes during recording During playback turn off the arpeggiator of this instrument Setting example 2 Use the external MIDI sequencer computer to record only the notes that trigger the arpeggiator and operate this instrument s arpeggiator for monitoring whil
270. e settings will shorten the attack times With an adjustment of 10 the attack times will be 0 A When you modify Attack Time the EG Start Level Attack Level Start Level Modulation and Attack Time Modulation of the amp EG will also be adjusted simul taneously to allow the maximum effect to be obtained Decay Decay Time 10 00 10 This adjusts the Decay Time and Slope Time of the filter EG and amp EG With an adjustment of 00 the value of the program param eters will be unchanged Positive settings will lengthen the Decay Time and Slope Time beyond the values that were set With an adjustment of 10 the times will be 99 Negative settings will shorten the Decay Time and Slope Time With an adjustment of 10 the times will be 0 IFX Bal IFX Balance 10 00 10 This adjusts the W D Wet Dry setting of the insertion effect With an adjustment of 00 the value of the program param eters will be unchanged Positive 4 settings will raise the Wet level above the pro gram setting and lower the Dry level With an adjustment of 10 the setting will be Wet the effected signal only Negative settings will lower the Wet level below the pro gram setting and raise the Dry level With an adjustment of 10 the setting will be Dry the signal is unaffected MFX Bal MFX Balance 10 00 10 This adjusts the master effect Rtn1 Return1 and Rtn2 R
271. e Value of the parameter being controlled by the Des tination will not exceed the allowable range of set tings For example if you have assigned three Detunel settings for the same track and their Value settings are set to 1000 1000 and 1000 respectively then the result will be 1200 The sum is 3000 but the value is limited at the maximum of 1200 for the Detunel parameter Settings of 1000 1000 and 1000 would produce a result of 1000 Hold Reverse The last of the multiple Destination settings will be valid Destination 1 6 and Value 1 6 The parameters that can be controlled and their range of val ues are as follows LPF Fc Low Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency 99 00 99 Adjusts the low pass filter cutoff frequency of program OSC 1 2 This will affect the brightness of the sound The param eter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 74 is received p 175 Reso HP Resonance High Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency 99 00 99 Adjusts the resonance level of the low pass filter or the cut off frequency of the high pass filter for program OSC 1 2 The parameter that is controlled will depend on the filter type specified for the program The parameter will be con trolled in the same way as when CC 71 is received p 175 F EG Int Filter EG Intensity 99 00 99 Adjusts the filter EG intensity the depth of the filter EG for program OSC1 2 The parameter will be c
272. e TEMPO knob EXT is shown if MIDI Clock GLOBAL 1 1a is set to Ext MIDI or Ext USB or if itis set to Auto and the unit is oper ating as a slave The arpeggiator will synchronize to MIDI clock messages from an external MIDI device You can also set this parameter from 7 Ed Arp Ctrls Setup X50 You can tap the ENTER button several times to set the tempo to the corresponding interval Alternatively if you set the GLOBAL 0 3 Foot page Foot SW Assign parameter to Tap Tempo you can specify the tempo by tap ping your foot on a pedal switch connected to the ASSIGN ABLE SWITCH jack microX If you set the GLOBAL 0 3 Foot page Foot SW Assign parameter to Tap Tempo you can specify the tempo by tapping your foot on a pedal switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack 0 1b Combination Information X50 Displays information about the selected combination This shows the functions that are assigned to SW1 SW2 and the REALTIME CONTROLS B mode ASSIGN ABLE 1 4 knobs microX Displays information about the selected combina tion This shows the functions that are assigned to the REALTIME CONTROLS B mode ASSIGNABLE 1 4 knobs B 0 1 UTILITY For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Write Combination This command writes an edited combination into this instrument s internal memory Be sure to write any combination that you wish to
273. e Env 0 100 Sets the speed of the response to the end of recording f Direct Mix Always On Always Off Cross Fade Selects how a dry sound is mixed S W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D z Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Scratch Source b Response Scratch The Scratch Source parameter enables you to select the modula tion source that controls simulation The value of the modulation source corresponds to the playback position The Response Scratch parameter enables you to set the speed of the response to the modulation source Scratch Source Start Playback Position End Dili hives Recorded Sound Scratch Source sclatch mod JS X I I 4 Rbn 16 Max Zero i Max JS Y 1 i JS Y 2 Zero Max etc c Envelope c Src d Threshold When Envelope is set to Dmod the input signal will be recorded only when the modulation source value is 64 or higher When Envelope is set to Input the input signal will be recorded only when its level is over the Threshold value The maximum recording time is 1365msec If this is exceeded the recorded data will start being erased from the top e Response Env This parameter enables you to set the speed of the response to the end of recording Set a smaller value when you ar
274. e LFO speed Manu Manual Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied 0 100 Dep Depth Sets the depth of LFO modulation 0 100 100 100 t Fx 23 Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet t Fx 10 23 Res Resonance Sets the resonance amount Phs W D Phaser Wet Dry Sets the phaser effect balance Output Mode Selects the phaser output mode Normal Wet Inv t Fx 60 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet DS Off Tempo W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 62 PA4EQ M Dly Parametric 4 Band EQ Multitap Delay This effect combines a mono type four band parametric equalizer and a multitap delay Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Ao Wet Dry pr arametrig 4Band ER Multitap Delay lm x Del ay fay Mt Dly Wet Dry Wet Dry PEQ Trim Sets the parametric EQ input level Band1 Cutoff SC the center frequency of Band 1 0 100 20 1 00kHz the bandwidth of Band 1 G Gain 18 418dB E e gain of Band 1 B2 Band2 Cutoff the center frequency of Band 2 50 5 00kHz Sg the bandwidth of Band 2 G Gain 18 418dB Gs ie gain of Band 2 B3 Band3 Cutoff GT the center frequency for Band 3 300 10 00kHz M the bandwidth of Band 3 G Gain 18 18dB E e gain of Band
275. e effective d Tap1 Level This parameter sets the output level of Tap1 Setting a different level from Tap2 will add a unique touch to a monotonous delay and feedback 129 EFFECT 130 46 St Mod Delay Stereo Modulation Delay This stereo delay uses an LFO to sweep the delay time The pitch also varies You will obtain a delay sound with swell and shimmering You can also control the delay time using a modulation source Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Righto D mo D ze 7 Response EE L R Y H Mod Mode Modulation Mode LFO Dmod Switches between LFO modulation control and modulation source control Src Source Selects the modulation source that controls delay time Dmod L R 4 L R Reversed L R control by modulation source Der Respons Response 0 30 Sets the rate of response to the modulation source LFO Wave LFO Waveform Selects LFO Waveform Shape LFO Shape Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed LFO Freq LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed LFO Sync Switches LFO reset off on Off Tempo Tri Sine 100 100 t Fx 20 0 02 20 00Hz Off On Dac Src Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that resets the LFO L Phase L LFO Phase 180 180 Sets the phase obtained when the left LFO is reset par H Phase R LFO Phase 180 180 Sets the phase obtained when the right LFO is reset
276. e messages on their own MIDI channel If bank select and program change messages are received on a MIDI channel that matches the MIDI channel of a timbre whose Status 2 1a is INT the program of that timbre will change However if the MIDI channel of the incoming message matches the global MIDI channel MIDI Channel then the combi nation will change If you do not want the combination to change you can either change the global MIDI channel so that it does not match the channel on which the program change messages are being received or you can uncheck Combi Combi Change GLOBAL 1 1b Alternately you can uncheck Bank Bank Change GLOBAL 1 1b so that only the program number will change and the bank will remain the same If you wish to change a program without changing the combination you can also set Program Change 3 1a so that the program will change on certain timbres but not on others This parameter can also be set from the 1 Ed Tone Adjust Prog page Program Name This displays part of the program name selected for the tim bre In the case of the GM drums bank drums bank d will be indicated 35 S gt 9 c3 36 0 2d Selected Timbre Information This shows information on the timbre 1 8 that is currently selected for editing Timbre No Bank No Prog No and name This shows the timbre number and the program bank num ber and name selected for that timbre Status INT O
277. e modulation amount of filter modulation W D Wet Dly Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds i D mes Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a LFO Wave c Freq d Step When LFO Wave is set to Step Tri LFO is a step shape triangle waveform The Freq parameter sets the original triangle wave form speed Changing the Step parameter enables you to adjust the width of the steps 109 EFFECT 110 When LFO Wave is set to Random the Step parameter uses a random LFO cycle Random Filter LFO LFO Frequency n LFO Step Freq L f Kua LFO Step Freq Step Tri Random b LFO Phase Offsetting the left and right phases alters how modulation is applied to the left and right channels creating a swelling affect 90 1 80 degree 180 f BPM g StepBase g Times The width of an LFO step or a cycle of random LFO is obtained by multiplying the length of a note J selected for Step Base in relation to the tempo specified in BPM or the MIDI Clock tempo if BPM is set to MIDI by the number specified in the Times parameter j W D The effect sound s phase will be reversed when you set this parameter in the range of values from Wet to 1 99 11 St Exct Enhcr Stereo Exciter Enhancer This ef
278. e multi set number RND removes Volume 000 127 Sets the volume of tracks 1 16 MIDI When Status 2 1a 2a is INT or BTH CC 7 Volume can be received to control the volume The volume of a track is determined by multiplying the MIDI Volume CC 7 and Expression CC 11 values If Multi Mode GLOBAL 0 2a is set to for Master the volume setting you specify here will be transmitted via MIDI for tracks whose Status is EXT EX2 or BTH when you switch the multi set number B 0 4 5 UTILITY Write Multi Copy From Combi GM Initialize 0 1 Select by Category 0 2 3 microX 0 6 Ext Control The external control function lets you use the REALTIME CONTROLS knobs to control an external MIDI device You can assign a MIDI control change and MIDI channel to each of the four knobs and switch between three such settings for each knob A B C to control your external device One set lets you transmit a total of twelve 4 x 3 different MIDI con trol changes These are called external control sets and you can choose from 64 such sets r p 5 fe This page only displays the settings of the external con trol set you selected Use Global mode to make external control assignments MULTI OP la Ext Control Multi Select 000 Fop Ballade Bt Control ag KLE H1 Gch CCHABE Gch CC Ard4 FORME T Gch CC Ho Bach CC ch Cus E GchCCHgcH GCHICCHETS GCh CCR0 2 Gch CC0091 C Gh 607 Gch oft
279. e recording and during playback Turn on the X50 microX s arpeggiator Set the X50 microX to Local Control Off The note messages generated by the arpeggiator will not be output On your external MIDI sequencer computer turn echo back on With these set tings the data will be recorded and played correctly and the arpeggiator will not be applied in duplicate C About GM GS XG the X50 microX supports the GM standard It also supports the GM sound map including bank select with 128 pro grams and 9 drum programs provided in ROM banks G and g d g d contains drum programs GM is a standard that ensures basic compatibility of sounds etc between different GM compatible instruments made by different manufacturers but you need to be aware of the fol lowing e The GM System On message is received only in Multi mode GM Initialize MULTI 0 1 When a GM System On message is received the system will be initialized for GM compatibility p 57 GM Initialize Roland GS and Yamaha XG are specifications by which these respective manufacturers have extended the GM standard The X50 microX automatically converts the GS XG sound maps to the GM sound map and supports some of their messages In Multi mode etc GS XG music data can be played back A Since the X50 microX does not support all of the GS XG sound maps or messages some data may not be played back correctly If you wish to play music data from an extern
280. e recording a phrase or rhythm pattern and set a higher value if you are record ing only one note 121 EFFECT 122 Mod P Shift Other modulation and pitch shift effects 32 St Tremolo Stereo Tremolo This effect modulates the volume level of the input signal The effect is stereo and offsetting the LFO of the left and right phases from each other produces a tremolo effect between left and right Stereo In Stereo Out Left o gt Wet Dry Tremolo Righto A 5 rt Wet Dry LFO Phase LFO Tri Sin Vintage Up Down gt LFO Shape LFO Wave LFO Waveform Tri Sine Vintg Up Down Selects LFO Waveform ps Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed w Fx 20 LFO Phase 180 180deg Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right ua 0 02 20 00Hz gt Fx 09 Duer Off Tempo Freq LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Source Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 09 Qe BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo r Ex 09 Note Base Note bs D d d J J 0 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed ix Ex 09 1 16 t Fx 09 0 100 Du Off Tempo Sets the depth of LFO modulation Source
281. ect balance HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range i Fx 43 W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance H Level Tap1 Level 0 100 143 EFFECT 144 79 OD HG AmpSim Overdrive Hi Gain Amp Simulation This effect combines a mono type overdrive high gain dis tortion and an amp simulation You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o A o Routing Wet Dry Overdrive Hi Gain Y wx Amp Simulation 3 Band PEQ Driver Output Level Amp Simulation Filter A Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Wet Dry OD Mode Drive Mode OverD Hi Gain Switches between overdrive and high gain distortion Drive 1 100 Sets the degree of distortion r Fx 06 Level Output Level 0 50 Sets the overdrive output level r Fx 06 Drez Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level Amount 50 50 Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level Lo Low Cutoff 20 1 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type G Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ M1 Mid1 Cutoff 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type
282. ects a source that will control the depth and direction of cutoff frequency change for both filters 1A and 1B p 152 AMS List Int to A LFO1AMS Int to A 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS LFO1 AMS will have on filter 1A For example if you set AMS to Pedal 04 and set Global 0 3a Foot Pedal Assign to Foot Pedal CC 04 higher settings of this parameter will allow the OSC1 LFO1 to produce a greater effect when you advance a foot pedal connected to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack Int to B LFO1 AMS Int to B 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS LFO1 AMS will have on filter 1B Int to A LFO1 AMS Int to A 4 4b Filter LFO2 Modulation Adjusts the depth of the cyclic modulation applied by OSC1 LFO2 set by OSC1 LFO 2 3 2 to the cutoff frequency of filters 1A and 1B Filter LFO 1 Modulation 4 4a Intensity to A LFO2 Int to A 99 99 Intensity to B LFO2 Int to B 99 99 JS Y Int to A LFO2 JS Y Int to A 99 99 JS Y Int to B LFO2 JS Y Int to B 99 99 AMS LFO2 AMS Off PEG FEG AEG KT EXT Int to A LFO2 AMS Int to A 99 99 Int to B LFO2 AMS Int to B 99 99 E 4 4 UTILITY i Write Program 0 1 Copy Oscillator Swap Oscilla tor 1 1 4 5 EG Filter1 EG ITE Here you can make settings for the EG that will produce time varying cha
283. ed by Control Track MULTI 0 1a However messages will be transmitted only if the track selected by Control Track has a Status of BTH EXT or EX2 resp P Control Track ff e Tracks whose Status is INT or BTH will receive channel messages of the matching MIDI channel t p 61 Status and MIDI Channel Note on off Note on 9n kk vv Note off 8n kk vv n channel kk note number vv velocity When you play a note on the X50 microX s keyboard it will transmit note on off messages When the arpeggiator is running note on off messages will be transmitted by the arpeggiator If Local Control is off the arpeggiator will not transmit note on off data OG p 32 Local Control On set tings Most devices do not transmit or receive note off velocity and the X50 microX does not transmit or receive this data either Program Change Bank Select Changing the program bank Program change Cn pp n channel pp program number that allows 128 sounds to be selected e Programs 000 127 in banks X50 A D microX A E correspond to program changes Cn 00 Cn 7F Programs 001 128 in banks G and g d correspond to program changes Cn 00 Cn 7F Bank select MSB CC 0 Bn 00 mm Bank select LSB CC 32 Bn 20 bb n channel mm bank number upper byte bb bank number lower byte e The internal banks that correspond to each bank select number will depend on the Bank Map
284. ed by the Send Level 1 and 2 values received via MIDI Setting for drum program If the program Oscillator Mode PROG 1 1a is Drums the USE DKit Setting PROG 8 1b will be used If this is checked the setting for each key of the selected drum kit will be used The drum instrument for a key whose drum kit BUS Bus Select GLOBAL 43a parameter is set to L R or Off will use the S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 GLOBAL 4 32 settings If IFX is used the 1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 PROG 8 2a after passing through IFX will be used If this is not checked the Send 1 and Send 2 PROG 8 la MFX Send settings or the S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 PROG 8 22 settings after passing through IFX will be used for all drum instruments This is the same as when Oscillator Mode is Single or Double 2 2 Combination Multi mode Use S1 Send1 MFEX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 8 1 2 a for timbres Combination and tracks Multi set to set the Send level for each timbre and track As with Program mode if BUS Select is set to L R or Off S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 become effective In this case the actual send level will be the setting of the program PROG 8 1a used by the timbre track multiplied by the send level you specify here Send level For example if a Program s OSC1 Send1 is set to 127 Send2 set to 064 OSC2 Send
285. edure steps 1 25 3 Steps in a procedure are listed as 1 Q 9 pii 14 OG p Bi Bi E From the left these symbols indicate a reference page in the Parameter Guide a reference page in the Operation Guide and a parameter number Symbols 4 EZ IT MEM Dze AS These symbols respectively indicate cautions advice MIDI related explanations a parameter that can be selected as an alternate modulation source a parameter that can be selected as a dynamic modulation source and a parameter that can use the BPM MIDI Sync function Example screen displays The values of the parameters shown in the example screens of this manual are only for explanatory purposes and may not necessary match the values that appear in the LCD screen of your instrument MIDI related explanations CC is an abbreviation for Control Change Number In explanations of MIDI messages numbers in square brackets always indicate hexadecimal numbers How to read the Parameter Guide example Modename PROG 3 Ed LFOs Page No Tab No Tab name FROG 3 Ed LFOs Jae for me lil LES Freq Mod Hl151 Hote No AHS2 JS 61 Parameter MsiLFoi fli Foz Lod Iz LFog No 3 1a OSC1 LFO1 Parameter name Waveform you can make settings for the LFO that can be used to cyclically modulate the Pitch Filter and Amp of oscillators 1 and 2 There are two LFO units for each oscillator By setting the LF
286. eessen SSCS MIDI Effect dynamic modulation Dmod is controlled on the global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 1a rx p 157 Dynamic Modulation Source Dmod E 8 3 UTILITY re Write Program 0 1 29 30 PROG 9 Ed MasterFX t For details on master effects refer to p 97 6 Effect Guide 9 1 Setup Here you can select the master effect types switch them on off specify chain order and set the master EQ Master E ainLdEl ROH B16 StChorus 2 Ath 87a i MEX Cham S NN NEEN de uw ku wanana aua du GC MM EER EENI 06 5 Signal LA Mir 9 1a Master Effect Setup The master effects do not output the direct sound Dry The return level Rtn 1 2 sends the effect sound Wet to the L and R bus and this is mixed with the direct sound BUS Select L R 8 1a 8 2a The master effects are monaural input The sound that is panned to L and R after passing through the oscillator and insert effect is mixed to a monaural signal as adjusted by the S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 levels and input to the master effects A The master effects are mono in stereo out Even when a stereo input type effect is selected the input will be monaural MFX1 On Off MFX2 On Off Off On Switches master effect 1 2 on off When off the output will be muted DI Separately from this setting you can use CC 94 to switch master effect 1 on off CC 95 to switch master e
287. efer to COMBI 5 Ed Key Zone X50 The value of these parameters can also be set by hold ing down the ENTER button and playing a note on a con nected MIDI instrument E 5 1 2 UTILITY is Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 5 3 Slp 8 Key Slope T01 08 5 4 Slp 16 Key Slope T09 16 MULTI keu DD I9IO DD 5 3a 5 3 4 a Top Slope Bottom Slope Top Slope 00 72 Specifies the key range 12 is one octave from the top key of track 1 8 9 16 until the original volume is reached Bottom Slope 00 72 Specifies the key range 12 is one octave from the bottom key of track 1 8 9 16 until the original volume is reached p 46 E 5 3 4 UTILITY is Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 5 5 Review Review Ti MULTI 3S Key Zone 5 5a DE TDDTTDETDDETRETTPETDE TRITT TREE TETTE TIETIETRIETETRIETETRIEIEE gt rea Mey te Sp Msp te Meview SS 5 5a Key Zone Map All T1 T16 This shows the range of note data that will be sounded by tracks 1 16 The note range that will be sounded is shown as a line and the slope portion is grayed E 5 5 UTILITY is Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 MULTI 67 68 MULTI 6 Vel Zone Velocity Zone Specifies the range of velocities that will sound each track Set the Top Bottom Velocity parameters to set the range of velocities that will sound tracks 1 8 and 9 16 and set the Top Bottom Slope parameters to specify the ran
288. effect to the next master effect when chain is turned on 9 1c Master EQ Gain dB Sets the amount of cut and boost for the three band EQ located immediately before the MAIN OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks This is linked with the various Gain parame ters of Master EQ 9 4 Low 18 0 18 0 Mid 18 0 18 0 High 18 0 18 0 The cutoff frequency for Low Mid and High and the Q of Mid can be adjusted in the MEQ page These set tings are in dB units E 9 1 UTILITY i Write Program 0 1 For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Copy Master Effect This command lets you copy any desired effect settings from Program Combination Muliti set CD Select Copy Master Effect to access the dialog box Copy Haster Effect Fram ABBR Portamento Pad WE a Lion T MF ai Cancel 2 In From select the copy source mode bank and num ber X50 vou can press a PROG BANK button to select a bank You can also use numeric buttons 0 9 and the ENTER button to select a number 3 Select the effect that you wish to copy If you select MFX 1 or 2 Rtn Return return level will be copied at the same time If you select Master EQ only the master EQ settings will be copied You can also copy from an insert effect If you check All all settings of the master effects and master EQ will be cop
289. el or R Release Time respectively es PROG 4 5a A EG A Amp EG Attack Time 99 00 99 A EG D Amp EG Decay Time 99 00 99 A EG S Amp EG Sustain Level 99 00 99 A EG R Amp EG Release Time 99 00 99 These adjust only the amp parameter as in A Attack Time D Decay Time S Sustain Level or R Release Time respectively rx PROG 6 3a 6 6a LFO1 Sp LFO1 Speed 199 00 199 Adjusts the LFO1 speed of program OSC 1 2 The parame ter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 76 is received rs p 175 PLFO1 I Pitch LFO1 Intensity 12 00 00 00 12 00 Adjusts the program OSC 1 2 pitch LFO1 intensity the depth of pitch modulation produced by LFO1 The parame ter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 77 is received p 175 LFO1 Fd LFO1 Fade 99 00 99 Adjusts the program OSC 1 2 LFO1 Fade parameter the time from when the LFO begins to take effect until it reaches the maximum level 3 1a p 14 LFO1 DI LFO1 Delay 99 00 99 Adjusts the program OSC 1 2 pitch LFO1 delay the time from note on until the LFO begins to take effect The parameter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 78 is received r p 175 P Strch Pitch Stretch 12 00 12 Simultaneously adjusts the program OSC 1 2 Transpose and Tune parameters This lets you create a rich variety of tonal changes without
290. el will change but this state can not be saved directly in the program CC 70 Sustain level Corresponds to Filter Amp EG Sustain Level PROG 4 5 Ed Filter1 2 EG page 6 Ed Amp1 2 EG page CC 71 Filter resonance level High pass filter cutoff frequency Corresponds to Filter A Resonance PROG 4 5 Ed Filter1 2 Basic page Corresponds to Filter B Frequency PROG 4 5 Ed Filter1 2 Basic page CC 72 Release time Corresponds to Filter Amp EG Release Time PROG 4 5 Ed Filter1 2 EG page 6 Ed Amp1 2 EG page CC 73 Attack time Corresponds to Filter Amp EG Attack Time PROG 4 5 Ed Filter1 2 EG page 6 Ed Amp1 2 EG page Corresponds to Amp EG Start Level PROG 6 Ed Amp1 2 EG page Corresponds to Amp EG Attack Level PROG 6 Ed Amp1 2 EG page Corresponds to Amp EG Level Modulation Start PROG 6 Ed Amp1 2 EG page Corresponds to Amp EG Time Modulation Attack PROG 6 Ed Amp1 2 EG page CC 74 Low pass filter cutoff frequency Corresponds to Filter A Frequency PROG 4 5 Ed Filter1 2 EG page Corresponds to Filter B Frequency PROG 4 5 Ed Filter1 2 EG page CC 75 Decay time Corresponds to Filter Amp EG Decay Time PROG 4 5 Ed Filter1 2 EG page 6 Ed Amp1 2 EG page Corresponds to Filter Amp EG Slope Time PROG 4 5 Ed Filter1 2 EG page 6 Ed Amp1 2 EG page CCZ76 LFO1 speed Corresponds to LFO 1 Frequency PROG 3
291. elay Sets the fade in delay time i FX 27 Freq Mod LFO Frequency Mod D mod AUTOFADE Switches between D mod and AUTOFADE for the LFO frequency modulation ix Ex 27 W D Mod Wet Dry Mod D mod AUTOFADE Switches between D mod and AUTOFADE for the effect balance modulation r gt Fx 27 W D Wet Dly Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds t Fx 10 20 Due Off Tempo Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 29 2Voice Reso 2Voice Resonator This effect resonates the input signal at a specified pitch You can set the pitch output level and pan settings for two reso nators individually You can control the resonance intensity via an LFO Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o High Damp WI JEUNE 2 Resonance Resonator TN A High Damp Right i i f Wet Dry Invert On Off A Pitch Fine cent Ctrl Control Mode Manual LFO Dmod Switches the controls of resonance intensity Dyer Invert LFO Dmod Invert Off On Reverses the Voice 1 and 2 control when LFO Dmod is selected ks Hot LFO Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Dmod Dmod Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls resonance intensity Mod Dep Mod Depth 100 100 Sets the amount of resonan
292. elect by Category to choose from the desired category p 36 Receiving a MIDI program change message can also be used to select a program p 171 DI If the Status 2 1a 2a is either INT or BTH pro grams can be selected by receiving MIDI program change messages When the multi set is changed X50 microX will transmit a song select message Also when a song select message is received from the specified source the multi set will change If the Status is EX2 a will be displayed before the program number Tracks whose Status is EX2 will transmit the bank number that was selected in the Bank EX2 LSB Bank EX2 MSP 2 1a PLAY MUTE PLAY MUTE This specifies the play muted status of each track PLAY The track will play MUTE The track will be muted silent 0 2 3 c Selected Track Information Selected Track Information This shows the currently selected track program bank number name and MIDI channel E 0 2 3 UTILITY FP Select bu Categ ru is Write Multi Copy From Combi GM Initialize 0 1 For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Select by Category You can select the program for each track by category This command can be selected when a Program page Prog 8 Prog 16 is displayed is PROG 0 1 0 4 Mix 8 Mixer T01 08 0 5 Mix 16 Mixer TO9 16 Here you can set the pan and volume of each track
293. elect the note whose pitch you want to change X50 The note can also be selected by holding down the ENTER button and playing a note on the keyboard B 2 1 UTILITY t Write Global Setting 0 1 For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Copy Scale This command copies a preset scale or user scale to the user scale that you wish to edit For details on the preset scales refer to Type PROG 1 1c D Select Copy Scale to access the dialog box Copy Scale From TITZNIENDI Ta User Octave D 2 Select the copy source scale From If you select Pure Major or Pure Minor you must also specify the Key selection located at the right Stretch can be selected only if To is the User All Notes Scale 3 Select the copy destination scale To 4 To execute the Copy Scale command press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CANCEL but ton 2 2 All Notes GLOBAL 2 User Scale All Hotes CH Hd D d F d GHd ad 2 5 D4 Ed Fd od Ad Ed ree miss rag 06 66 66 600 00 istaec Tl am 2 2a User All Notes Scale Tune 99 99 Here you can make independent pitch settings for each of the 128 notes Adjust the pitch of each of the 128 notes C 1 G9 in one cent steps This adjustment is relative to equal temperament A setting of 99 lowers the pitch approximately a semitone below norm
294. elects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 81 OD HG Phaser Overdrive Hi Gain Phaser This effect combines a mono type overdrive high gain dis tortion and a phaser You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Righto j Wet Dry Routing Overdrive Hi Gain Y wx Phaser Output Level S Output Mode I i Li h i Wet Ei Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Resonance el Inveri Drive Phaser Wet Dry Wet Dry LFO Tri Sine l OD Mode Drive Mode Switches between overdrive and high gain distortion OverD Hi Gain Sets the degree of distortion Level Output Level Sets the overdrive output level r Fx 06 De Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level Amount 50 50 Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level Lo Low Cutoff 20 1 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type G Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ M1 Mid1 Cutoff 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type 18 18dB Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 G Gain Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 M2 Mid2 Cutoff 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type 18 18dB Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 G Gain Set
295. elocities that will trigger arpeggiator B tA Key A Vel X50 The value of these parameters can also be set by hold ing down the ENTER button and playing a note on a con nected MIDI instrument B 7 5 UTILITY is Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 Copy Arpeg giator COMBI 7 1 7 6 Controls DI When you operate these controllers on the MIDI chan nel of the Control Track the MIDI messages assigned here will be transmitted if Status 2 1a 2a is EXT EX2 or BTH X50 MULTI fi Arp Ctris Controls knobi B assign Knob B R ign Sg 172 Rzsign eee Ok Pod MM N i GL GH Por 7 82 knobz E khnaob Pod CCC 13 Toggle knoabs5 B khnob MHad 5 fCC RSE Shs Shs Mor Knobd E Krob Mad d cCC4z 15 Toggle CCCHSA CCH 15 set Meet te arp n arp E zone __ entren 7 6b microX MULTI Arp Ctris Knob B ns5sign Enok Ei Lo D M D A hnoabz B hnab od 2 Controls knob1 BE assign AME AE cCo3 195 NS 282 cCC42 1 knob35 B knob Pod 5 knobd B knab Pad d set Meet te arp RID EID ne eontro 7 6a Knob B Assign Here you can set the B mode functions mainly various con trol changes that the REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 will have 12 p 162 Realtime Control Knobs B Assign List When the REALTIME CONTROLS are in B mode the func tions you specify here will be controlled on the track and MIDI channel of the Control Track 0 1a when you oper ate knobs 1
296. emble halls 53 Rev Smth Hall Reverb Smooth Hall This hall type reverb simulates the reverberation of larger halls and stadiums and creates a smooth release 54 Rev Wet Plate Reverb Wet Plate This plate reverb simulates warm dense reverberation 55 Rev Dry Plate Reverb Dry Plate This plate reverb simulates dry light reverberation Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Pre Delay Thru d O EFFECT Reverb Time Sets the reverberation time High Damp Sets the damping amount in the high range Pre Delay Sets the delay time from the dry sound Pre Delay Thru Sets the mix ratio of non delay sound Pre EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain Sets the gain of High EQ W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dose 15 415dB 15 15dB Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance c Pre Delay d Pre Delay Thru The Pre Delay sets the delay time to the reverb input allowing you to control spaciousness 133 134 Using the Pre Delay Thru parameter you can mix the dry sound without delay emphasizing the attack of the sound Reverb Hall Plate Type Reverb Pre Delay Thru Pre Delay Reverb Time 56 Rev Roo
297. empo Selects the modulation source of the LFO modulation depth Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth Shimmer 0 100 Sets the amount of shimmering of the LFO waveform us W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dose Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance c Shimmer This parameter sets the amount of shimmering of the LFO wave form Increasing this value adds more shimmering making the chorus effect more complex and richer Ensemble LFO Level g Shimmer Time 20 St Flanger stereo Flanger This effect gives a significant swell and movement of pitch to the sound It is more effective when applied to a sound with a lot of harmonics This is a stereo flanger You can add spread to the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from each other Stereo In Stereo Out Left A Wet Dry Feedback E LFO Phase LFO Tri Sine gt LFO Shape LFO Wave LFO Waveform Selects LFO Waveform Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed LFO Phase 180 180deg Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right ee Fx 10 0 02 20 00Hz r gt Fx 09 Dose Off Tempo Tri Sine Freq LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Sour
298. ensity is a positive value a setting of will raise the EG level and a setting of will decrease it With a setting of 0 there will be no change A AMS1 SW Attack 0 Specifies the direction of change in A Attack Level caused by AMSI Level Mod AMS1 If I AMS1 Inten sity is a positive value a setting of will raise the EG level and a setting of will decrease it With a setting of 0 there will be no change AMS2 Level Mod AMS2 Off KT EXT I AMS2 Intensity 99 99 S AMS2 SW Start 0 A AMS2 SW Attack 0 Refer to the preceding paragraphs AMS1 Level Mod AMS1 A AMS1 SW Attack 2 5c Time Mod Time Modulation These parameters let you use alternate modulation to con trol the T Time parameters of the pitch EG AMS Time Mod AMS Off KT EXT Indicates the source that will control the T Time parame ters of the pitch EG p 152 AMS List I AMS Intensity 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS Time Mod AMS will have With a setting of 0 the pitch EG times will be just as speci fied by the Pitch EG 2 5a settings The alternate modulation value at the moment that the EG reaches each point will determine the actual value of the EG time that comes next For example the decay time will be determined by the alter nate modulation value at the moment that the atta
299. ensity val ues together For example if Velocity has been selected changes in key board velocity will affect the resonance With positive values the resonance will increase as you play more strongly and as you play more softly the reso nance will approach the level specified by the Resonance A Resonance setting With negative values the resonance will decrease as you play more strongly and as you play more softly the reso nance will approach the level specified by the Resonance A Resonance setting The effect of resonance Low Pass Low resonance value A ee High resonance value 4 1c B Filter B This will be displayed if Type Filter1 Type 4 1a is Low Pass amp High Pass This filter cuts the low frequency range that lies below the cutoff frequency By cutting the lower overtones it lightens the tone High Pass Level 12dB oct Frequency Frequency B Frequency 00 99 Specifies the cutoff frequency of filter 1B B 4 1 UTILITY ws Write Program 0 1 Copy Oscillator Swap Oscilla tor 1 1 4 2 Mod 1 Filter1 Modulation1 Indicates settings for keyboard tracking which modifies the tone by modulating the filter 1 cutoff frequency Frequency A B Frequency and intensity settings for the filter 1 EG etc FROG d Ed Filter1 Keyboard Track Hod 1 EBDTrk Key Low 4 29 Key Low ER High c 4 Int to B 458 B 58 Ramp Low
300. ento Switch CC 65 When you press SW1 or SW2 to turn it on LED lit portamento will be applied Each time this is turned On Off CC 65 will be transmitted Off 0 On 127 Octave Down Each time you press SW1 or SW2 the pitch will alternate between 1 octave lower and the original octave setting 1 octave down when the LED is lit Octave Up Pitch Bend SW1 Mod CC 80 SW1 Modulation CC 80 SW2 Mod CC 81 SW2 Modulation CC 81 This effect differs between SW1 and SW2 SW1 is handled as CC 80 and SW2 is handled as CC 81 Porta SW CC 65 Portamento Switch CC 65 When Mode Oscillator Mode PROG 1 1a is Single turning the switch on LED lit will apply portamento regardless of the Enable Porta Enable PROG 2 1c set ting and turning the switch off LED off will not apply por tamento If Mode Oscillator Mode is Double and if the Enable Porta Enable setting is the same for OSC1 and 2 i e Enable or Disable for both OSC1 and 2 then portamento will be applied to OSC1 and 2 when the switch is turned on LED lit and portamento will not be applied to OSC1 and 2 when the switch is turned off LED off If the Enable Porta Enable setting is different for OSC1 and 2 i e OSC1 is Enable and OSC2 is Disable or OSC1 is Disable and OSC2 is Enable then portamento will be applied to the OSC whose setting is Enable when the switch is turned on LED lit and portamento will be
301. er CC 64 Prt 65 Portamento Switch CC 65 Sos 66 Sostenuto CC 66 SW1 80 SW1 Mod CC 80 SW2 81 SW2 Mod CC 81 FSW 82 Foot Switch CC 82 CC 83 Tempo CC This is the control change number X50 PITCH wheel microX Joystick X axis horizontal X50 MOD wheel microX Joystick Y up CC 01 X50 CC 02 microX Joystick Y down CC 02 tempo internal clock or external MIDI clock tempo data v p 159 This indicates a controller not present on the X50 microX that can be received via MIDI such as the ribbon controller on the TRITON Extreme etc The controller and the type of MIDI messages it transmits will depend on the type of connected MIDI instrument or device DI In Program mode dynamic modulation of the insert effect and master effects is controlled on the global MIDI channel In Combination mode and Multi mode dynamic mod ulation of the insert effect and master effects are con trolled on the MIDI channel that has been specified as the Control Channel for IFX MFX1 and MFX2 respectively Gatel G1 Dmp Gatel Damper The effect is at maximum during note on and will stop when all keys are released With G1 Dmp the effect will remain at maximum even after the keys are released as long as the damper sustain pedal is pressed Gate1 G1 Dmp Dmpr 1 m Note Y Damper Pedal On Gate1 Y Off G1 Dmp Time Gate2 G2 Dmp Gate2 D
302. er arpeggio pattern memory will be protected and the following write operations cannot be performed e Writing a user arpeggio pattern e Receiving user arpeggio pattern data via MIDI data dump Off unchecked Data can be written to internal user arpeg gio pattern memory G 79 80 microX Ext Control Setup Off On This protects the external control set memory of the microX On checked The external control set memory of the microX will be protected and the following writing opera tions will not be possible e Writing an external control set e Receiving external control set data via MIDI data dump Off unchecked External control memory sets can be writ ten to the microX E 0 2 UTILITY is Write Global Setting Load Preload Data Change all bank references Half Damper Calibration 0 1 0 3 Foot Specify the polarity and function of a switch or pedal con nected to the rear panel Foot Foot SW Assign Off 3 KORG Standard 3 KORG Standard 0 34 Foot su Assign Damper Palaritu Foot SW Polarity 0 3a Damper Assignable Foot Switch Pedal Foot SW Assign Off Tap Tempo Select the function that will be controlled by a pedal switch PS 1 option sold separately connected to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack ep Loi Foot Switch Assign List Foot Pedal Assign Off Knob4 Indicates the function that will be controlled by a foot vol ume pedal X
303. ereceived Thefunction of this switch is set in GLOBAL 0 3 System Foot page This is valid when the switch is set to a MIDI control change Other Ctrl Change Off On Specifies whether or not MIDI control change messages other than those included in MIDI Filter 1 2 will be received B X50 4 7 8 microX 4 5 6 UTILITY i Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 MULTI 5 Key Zone Here you can specify the range of keys that will be sounded by each track Top Bottom Key settings specify the range of notes that will be sounded by tracks 1 8 9 16 and Top Bottom Slope set tings specify the range from the top bottom key until the original volume is reached DI This setting does not affect MIDI transmission All note data produced by the arpeggiator will be transmitted 5 1 Key 8 Key Zone T01 08 5 2 Key 16 Key Zone T09 16 MULTI 5 He Key Top Key State ET RN W ESA Standard Eit MC ven 8 Mienie ll ia aipe Feun 5 1 2 a Key Zone Map 1 This shows the range of note data that will sound the cur rently selected track The note range that will be sounded is shown as a line and the slope portion is grayed 5 1 2 b Top Key Bottom Key Top Key C 1 G9 Specifies the top key upper limit that will be sounded by each track 1 8 9 16 Bottom Key C 1 G9 Specifies the bottom key lower limit that will be sounded by each track 1 8 9 16 For a diagram of Key and Slope parameters r
304. erics 10s Hold WEE 2 34 A Alternate Modulation 13 14 15 18 20 23 151 154 174 175 Alternate Modulation Source 151 Amp DEL optas 21 z uero PC as ae 23 AP LEV Clee oos rnt 4 21 ZU NOG ala DOE sci ritos 22 AMS Alternate Modulation Source JUOD AIMS Gassesevnd outer doc ipi ptus deest 22 Filter AMS 18 Filter EG AMS 18 Cp AND M een ne 14 JS X PBend as AMS 43 65 Level Mod AMS 13 20 23 LFO AMS 11 12 19 23 EE 2I Pitch AMS ia ien rotten 10 Pitch EG AMS 11 Resonance AMS 16 Time Mod AMS 13 20 24 ENEE eege 6 Arpeggiator 5 25 37 47 69 89 Arpeggiator Run 37 47 69 Arpegio TYP eresien 90 Dato Arpegegialor sisser 76 COULFOL secto Eois vo enn 176 PACED ege 25 90 e esiti imuE 25 47 69 Arpeggio pattern assist 25 90 1 Lawa es 27 47 50 86 ATDePBIOEOE eeneg 47 69 Foot Pedal 80 EOOEDWILGQI EEN 80 REALTIME CONTROLS Knob B 27 5 0 71 SWI SV 2 asao 27 50 71 Attack Level 12 19 23 varie M cl E NU I NN NEN 23 Filter E 19 Pitek EI E 12 Attack Time 4 12 19 23 87 156 175 eur edis CX 23 Piter EG M 19 Jeg lel gil ct eT 12 AUDITION 9 E Ke ee 9 B reien L Z 35 95 7
305. ert Position 1 1a Note number transmitted Ka fo A 24 84 C1 C6 microX when OCTAVE keys are dark D Master Tune can be controlled by the MIDI universal system exclusive message Master Fine Tuning FO 7F nn 04 03 vv mm F7 nn MIDI channel vv mm value Key Transpose can be controlled by the MIDI univer sal system exclusive message Master Coarse Tuning FO 7F nn 04 04 vv mm F7 nn2 MIDI channel vv mmc value These messages are received on the global MIDI chan nel specified by MIDI Channel 1 1a 75 76 In Program Combination and Multi modes MIDI RPN fine tuning messages can be received to adjust the tun ing of the program the timbres in Combination mode or the tracks in Multi mode relative to the Global mode Master Tune setting In Program mode MIDI RPN fine tune messages will be received on the global MIDI channel that you speci fied for MIDI Channel 1 1a In other modes MIDI RPN fine tune messages will be received on the MIDI channel for each timbre in Combination mode or track in Multi mode Detune Transpose COMBI 2 3a MULTI 2 5 6 a Velocity Curve 1 8 This specifies the way in which the volume and or tone will change in response to how hard the keyboard is struck velocity When Convert Position 1 1a is PreMIDI variations in keyboard playing dynamics will affect the velocity effect and the transm
306. eset 0 Preset 4 D Select Copy Arpeggio Pattern to access the dialog box Copy Arpeggio Pattern From HIGH 1 ss LR DL 2 Select the copy source arpeggio pattern From 8 To execute the Copy Arpeggio Pattern command press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CANCEL button 5 2 Edit Here you can input Tones 0 11 for each step 01 to 48 Step can be a maximum of 48 steps and Tone corresponds to up to twelve notes for the up to twelve keys pressed simulta neously If Sort 5 1b is checked the notes that were pressed will correspond in ascending order of pitch to Tones 0 1 etc If Sort 5 1b is unchecked the notes that were pressed will correspond to Tones 0 1 etc in the order in which they were pressed A These parameters are not valid for preset patterns Pre set 0 Preset 4 GLOBAL 3 f rp 5 2a a a a a a a EI EENEG E ED dE el ear HUE LU UL DEL PPP 5 2a Step Ptch Gt Vel Flam Step Step No 01 48 Select the step that you wish to edit and set reset each Tone With Step selected press the center of the Click Point use ClickPoint A V to select the Tone you want to enter and press the center of the ClickPoint to confirm your selection Use the ClickPoint lt 4 b to move to another step When you re finished with entry press the EXIT CANCEL button or the MENU OK button You can use the Delete Step utility to delete the Tones of all ste
307. eso Resolution L5 Sp 055 25 45 J Octave 1 2 3 4 Sort Off On Latch Off On Key Sync Off On Keyboard Off On Make settings for the program arpeggiator rs PROG Ed Arp Ctrls These parameters can also be set from 7 Ed Arp Ctrls Setup page 127 12 B 0 3 UTILITY Write Program Select by Category 0 1 microX 0 4 Ext Control External control lets you use the REALTIME CONTROLS knobs to control an external MIDI device You can assign a MIDI control change and MIDI channel to each of the four knobs and switch between three such settings A B C to control your external device One set lets you transmit a total of twelve 4 x 3 different MIDI control changes These are called external control sets and you can choose from 64 such sets For example you can use this to control parameters such as level or pan on your DAW digital audio workstation or fil ter or envelope on your software synthesizer Simply switch between external control sets to choose the parameters you want to control The external control function is independent of programs or combinations When you press the EXT CONTROLLER button to turn this function on the LED will light the exter nal control set you ve selected will not change even if you change programs or switch to Combination mode or Multi mode This means that you can choose different sounds without affecting how you re controlling your external MIDI
308. et and retriggered according to the settings of the program A If Legato is checked certain multisamples or key board locations may produce an incorrect pitch Priority Low High Last This parameter is valid when Mode Voice Assign Mode is set to Mono It specifies which note will be given priority to play when two or more notes are played simultaneously Low Lowest note will take priority High Highest note will take priority Last Last note will take priority 1 1c Scale Type Scale Type Equal Temperament User Octave 15 Indicates the basic scale for the internal tone generator Equal Temperament This is the most widely used scale where each semitone step is spaced at equal pitch intervals Pure Major In this temperament major chords of the selected tonic will be perfectly in tune Pure Minor In this temperament minor chords of the selected tonic will be perfectly in tune Arabic This scale includes the quarter tone scale used in Arabic music Pythagoras This scale is based on ancient Greek musical theory and is especially effective for playing melodies Werkmeister Werkmeister III This is an equal tempered scale that was used since the later Baroque period Kirnberger Kirnberger III This scale was created in the 18th century and is used mainly to tune harpsichords Slendro This is an Indonesian gamelan scale in which an octave consists of five notes When Key is set t
309. et to the L Phase and R Phase settings when the value changes from 63 or smaller to 64 or higher 47 St DynamicDly Stereo Dynamic Delay This stereo delay controls the level of delay according to the input signal level You can use this as a ducking delay that applies delay to the sound only when you play keys at a high velocity or only when the volume level is low Stereo In Stereo Out Left o High Damp Low Damp Threshold Ctrl Target Control Target Selects from no control output and feedback Pol Polarity Reverses level control Threshold Sets the level to which the effect is applied Offset Sets the offset of level control Attack 1 100 Sets the attack time of level control EN Release 1 100 Sets the release time of level control EN L Delay L Delay Time 0 0 680 0ms Sets the delay time for the left channel R Delay R Delay Time Sets the delay time for the right channel Feedback Sets the feedback amount 0 0 680 0ms 100 100 0 100 t Fx 43 0 100 t Fx 43 Spread 100 100 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound ix Ex 43 W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D Off Tempo HiDamp High Damp Sets the damping amount in the high range LoDamp Low Damp Sets the damping amount in the low range Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 1
310. eturn2 9 1a settings as a whole With an adjustment of 00 the value of the program param eters will be unchanged Positive settings will raise the return levels above the program setting With an adjustment of 10 the setting will be 127 maxi mum Negative settings will lower the return levels below the program setting With an adjustment of 10 the setting will be 0 Attack Amp EG Attack Time Start Level Attack Level Level Modulation S Time Modulation A of Amp 1 and 2 and Filter EG Attack Time of Filter 1 and 2 Decay AmpEG Decay Time Slope Time of Amp 1 and 2 Filter EG Decay Time and Slope Time of Filter 1 and 2 IFX Bal W D Wet Dry balance of the IFX effect MFX Bal Master Effect RTN1 2 Return1 2 B 0 2 UTILITY is Write Program Select by Category 0 1 0 3 Arp Arp Play While arpeggiator parameters are for the most part edited in PROG 7 Ed Arp Ctrls Some major parameters can be edited here as well When you are playing in PROG 0 Play you can edit the arpeggiator in realtime such as changing the arpeggio pattern etc You can also use the REALTIME CONTROLS C mode ARP GATE ARP LENGTH ARP VELOCITY and TEMPO knobs to edit the arpeggio in realtime OG p 91 000 Portamento Pad Rrpa33idtor Pattern Prezet 1 DON r amp ort FlLatch OKey Sync Fl Keyboard IFroaram l F Edit J arp 0 3a Arpeggiator Pattern Preset 0 Preset 4 U000 U250 R
311. evel rises and lessen as the EG level falls If Int AMS Intensity is set to a negative value the phase of the LFO will be inverted e X50 If select a controller such as SW1 or 2 as the AMS LFO1 2 AMS you can apply the tremolo effect by pressing SW1 or SW2 when desired e micrOX If you set AMS LFO1 2 AMS toa controller such as Foot SW 82 you can apply a tremolo effect just when you want by using a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack Pan PROG 6 1 4 b The oscillator pan can be controlled by EG LFO keyboard tracking controllers or tempo etc If you select Note No as the AMS Pan AMS and set Intensity to 50 panning will be controlled by the keyboard position center at the C4 note far right at C6 or above and far left at C2 or below e If EG is selected as the AMS Pan AMS the oscillator pan will be controlled in synchronization with the changes in EG level If Intensity is set to a positive value the pan will move toward the right as the EG level increases and toward the left as the EG level decreases If Intensity is set to a negative value the opposite effect will occur EG Level Pitch EG PROG 2 5b Filter EG PROG 4 5b 5 5b Amp EG PROG 6 3b EG levels can be controlled by keyboard tracking control lers or tempo etc Set the I AMS Intensity value and select 0 for each EG segment S sta
312. everse direction from the last arpeggio note back toward the first Example If you set Leth to 04 Step 01 to Tone0 Step 02 to Tonel Step 03 to Tone2 Step 04 to Tone3 and simultaneously play three notes to produce an arpeggio the following results will be produced depending on the Type As Played 05 152 gt rest gt 0 gt 1 gt 2 gt rest gt 0 As Played Fil 05152522051525290 Running Up 051525050251525090 Up amp Down 051525150515291 90 Octave Motion Up Down Both Parallel Specifies the operation when Oct is set to 2 4 octaves Up Notes will repeatedly ascend within the specified range of octaves Down Notes will repeatedly descend within the specified number of octaves Both Notes will repeatedly ascend and descend within the specified number of octaves Parallel The notes of the specified octaves will sound simul taneously 5 1d Fixed Note Mode Tone No Fixed Note No Fixed Note Off On Specifies the Tone type the 9 or O displays in 5 2 of the arpeggio pattern Off unchecked This is the normal arpeggiator type The Tone pitches will be expanded into an arpeggio based on the note number played on the keyboard On checked You can specify the note number for each Tone The note numbers from the keyboard will be ignored for the purposes of the Tone pitch and the arpeggio will be sounded using the note numbers specified for each Tone The note
313. f Band 7 W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Wet Dry 18 0 18 0dB 18 0 18 0dB 18 0 18 0dB 18 0 18 0dB 18 0 18 0dB 18 0 18 0dB 18 0 18 0dB Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Das Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Type This parameter selects a combination of center frequencies for each band Select a combination of center frequencies for each band The center frequency of each band is shown at the top of the LCD screen 09 St Wah AutoW Stereo Wah Auto Wah This stereo wah effect allows you to create sounds from vin tage wah pedal simulation to auto wah simulation and much broader range settings Stereo In Stereo Out Left o e Envelope Sens d Sweep iii ka o Response FreqBottm Frequency Bottom Sets the lower limit of the wah center frequency FreqTop Frequency Top Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency Swp Mode Sweep Mode Auto Dmod LFO Selects the control from auto wah modulation source and LFO Dze Src Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the wah when Swp Mode Dmod Response 0 100 Sets the response speed when Swp Mode Auto or Dmod Envelope Sens Envelope Sensitivity 0 100 Sets the sensitivity of auto wah us Envelope Shape 100 100 Sets
314. f High EQ C F W D Cho Flng Wet Dry Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger Out Output Mode Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds 0 02 20 00Hz 0 0 50 0ms 0 100 100 100 t Fx 20 0 100 15 15dB 15 15dB Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet r gt Fx 10 20 Normal Wet Inv t Fx 60 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Dyer Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 89 Reverb Gate This effect combines a mono type reverb and a gate Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out 0 Reverb Balance Righto SZ Input Reverb Mix 2 Envelope Control D mod Enyelope Select REV Reverb Time Sets the reverberation time HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Pre Dly Pre Delay 0 200ms Sets the delay time of the reverb sound and gate control signal Pre EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain Sets the gain of High EQ 15 15dB 15 15dB Rev Balance Reverb Balance Sets the reverb effect balance GATE In Rev Mix Input Reverb Mix Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the dry and reverb sounds of the gate con trol signal pa Dry 1
315. f LFO modulation D s Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the depth of modulation Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the depth of mod ulation W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D z Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance an change the panning curve by modifying the LFO wave b LFO Phase This parameter determines the difference in the left and right LFO phases When you change the value gradually from 0 the sound from the left and right channels will chase each other around If you set the parameter to 180 or 180 the sound from each chan nel w ill cross over each other You need to input different sounds to each channel in order for this parameter to be effective Stereo Auto Pan LFO Phase LFO Phase 180 degrees Left Center Right Output Stereo Image 35 St Phasr Trml Stereo Phaser Tremolo This effect has a stereo phaser and tremolo LFOs linked together Swelling phaser modulation and tremolo effects synchronize with each other creating a soothing modulation effect It is suitable for electric piano type sounds Stereo In Stereo Out Left o 2 o Wet Dry d Tremolo Phaser Wet Dry 4 Right o LFO Type gt uscite debes ge LFO Phase Phs Trml Phs LR Trml LR Selec
316. f for some reason notes become stuck and will not stop sounding you can usually stop the sound by changing the mode If notes played via MIDI are stuck you can discon nect the MIDI cable MIDI transmits a message called Active Sensing FE at reg ular intervals A device that receives this message will be aware that an external MIDI device is transmitting to it Sub sequently if no MIDI messages are received for a certain interval of time the receiving device will decide that the connection has been broken and will turn off any notes that had been sounded via MIDI and reset its controller values Playing the X50 microX multi timbrally from an external device The X50 microX can be connected to an external device and played multi timbrally in the following ways MIDI messages from the external device can play a combination 8 part multi timbral performance You can change the overall settings programs levels and effects by using program change messages to switch combinations MIDI messages from the external device can be used to play a multi set 16 part multi timbral performance Overall settings programs levels effects etc can be changed by using a Song Select message to switch multi sets If you re using Multi mode as a 16 channel multi timbral sound module you will normally set Multi Mode GLOBAL 0 2a to Ext Seq Synchronizing the playback of the arpeggiator The choice of whether the X50 microX
317. f you wish to apply the effect to a higher range sound set this parameter to a higher value to apply the effect to a lower range sound set this to a lower value EFFECT h Resonance This parameter sets the intensity of resonance for the voice pat tern A larger value will add more character to the sound 111 112 14 St Decimator Stereo Decimator This effect creates a rough sound like a cheap sampler by low ering the sampling frequency and data bit length You can also simulate noise unique to a sampler aliasing Stereo In Stereo Out Left Wet Dry Pre LPF Resolution High Damp Output Level N Decimator g gt Sampling Frequency LFO AE N Fa Decimator N Pre LPF Resolution High Damp Output Level Right gt Wet Dry Pre LPF Off On Selects whether the harmonic noise caused by a decrease in sam pling frequency is generated or not 1S 0 100 High Damp Sets the ratio of cut of the high range 1 00k 48 00kHz Does Off Tempo Fs Sampling Frequency Sets the sampling frequency Source Selects the modulation source of the sampling frequency Amount 48 00k 48 00kHz Sets the modulation amount of the sampling frequency Resolution 4 24 Sets the data bit length ps Level Output Level 0 100 Sets the output level r gt prer Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the output level Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation
318. fect is a combination of the Exciter which adds a punch to the sound and the Enhancer which adds spread and pres ence Stereo In Stereo Out Lett Wet Dry LEQ HEQ z Exciter EQ Trim EQ Trim Blend Exciter Blend Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect 100 100 S Dna Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the Exciter intensity Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the Exciter intensity Point Emphatic Point 0 70 Sets the frequency to be emphasized Dae Off Tempo Source Selects the modulation source of the frequency to be emphasized Amount 70 70 Sets the amount of modulation of the frequency to be emphasized Enh Dly L Enhancer Delay L 0 0 50 0ms Sets the delay time for the Enhancer left channel Enh Dly R Enhancer Delay R msec 0 0 50 0ms Sets the delay time for the Enhancer right channel Enh Dep Enhancer Depth 0 100 Sets the determines to what degree the Enhancer effect is applied D Source Selects the modulation source of the Enhancer width Off Tempo Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the Enhancer width Pre EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain 0 100 15 0 15 0dB Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain Sets the gain of High EQ W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds 15 0 15 0dB Dry
319. ff EXT EX2 This shows the MIDI and internal tone generator status for each track Ch 01 16 Gch This shows the MIDI channel number specified for the tim bre B 0 2 UTILITY t Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 Select by Category Combi Category Prog T1 T8 Category Combinations or the programs used by each timbre can be selected by category If you have selected Combi Select selecting Utility Select by Category will access the Combi Category dialog box allowing you to select a combination by category 1 p 35 If you have selected Program Select selecting Utility Select by Category will access the Prog T1 T8 Category dialog box allowing you to select a program for each timbre by category For the procedure of selecting by category refer to p 2 0 3 MIX Mixer Here you can set the pan and volume for each timbre 1 8 COHEI 0 Pla Hixer combi select 0 3a Tal Hag1 s5tereoPrano mtit Status INT Ch Gch combi JI Frog Jl hin Mare m IL Arp E 0 3a Pan Volume Pan RND L001 C064 R127 Sets the pan for each timbre 1 8 L001 C064 R127 A setting of L001 is far left and R127 is far right A setting of C064 will reproduce the pan setting that was made for the oscillator in Program mode c OSC1 Amp1 Pan L001 e O OSC2 Amp2 Pan R127 Lage Center Right Center Right OSC1 Amp1 Pan L032 OSC2 Amp2 Pan R096 Pan CC 10 Pan CC 10
320. ffect 2 on off A value of 0 will be off and a value of 1 127 will be the original setting This is controlled on the global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 12 Master Effect 1 2 00 89 name Indicates the effect type for master effect 1 2 You can select from 89 types of effect 01 St Amp Sim 89 Reverb Gate If 00 No Effect is selected the output from the master effect will be muted Rtn 1 2 Return 1 2 000 127 Adjusts the return levels from the master effects to the L R bus main output L MONO R 9 1b Chain MFX Chain Off On On checked Chain series connection will be turned on for MFX1 and MEX2 rz p 102 Off unchecked MFX 1 and MFX2 are operating in parallel Direction Chain Direction IMFX1 MFX2 MFX2 gt MFX1 Specifies the direction of the connection when MFX1 and MFX2 are chained MFX1 MEX2 Connect from MFEX1 to MFX2 MFX2 gt MEX1 Connect from MFX2 to MFX1 Signal Chain Signal L R Mix L Only R Only When chain is On this parameter specifies how the stereo output signal of the first master effect will be connected to the input mono of the next master effect L R Mix The stereo output L R of the first master effect will be mixed before being input to the next master effect L Only R Only Only the left or right channel of the output will be input to the next master effect Level Chain Level 000 127 Sets the send level from the first master
321. fied gate time Step This is available when a user arpeggio pattern U000 U250 is selected for Pattern When this is selected the gate time specified for each step will be used The gate time can also be controlled by the REALTIME CONTROLS C mode ARP GATE knob Rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the gate time and rotating it toward the right will lengthen the gate time When the knob is at the 12 o clock position the gate time will be as specified here Velocity 001 127 Key Step Specifies the velocity of the notes in the arpeggio 001 127 Each note will sound with the specified velocity value Key Each note will sound with the velocity value at which it was actually played Step This is available when a user arpeggio pattern U000 U250 is selected for Pattern When this is selected the velocity specified for each step will be used The velocity can also be controlled by the REALTIME CON TROLS C mode ARP VELOCITY knob Rotating the knob toward the left will decrease the velocity and rotating it toward the right will increase the velocity When the knob is at the 12 o clock position the velocity will be as specified here Swing 100 100 This parameter shifts the timing of the odd numbered notes of the arpeggio When Resolution Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A A A 29 A A A Lb OD ei 45 1 NT N 50 x 25 125 x 125 x Swing Sort Off On This specifies the order i
322. fies the depth and direction of the effect that the time varying changes created by the filter 1 EG will have on the filter 1A cutoff frequency With positive settings the sound will become brighter when the EG levels set by Filter 1 EG L Level parameters and T Time parameters 4 5a are in the area and darker when they are in the area With negative settings the sound will become darker when the EG levels set by Filter 1 EG L Level parameters and T Time parameters are in the area and brighter 44 7 when they are in the area Int to B Intensity to B 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that the time varying changes created by the filter 1 EG will have on the filter 1B cutoff frequency es Int to A Intensity to A Vel to A Velocity to A 99 99 This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that velocity will have on the time varying changes created by the filter 1 EG as set by Filter 1 EG 4 5 to control the filter 1A cutoff frequency With positive values playing more strongly will cause the filter 1 EG to produce greater changes in cutoff fre quency With negative values playing more strongly will also cause the filter 1 EG to produce greater changes in cut off frequency but with the polarity of the EG inverted Vel to B Velocity to B 99 99 This parameter specifies the depth
323. fter the slope time has elapsed until note off occurs R Release Level 99 99 Specifies the change in cutoff frequency that will occur when the release time has elapsed T Time parameters These parameters specify the time over which each change will occur A Attack Time 00 99 Specifies the time over which the level will change from note on until the attack level is reached D Decay Time 00 99 Specifies the time over which the level will change from the attack level to the break point level C 19 S Slope Time 00 99 Specifies the time over which the level will change after the decay time has elapsed until the sustain level is reached R Release Time 00 99 Specifies the time over which the level will change after note on occurs until the release level is reached 4 5b Level Mod Level Modulation These settings let you use alternate modulation to control the L Level parameters of the filter 1 EG AMS Level Mod AMS Off KT EXT Indicates the source that will control the L Level parame ters of the filter 1 EG p 152 AMS List I AMS Intensity 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS Level Mod AMS will have With a setting of 0 the levels specified by Filter 1 EG 4 5a will be used no additional effect is produced For example if AMS Level Mod AMS is Velocity and you set 5
324. fy here will be used EXT This is shown if MIDI Clock is Ext MIDI or Ext USB or if set to Auto and the X50 microX is operating as a slave The internal tempo will synchronize to the MIDI clock being received from an external sequencer or other device You can also set this parameter from the 7 Arp Ctrls Setup page X50 You can set the tempo by tapping the ENTER button several times at the desired timing Alternatively if GLO BAL 0 3 Foot page Foot SW Assign is set to Tap Tempo you can specify the tempo by tapping your foot on a pedal switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack microX If GLOBAL 0 3 Foot page Foot 5W Assign is set to Tap Tempo you can specify the tempo by tapping your foot on a pedal switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack Multi Information X50 This area shows information about the selected multi set This indicates the functions that are assigned to SW1 and SW2 and REALTIME CONTROLS B mode ASSIGN ABLE 1 4 knobs microX This area shows information about the selected multi set This indicates the functions that are assigned to the REALTIME CONTROLS B mode ASSIGNABLE 1 4 knobs B 0 1 UTILITY F Select bu Category For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Write Multi If you wish to save a multi set be sure to write it into the memory of the X50 microX An edited multi set cannot be recovered if you do not w
325. g Compressor Y wx Parametric 4Band EQ Comp Zf A Trim Output Level i a a Dri Dry Envelope Control CMP Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity Attack Sets the attack level 1 100 t Fx 02 0 100 t Fx 02 0 100 Level Output Level Sets the compressor output level PEQ Trim Sets the parametric EQ input level Routing CMP PEQ PEQ CMP Switches the order of the compressor and parametric EQ connection B1 Band1 Cutoff 20 1 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 1 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 18dB Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 1 B2 Band2 Cutoff Sets the center frequency of Band 2 50 5 00kHz 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 418dB Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 2 67 C F W D Cho FIng Wet Dry Sets the center frequency for Band 3 Q Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 Gain a me gain of Band 3 B4 Band4 Cutoff an the center frequency for Band 4 Cope ee the bandwidth of Band 4 Mo gum EE Mo gum EE e gain of Band 4 W D Wet Dly Sets e balance between the effect and dry sounds Source Dr MM nid the modulation source of the effect balance po i il po i il the ee amount of the effect balance Comp Cho Fl 300 10 00kHz 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 18dB 500 20 00kHz Cope ee 10 0 t Fx 06 18 418dB Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Dus m
326. gain of High EQ WAH FreqBtm Frequency Bottom Sets the lower limit of the wah center frequency 15 15dB 15 15dB 0 100 t Fx 09 0 100 t Fx 09 Swp Mode Sweep Mode Auto Dmod LFO Selects the control from auto wah modulation source and LFO gt Fx 09 Dude Src Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the wah when Swp Mode Dmod Hot LFO Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Res Resonance Sets the resonance amount LPF Low Pass Filter Switches the wah low pass filter on and off Routing CMP WAH WAH CMP Switches the order of the compressor and wah connection W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dine Off Tempo Top Frequency Top Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 137 EFFECT 138 64 Comp AmpSim Compressor Amp Simulation This effect combines a mono type compressor and an amp simulation You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Ao Routing Wet Dry Compressor Y N Amp Simulation EQ Trim LEQ HEQ Z H C compa Output Level Amp Simulation Filter Right gt Envelope Control CMP Sensitivity Sets the sensi
327. gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain 15 15dB Sets the gain of High EQ CMP Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity Attack 1 100 Sets the attack level t Fx 02 0 100 t Fx 02 DE XCT5CMP CMP gt XCT DE the order of the exciter and compressor connection W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D s Off Ee nis Level Output Level Sets the compressor output level Source Ee nis the modulation source of the effect balance po BELL 100 100 po BELL the ene amount of the effect balance Exct Limiter Exciter Limiter This effect combines a mono type exciter and a limiter You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Right Routing Exciter Y N Limiter EQ Trim LEQ HEQ Gain Adjust o i CRUDO Envelope Control 100 100 r gt Ex 11 0 70 r gt Ex 11 0 100 XCT Blend Exciter Blend Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Emphatic Point Sets the frequency range to be emphasized Pre EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ 15 415dB 15 15dB HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain Sets the gain of High EQ LMT Ratio Sets the signal compression ratio Threshld Threshold Sets the level above which the compressor is applied G
328. gative value harmon ics will be changed and resonance will occur at a pitch one octave lower When Ctrl LFO the intensity of resonance varies according to the LFO The LFO sways between positive and negative values causing resonance to occur between specified pitches an octave apart in turn When Ctrl Dmod the resonance is controlled by the dynamic modulation source If JS X or Rbn 16 is assigned as the modula tion source the pitch an octave higher and lower can be con trolled similar to when LFO is selected for Control Mode a Invert When Ctrl LFO or Dmod the controlled phase of either Voice 1 or 2 will be reversed When the resonance pitch is set for Voice 1 Resonance has a positive value Voice 2 will resonate at a pitch an octave below Resonance has a negative value d V1 Pitch d Fine g V2 Pitch g Fine The Pitch parameter specifies the pitch of resonance by note name The Fine parameter allows for fine adjustment in steps of cents e HiDamp h HiDamp This parameter sets the damping amount of resonant sound in the high range Lower values will make a metallic sound with a higher range of harmonics 30 Doppler This effect simulates the Doppler effect of a moving sound with a changing pitch similar to the siren of an passing ambulance Mixing the effect sound with the dry sound will create a unique chorus effect Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In S
329. ge over which the volume will change DI These settings do not affect MIDI transmission All note data produced by the arpeggiator will be transmitted 6 1 Vel 8 Velocity Zone TOL 08 6 2 Vel 16 Velocity Zone T09 16 MULTI 6 Uel Zone Vel Top Velocity trin TE MFLEE 6 1b ETIE Glatus ETH Ch 816 r i Base Standard Kit 1 Sgr erugeet D 1 2 a Velocity Zone Map 1 This shows the range of velocities that will sound the cur rently selected track The velocity range that will be sounded is shown as a line and the slope portion is grayed 6 1 2 b Top Velocity Bottom Velocity Top Velocity 001 127 Specifies the maximum velocity that will be sounded by each track 1 8 9 16 Bottom Velocity 001 127 Specifies the minimum velocity that will be sounded by each track 1 8 9 16 A It is not possible to set the bottom velocity greater than the top velocity for the same timbre Nor can the top slope and the bottom slope overlap X50 The value of these parameters can also be set by hold ing down the ENTER button and playing a note on a con nected MIDI instrument B 6 1 2 UTILITY is Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 6 3 Slp 8 Velocity Slope T01 08 6 4 Slp 16 Velocity Slope T09 16 AG UA 6 3a BES BBB 6 3 4 a Top Slope Bottom Slope Top Slope 000 120 Specifies the range of values over which the volume will be adjusted from the top velocity
330. grams in three rewritable banks A B C each containing 128 combinations Preloaded combinations X50 Use the front panel COMBI BANK A C buttons to select the bank microX Use the front panel COMBINATION A C but tons to select the bank If you press one of the COMBINA TION A C buttons you will automatically enter Combination mode regardless of the mode in which you were Combi Select Combination Select 0 127 name Here you can select a combination Choose this parameter and use one of the following methods to select a combina tion X50 e Turn the VALUE dial e Use the INC DEC buttons e Use the numeric buttons 0 9 to enter a program number and press the ENTER button to finalize the number 33 34 e Press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight the field then use V to select a program and press the center to finalize your selection 10s HOLD amp p 34 e Use COMBI BANK A C to select a bank r p 33 e Use Cat HOLD to select by category r p 34 e Use Select by Category to select by category 1 p 34 e Use the foot switch r p 80 164 e Receive a MIDI program change r p 171 microX e Turn the VALUE dial Press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight the field then use A V to select a program and press the center to finalize your selection e Use Select by Category to select by category 1 p 34 e Use the
331. hannel R Dly Bottom R Delay Bottom 0 0 50 0ms Sets the lower limit of the delay time on the right channel Fx 09 R Dly Top R Delay Top 0 0 50 0ms Sets the upper limit of the delay time on the right channel Fx 09 Swp Mode Sweep Mode EG Dmod Determines whether the flanger is controlled by the envelope gener ator or by the modulation source Dyer Src Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that triggers the EG when EG is selected for Swp Mode or modulation source that causes the flanger to sweep when Dmod is selected for Swp Mode EG Attack 1 100 Sets the EG attack speed par EG Decay 1 100 Sets the EG decay speed Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount t Fx 20 High Damp 0 100 Sets the feedback damping amount in the high range w Fx 20 W D Wet Dly Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds i Fx 10 20 Dime Off Tempo j Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance e Swp Mode e Src This parameter switches the flanger control mode With Swp Mode EG the flanger will sweep using the envelope generator This envelope generator is included in the envelope flanger and not related to the Pitch EG Filter EG or Amp EG The Src parameter selects the source that starts the envelope generator If you select for example Gate
332. he shimmering speed Stereo In Stereo Out Left o L Righto A o Wet Dry LFO Tri Sine 3 sl LFO Shape AutoFadeg Fade In Delay LFO Wave LFO Waveform Selects LFO Waveform Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed i Fx 20 LFO Freq Mod LFO Frequency Mod Dmod AUTOFADE Switches between Dmod and AUTOFADE for the LFO frequency modulation ps 0 02 20 00Hz r gt Fx 09 Dese Off Tempo Triangle Sine Freq LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Source Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes r Fx 09 eye BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo ix Ex 09 Base Base Note A 45 2 45 4 J dy 0 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed ix Ex 09 1 16 t Fx 09 Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Dims Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the LFO modulation depth Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth AUTOFADE Src AUTOFADE Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that starts AutoFade D mos Fade Rate Fade In Rate 1 100 Sets the rate of fade in Dly Fade In Delay 00 2000ms Sets the fade in delay time ps W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99
333. he 8 Ed InsertFX Setup page will not be copied DKit IFX Patch DrumKit IFX Patch This command changes the BUS Select settings for each key of the drum kit so that connections to the IFX are tem porarily changed to L R This can be executed only if the program specified for a timbre is a drum program and the BUS Select 8 1a setting is DKit and the BUS Select GLOBAL 4 32 for each key of the drum kit is IEN CD Select DKit IFX Patch to access the dialog box Drumkit IF Patch CTinbred Drumkit IES At the right of DrumKit IFX select L R as the patch destination 3 To execute Drum Kit Insert Effect Patch press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CAN CEL button To return the drum kit to its original state execute IFX gt IFX 8 2 Setup Here you can select the type of insert effect turn it on off etc 8 2b LUHEBIS Ed InzertF x t Inzert Effect 8 2a Eee ee gt coed LAR 51 127 52 127 iG ch 8 2c 1lgadg5h7H 8 2a Ed InsertFX Setup IFX On Off Off On Insert Effect 00 89 name Pan CC 8 L000 C064 R127 BUS Select L R 1 2 1 2 Off S1 Send1 MFX1 000 127 S2 Send2 MFX2 000 127 These parameters are the same as in Program mode PROG 8 2 However dynamic modulation Dmod of the insert effect and the Pan CC 8 Send1 MFX1 and Send2 MFX2 that follow the insert effect will be controlled on the Con
334. he Filter A Frequency A Frequency 4 1b AMS2 Filter AAMS2 Off PEG AEG EXT Intensity A AMS2 Intensity 99 99 Selects AMS2 Filter A AMS2 and specify the depth and direction of the effect that the selected source will have rz AMSI Intensity 4 3b Filter B Modulation This will be displayed when Type Filter Type 4 1a is Low Pass amp High Pass Two alternate modulation sources can be used to modulate the cutoff frequency of filter 1B Filter A Modulation B 4 3 UTILITY ws Write Program 0 1 Copy Oscillator Swap Oscilla tor 1 1 4 4 IfoMod LFO Modulation Here you can use the filter 1 LFO to apply cyclic modulation to the cutoff frequency of filter 1 for oscillator 1 to create cyclical changes in tone PROG d Ed Filter1 LEO Mod LFoi Int to A Filter LFOIf Hodulation LFO Intensity t B BB to B 466 AMS Off J5 Int ta A 18 to B 488 Int to A 868 B App 4 4a Filter LFO1 Modulation Intensity to A LFO1 Int to A 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the modulation that OSC1 LFOI set by OSC1 LFO1 3 1a will have on the cut off frequency of filter 1A Negative settings will invert the phase Intensity to B LFO1 Int to B 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the modulation that OSC1 LFOI will have on the cutoff frequency of filter 1B Intensity to A LFOI Int to A
335. he data To set the MIDI channel of the transmitting device refer to the owner s manual for that device 3 Turn check the Exclusive setting 1 1b 4 Transmit the data from the other device For the proce dure refer to the owner s manual for the device you are using While the data is being received the display will indicate Now received MIDI data GLOBAL 2 User Scale Here you can create sixteen User Octave Scales and one User All Notes Scale The user scales you create here can be selected in the PROG 1 1 COMBI 2 4 MULTI 2 7 8 A If you wish to keep an edited user scale after the power is turned off be sure to write save your settings This data is written by the Utility Write Global Set ting 2 1 Octave GLOBAL 27 User Scale User Octave EE ci Dit Fit utt Hi 24a H App HH 66 88 Cbeu E F A E TB n 656 66 60 App Octave D ul 2 la User Octave Scale User Octave 00 15 Select the user octave scale that you wish to edit Tune 99 99 Specifies the scale for one octave of notes When you adjust the pitch of each note in the octave C B in one cent steps your settings will be applied to all octaves This adjustment is relative to equal temperament A setting of 99 lowers the pitch approximately a semitone below normal pitch A setting of 99 raises the pitch approximately a semitone above normal pitch Use the ClickPoint lt 4 P to s
336. he depth of the LFO settings you make here v p 14 Filter1 4 Ed Filter1 Filter 1 tone settings Filter EG settings v p 16 Filter2 5 Ed Filter2 Filter 2 tone settings Filter EG settings v p 21 Amp1 2 6 Ed Amp1 2 Amp 1 and Amp 2 volume settings Amp EG pan position settings vx p 21 Arp Controls 7 Ed Arp Ctrls Arpeggiator settings Shared with 0 Play parameters You may edit either Controller settings p 25 Insert Effect 8 Ed InsertFX Select the BUS and master effect send level for the oscillator output Insert Effect routing selection and set tings r p 28 Master Effect 9 Ed MasterFX Master Effect selection and settings Mas ter EQ settings vx p 30 PROG 0 Play In this display page you can select and play programs DI All MIDI data in PROG 0 Play is transmitted and received on the Global MIDI Channel r GLOBAL 1 1a 0 1 Program X50 Frogram Proaram Select Frogram Proaram Select Category ga STousSunth 4 188 000 Kombat DEE EE EE EES Porta Time Knob Mod 2 knob Hod S knob od d 0 1a Bank Program Select Category Cat Hold 10 s Hold Tempo Bank X50 Bank A D G g d microX Bank A E G g d This is the program bank display X50 Use the PROG BANK A GM buttons to select the bank The X50 provides rewritable banks A B C and D each containing 128 programs total 512 As for non rewrit able program areas it provi
337. he effect balance is 10 90 As you apply After Touch the percentage of the effect sound will increase When After Touch is at its maximum the effect balance will be 60 40 Dynamic Modulation Example Wet Dry A Wet Dry 10 90 p Amt 50 O Wet Dry 60 40 Amt 50 amp The dynamic modulation effect will not be affected if you modify the Amount value while dynamic mod ulation is being applied The change will become effec tive when you operate the dynamic modulation source again Refer to the corresponding effect section for an explanation of other dynamic modulation parameters In the table of parameters for each effect dynamic modula tion parameters are marked by a DZ symbol at the right of the parameter 157 Appendices 158 Dynamic Modulation Source List Source name Off Gate G1 Dmp Gate1 Damper Gate2 G2 Dmp Gate2 Damper Note No Note Number Vel Velocity AfterT After Touch X50 PBend microX JS X Joy Stick X X50 M Whlit microX JS Y Joy Stick Y CC 01 JS Y 2 Joy Stick Y CC 02 Pdl 4 Foot Pedal CC 04 FX1 12 FX Control CC 12 FX2 13 FX Control2 CC 13 Rbn 16 Ribbon CC 16 Sld 18 Value Slider CC 18 Kb1 17 Knob Mod1 CC 17 Kb2 19 Knob Mod2 CC 19 Kb3 20 Knob Mod3 CC 20 Kb4 21 Knob Mod4 CC 21 Kb1 Knob Mod1 CC 17 Kb2 Knob Mod2 CC 19 Kb3 Knob Mod3 CC 20 Kb4 Knob Mod4 CC 21 Dmp 64 Damp
338. he left and right This is especially effective when the effect sound and dry sound output from stereo speakers are mixed Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Wet Dry gt Pitch Shifter Pitch Shift 100 100cent Sets the pitch difference from the input signal us LFO Wave LFO Waveform Triangle Square Selects LFO Waveform Freq LFO Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed r Fx 09 D z lt Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes rx Fx 09 eyes BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo r Ex 09 Base Base Note D ds D ds d 45 J 0 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed ix Ex 09 Times 1 16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed r Fx 09 Depth 100 100 Sets the LFO modulation depth for pitch shift amount Dames Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the depth of modulation Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the depth of modulation L 1 99 99 1 R Sets the panning effect sound and dry sound separately W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dames Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 1
339. he modulation caused by a warped turntable Stereo In Stereo Out Left A Wet Dry Z Simulation Z Ee EQ Trim Pre EQ Right CH Wet Dry Speed 33 1 3 45 78RPM Sets the r p m of a record Flutter 0 100 Sets the modulation depth us Pre EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the EQ input level EQ Pre EQ Cutoff Sets the EQ center frequency Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the EQ band width G Gain Sets the EQ gain 300 10 00kHz 18 0 18 0dB Noise Density 0 100 Sets the noise density Noise Tone 0 100 Sets the noise tone 0 100 D Off Tempo NoiseLv Noise Level Sets the noise level Source Selects the modulation source for the noise level Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the noise level ClickLvl Click Level Sets the click noise level 0 100 S Dyer Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the click noise level Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the click noise level W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D s Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance b Flutter This parameter enables you to set the depth of the modulation caused by a warped turntable h ClickLvl This parameter enables you to set the level of the click noise that Occurs o
340. he modulation amount of the depth of modulation W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Du Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Pre LPF This parameter enables you to set the damping amount of the high range sound input to the ring modulator If the input sound contains lots of harmonics the effect may sound dirty In this case cut a certain amount of high range b OSC Mode This parameter determines whether or not the oscillator fre quency follows the note number c F This parameter sets the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode is set to Fixed d Note Offset d Fine These parameters for the oscillator are used when OSC Mode is set to Note Key Follow The Note Offset sets the pitch differ ence from the original note in semitone steps The Fine parame ter fine adjusts the pitch in cent steps Matching the oscillator frequency with the note number produces a ring modulation effect in the correct key 37 Detune Using this effect you can obtain a detune effect that offsets the pitch of the effect sound slightly from the pitch of the input signal Compared to the chorus effect a more natural sound thickness will be created 38 Pitch Shifter This effect changes the pitch of the input signal You can select from three types Fast quick response
341. he sound to move toward the right as the note numbers increase beyond the C4 note i e as you play higher and toward the left as the note numbers decrease i e as you play lower Negative values of this parameter will have the opposite effect B 6 1 UTILITY ws Write Program 0 1 Copy Oscillator Swap Oscilla tor 1 1 6 2 Mod Amp1 Modulation These settings allow you to apply modulation to amp 1 for oscillator 1 to modulate the volume FROG b Ed flimpl Z Hod KEDTrE Key Low Keyboard Track keyg Lott ets High Ce Melacitu Int 66 AMS RnobhM2 19 Int 24 Int 433 Int App LEO Mod Intensity LFO Mod Intensity i tG H GM 2 21 66 he ott 6 2a Keyboard Track These parameters let you use keyboard tracking to adjust the volume of oscillator 1 Use the Key and Ramp parameters to specify how the volume will be affected by the position on the keyboard of the note that you play Key Keyboard Track Key Specifies the note number at which keyboard tracking will begin to apply The volume will not change between Low KBDTrk Key Low and High KBDTrk Key High X50 You can also input a value by playing a note on the keyboard while you hold down the ENTER button Low KBDTrk Key Low C 1 G9 Keyboard tracking will apply to the range of notes below the note number you specify here High KBDTrk Key High C 1 G9 Keyboard tracking will ap
342. he track specified as the Control Track 0 1a the X50 microX will be controlled and the same data will also be transmitted via MIDI EXT MIDI messages will be transmitted without sounding the track If the arpeggiator are assigned to a track that is set to EXT MIDI data will be transmitted to an external device but the tone generator of the X50 microX will not sound If the X50 microX s controllers are operated on the track spec ified as the Control Track 0 1a MIDI messages will also be transmitted to control the external device but the X50 microX itself will not be controlled If Multi Mode GLOBAL 0 22 is set to for Master the program change volume pan portamento send 1 2 post IFX pan and post IFX send 1 2 settings for tracks set to EXT will be transmitted via MIDI EX2 Bank EX2 MSP and Bank EX2 LSB will be enabled Instead of the A g d bank numbers that can be selected on the X50 microX the bank number you specify here will be transmitted In other respects this is the same as EXT MIDI MIDI data is transmitted and received on the MIDI channel that is specified separately for each track by MIDI Channel MULTI 61 62 Status Internaltone MIDI OUT Internaltone MIDI OUT generator USB generator USB pm o go ox qoe qx xee x BH e m MIDI Channel 01 16 Specifies the MIDI data that the track will use to transmit and receive MIDI data T
343. hen a control change is received from the ribbon controller or other assigned controller of a MIDI instrument such as the TRITON Extreme the specified effect e g alternate modulation or dynamic modulation will be applied e n Combination or Multi modes transmission and reception can be turned on off for each timbre track Ribbon CC 16 COMBI 3 4a MULTI 3 7 8 a Controller CC 18 Bn 12 vv When the VALUE slider of MIDI instruments such as the TRITON Extreme or a control change assigned to a control ler is received the specified alternate modulation or dynamic modulation effect will be applied Controlling the tone envelope of a program CC 70 control specific parameters of a program For details on the program parameters that correspond to each control change and how this instrument will respond in each mode when these are received refer to X50 microX operations when control changes are transmitted received p 168 Low pass filter cutoff CC 74 Bn 4A vv Resonance level High pass filter cutoff CC 71 Bn 47 vv Filter EG intensity CC 79 Bn 4F vv Release time CC 72 Bn 48 vv These messages are transmitted when you operate this instrument s REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs in A mode They can also be set as B mode functions Sustain level CC 70 Bn 46 vv Attack time CC 73 Bn 49 vv Decay time CC 75 Bn 4B vv LFO 1 speed CC 76 Bn 4C vv LFO 1 depth pitch CC
344. hese parameters specify the length of time over which the pitch change will occur A Attack Time 0 99 Specifies the time over which the pitch will change from note on until it reaches the pitch specified as the attack level D Decay Time 0 99 Specifies the time over which the pitch will change after reaching the attack level until it reaches the normal pitch R Release Time 0 99 Specifies the time over which the pitch will change from note off until it reaches the pitch specified as the release level 2 5b Level Mod Level Modulation These settings allow the pitch EG L Level parameters to be controlled by alternate modulation AMS1 Level Mod AMS1 Off KT EXT Selects the source that will control the pitch EG L Level parameters r p 152 AMS List I AMSI Intensity 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect applied by AMSI Level Mod AMS1 With a setting of 0 the levels specified by Pitch EG 2 5a will be used If AMS1 is set to Velocity increasing the absolute value of Intensity will produce increasingly wider change in pitch EG levels for strongly played notes The direction of the change is specified by 5 AMS1 SW Start and A AMS1 SW Attack As you play more softly the pitch change will draw closer to the pitch EG levels X50 For example if AMS1 Level Mod AMS1 is set to SW1 80 and 7 3b SW1 2 Assign
345. his message will be transmitted when the knob is operated SW1 modulation CC 80 Bn 50 vv SW2 modulation CC 81 Bn 51 vv X50 If the above CC are assigned as the function of SW1 or SW2 operating the switch will transmit this message with vv 127 7F for ON and vv 00 00 for OFF These can also be set as the B mode functions of the REALTIME CON TROL knobs 1 4 microX If you assign the above CC as the function of the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH or a REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knob B mode function operating that control of the microX will transmit the specified CC e n Combination and Multi modes transmission reception of these messages can be turned on off independently for each timbre track SW1 2 COMBI 4 3a MULTI 4 5 6 a Foot switch CC 82 Bn 52 vv If the above CC is assigned as the function of the ASSIGN ABLE SWITCH operating the switch will transmit this mes sage with vv 127 7F for ON and vv 00 00 for OFF This can also be set as a B mode function of the REALTIME CONTROL knobs 1 4 e In Combination and Multi modes transmission reception of this message can be turned on off independently for each timbre track Foot Pedal Switch microX COMBI 4 3a MULTI 4 5 6 a X50 COMBI 4 4a MULTI 4 7 8 a When Foot controller CC704 Foot switch CC 82 are operated on the X50 microX the specified alternate modu lation or dynamic modulation etc will be controlled When
346. ied A If you copy from an insert effect the result may not be identical due to differences in routing and level set tings 4 In To select the copy destination master effect 5 To execute the Copy Master Effect command press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CAN CEL button Swap Master Effect This command swaps exchanges the settings of MFX1 and MEX2 CD Select Swap Master Effect to access the dialog box Swap Master Effect tantel OK 2 To execute the Swap Master Effect command press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CAN CEL button Select by Category Selects master effects by category For the procedure refer to Select by Category r p 2 MFA1 Category 46 Filter Oynamic Filter Dun4 lER Delag r pgpoppoHo Effect Pitch heh IReuerb Bus 1i E pp Sim AAD St COMpressor Mad P Shft 83005 St Limiter aad agd band Limit WA This command is valid when the 9 1a parameters are on ser Ea mn 9 2 MFX1 Master Effect1 9 3 MFX 2 Master Effect2 Indicates effect parameter settings for the MFX1 and 2 effects that were selected in the Setup page rv p 104 PROG S Ed MasterFA 7 MFEZI S5t Chorus RIZEUEFIPEL OY Sams ROY 18 85 4168 deg Depth 56 Kbi ir 7 8 Freq a 5aH2 Ott 46 28 Pre EQ Trim au BPM MIO Sync Off BPPh 12B LoED 2 60B HIER ro pdb Bate J Times 1 WO 35 65 Fb3g20 7 55 MIDI Effect dynamic modulation Dmod i
347. ifter mode Shift Pitch Shift Source Amount Sets the modulation amount of pitch shift amount Fine Sets the pitch shift amount by steps of a cent Amount Sets the modulation amount of pitch shift amount Delay Delay Time Sets the delay time Feedback Position Switches the feedback connection Feedback Sets the feedback amount HiDamp High Damp Sets the damping amount in the high range InLvi Mod Input Level Dmod Sets the modulation amount of the input level Src Source Selects the modulation source for the input level Sets the pitch shift amount by steps of a semitone Selects the modulation source of pitch shift amount 7 Wet Dry Slow Medium Fast IS 24 24 S Dreger Off Tempo IS 24 424 IS 100 100cent S D 100 100cent IS 0 1000ms Pre Post IS 100 100 IS 0 100 100 100 c Fx 37 Due Off Tempo w Fx 37 This parameter sets the dynamic modulation of the input level Input Level D mod Input Level A Input Level A DE Amt 50 x1 0 Amtz 50 Amtz 100 Amtz 100 S x05 S x0 5 ai 3 5 Das High igher d Higher Max W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dag Off Tempo EFFECT Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance 100 100 Amount Sets the modulation am
348. ign a function to SW1 The on off status of the switch is saved when the program is written When you change the function it will be reset to the off state SW1 Mode Toggle Momentary Specifies the on off behavior of SW1 Toggle The switch will alternate on off each time you press SW1 Momentary The switch will be on only while you continue holding SW1 SW2 Assign NES Off Pitch Bend Lock SW2 Mode Toggle Momentary Here you can assign a function to SW2 The functions that can be assigned to SW2 are the same as for SW1 with the exception of SW2 Mod CC 81 instead of SW1 Mod CC 80 B 7 3 UTILITY is Write Program 0 1 27 28 PROG 8 Ed InsertFX t For details on insertion effect refer to p 97 6 Effect Guide 8 1 BUS These settings specify the bus on which the output of the oscillator will be sent and adjust the send levels to the mas ter effects The following diagram shows the LCD screen when Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a is set to Single or Double PROG Ed InsertFx BUS BUS Select BUS Select GUS Select AT OSCE ois MFA Send mehi ns oil L SS fernir ta Bertie ix i puru dare J Setup 8 la BUS BUS Select BUS Select All OSCs L R IFX 1 2 1 2 Off Specifies the bus to which oscillators 1 and 2 will be sent A If this is set to 1 2 the oscillator pan settings 6 1b 6 4 will be used to output the sound in stereo from
349. ill be invalid and the drumsamples of the key to the right will sound At this time the pitch will be a semitone lower than the pitch of the key to the right Uncheck this parameter when you wish to play a drumsample at differing pitches Level H Level High 99 99 Level L Level Low 99 99 Specifies the volume of the High and Low drumsamples Keys that are set to 99 will sound at a volume double that of the amp level of the program that uses this drum kit Keys that are set to 0 will sound at the amp level of the program that uses this drum kit Keys that are set to 99 will not sound Vel SW L H Velocity SW Lo Hi 001 127 Specifies the velocity value at which you will switch from the Low drumsample to the High drumsample Velocities above this value will sound the High drumsample and velocities below this value will sound the Low drumsample If you do not wish to use velocity switching set this to 001 and specify only the High drumsample Velocity SW LH PROG 1 2 3 a X50 You can also select a key by holding down the ENTER button and playing a note on the keyboard 4 1b High High Sample X50 000 517 name microX 000 928 name Indicates the High drumsample The sample selected here will be sounded by velocities above the Vel SW LH value Drumsample WA You can use the utility menu command Select by Cate gory to select drumsamples by category 1 4 1d A It is not p
350. impairing the character of the origi nal sound This controls the same parameters as Performance Editor Stretch Pitch Stretch 0 2b ep Ai Dtune 1 Detune 1 1200 0000 1200 Adjusts the tuning of program OSC 1 This controls the OSC1 Multisample Tune parameter 1 2c v p 8 Dtune 2 Detune 2 1200 0000 1200 Adjusts the tuning of program OSC 2 This controls the OSC2 Multisample Tune parameter 1 2c v p 8 A This is valid only if the program s Oscillator Mode 1 1a v p 6 is set to Double Hold Off PRG On Controls the program s Voice Assign Hold parameter 1 1b p 6 If you turn this Off the OSC1 2 Amp EG Release Time parameter will be set to 0 in order to make full use of the effect Normally you can make effective use of this with a drum program When you turn this Off the key off timing will be valid letting you use the key on off timing to control the gate time Sometimes you can obtain an interesting effect by turning this Off for a previously created drum track Reverse Off PRG On Controls the Rev Reverse parameter 1 1b p 8 GLO BAL 4 1b p 87 for each Multisample or Drumsample of program OSC1 2 If you turn this On all multisamples and drum samples will play backward If you turn this Off all multisamples and drum samples will play normally If you set this to PRG the settings of the program or the drum kit used by the pro gram will be used
351. ing toward either end of the keyboard will cause amp keyboard tracking to increase the volume and Reso AMS Resonance AMS to raise the resonance level e Youcan select a controller as the Reso AMS Resonance AMS and apply resonance when desired by operating the controller e You can select LFO1 or 2 as the Reso AMS Resonance AMS and use the LFO to modulate the resonance level LFO1 2 KT Flt KT Amp KT KT Note No 1 99 0 4 99 99 0 4 99 36 C2 60 C4 84 C6 dedicated parameter 1 0 41 Octave dedicated parameter _ 1 0 1 Octave 1 0 1 Octave 1 0 1 Octave 1 0 41 Octave dedicated parameter 99x2 0 99x2 dedicated parameter 127 0 4127 value x 1 64 1 64 value x 1 64 1 64 value x 1 64 1 64 value x 1 128 1 128 value x 1 64 1 64 Pitch Bend JS X Ribbon 16 Max 0 4Max 1 0 1 Octave 5 0 1 Octave 1 0 1 Octave 1 0 1 Octave 0 1 Octave 1 0 1 Octave 1 0 1 Octave 0 1 Octave 1 0 1 Octave 0 0 value x 0 1 8 99 0 99 63 0 63 99 0 99 value x 1 64 1 64 value x 1 64 1 64 Filter EG Intensity PROG 4 2b Filter EG intensity can be controlled by a controller or tempo etc You can use Int to A AMS Int to A and Int to B AMS Int to B to independently specify the in
352. ings to the currently selected program D Select Copy Oscillator to access the dialog box Copy Oscillator From OSC ABBR Portamento Pad Ta Cancel 2 In From select the oscillator that you wish to copy and the copy source program X50 You can use the PROG BANK A GM buttons to select a bank You can also use the numeric buttons 0 9 and ENTER button to select a program number In To select the copy destination oscillator 4 To execute the Copy Oscillator operation press MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CANCEL but ton Swap Oscillator This command exchanges the settings of oscillators 1 and 2 CD Select Swap Oscillator to access the dialog box Swap Oscillator tantel OK 2 To execute the Swap Oscillator operation press OMENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CANCEL but ton This can be selected only if Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a is Double 1 2 0SCI1 The multisample s waveform or drum kit on which the program will be based can be selected here for oscillator 1 and or oscillator 2 You can use the following multisamples X50 470 different multisamples 49 different drum kits microX 642 different multisamples 49 different drum kits The following illustration shows a LCD screen where Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a has been set to Double If this is set to Single the OSC2 page parameter will not appear and cannot be set
353. ion and settings rs p 72 Master Effect 9 MasterFX Master effect selection and settings Mas ter EQ settings rs p 73 Tone Adjust MULTI 0 Play Here you can select multis and make basic settings such as selecting the program used by each track 0 1 Multi This display shows the selected multi set the track that will be played from the keyboard and the assignments made to the REALTIME CONTROLS X50 Hulti ulti select Control Track TB 1 Drurms 128 000 Pop Balade wuunmumunuunauanaanasananaanananuananuunuaqn SC SH SL Mod tCH 20 BnebdE Modi BnobzE RMod gt 1 microX Hulti Multi select Control Track T1 0rumE 421zH 000 Pop Balade la nob 1 6 a LEET ERR ES ER i Knob Mod Ti Knob Mod 2i Knob Mod 5 Knob Mod d Frog 2lifrog tell Mis Hind EREE 0 1a Multi Select Control Track Tempo Multi Select 000 127 name Here you can select the multi set that you wish to use X50 e Turn the VALUE dial e Use the INC DEC buttons Use the numeric buttons 0 9 to enter a program number and press the ENTER button to finalize the number e Press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight the field then use Y to select a program and press the center to finalize your selection microX e Turn the VALUE dial Press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight the field then use A V to select a program and press the ce
354. ion of the instruments in the selected drum kit Unless you need to change this leave it at 0 Tune 1200 1200 This adjusts the pitch in one cent units The pitch of each drum kit can be adjusted in GLOBAL 4 DKit Delay 0000ms 5000ms KeyOff This specifies a delay time from note on until the sound will begin With a setting of KeyOff the sound will begin when note off occurs In this case set the Amp1 EG parameter S Sustain Level 6 3a to 0 B 1 2 UTILITY ws Write Program 0 1 Copy Oscillator Swap Oscilla tor 1 1 For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Select by Category Selects multisamples by category For the procedure refer to Select by Category p 2 H Smpl Category i4 0rum Wave set Ea Piand Bras Bass BE 1 op tides D jembe Basstone Ordal Chain Ethni SE 2 BS 2466 D jembe pen EE a53 467 Dance Perc a B54id63 Dance Pere b Kass ZEENHSIMI WA This command is valid if Mode Oscillator Mode 1 la is set to Single or Double and you have selected the 1 2b High Low parameter 1 3 08C2 This will appear when Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a is set to Double For details on the settings and function of the parameter refer to 1 2 OSC1 1 4 V Zone velocity Zone Specifies the range of velocities that will sound oscillator 1 and 2 By using these set
355. is mixed W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Always On Always Off Cross Fade i Ex 31 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet D zs Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Rec Mode b Reverse Time When Rec Mode is set to Single you can set up to 1320msec for Reverse Time If recording starts during the reverse playback the playback will be interrupted When Rec Mode is set to Multi you can make another record ing during the reverse playback However the maximum Reverse Time is limited to 660msec If you wish to record a phrase or rhythm pattern set Rec Mode to Single If you record only one note set Rec Mode to Multi The Reverse Time parameter specifies the maximum duration of the reverse playback The part in excess of this limit will not be played in reverse If you wish to add short pieces of the reverse playback of single notes make the Reverse Time shorter Rec Mode Reverse Time Reverse Rec Y t Reverse Envelope Select Input Rec Mode Multi p papa Reverse Time Reverse Time c Envelope c Src d Threshold These parameters select the source to control the start and end of recording When Envelope is set to Dmod the input signal will be recorded only when the value of the modulation source selected by the Src parameter is 64 or higher When
356. it and then edit them CD Select Copy Drum Kit to access the dialog box Copy Drum Eit From IST Standard Kit 1 2 Select the copy source drum kit From To execute the Copy Drum Kit command press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CAN CEL button Copy Key Setup This command copies the settings of an individual key to another key You can also copy settings from two or more contiguous keys at once CD Select Copy Key Setup to access the dialog box Copy Key Setup From Key HF c i Ta key C 1 Cancel 2 Specify the beginning of the range of keys to be copied From Key 3 Select the copy destination key To Key If you selected multiple keys in From Key they will be copied sequentially starting at To Key and extending upward 4 To execute the Copy Key Setup operation press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CAN CEL button Select by Category You can select drumsamples by category All drumsamples are grouped into one of sixteen categories For the procedure refer to Select by Category p 2 amp It is not possible to edit the name of a drumsample cate gory or to change the assigned category of a drumsam ple 4 2 LOW Low Sample GLOBAL d ODkit Drum Kit GEER Low Sample Orum Kit Standard Fit 1 C4 FlAssign Level H 99 L 99 424 Low 888 BD Dry 1 Trans 89 Tune Fe 488 Beso 98 B
357. itch bend range select Fine Tune 99 NRPN MSB 100 RPN LSB select Coarse Tune MSB of RPN 101 RPN MSB amp Any control change number CC 00 95 can be assigned as the B mode function of a REALTIME CON TROLS knob In this case the transmitted values will all be 0 127 1 Unlike conventional control changes pitch bend range fine tune and coarse tune settings are made using RPC Registered Parameter Control messages In Program Combination and Multi modes you can use RPC mes sages to control the bend range and tuning for each pro gram combination Combination or track Multi The procedure is to use an RPN Registered Parameter Num ber message to select the parameter that you wish to edit and then use Data Entry to input a value for that parameter To select the parameter use CC 100 with a value of 00 02 and CC 101 with a value of 00 use CC 06 and CC 38 to enter the data The data entry values for each parameter and the corre sponding settings are as follows RPN 0 Pitch bend range CC 06 CC 38 Parameter value Semitone steps RPN 1 Fine tune RPNz2 Coarse tune For example if in Multi mode you wish to set a track that is receiving channel 1 to a transpose coarse tuning value of 12 you would first transmit BO 64 02 64H CC 100 and B0 65 00 65H CC 101 to this instrument to select the RPN coarse tune Then you would set this to 12 by transmitting BO 06 34
358. itted velocity data as shown in the left hand diagram on the following page Incoming data will automat ically use the velocity curve number 4 shown in the right hand diagram With a setting of PostMIDI variations in keyboard playing dynamics and in the velocity of incoming data will create change as shown in the right hand diagram on the below If you are playing this instrument s tone generator from an external keyboard or sequencer and the overall sound is too bright or too dark you can set the Convert Position parameter to PostMIDI and select the appropriate velocity curve here For the transmitted data the velocity curve number 4 shown in the left hand diagram will automatically be selected For a setting of PreMIDI Velocity KBD MIDI Out For a setting of PostMIDI Velocity MIDI In TG MAX Velocity effect Soft Strong 1 3 These curves produce an effect for strongly played notes 4 Normal This is the standard curve 5 6 An effect will be obtained even if you do not play very strongly 7 A certain amount of effect will be obtained even for softly played notes 8 This curve produces the most regular effect This setting is suitable when you do not need velocity sensitivity or when you wish to make the notes more consistent However with this curve control of softly played notes will be more diffi cult so use the curve that is most appropriate for your play ing strength and style and the effect
359. ived B 3 1 2 UTILITY is Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 3 3 1 2 8 MIDI Filter1 2 T01 08 3 4 1 2 16 Mibi Filter1 2 709 16 T DEEN Een rortannents A i i L1 5 i Pl E a i Cl NE A Lo cI co BBZB Standard Fit i Status 6TH Ch Bi pt 1 20 1 ae se Hoz eco EIU 161 42 1 416 3 3 4 a Damper CC 64 Portamento SW CC 65 Damper CC 64 Off On Specifies whether or not MIDI control change message 64 Hold damper pedal will be received Portamento SW CC 65 Off On Specifies whether or not MIDI control change message 65 Portamento On Off will be received E 3 3 4 UTILITY re Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 3 5 1 3 8 MIDI Filter2 1701 08 3 6 1 3 16 MIDI Filter2 1709 16 nuitu THU i Aral i i i Ld e Rm ma ma i ra aTi FAT Boah Standard Fit 1 Status 6TH Ch 816 1 1 36 1 2 2 H z tell1 3 2 T5 467424 2 1 446 3 5 6 a J S Y M Whl CC701 JS Y CC 02 JS Y M Whl CC 01 Off On X50 Specifies whether MIDI control change CC 1 the X50 s modulation wheel or a REALTIME CONTROLS B mode assignment will be received microX Specifies whether MIDI control change CC 1 the Y direction of the microX s joystick or a REALTIME CON TROLS B assign setting will be received JS Y CC402 Off On X50 Specifies whether MIDI control change CC 2 REAL TIME CONTROLS B mode assignment or the GLOBAL 0 3 Foot page Foot Pedal Assign set to JS Y CC 0
360. keep If the power is turned off or a different combination selected before you write an edited combination your edits cannot be recovered For the procedure refer to Write Program PROG 0 1 Write Combination Agee W stereophonickeus Category ma Keyboard To Cancel If you use Category to specify a category for the combina tion that you are writing you will be able to select it by cate gory when selecting combinations in COMBI 0 Play Solo Selected Timbre The Solo function will alternately be switched on off each time you select Solo Selected Timbre CD Choose Solo Selected Timbre from the utility menu and press the center of the ClickPoint to execute When you execute a check mark will be shown at the left of the Solo Selected Timbre in the menu and the Solo func tion will be turned on 2 In pages that show parameters for an individual timbre you can select a timbre to Solo in 0 Play Prog page Pro gram Select etc so that only that timbre will sound and the other timbres will be muted The Selected Timbre Information 0 2d in each page will indicate Solo To solo a different timbre select a parameter of the tim bre that you wish to solo 3 To defeat the Solo function choose Solo Selected Tim bre from the utility menu once again and press the cen ter of the ClickPoint Ki If a timbre that is muted by the Solo function has been set to a
361. l s EQ Trigger Monitor Off On Switches between effect output monitor and trigger signal monitor IS EQ Side PEQ Cutoff 20 12 00kHz Sets the EQ center frequency for the trigger signal par Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the EQ bandwidth for the trigger signal G Gain Sets the EQ gain for the trigger signal G Adj Gain Adjust Sets the output gain 18 0 18 0dB Inf 38 24dB S Dine Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the output gain Amount 63 63 oH the modulation amount of the output gain W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D zs Off Dr ime d Source awu ie modulation source of the effect balance po Rn 100 100 po Rn the ege amount of the effect balance a Envelope When L R Mix is selected for this parameter the left and right channels are linked to control the Limiter using the mixed signal If L Only or R Only is selected the left and right channels are linked and the Limiter is controlled via only the left or right channel With L R individually the left and right channels control the Lim iter individually b Ratio c Threshold i G Adj This parameter sets the signal compression Ratio Compression is applied only when the signal level exceeds the Threshold value Adjust the output level using the G Adj parameter since com pression causes the entire level to be red
362. l Wet Inv IS CMP CF FL CH FL CMP Switches the order of the compressor and chorus flanger connection W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance IS Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet p gt Off Tempo 100 100 g Out h Routing When Wet Inv is selected the right channel phase of the chorus flanger effect sound is inverted This creates pseudo stereo effects and adds spread However if a mono input type effect is connected after this effect the left and right sounds may cancel each other eliminating the chorus flanger effects When Routing is set to CH FL CMP Out will be set to Normal 68 Comp Phaser Compressor Phaser This effect combines a mono type compressor and a phaser You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Routing Compressor Y N Phaser Phaser Wet Dry Righto i Ao g f Wet Dry gt Envelope Control LFO Tri Sine A Output Level gt i o Output Mode Resonance Wet CMP Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity Attack 1 100 Sets the attack level t Fx 02 0 100 t Fx 02 0 100 Level Output Level Sets the compressor output level Pre EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre L
363. l be mm 127 7F and when turned OFF the data will be mm 0 00 and the arpeggiator will be turned on off accordingly Similarly the arpeggiator will be turned on off when this message is received ON when mm is 64 40 or greater and OFF when 63 3F or less NRPN arpeggiator gate control Bn 63 00 Bn 62 0A Bn 06 mm This message will be transmitted when you operate the ARP GATE knob REALTIME CONTROLS 2 knob in C mode and the arpeggiator gate will change The same effect will be applied when this message is received NRPN arpeggiator velocity control Bn 63 00 Bn 62 0B Bn 06 mm This message will be transmitted when you operate the ARP VELOCITY knob REALTIME CONTROLS 3 knob in C mode and the arpeggiator velocity will change The same effect will be applied when this message is received About system exclusive messages Since the way in which these messages are used is left up to each manufacturer they are mainly used to transmit and receive sound data and editing data for parameters that are unique to a particular instrument the X50 microX s system exclusive message format is FO 42 3n 63 ff F7 F0 exclusive status 42 Korg ID 3n n 0 F global MIDI channel 1 16 7A Future model ID ff function ID type of message F7 end of exclusive iq To obtain a copy of the MIDI Implementation which includes MIDI exclusive format information please contact your Korg distri
364. l c Fx 06 Dine Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level Amount 50 50 Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level Lo Low Cutoff 20 1 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type 18 418dB Sets the gain of Low EQ M1 Mid1 Cutoff 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 18 418dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 M2 Mid2 Cutoff 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 G Gain Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 CH FL LFO LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform of the chorus flanger F LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Dly Delay Time Sets the delay time Dep Depth Sets the depth of LFO modulation Fb Feedback Sets the feedback amount C F W D Cho Fing Wet Dry Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger Out Output Mode Normal Wet Inv Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger w Fx 67 Routing OD CH FL CH FL OD Switches the order of the overdrive and chorus flanger connection i Ex 67 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Dz Off Tempo 18 418dB Tri Sine 0 02 20 00Hz 0 0 50 0ms 0 100 100 100 t Fx 20 Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet t Fx 10 20 W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Source J S
365. lation Pre LPF High Damp Wet Dry DECI Pre LPF Off On Turn the harmonic noise caused by lowered sampling on and off w Ex 14 High Damp 0 100 Sets the ratio of high range damping Sampling Freq Sampling Frequency 1 00k 48 00kHz Sets the sampling frequency Resolution 4 24 Sets the data bit length i Fx 14 85 Level Output Level 0 100 Sets the decimator output level e Fx 14 AMP Amplifier Type SS EL84 6L6 Selects the type of guitar amplifier nme DECI AMP AMP gt DECI me the order of the wah and amp simulation connection W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D Source Off po cdi po cdi is modulation source of the effect balance o Mn 100 100 o Mn the fedus amount of the effect balance Deci Comp Decimator Compressor This effect combines a mono type decimator and a compres sor You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Right m Wet Dry Routing Decimator Y N Compressor Pre LPF High Damp Envelope Contre DECI Pre LPF Off On Turn the harmonic noise caused by lowered sampling on and off i Fx 14 High Damp 0 100 Sets the ratio of high range damping Sampling Freq Sampling Frequency 1 00k 48 00kHz Sets the sampling frequency Resolution 4 24 Sets the data bit length i Fx 14 Level Ou
366. lect EG as the AMS LFO1 2 AMS the auto wah effect produced by LFO modulation will be controlled by the changes in EG level If you set Int to A LFO1 2 AMS Int to A Int to B LFO1 2 AMS Int to B to a positive value the wah effect will deepen as the EG level rises and will lessen as the EG level falls With negative values of Int to A LFO1 2 AMS Int to A Int to B LFO1 2 AMS Int to B the phase of the LFO will be inverted e X50 If you use a controller such as SW1 or 2 as the AMS LFO1 2 AMS you can apply the auto wah effect when desired by pressing SW1 or SW2 e ImicroX If you set AMS LFO1 2 AMS toa controller such as Foot SW 82 you can apply an auto wah effect by using a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack EXT 2 0 127 EXT 4 3 Max 0 Max J EXT Tempo 4 60 120 240 0 1 Octave 0 1 Octave 0 1 Octave value x 1 8 0 99 0 63 0 99 value x 1 64 value x 1 64 value x 0 1 8 99 0 99 63 0 63 99 0 99 value x 1 64 1 64 value x 1 64 1 64 value x 0 1 8 99 0 99 69 0 63 99 0 99 value x 1 64 1 64 value x 1 64 1 64 8 155 Appendices 156 Amp PROG 6 2 5 b The volume can be controlled by the pitch filter EG con trollers or tempo etc If
367. ll allow AMS1 to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no change Filter 1 EG changes Time AMS Velocity Intensity a positive value Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off Softly played note with A Strongly played note with Strongly played note with D S and R set to A D S and R setto A D S and R set to setting of 4 5a Filter 1 EG AMS2 Time Mod AMS2 Off KT EXT AMS2 Intensity 99 99 A AMS2 SW Attack 0 D AMS2 SW Decay 0 S AMS2 SW Slope 0 R AMS2 SW Release 0 These parameters are the settings for AMS2 to control the Time parameters of the filter 1 EG AMS1 Time Moc AMSI1 R AMS1 SW Release E 4 5 UTILITY i Write Program 0 1 Copy Oscillator Swap Oscilla tor 1 1 For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Sync Both EGs Choose Sync Both EGs from the utility menu and press the center of the ClickPoint a check mark will appear at the left of Sync Both EGs and the SYNC icon will appear at the left of the envelope curve in the display 3 Erop od TET dem Bra DG 5 3 RG Jacitu 488 AB 0 8 5 8 pa a E In this state the filter 1 EG and the filter 2 EG can be edited simultaneously Editing either one will cause the other to chang
368. ll state 3 To execute the Initialize Steps operation press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CAN CEL button Copy Step This command copies the settings of a specific step The set tings of two or more adjacent steps can also be copied together CD Select Copy Step to access the dialog box Copy Step From Step EN Ta Step 81 2 Select the range of steps that you wish to copy From Step 3 Select the copy destination step To Step If you selected more than one step in From Step the steps will be copied starting at To Step and continuing through the steps to the right 4 To execute the Copy Step command press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CANCEL but ton Delete Step This command deletes the step parameters Tone Ptch Gt Vel Flam of the currently selected step number Subsequent steps will move one column toward the left CD Select Delete Step to access the dialog box Delete Step 1 kancel OK 2 To execute the Delete Step operation press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CANCEL but ton Insert Step This command inserts an empty step into the currently selected step number Subsequent steps will be moved one step to the right CD Select Insert Step to access the dialog box Insert Step 01 Cancel 2 To execute the Insert Step operation press the MENU OK button
369. lues the sound moves from right to left v Doppler Pitch Pan Depth Pan Depth b Q7 i Pan Depth value value Pitch Depth Higher Original Pitch r Lowe Pan Depth lt lt lt lt lt lt lt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Louder Volume lt Louder 3 1 Scratch f Direct Mix With Always On a dry sound is usually output With Always This effect is applied by recording the input signal and mov Off dry sounds are not output With Cross Fade a dry sound is ing the modulation source It simulates the sound of scratches usually output and it is muted only when scratching you can make using a turntable Set W D to Wet to use this parameter effectively Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Right o I a pa Drar D mod Pod 5 0 gt Envelope Control t Scratch Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for simulation control Dgr Response Scratch 0 100 Sets the speed of the response to the Scratch Source Envelope Envelope Select Dmod Input Selects whether the start and end of recording is controlled via the modulation source or the input signal level v Dae Src Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls recording when Enve lope is set to Dmod pe Threshold 0 100 Sets the recording start level when Envelope is set to Input Respons
370. m Combination or Multi set parameter Velocity PROG 7 1a COMBI 7 2 3 a MULTI 7 3 4 a is set to Step When making this setting make sure that Velocity is set to Step in the mode from which you arrived here Flam 99 99 Specifies how the note timing will be skewed when two or more Tones are specified in the same step To simulate chords strummed on a guitar it is effective to set values for odd numbered steps and values for even numbered steps This setting is not valid for preset patterns Preset 0 thru Pre set 4 00 All Tones will sound simultaneously 01 99 The timing of the notes will be skewed in the order of the Tone number When Sort is ON from low note to high note When Sort is OFF in the order in which keys were pressed 01 99 The timing of the notes will be skewed in the opposite direction as E 5 2 UTILITY cs Write Arpeggio Patterns Rename Arpeggio Pattern Copy Arpeggio Pattern 5 1 For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Initialize Steps This command initializes the step parameters Tone Ptch Gt Vel Flam of the arpeggio pattern Select Initialize Steps to access the dialog box Inttialize Steps Type Cancel 2 Select the type Type of initialize Empty will initialize all tones to a blank state Full will initialize all tones to a fu
371. m Reverb Room This room type reverb emphasizes the early reflections that make the sound tighter Changing the balance between the early reflections and reverb sound allows you to simulate nuances such as the type of walls of a room 57 Rev Brt Room Reverb Bright Room This room type reverb emphasizes the early reflections that make the sound brighter See 56 Reverb Room Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out ER Level ERs g Reverb 2 s Delay Thru CG Pre Delay Reverb Level Reverb Time Sets the reverberation time High Damp Sets the damping amount in the high range Pre Delay Sets the delay time from the dry sound ix Ex 52 0 100 c Fx 52 0 100 Pre Delay Thru Sets the mix ratio of non delay sound Pre EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain Sets the gain of High EQ ER Level 0 100 Sets the level of early reflections us Reverb Level 0 100 Sets the reverberation level p W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dyer Off Tempo 15 15dB 15 15dB Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance g ER Level h Reverb Level These parameters set the early reflection level and reverb level Changing these parameter values allows you to
372. me of oscillator 1 p 152 AMS List Int AMS Intensity 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that OSC1 LFO1 will have on the volume of oscillator 1 Negative values will invert the LFO waveform AMS LFO2 AMS Off PEG FEG AEG KT EXT Indicates the source that will control the depth by which OSC1 LFO2 3 2 will modulate the volume of oscillator 1 p 152 AMS List Int AMS Intensity 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that OSC1 LFO2 will have on the volume of oscillator 1 Negative values will invert the LFO waveform B 6 2 UTILITY i Write Program 0 1 Copy Oscillator Swap Oscilla tor 1 1 6 3 EG Amp1 EG ITE Indicates settings to specify how Amp 1 will cause the vol ume of oscillator 1 to change over time PROG 6 Ed Ampl i L SHEE A 99 Pop Sid T A450 D492 5 497 R5 Levei Mod Time Mod G Start Level 16 H D 5 6 R 66 A D6 5 6 BE AMS Sh 1 488 AMS Velocity l 25 5 6 A Bri AMSZ Off 6 3a Amp1 EG These parameters specify how the amp 1 EG will change over time Amplifier EG Attack Level Note off Break Point Volume Attack Decay Slope Release Time Time Time Time L Level parameters S Start Level Specifies the volume level at note on If you want the note to begin at a loud level set this to a high value A Attack Level 00 99 Specifie
373. ment drumsample to each key A drum kit you edit here can be selected in Program mode PROG 1 Ed Basic OSCI page Drum Kit when Oscillator Mode is Drums as an oscillator and processed through the filter amp and effects in the same way as a multisample when Oscillator Mode is Single or Double When you wish to edit a drum kit enter Program mode select a program that uses a drum kit i e whose Oscillator Mode is Drums and then move to this page A program that uses a drum kit will already have filter amp and effect settings etc suitable for drum sounds Even if a program with an Oscillator Mode of Single or Double is selected in Program mode the program will sound using its own filter and amp settings etc Effects will sound according to the settings of the program you selected You must set Octave PROG 1 2c to 0 8 With any set ting other than 0 8 the key locations and drum sounds will not correspond correctly MIDI If Exclusive 1 1b is checked the drum kit can be edited using exclusive data amp When a drum kit is edited all programs that use that drum kit will be affected amp If you want the edited drum kit settings to be backed up after you turn off the power you must write them into memory Select the Utility Write Drum Kits to access the Write Drum Kits dialog box and press the MENU OK but ton to write the edited settings t For details on creating a drum kit OG
374. miter This effect applies the Limiter to the low range mid range and high range of the input signal You can control dynamics for each range to adjust the sound pressure of the low range mid range and high range in a different way from the EQ Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Band Pass Filters Limiter A gt Envelope Control Mid Low Offset Limiter A A Envelope Control Gain Adjust High Mid Offset Limiter A gt Envelope Control E High Offset Righto 7 Wet Dry Ratio Bra Sets the signal compression ratio Threshold Sets the level above which the compressor is applied Attack Sets the attack time 50 071 Inf 1 40 0dB t Fx 03 Release Sets the release time Low Offset Gain of the low range trigger signal Mid Offset Gain of the mid range trigger signal High Offset Gain of the high range trigger signal G Adj Gain Adjust Sets the output gain Inf 38 24dB s gt Fx 03 D aes Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the output gain Amount 63 63 Sets the modulation amount of the output gain 105 EFFECT 106 W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet rege ee EENS Off Tempo ee modulation source of the effect balance po W e 100 4 100 po W e the amount of the effect b
375. modulation source for the input level Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance e HiDamp e LoDamp These parameters set the damping amount of high range and low range The tone of the delayed sound becomes darker and lighter as it feeds back g Spread This parameter sets the pan width of the effect sound The stereo image is widest with a value of 50 and the effect sound of both channels is output from the center with a value of 0 44 St Cross Dly stereo Cross Delay This is a stereo delay and can by used as a cross feedback delay effect in which the delay sounds cross over between the left and right by changing the feedback routing Stereo In Stereo Out Left o High Damp Low Damp e Dela N s Input Level D mod y ER Ee Stereo Cross I ia Feedback Input Level D mod eer pier Damp Low zai Delay Delay CORNEA A Wet Dry Stereo Cross Stereo Cross Switches between stereo delay and cross feedback delay L Delay L Delay Time 0 0 680 0ms Sets the delay time for the left channel R Delay R Delay Time Sets the delay time for the right channel L Fb L Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount for the left channel D zs Off Tempo 0 0 680 0ms Source Selects the modulation source of feedback amount Amount L Sets the modulation amount of the left channel feedback
376. mount is a positive value rotating the knob toward the right will produce a positive change in the effect and rotating it toward the left will produce a negative change With nega tive values the opposite effect will result Kb1 Knob Mod1 CC717 Kb2 Knob Mod2 CC 19 Kb3 Knob Mod3 CC 20 Kb4 Knob Mod4 CC 21 These differ from Kb1 17 Knob Mod1 CC 17 Kb4 21 Knob Mod4 CC 21 in the knob position and direction of the effect If Amount is set to a positive value rotat ing the knob to the far right will produce an effect of 0 as the dynamic modulation source Rotating the knob toward the right will apply an effect only in the positive direction With negative settings the opposite effect will result SW1 80 SW1 Mod CC 80 SW2 81 SW2 Mod CC 81 X50 rf you want to use SW1 and SW2 as dynamic mod ulation sources in Program Combination Multi modes access the 7 Ed Arp Ctrls page and in SW1 2 Assign set SW1 to SW1 Mod CC 80 and SW2 to SW2 Mod CC 81 amp p 161 X50 SW1 2 Assign The effect will be controlled when you operate SW1 or SW2 FSW 82 Foot Switch CC 82 If you wish to use an assignable foot switch as a dynamic modulation source set Foot SW Assign GLOBAL 0 3a to Foot SW CC 82 p 164 Foot Switch Assign The effect will be controlled when you operate a foot switch etc connected to the
377. mulating harpsichord sounds Normally you will leave this at 0 Use Prog s Scale Off On Each track can use the scale that is specified for the program by Scale PROG 1 1c On checked The scale of the program will be used Off unchecked The scale specified by Type Multi s Scale 2 1b 2b will be used 2 7 8 b Scale Specifies the scale that will be used for the multi Type Multi s Scale Equal Temperament User Octave15 Selects the type of scale is Type Scale Type PROG 1 1c Key C B Selects the tonic key of the selected scale i Key PROG 1 1c Random 0 7 As this value is increased an increasingly random devia tion will be added to the pitch at each note on c Random PROG 1 1c B 2 7 8 UTILITY is Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 MULTI 63 64 MULTI 3 MIDI Filter1 Here you can select whether or not to apply filtering to the MIDI data received by tracks 1 16 For example even if two tracks are receiving the same MIDI channels one can be made to respond to damper pedal activity while the other does not WA These settings affect the MIDI messages that are trans mitted when you adjust program pan volume porta mento and send 1 2 parameters of a track whose Status 2 1a 2a is set to BTH EXT or EX2 On checked Reception of MIDI data is enabled Tracks whose Status 2 1a 2a is INT or BTH will receive MIDI messages
378. n a different program is selected the arpeggiator settings stored in that program will automati cally take effect Off unchecked The arpeggiator settings will not change when the program is switched Use this setting when you wish to keep the same arpeggiator pattern running while you select different program sounds Combi Auto Arp Combi Off On On checked When a different combination is selected the arpeggiator settings stored in that combination will auto matically take effect Off unchecked The arpeggiator settings will not change when the combination is switched Use this setting when you wish to keep the same arpeggiator pattern running while you select different combination sounds B 0 1 UTILITY For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Write Global Setting This command writes Global mode settings except for Drum Kits and User Arpeggio Patterns CD Select Write Global Setting to access the dialog box Write Global Setting Caneell OK 2 To write the data press the MENU OK button To can cel press the EXIT CANCEL button To write a drum kit or user arpeggio pattern execute the appropriate utility 4 1 Write Drum Kits 5 1 Write Arpeggio Patterns Load Preload Data This command loads the preload data into internal memory amp Before loading this data you must uncheck the Mem ory Protect 0 2b setti
379. n make settings for the pitch EG which creates time variant changes in the pitch of oscillators 1 and 2 The depth of pitch change produced by these EG settings on oscillator 1 2 is adjusted by Pitch EG 2 1b 2 3 PROG Z Ed Fitch L s A o T R 99 D499 Pitch EG Start Level LApop 5 8 A i Time AMS Sh 1 26 66 S A A Hod Loo R D age Mosii asce Hoszieol es J 2 5c 2 5a Pitch EG These settings specify how the pitch will change over time Time varying pitch settings when Pitch EG Intensity 412 00 99 approximately 1 octave Attack Level Note off Attack Decay Time Time Release Time 0 pitch when key is held sustained Time Release Level Start Level 99 approximately 1 octave L Level parameters These parameters specify the amount of pitch change The actual amount of pitch change will depend on the Pitch EG 2 1b 2 3 parameter Intensity For example with an Intensity setting of 412 00 a Level setting of 99 would raise the pitch one octave and a Level setting of 99 would lower the pitch one octave S Start Level 99 99 Specifies the amount of pitch change at note on A Attack Level 99 99 Specifies the amount of pitch change when the attack time has elapsed R Release Level 99 99 Specifies the amount of pitch change when the release time has elapsed T Time parameters T
380. n that channel will be turned off as though the keys had been released However the release portion of the notes will remain All sound off CC 120 Bn 78 00 value 00 When this is received all currently sounding notes on that channel will be silenced While the All Note Off message allows the release portion of the notes to remain the All Sound Off message will silence the notes immediately However these messages are provided for emergency use and are not something that you will use while performing Resetting all controllers on a specific channel Reset all controllers CC 121 Bn 79 00 value 00 When this is received the value of all controllers on that channel will be reset Using RPN to edit RPN Registered Parameter Number is a type of message that allows settings to be made in a way that is common between instrument manufacturers NRPN Non registered Parameter Numbers and exclusive messages can be freely used in non compatible ways by different manufacturers and models of instrument RPN messages can be used for editing with the following procedure D Use RPN MSB CC 101 Bn 65 mm and RPN LSB CC 100 Bn 64 rr n channel mm rr upper and lower bytes of the parameter number messages to select the parameter 2 Use data entry MSB CC 6 Bn 06 mm and data entry LSB CC 38 Bn 26 vv n channel mm vv upper and lower bytes of the value together expressing 16 384 lev els to
381. n which the notes you press will be arpeggiated On checked Notes will be arpeggiated in the order of their pitch regardless of the order in which you pressed them Off unchecked Notes will be arpeggiated in the order in which you pressed them Latch Off On Specifies whether or not the arpeggio will continue playing after you take your hand off the keyboard On checked The arpeggio will continue playing after you remove your hand from the keyboard Off unchecked The arpeggio will stop when you remove your hand from the keyboard Key Sync Off On Specifies whether the arpeggio pattern will begin when you press a key or whether it will always follow the J Tempo setting On checked The arpeggio pattern will start playing from the beginning when a note on occurs from a condition where no keys are pressed This setting is suitable when you are playing in realtime and want the arpeggio to play from the beginning of the measure Off unchecked The arpeggio pattern will always play according to the J Tempo Keyboard Off On This specifies whether the notes you play on the keyboard will be sounded as usual in addition to being sounded as part of the arpeggio On checked The notes you play will be sounded on their own in addition to being sounded as part of the arpeggio For example if you simultaneously press two or more notes they will be sounded as usual in addition to being played
382. nce editing done using the Performance Editor is not as detailed as conventional editing the balance between parameters may be lost If this occurs use 1 Ed Basic 9 Ed MasterFX to make fine adjustments m If the MIDI Filter Exclusive GLOBAL 1 1b setting is checked MIDI exclusive parameter changes will be transmitted whenever you operate the Performance Editor If these messages are received by an instrument whose Exclusive setting is checked the Performance Editor on that instrument corresponding to the received message will be modified Octave 03 00 03 An adjustment of 01 will raise the pitch one octave An adjustment of 01 will lower the pitch one octave This setting cannot adjust the pitch higher than 4 feet or lower than 32 feet Stretch Pitch Stretch L 12 00 12 This simultaneously adjusts the Transpose and Tune of the oscillator This lets you produce a variety of tonal changes and variations without loosing the character of the original sound At the 00 setting the value of the program parameters will be unchanged An adjustment of 01 will lower the Transpose value by 1 and simultaneously raise the Tune value by 100 An adjustment of 01 will raise the Transpose value by 1 and simultaneously lower the Tune value by 100 However it is not possible for the Transpose value to exceed the range of 12 nor the Tune value to exceed the range of 1200 OSC Bal OSC Balance
383. nce every rotation of the turntable This simulation repro duces record noise and the noise generated after the music on a vinyl record finishes Pitch Phase Mod Pitch phase modulation effects 16 St Chorus Stereo Chorus This effect adds thickness and warmth to the sound by modu lating the delay time of the input signal You can add spread to the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from each other Stereo In Stereo Out A emm en Z g EQ Trim Wet Dry E LFO Phase LFO Tri Sing LFO Wave LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform LFO Phase 180 180deg Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right ee Fx 10 Freq LFO Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed vo Fx 09 Dae Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes r gt Fx 09 eer BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo r Ex 09 Base Base Note dios 2 des Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed ix Ex 09 Times 1 16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed r Fx 09 L Dly L Pre Delay 0 0 50 0ms Sets the delay time for the left channel R Dly R Pre Delay 0 0 50 0ms Sets the delay time for the right channel us Depth 0 100 Sets the dep
384. nd direction of the effect produced by AMS Pitch AMS With a setting of 0 no modulation will be applied With a setting of 12 00 the pitch will change up to one octave For example if AMS Pitch AMS is set to Pedal 04 Glo bal 0 3a Foot Pedal Assign is set to Foot Pedal CC 04 and you advance a foot pedal connected to the ASSIGN ABLE PEDAL jack the pitch will rise if you have assigned a positive value here or fall if you have assigned a nega tive value The maximum range is one octave r p 154 2 1b Pitch EG Intensity 12 00 12 00 Specifies the depth and direction of the modulation that the pitch EG specified in EG Pitch EG 2 5 page will apply to the pitch With a setting of 12 00 the pitch will change a maximum of 1 octave AMS Pitch EG AMS Off KT EXT Selects the source that will control the pitch modulation applied by the pitch EG r p 152 AMS List Intensity AMS Intensity 12 00 412 00 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS Pitch EG AMS will have For example if you set AMS Pitch EG AMS to Velocity and set this value to 12 00 the velocity will control the range of pitch change produced by the pitch EG in a range of 1 octave p 154 As you play more softly the pitch change will draw closer to the pitch EG levels Pitch change level Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off Softly playe
385. nd the last selected program or combination number will be selected Reset Memorize A The contents of any parameters that were being edited are not saved by this function Before turning the power off you must Write your edits Page Menu Style Icon List In each mode you can press the MENU OK button to see a list of the pages PAGE MENU for that mode Here s how you can specify how this list will appear Icon The pages will appear as icons Use the ClickPoint lt gt A V to select the page you want to view and press the center of the ClickPoint to access that page The page you had selected immediately before accessing the PAGE MENU will be highlighted X50 System E amp lobal PAGE HENHUX category Name Arpeggio Pattern microX SUS ten Global PAGE HEHUX category ame Arpeggio Pattern Ext Control List The pages will appear as a tabbed list Use the Click Point A V to select the page you want to view use to move to a tab lt 4 to move to a page and use V to select the tab you want to view Then press the center of the ClickPoint to access that tab The page you had selected immediately before accessing the PAGE menu will be high lighted z User Scale 3 Category Name d Drum Kit 2 Arpeggio Pattern LCD Contrast This sets the contrast of the LCD screen Higher values will increase the contrast 0 62 RA If because of
386. ne Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level Amount 50 50 Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level Lo Low Cutoff 20 1 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type G Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ M1 Mid1 Cutoff 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type Q Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 G Gain Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 M2 Mid2 Cutoff 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type Q Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 G Gain Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 DLY T1 Tap1 Delay Sets the Tap1 delay time T2 Tap2 Delay Sets the Tap2 delay time T1 Level Tap1 Level Sets the Tap1 output level T2 Fb Tap2 Feedback Sets the Tap2 feedback amount Dly W D Delay Wet Dry Sets the multitap delay effect balance 18 18dB 18 18dB 18 18dB 0 680ms 100 100 Dry 2 98 98 2 Wet HiDamp High Damp Sets the damping amount in the high range W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet D Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 145 EFFECT 146 83 Wah AmpSim Wah Auto Wah Amp Simulation This effect combines a mono type wah and an amp simula
387. ne of arpeggiator A C 1 G9 M Velocity zone of P r Velocity zone of arpeggiator A arpeggiator B A Key Btm A Bottom Key C 1 G9 Top A Top Key C 1 G9 Specifies the range of notes keys that will operate arpeggiator A Top specifies the upper limit and Btm specifies the lower limit A Vel Velocity Btm A Bottom Velocity 001 127 Top A Top Velocity 001 127 Specifies the range of velocities that will operate arpeggiator A Top specifies the upper limit and Btm specifies the lower limit B Key Btm B Bottom Key C 1 G9 Top B Top Key C 1 G9 B Vel Velocity Btm B Bottom Velocity 001 127 Top B Top Velocity 001 127 Specify the range of notes keys and velocities that will operate arpeggiator B A Key A Vel X50 The values of these parameters can also be entered by playing a note on the keyboard while you hold down the ENTER button B 7 4 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 Copy Arpeggiator 7 1 COMBI 49 50 7 5 Controls X50 COMBI 7 Ed flirp Ctrla Controls knobi 6 assign 7_5 _ Knob B Assign 5g172 Rs5ign Knob 1 6 an ELMAR IEN GMT 0ctaue Down knob2 B knob Mod 2 CCCH 19 Toggle knab5 B Rnab Pod 5 CC 26 SWS Pitch Bend Lock knobd B knob Mod d CCCH21 Toggle setup TI Lo Aare E fl zone 7 5b microX COMBI T Ed A
388. ng for the data that you want to load If the setting is still checked when you attempt to load the data a dialog box will indicate Memory Pro tected and it will not be possible to load the data CD Select Load Preload Data and access the dialog box Load Preload Data 2 In the Kind field select the data that you want to load Combination Single Program Bank Program Single Combination All Combination Bank Arpeggio Pattern All Arpeggio Pattern Single Data for one selected arpeggio pattern microX Ext Control Setup All Data for all external control sets microX Ext Control Setup Single Data for one selected external control set If you selected Program or Combination move the cur sor down and select All Bank or Single to specify the range of data that will be loaded All Data for all programs or combinations will be loaded Bank Data will be loaded in units of one bank In this case move the cursor down and select the bank whose data you want to load Single Data for one program or combination will be loaded In this case move the cursor down to select the data that you want to load If you selected Multi DrumKit or Arpeggio Pattern move the cursor down and select either All or Single to specify the range of data that will be loaded microOX You can also choose either All or Single even if you selected Ext Control Setup All Data for all multi set drum kits or arpeggio patterns
389. ng settings respectively Knob1 B to Knob Mod 1 CC 17 Knob2 B to Knob Mod 2 CC 19 Knob3 P to Knob Mod 3 CC 20 or Knob4 B to Knob Mod 4 CC 21 p 162 Knob 1 4 B Assign When you set REALTIME CONTROLS to B mode and oper ate knobs 1 4 the specified modulation will apply If AMS intensity is set to a positive value moving the knob to the 12 o clock position will produce an AMS effect of 0 Rotating the knob toward the right will produce a positive change in the effect and rotating it toward the left will pro duce a negative change With negative settings the opposite effect will result KnobM1 Knob Mod1 CC 17 KnobM2 Knob Mod2 CC 19 KnobM3 Knob Mod3 CC 20 KnobM4 Knob Mod4 CC 21 These differ from KnobM1 17 KnobM4 21 in the knob position and direction of the effect If AMS intensity is set to a positive value rotating the knob to the far left will pro duce an AMS effect of 0 Rotating the knob toward the right will apply an effect only in the positive direction With neg ative settings the opposite effect will result SW 1 80 SW1 Mod CC 80 SW 2 81 SW2 Mod CC 81 X50 If you wish to use either SW1 or SW2 as an AMS make settings in the program combination or multi set to set the Ctrls page parameter SW1 2 Assign to the follow ing values respectively SW1 to SW1 Mod CC 80 or SW2 to SW2 M
390. ng two or more timbres to velocity zones that do not overlap you can use variations in playing dynamics to play different sounds Velocity Switch If you set two or more timbres to velocity zones that overlap the sounds will be heard together Layer If the slope ranges gray line overlap different sounds will be sounded together and your playing dynamics will deter mine the proportion of each sound Velocity Cross fade 6 1 Vel Velocity Zone COMBI 6 Ed Uel Zone Vel Top Velocity 6 la Velocity Zone Map 1 Bottom Slope e a 1 1 Bottom Velocity p Top Slope S Top Velocity This displays the range of velocities that will sound the cur rently selected timbre The range of velocities sounded is shown as a line and the slope portion is shaded 6 1b Top Velocity Bottom Velocity Top Velocity 1 127 Specifies the maximum velocity value that each timbre 1 8 will sound Bottom Velocity 1 127 Specifies the minimum velocity value that each timbre 1 8 will sound A It is not possible to set the bottom velocity greater than the top velocity for the same timbre Nor can the top slope and the bottom slope overlap X50 You can also set this parameter by holding down the ENTER button and playing a note B 6 1 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 6 2 Slope velocity Slope Fast issus kd SEIT Bana BER dad 6 2a x aun i opp ooo
391. nges in the cutoff frequency of filters 1A and 1B The depth of the effect that these settings will have on the filter 1 cutoff frequency is determined by Filter EG 4 2b PROG d Ed Filter 1 4 5a LL SHEE A 20 B r39 5 658 F 00 T DA D480 5 404 R T Levei Hod Time Mod 4 5b LAMS Off AMSi Velocity 482 A D 5 B Lupp 5 8 AA B i AMSZ Off Lupp AL 0 8 5 8 Bn faze Medi Mode pred ec SSS 4 5c EG Start Level 4 5a Filter1 EG Specifies the time varying change produced by the filter 1 EG Note off Attack Level Sustain Level Note on Release Level Time Break Point Level Attack Decay Slop Time Time Time The specified cutoff frequency Release Time L Level parameters The result will depend on the filter that was selected in Type Filter Type 4 1a For example with the Low Pass Resonance filter positive values of Int to A 4 2b will cause the tone to be brightened by positive levels and darkened by negative levels S Start Level 99 99 Specifies the change in cutoff frequency at the time of note on A Attack Level 99 99 Specifies the change in cutoff frequency after the attack time has elapsed B Break Point Level 99 99 Specifies the change in cutoff frequency after the decay time has elapsed S Sustain Level 99 99 Specifies the change in cutoff frequency that will be main tained from a
392. nsmitted on the global MIDI channel amp Ifa REALTIME CONTROLS B mode knob 1 4 is set to Master Volume the universal exclusive message Master Volume will be transmitted Combination mode When one of the X50 microX s controllers is operated a control change message will be transmitted on the global MIDI channel Simultaneously the message will also be transmitted on the MIDI channel MIDI Channel COMBI 2 1a of any timbre whose Status COMBI 2 1a is EXT or EX2 When one of the X50 microX s controllers is operated its effect will apply to any timbre whose Status is INT and whose MIDI Channel setting is either Gch or the same as the global MIDI channel amp In the case of Master Volume the universal exclusive message Master Volume will be transmitted only on the global MIDI channel amp You can make settings for MIDI Filter COMBI 3 4 to enable or disable control changes and controllers for each timbre When checked the above operations will be enabled Effect dynamic modulation can be controlled when the Control Ch Control Channel COMBI 8 1b setting for IFX MFX1 2 or MEO is either set to Gch or to the same channel as the global MIDI channel In the case of All Rt control is possible on the MIDI channel of any routed tim bre Multi mode When one of the X50 microX s controllers is operated its effect will apply to the track 1 16 that is selected by Control Track MULTI 0 1a
393. nt Key c Random 8 M osci j oscz f u zone lfuditionl 1 1la Oscillator Mode Oscillator Mode Single Double Drums Specifies the basic program type whether it will use one or two oscillators or a drum kit Single The program will use one oscillator Oscillator 1 Filter 1 Amplifier 1 In this case the program will have a maximum of 62 note polyphony Double The program will use two oscillators Oscillator 1 2 Filter 1 2 Amplifier 1 2 Allowing you to create more complex sounds In this case the program will have a 31 note maximum polyphony Drums The program will use one oscillator as when Sin gle is selected but Oscillator 1 will be assigned a drum kit instead of a multisample In this case the program will have a maximum of 62 notes of polyphony 1 1b Voice Assign Mode Voice Assign Mode Poly Mono Poly The program will play polyphonically allowing you play chords Mono The program will play monophonically producing only one note at a time Hold Off On On checked Hold is On Even when you take your finger off of the key the note will continue sounding as if it contin ued to be held Unless the Amp1 EG Amp2 EG 6 3 6 6 S Sustain Level is set to 0 the sound will continue playing This is ideal for playing drum sounds If you set Mode Oscillator Mode 1 1a to Drums you should normally turn Hold On Off unchecked Hold is Off Except fo
394. nt of LFO speed R Manu Top R Manual Top 0 100 Sets the upper limit of the frequency range for the effect on the right Freq LFO Step Frequency 0 05 50 00Hz channel i Fx 09 Sets the LFO step speed i Fx 10 pms d Swp Mode Sweep Mode EG Dmod Amount 50 00 50 00Hz Determines whether the flanger is controlled by the envelope gener Sets the modulation amount of LFO step speed ator or by the modulation source cx Fx 22 prer Manual 0 100 Src Source Off Tempo Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Selects the modulation source that triggers the EG when EG is selected for Swp Mode or modulation source that causes the flanger to sweep when Dmod is selected for Swp Mode EG Attack 1 100 BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using Sets the EG attack speed ics the tempo and notes Fx 09 eer EG Decay 1 100 BPM MIDI 40 240 Sets the EG decay speed ix Ex 22 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo Fx 09 10 Resonance 100 100 5 ds d Js J ds J Sets the resonance amount i Fx 23 Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Base Base Note Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed w Fx 09 High Damp 0 100 Times 1 46 Sets the resonance damping amount in the high range i Ex 23 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed t Fx 09 W D Wet Dly Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Step Base Step Base Note 3s Da gt Js
395. nter to finalize your selection MIDI If Multi Mode GLOBAL 0 2a is set to Master when the multi set is changed track whose Status is EXT EX2 or BTH will transmit bank and program number via MIDI If Multi Mode GLOBAL 0 2a is set to for Master switching the multi set will transmit bank select program change volume pan portamento send 1 2 post IFX pan and post IFX send 1 and 2 messages on the MIDI channel of the corresponding track for each track whose Status 2 1a 2a is EXT EX2 or BTH 55 D MULTI 56 Control Track T01 T16 name This selects the track that will be played by the keyboard of the X50 microX and that will be controlled by the various controllers of the X50 microX WA Track names can be specified in Utility Rename Track 0 1 D When you play the keyboard or operate the controllers of the X50 microX the internal sound generator will sound according to the settings program level etc of the track you selected here if its Status 2 1a 2a is INT or BTH and other tracks with the same MIDI channel will also sound at the same time if their Sta tus is INT or BTH These messages will also be trans mitted on the MIDI channel specified for these tracks if their Status is EXT EX2 or BTH J Tempo 040 240 EXT This specifies the tempo of the arpeggiator 040 240 This will be displayed if MIDI Clock GLOBAL 1 1a is Internal The tempo you speci
396. numbers from the keyboard will only control the timing at which the arpeggiator is triggered This setting is suitable for arpeggio patterns used for drum patterns etc The Tone indication in 5 2 Arp Pattern Edit page will be e if this setting is Off unchecked or O if this is On checked Mode Fixed Note Mode Trigger As Played Trigger All Tones Specifies how tones will be triggered when Fixed Note is checked Trigger As Played The Tones will be triggered according to the number of keys pressed Trigger All Tones Pressing a single key will trigger all Tones Example Here s how the drums pattern will sound when Fixed Note is checked Tone 1 is assigned a note number that plays a kick sound Tone 2 a snare and Tone 3 a hi hat With a setting of Trigger As Played pressing one key will sound only Tone 1 kick Pressing two keys will sound Tone 1 kick and Tone 2 snare Pressing three keys will sound all three Tones 1 3 kick snare hi hat If the Vel Velocity of each Tone is set to Key each Tone will be sounded at the velocity with which each key was played With a setting of Trigger All Tones playing one key is sufficient to sound all three Tone 1 kick Tone 2 snare and Tone 3 hi hat If the Vel Velocity of each Tone is set to Key the Tones will be sounded at the correspond ing velocity each time a key is pressed Tone No 00 11 This is valid only if Fix Note 5 1
397. o C use the C D E G and A notes Other keys will sound equal tempered pitches Pelog This is an Indonesian gamelan scale in which an octave consists of seven notes When Key is set to C use the white keys The black keys will sound the equal tempered pitches Stretch This tuning is used for acoustic pianos User All Notes This is the full range scale C 1 G9 that is specified in User All Notes Scale GLOBAL 2 22 User Octave 00 15 These are the single octave scales that are specified in User Octave Scale GLOBAL 2 12 Key C B Indicates the tonic note of the specified scale This setting is not valid for Equal Temperament Stretch and User All Notes Scale Random 0 7 As this value is increased a greater variance will be applied to the pitch when each note is sounded Normally you will set this to 0 This parameter is used when simulating instru ments that have natural instability in pitch such as tape mechanism organs or acoustic instruments A If a scale other than Equal Temperament is selected the combination of the selected scale and the Key setting may skew the tuning of the base key for example A 440 Hz If this occurs use Master Tune GLOBAL 0 1a to correct the pitch B 1 1 UTILITY i Write Program 0 1 For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Copy Oscillator This function copies oscillator sett
398. o confirm Press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight the field in the display use A V to make your choice and press the center to confirm e Use PROG BANK A GM to select a bank rs p 1 e Receive a MIDI program change to select a program rz p 171 microX e Turn the VALUE dial Press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight the field in the display use A V to make your choice and press the center to confirm Use Select by Category to choose from the desired category r p 34 e Receive a MIDI program change to select a program v p 171 HI When you select a combination on this instrument a MIDI program change for the selected combination number will be transmitted on the global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 1a At the same time bank select program change and volume CC 77 mes sages will be transmitted on the MIDI channel specified for each timbre that is set to Status 2 1a of EXT or EX2 However these messages will not be transmitted for timbres that are set to the same MIDI channel as the global MIDI channel In this case EX2 timbres will show the Program Select Bank as and will trans mit the bank number that was specified in Bank EX2 MSB and Bank EX2 LSB 2 1a MIDI messages transmitted when you operate this instrument are transmitted on the global MIDI channel At the same time timbres whose Status is EXT or EX2 will transmit the sam
399. od CC 81 r p 161 X50 SW1 2 Assign These are controlled by SW1 or SW2 Foot SW 82 Foot Switch CC 82 If you wish to use an assignable foot switch as an AMS set Foot SW Assign GLOBAL 0 3a to Foot SW CC 82 p 164 Foot Switch Assign The effect will be controlled when you operate a foot switch etc connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack 153 Appendices 154 Alternate Modulation settings When you operate an AMS Alternate Modulation Source the modulation destination will be affected as shown in the table below By using alternate modulation you can create complex sys tems of modulation in which EG LFO keyboard tracks and controllers work together You can apply complex change to an LFO or EG for example by using the pitch filter amp EG to control the frequency or intensity of an LFO that modulates the pitch filter amp or by using LFO2 to control the frequency of LFO1 e The tone EG and LFO etc can be controlled not only by velocity or joystick or PITCH wheel but also from a switch knob or pedal etc e Panning can be controlled in realtime from a controller EG or LFO etc e The filter EG can also be used to control pitch or volume at the same time as it controls the filter e Controllers etc can be used to control EG levels or times This lets you shape the EG in realtime e Filter amp keyboard tracking or note number can be used to control the EG or LFO accor
400. od eg Off Dr MM nid 100 100 Compressor Chorus Flanger This effect combines a mono type compressor and a chorus Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Right Routing Compressor Y wx Chorus Flanger EQ Trim LEQ HEQ rZ CH Chorus Flanger A flanger You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Dry Normal Output Mode i Output Level i Feedback Wet Invert Cho Flng Wet Dry gt Envelope Control LFO Tri Sine CMP Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity Attack Sets the attack level Level Output Level Sets the compressor output level Pre EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain Sets the gain of High EQ CH FL LFO LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform of the chorus flanger F LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Dly Delay Time Sets the delay time Dep Depth Sets the depth of LFO modulation Fb Feedback Sets the feedback amount F Cho Flng W D Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger Out Output Mode Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger Routing gt o Wet Dry 1 100 t Fx 02 0 100 t Fx 02 0 100 15 415dB 15 415dB Tri Sine 0 02 20 00Hz 0 0 50 0ms 0 100 100 4 100 t Fx 20 Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet t Fx 10 20 Norma
401. odification DI Separately from this On Off setting MIDI control change CC 92 can be received to turn all IFX effect off A value of 0 is off and a value of 1 127 restores the original setting You can also use FX SW GLOBAL 0 1b to turn off IFX in the same way This is controlled on the global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 1a 2 Routing 2 1 Program mode Use BUS Select PROG 8 12 to set the destination bus of the oscillator output PROG EH ics BUS BUS Select BUS Select GUS Select n GC SEN einn SC GE Et L R The signal is not sent to the Insert Effects Instead it is sent to MAIN OUTPUT L MONO and R after the Master EQ IFX The signal is sent to Insert Effect IFX 1 2 1 2 The signal is sent to INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1 2 p 103 Individual Outputs The signal is not sent to the Insert Effect Master Effects and or Master EQ Off The signal is not sent to MAIN OUTPUT L MONO R INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1 or 2 After the Master Effects the signal is output to MAIN OUTPUT Select this option if you connect the Insert Effect with the Master Effects in series with the send level specified by MFX1 Send1 and MEX2 Send2 Use MEX1 Send Send1 and Send2 PROG 8 1a to specify the send level for the Master Effects This setting is effective if BUS Select PROG 8 1a is set to L R or Off If BUS Select is set to IFX use S1 Send1 MFX1 an
402. of the left channel will be the duration of an eighth note and the delay time of the right channel will be the duration of a sixteenth note triplet BPM MIDI Sync Delay Time When BPM is set to MIDI the effect will synchronize to the tempo of the arpeggiator or to an external MIDI clock If BPM is in the range of 40 240 the specified value will be used If the tempo Bs Base Note and Times settings in con junction would cause the maximum delay time to be exceeded the warning TimeOver gt OVER will appear in the display Please modify your settings so that this setting does not appear The maximum delay time will depend on the effect type X50 SW1 2 Assign The following functions can be assigned to the assignable switches SW1 and SW2 e Fora program combination or multi set make the settings in 7 Ed Arp Ctrls page SW1 2 Assign PROG 7 3a COMBI 7 5b MULTI 7 5b Z8 This can be set for each program in Program mode each combination in Combination mode and each multi set in Multi mode SW1 SW2 Assign List SW1 Mod CC 80 SW1 Modulation CC 80 SW2 Mod CC 81 SW2 Modulation CC 81 Select this when using the switch as an Alternate Modulation or Effect Dynamic Modulation source In this case you must first specify the control destination Each time the switch is turned On Off a CC 80 or CC 81 message will be transmitted Off 0 On 127 Porta SW CC 65 Portam
403. ol the tempo of the arpeggiator in realtime amp Even if you set Foot SW Assign to Knobl 4 you can not use a connected foot switch to control the REAL TIME CONTROLS C mode arpeggiator effect Nor will it transmit MIDI control messages A Tap tempo control can be used whenever the TEMPO knob can be operated Enable or Disable for both OSC1 and 2 then portamento will be applied to OSC1 and 2 when the switch is turned on and portamento will not be applied to OSC1 and 2 when the switch is turned off If the Enable Porta Enable setting is different for OSC1 and 2 i e OSC1 is Enable and OSC2 is Disable or OSC1 is Disable and OSC2 is Enable then portamento will be applied to the OSC whose setting is Enable when the switch is turned on and portamento will be applied to neither OSC when the switch is turned off Foot Pedal Assign You can assign the function that will be controlled by an assignable pedal separately sold Korg XVP 10 or EXP 2 option connected to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack e This setting is made in GLOBAL 0 System Foot page Foot Pedal Assign 0 3a I If you select a function that includes a CC that MIDI control change message will be transmitted each time the pedal is operated min 0 max 127 Foot Pedal Assign List Master Volume Control the volume Simultaneously the universal exclusive message Master Volume FOH 7FH nn 04 01 vv mm F7H will be transmitted to con
404. on Drive 1 100 Sets the degree of distortion r Ex 06 C Level Output Level 0 50 Sets the overdrive output level i Fx 06 Des Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level Amount 50 50 Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level Lo Low Cutoff 20 1 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type G Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ M1 Mid1 Cutoff 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type Q Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 G Gain Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 M2 Mid2 Cutoff 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type Q Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 G Gain Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 18 18dB 18 18dB 18 18dB CMP OD OD gt CMP Routing Switches the order of the compressor and overdrive connection W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Doe Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 66 Comp P4EQ Compressor Parametric 4 Band EQ This effect combines a mono type compressor and a four band parametric equalizer You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out gt o TU Dry Routin
405. onance amount P Phaser W D Sets the phaser effect balance Output Mode Selects the phaser output mode Routing Switches the order of the limiter and phaser connection Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance t Fx 03 Inf 38 24dB t Fx 03 1 100 t Fx 03 1 100 t Fx 03 Tri Sine 0 02 20 00Hz 02 100 0 100 100 100 t Fx 23 Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet t Fx 10 23 Normal Wet Inv t Fx 67 LMT PHS PHS LMT t Fx 67 Das Off Tempo 100 100 EFFECT 142 73 Limit M Dly Limiter Multitap Delay This effect combines a mono type limiter and a multitap delay You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Routing N Multitap Delay Z Feedback NPD elay Limiter gt Envelope Control LMT Ratio 1 0 1 Sets the signal compression ratio Threshld Threshold Sets the level above which the compressor is applied par G Adj Gain Adjust Sets the limiter output gain ws Attack 1 Sets the attack time Release 1 Sets the release time S DLY T1 Tap1 Delay Sets the Tap1 delay time T2 Tap2 Delay Sets the Tap2 delay time T1 Level Tap1 Level
406. ontrolled in the same way as when CC 79 is received p 175 A Vel I Amp Velocity Intensity 99 00 99 Adjusts the amp velocity intensity the degree to which velocity will affect the amp for program OSC 1 2 This con trols the Amp Modulation Velocity Intensity parameter se p 22 6 2b F A EG A Filter Amp EG Attack Time 99 00 99 Adjusts the EG attack times of the program OSC 1 2 filter and amp To maximize the result of this adjustment the Amp EG sustain level attack level start level modulation and attack time modulation will also be adjusted at the same time The parameter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 73 is received p 175 F A EG D Filter Amp EG Decay Time 99 00 99 Adjusts the EG decay time and slope time of the program OSC 1 2 filter and amp The parameter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 75 is received v p 175 F A EG S Filter Amp EG Sustain Level 99 00 99 Adjusts the EG sustain level of the program OSC 1 2 filter and amp The parameter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 70 is received r p 175 F A EG R Filter Amp EG Release Time 99 00 99 Adjusts the EG release time of the program OSC 1 2 filter and amp The parameter will be controlled in the same way as when CC 72 is received r p 175 F EG A Filter EG Attack Time 99 00 99 F EG D Filter EG Decay Time 99 00 99
407. ossible to edit the category name of a drum sample or to re specify its category S Ofs Start Offset Off On On checked The sample waveform will start playback from a location later than the beginning of the drumsample waveform The location of the Start Offset is pre determined for each drumsample This setting is not valid for drumsam ples which have no Start Offset Off unchecked Playback will start from the beginning of the drumsample waveform Rev Reverse Off On On checked The drumsample waveform will playback in one shot reverse The location at which the reverse play back will start and end is pre determined for each drum sample A If the drumsample is already preset for reverse play back or reverse loop playback checking this setting will not change its playback direction A This parameter will not change the playback direction of a sample for which Rev Reverse is checked Trans Transpose 64 63 Adjusts the pitch in semitone steps 12 is one octave up and 12 is one octave down Tune Adjusts the pitch in one cent steps 99 is a semitone lower and 99 is a semitone higher Fc Cutoff 64 63 Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the filter The cutoff fre quency for each key is determined by adding this value to the filter Frequency PROG 4 1b 5 1b of the program that uses this drum kit 99 99 Reso Resonance 64 63 Adjusts the filter re
408. ot die away if the sustain level of the program s amp EG is other than 0 This setting is used when creating harpsichord sounds Normally you will set this to 0 Use Prog s Scale Off On Each timbre can use the scale that is specified by Scale PROG 1 1c On checked The scale specified by the program will be used Off unchecked The scale specified by Type Combi s Scale 2 4b will be used 2 4b Combi s Scale Key Random Specifies the scale that the combination will use Type Combi s Scale Equal Temperament User Octave15 Indicates the type of scale i Type Scale Type PROG 1 1c Key C B Indicates the tonic key of the selected scale re Key PROG 1 1c Random 0 7 As this value is increased an increasingly random devia tion will be added to the pitch at each note on t Random PROG 1 1c B 2 4 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 COMBI 3 Ed MIDI Filter1 These settings allow you to apply filters to the MIDI data that will be transmitted and received by each timbre 1 8 For example even if two timbres are being played by the same MIDI channel you can make settings so that the damper pedal will apply to one but not the other On checked Transmission and reception of MIDI data is enabled When Status 2 1a is INT operations of the built in con trollers or incoming MIDI data will apply the effect of the checked
409. otation speed is accelerated or decel erated gradually after you switch the speed The Horn Accel parameter sets the speed at which the rotation is accelerated or decelerated f MicDistance f Spread This is a simulation of stereo microphone settings Rotary Speaker Mic Placement Mic Spread Microphone EE Microphone bu TR Mic Distance Mic Distance _ Pa H Rotary Speaker Top View ER Delay Early reflection and delay effects 41 Early Reflect Early Reflections This effect is only the early reflection part of a reverberation sound and adds presence to the sound You can select one of the four decay curves Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o EQ Trim LEQ HEQ Early Reflections Righto Type Sharp Loose Modulated Reverse Selects the decay curve for the early reflection us ER Time 10 800ms Sets the time length of early reflection Pre Delay 0 200ms Sets the time taken from the original sound to the first early reflection Pre EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the input level of EQ applied to the effect sound LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain Sets the gain of High EQ W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dose Off Tempo 15 0 415 0dB 15 0 415 0dB Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100
410. oth Feedback and W D h High Damp This parameter sets the amount of damping of the feedback in the high range Increasing the value will cut high range harmonics 21 St Rndm Flang Stereo Random Flanger The stereo effect uses a step shape waveform and random LFO for modulation creating a unique flanging effect Stereo In Stereo Out Left A Wet Dry Feedback High Damp Right BEEN ERA Jo Ki Wet Dry LFO Phase LFO Step Tri Random e LFO Wave LFO Waveform Selects LFO Waveform LFO Phase 180 180deg Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 10 0 02 20 00Hz Step Tri Random i Ex 10 Freq LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed c Fx 10 Drar Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source used for both LFO speed and step speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed Step LFO Step Frequency 0 05 50 00Hz Sets the LFO step speed speed that changes in steps i Ex 10 D usa Amount 50 00 50 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO step speed Delay Delay Time 0 0 50 0ms Sets the delay time from the original sound Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes r gt Fx 09 eer BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo r Fx 09 10 Base Base Note
411. ou make here This is the same as when Oscillator Mode is Single or Double If IFX are selected the S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 after the specified insert effect will be used If 1 2 or 1 2 are selected S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 will be ignored 3 Mixer The send levels determine the input levels of oscillators Program timbres Combination tracks Multi set that are routed to the Master Effects The 9 Ed MasterFX or Mas terFX in all modes enable you to set the output levels and Master EQ gain values and connect the Master Effects in series chain 3 1 Rtn Return1 Return2 These specify the output levels from MFX1 and MFX2 respectively The left value of the W D specified for the effect selected in MFX 1 or 2 will be the output level of the master effect e g 25 for 25 75 100 for Wet and 0 for Dry This level multiplied by the Rtn Return 1 Return 2 value will be sent to the L R bus and will be mixed with the 8 1a BUS Select L R or 9 1a BUS Select L R output sound For example with MFX1 W D set to 50 50 50 and Rtn Return1 set to 64 50 the resultant effect level will be 25 The effect level is maximum 100 when W D is set to Wet and Rtn Return1 is set to 127 3 2 MFX Chain If you check the MFX Chain check box the signal will be routed between MFX1 and MFX2 The following figure indicates that the output from
412. ount of the effect balance a Mode This parameter switches the pitch shifter operating mode With Slow tonal quality will not be changed too much With Fast the effect becomes a Pitch Shifter that has a quick response but may change the tone Medium is in between these two If you do not need to set too much pitch shift amount set this parameter to Slow If you wish to change the pitch significantly use Fast b Shift b Source b Amount c Fine c Amount The amount of pitch shift will use the value of the Shift plus the Fine value The amount of modulation will use the c Amount value plus d Amount Modulation Source is used both for Shift and Fine e Feedback Position f Feedback When Feedback Position is set to Pre the pitch shifter output is again input to the pitch shifter Therefore if you specify a higher value for the Feedback parameter the pitch will be raised or low ered more and more each time feedback is repeated If Feedback Position is set to Post the feedback signal will not pass through the pitch shifter again Even if you specify a higher value for the Feedback parameter the pitch shifted sound will be repeated at the same pitch 125 126 39 PitchShft Mod Pitch Shift Modulation This effect modulates the detuned pitch shift amount using an LFO adding a clear spread and width to the sound by pan ning the effect sound and dry sound to t
413. ow EQ Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain Sets the gain of High EQ PHS LFO LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform of the phaser F LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Manu Manual Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Dep Depth Sets the depth of LFO modulation 15 415dB 15 415dB Tri Sine 0 02 20 00Hz 0 100 0 100 100 100 t Fx 23 Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet i Fx 10 23 Res Resonance Sets the resonance amount Phs W D Phaser Wet Dry Sets the phaser effect balance Out Output Mode Selects the phaser output mode Normal Wet Inv t Fx 67 Routing CMP gt PHS PHS CMP Switches the order of the compressor and phaser connection i Ex 67 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet D zs Off Tempo W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance EFFECT 140 69 Comp M Dly Compressor Multitap Delay This effect combines a mono type compressor and a multitap delay You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Routin g Compressor V N Multitap Delay EQ Trim LEQ HEQ r gt H lt H Comp A High Damp DLA Output Level Mt Dly Wet Dry Right gt o Wet Dry gt
414. pa 0 100 i Ex 43 0 100 t Fx 43 HiDamp High Damp Sets the damping amount in the high range LoDamp Low Damp Sets the damping amount in the low range 131 EFFECT 100 100 ce Fx 37 Drez Src Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level i Ex 37 Spread 0 50 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound ix Ex 43 W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds riese InLvi Mod Input Level Dmod Sets the modulation amount of the input level Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a BPM b L Bs b Times c C Bs c Times d R Bs d Times The delay time is the length of the note obtained by multiplying the Bs parameter by the Times value in relation to the tempo specified by the BPM parameter or the MIDI Clock tempo if BPM is set to MIDI f Time Over gt You can set the delay time up to 1365msec If the delay time exceeds this limit the error message OVER appears in the dis play Set the delay time parameters so that this message will not appear Time Over gt is only a display parameter 50 St BPM Delay stereo BPM Delay This stereo delay enables you to set the delay time to match the song tempo Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Ao Wet Dry High Damp Low Damp
415. pass filter Simultaneously CC 74 will be transmitted Fit Reso CC 71 Control the resonance of the Filter or the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter If the program s Type Filter1 2 Type is Low Pass Resonance the resonance level will be controlled If it is Low Pass amp High Pass the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter will be controlled Simultaneously CC 71 will be transmitted SW 1 Mod CC 80 General purpose controller Alternate Modulation or Effect Dynamic Modulation can be controlled To control these set AMS or Dmod Src to SW 1 80 Simultaneously CC 80 will be transmitted SW 2 Mod CC 81 General purpose controller Alternate Modulation or Effect Dynamic Modulation can be controlled To control these set AMS or Dmod Src to SW 2 81 Simultaneously CC 81 will be transmitted Foot SW CC 82 General purpose controller Alternate Modulation or Effect Dynamic Modulation can be controlled To use this select FootSW 82 for AMS or FSW 82 for Dmod Src Simultaneously CC 82 will be transmitted MIDI CC 83 CC 83 General purpose controller Alternate Modulation or Effect Dynamic Modulation can be controlled To use this select MIDI CC 83 for AMS or CC 83 for Dmod Src Simultaneously CC 83 will be transmitted MFX Send 1 CC 93 Control the send level to Master Effect1 Simultaneously CC 93 will be transmitted MFX Send 2 CC 91 Control the send level to Ma
416. pend on the type of con nected MIDI instrument or device Fit KT Filter Keyboard Track Fit KT Filter Keyboard Track Fit KT 0 Filter Keyboard Track 0 Fit KT 0 Filter Keyboard Track 0 Amp KT Amp Keyboard Track Amp KT Amp Keyboard Track Amp KT 0 Amp Keyboard Track 0 Amp KT 0 Amp Keyboard Track 7 0 The direction of the effect will be determined by the sign positive or negative of the Ramp Low or Ramp High setting The direction of the effect will be determined by the sign of the Ramp Low setting and by the opposite sign of the Ramp High setting 50 for a setting of 50 and 50 for a setting of 50 0 4 Ramp Low will have no AMS effect The sign of the Ramp High setting will determine the direction of its effect 0 The sign of the Ramp Low setting will determine the direction of its effect Ramp High will have no AMS effect example of Amp Keyboard Track settings Ramp High 50 Note Number Key Low Key High AMS Amp KT max AMS Intensity positive value Depth and direction of modulation AMS Amp KT max AMS Intensity positive value Depth and direction of modulation AMS Amp KT 0 max AMS Intensity positive value Depth and direction of modulation AMS Amp KT 0 max AMS Intensity positive value Depth and direction of modulation X50 M WhI amp AT 2 mi
417. peration p 83 84 Transmission Reception e f Exclusive GLOBAL 1 1b setting is checked selecting a combination in COMBI 0 Play will transmit data for one combination Selecting a program in PROG 0 Play will transmit data for one program This data is the edit buffer data for the currently selected combination or program If this data is received by the X50 microX the data will be written into the edit buffer so if you wish to save it to internal memory you will need to perform the Write operation The Write operation can also be performed by a MIDI exclusive Program Write Request or Combination Write Request message in addition to the usual method of using the X50 microX s switches rx OG X50 p 115 microX p 117 Saving data e f Exclusive GLOBAL 1 1b setting is checked data will also be dumped in response to a Dump Request message This data is transmitted and received on the global MIDI channel Editing sounds etc By using various MIDI exclusive data dumps you can rewrite all programs or an individual program By using parameter change messages you can edit individual param eters as follows Parameter changes e In Program mode all parameters other than the program name can be edited Performance editor parameters are included n Combination mode parameters other than the combination name can be edited n Multi mode track parameters and effect parameters can be edited When
418. pitch modulation produced by OSC1 LFOI will be applied in the normal phase if you have assigned a positive value or in the reverse phase if you have assigned a negative value 98 The depth and direction of the pitch modulation pro duced by OSC1 LFOI depends on the sum of the settings for Intensity LFO1 Intensity X50 M Whl Int LFO1 MWheel Int microX JS Y Int LFO1 JS Y Int and AMS LFO1 AMS p 154 LFO2 Intensity LFO2 Intensity 12 00 12 00 X50 Mod Whl Int LFO2 Mod Whl Int 12 00 12 00 microX J S Y Int LFO2 J S4 Y Int 12 00 12 00 AMS LFO2 AMS Off PEG FEG AEG KT EXT Intensity AMS Intensity 12 00 12 00 Refer to the preceding section LFO1 E 2 2 UTILITY s Write Program 0 1 Copy Oscillator Swap Oscilla tor 1 1 2 3 0SC2 Specifies how the key position on the keyboard will affect the pitch of oscillator 2 and selects the controller that will affect the pitch and specify the depth of control Here you can also specify the amount of pitch change produced by the pitch EG and set the portamento mode and on off status For details on each parameter refer to the preceding 2 1 OSC1 2 4 OS2Ifo osc2 LFo Specifies the amount of pitch change produced by LFO1 and LFO2 for oscillator 2 For an explanation of each parameter refer to the preceding 2 2 OS1Ifo 2 5 EG Pitch EG IE Here you ca
419. ply to the range of notes above the note number you specify here Ramp Ramp Setting Specifies the angle of the keyboard tracking Low KBDTrk Ramp Low 99 99 With positive values of this parameter the volume will increase as you play notes below the Low KBDTrk Key Low note number With negative values the volume will decrease High KBDTrk Ramp High 99 99 With positive values of this parameter the volume will increase as you play notes above the High KBDTrk Key High note number With negative values the volume will decrease Volume change produced by key position and Ramp settings Volume Ramp Low 99 Ramp High 99 Ramp Low 0 Ramp High 0 Ramp Low 99 Ramp High 99 Key KBDTrk Low KBDTrk High 6 2b Amp Mod LFO1 Mod LFO2 Mod Indicates settings to specify how the volume of oscillator 1 will be controlled by velocity OSC1 LFO1 and OSC1 LFO2 Amp Mod Amp Modulation Velocity Int Amp Velocity Int 99 99 With positive values the volume will increase as you play more strongly With negative values the volume will decrease as you play more strongly Volume change with positive values of this parameter Note on Note on Note off Note off Softly played Strongly played LFO1 Mod LFO1 Modulation Intensity LFO1 Intensity 99 99 These parameters let you use OSC1 LFO1 3 1 to control the oscillator
420. ps or the Insert Step utility to insert an empty step X50 Use the numeric buttons to enter Tones With Step selected use the numeric buttons to enter a Tone 0 9 cor respond to Tone 0 9 to Tone 10 and the HOLD but ton to Tone 11 The tone will be set or reset each time you press the button Tones are shown as O if Fixed Note 5 1d is checked or as if it is not checked Ptch Pitch Offset 48 48 For each step the pitch corresponding to the Tone can be raised or lowered in semitone steps This lets you make set tings for the same tone in each step to create a melody or to make settings for two or more tones in each step to play par allel chords G 91 92 Gt Gate Off 001 100 LGT Off That step will not sound even if Tones have been speci fied LGT Notes will continue sounding until the same Tone is sounded next or until the pattern returns to the beginning At this time the display will change to BI or L1 This setting is valid when the Program Combination or multi set parameter Gate PROG 7 1a COMBI 7 2 3 a MULTI 7 3 4 a is set to Step When making this setting make sure that Gate is set to Step in the mode from which you arrived here Vel Velocity 001 127 Key Key The Tone of the step will sound with the velocity at which the key was played 001 127 The specified velocity value will always be used This setting is valid when the Progra
421. q ost WO TO ss 33 2 Tozquoo peeds TOAT 403 L ae odauo punos AA AA 9L OV ug uad q o3e943qrA 60 TO Ss 33 2 Tozquoo eurp eoeq 403 9 AeTTOA UCD punog AA AA SL gp ug qew OQ9JQIA 80 IO Ss 33 3 To233uoo FFOIND AdT 403 G AST TOA uUoD punos AA AA VL WP ug 3109jje ou sey entea gst Aaquyq GIS To233uoo SUTL Open 4303 p ae oad3uo punos AA AA EL et uq PTTCA ST obessoul euueuo s xoe3 Toto epou TATNW UT u uM o TOr UOCD eurp esee eu AOJ ae o4d4uo punos AA AA ZL 8 ug pTTeA ST ebesseu euueuo eqo 9 epow uorjeurquoo uedqboaq ut ueuM J T2949 jgoano 4dH 9oueuoseHg 103 Z I TTO01I7U09 punog AA AA IL L ug 2 TorqUOD T A T ureasns 3071 TI I TTOI4U09 punog AA AA 0L op ug 943uoo uabu Tq zo3er 6bedaw 20 00 2 Teped 470S AA AA L9 V ug 043uoo AAToOoTeA do3erbbedav g0 00 9 UO 3jgO oanuea2sosS 79 lt E9 gt OP lt AE gt 1 99 Zr ug 033uoo een idoqerbb6eday vO 00 2 uo FFO oaueuej34g0gd v9 9 0v 43 51 89 TP ug uo 3jo Zoigtbbadig z0 00 SS 33 x 2 xedueq se TPTOH AA AA v9 OF ug S atpe Odd 1393 asT aaug e3eq AA AA 8 92 ug 9uueuo S X4I yore pou ri3Tny uoraeurquoj ur ueuM 8d I ebueyo rquo borg 1403 gS I 399 9S xued qq qq ZE OC ug Teuueyo TeqoTH epou ueidbodgd ur u uM U Zx 9 vWqoux 235 poug x3 9 SWY se AA AA TZ SI ug d Wqouy 235 powd X4 9 SWW S AA AA 02 FI uq 5
422. quency 0 02 30 00Hz Sets the LFO1 speed Dm Off Tempo Triangle Sine Triangle Sine Source Selects the modulation source of LFO1 amp 2 speed Amount 30 00 30 00 Sets the modulation amount of LFO1 speed F2 LFO2 Frequency Sets the LFO2 speed 0 02 30 00Hz D Amount 30 00 30 00 Sets the modulation amount of LFO2 speed L Dly L Pre Delay Sets the delay time for the left channel R Dly R Pre Delay Sets the delay time for the right channel Depth1 Sets the depth of LFO1 modulation r gt Ex 16 0 0 50 0ms r gt Ex 16 0 100 D Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO1 amp 2 modulation depth Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of LFO1 modulation depth Depth2 Sets the depth of LFO2 modulation De Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of LFO2 modulation depth Feedback Sets the feedback amount 100 100 c Fx 17 HiDamp High Damp Sets the damping amount in the high range W D Wet Dly Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds i Ex 10 Due Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance Bi Phase Modulation LFO 27 St Vibrato Stereo Vibrato This effect causes the pitch of the input signal to shimmer Using the AutoFade allows you to increase or decrease t
423. r drum programs you should normally set Hold Off amp If you turn Hold On for a drum program keys of the selected drum kit whose Enable Note Off parameter GLOBAL 4 3a is unchecked will be set to Hold On Keys that are checked will be set to Hold Off If you select Hold Off the keys will be set to Hold Off regard less of their Enable Note Off setting Single Trigger Off On This is available when the Mode Voice Assign Mode set ting is set to Poly On checked When the same note is played repeatedly the previous note will be silenced before the next note is sounded so that the notes do not overlap Legato Off On This is available when the Mode Voice Assign Mode set ting is set to Mono On checked Legato is on When multiple note on mes sages occur the first note on will retrigger the sound and the second and subsequent note ons will not retrigger When legato is on multiple note on message will not retrig ger the voice If one note is already on and another note is turned on the oscillator sound envelope and LFO will not be reset and only the pitch of the oscillator will be updated This setting is effective for wind instrument sounds and analog synth type sounds Off unchecked Legato is off Notes will always be retrig gered when note on occurs When legato is off multiple note on s will retrigger the voice at each note on The oscillator sound envelope and LFO will be res
424. r iris Controls knobi 6 assign 7798 Trnob fe At ae hnabz B hnab od 2 hnab5 B Krob od 5 Hnabd B Rnab Mod d 7 5a Knob B Assign These settings assign functions mainly various control changes to the B mode of the REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 rx p 162 Realtime Control Knobs B Assign List The functions you specify here will be controlled when you operate the REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 in B mode Since the REALTIME CONTROLS knob 1 4 function of the B mode assignments made for the programs assigned to each timbre are not valid for the combination new functions must be set by these parameters Knob1 B Knob1 B Assign TI Off MIDI CC 95 Knob2 B Knob2 B Assign RES Off MIDI CC 95 Knob3 B Knob3 B Assign RES Off MIDI CC 95 Knob4 B Knob4 B Assign RES Off MIDI CC 95 X50 7 5b SW1 2 Assign These settings assign the function of SW1 and SW2 p 161 SW1 SW2 Assign List Since the function assignments of SW1 and SW2 made for the programs assigned to each timbre are not valid for the combination new functions must be set for these parame ters SW1 SW1 Assign MESS Off Pitch Bend Lock SW1 Mode Toggle Momentary SW2 SW2 Assign MESS Off Pitch Bend Lock SW2 Mode Toggle Momentary t PROG 7 3b B 7 5 UTILITY w Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 COMBI 8 Ed InsertFX t For details on insertion effects refer to p 97
425. r the chorus flanger Routing W D Wet Dly Source Amount Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance Sets the level above which the compressor is applied Inf 38 24dB Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Selects the modulation source of the effect balance gt o s Dry 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 t Fx 03 t Fx 03 1 100 t Fx 03 1 100 te Fx 03 Tri Sine 0 02 20 00Hz 0 0 50 0ms 0 100 100 100 t Fx 20 0 100 15 15dB 15 15dB Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet t Fx 10 20 Normal Wet Inv LMTCH FL CH FL gt LMT Switches the order of the limiter and chorus flanger connection Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Dus Off Tempo 100 100 Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Routing Limiter Y N Phaser Limiter Wet Dry 979 Output Mode Resonance Wet Invert i Phaser Wet Dry Wet Dry 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio Threshld Threshold Sets the level above which the compressor is applied G Adj Gain Adjust Sets the limiter output gain Attack Sets the attack time Release Sets the release time PHS LFO LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform of the phaser F LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Manu Manual Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Dep Depth Sets the depth of LFO modulation Resonance Sets the res
426. racks set to INT which have the same MIDI channel will sound and be controlled identically when they receive MIDI data Bank EX2 MSB 000 127 Bank EX2 LSB 000 127 When Status is set to EX2 this sets the bank number that will be transmitted When Status is other than EX2 this setting has no effect Data from Arp Operations on the X50 microX B 2 1 2 UTILITY is Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 2 3 0SC 8 oscTo1 08 2 4 0SC 16 osc T09 16 Indicates settings for each track MULTI 2 Track Param OSC Force 05C Mode Gita Ey slow agita Be nuita Etrin PRG PRG PRG PRG PR PRG Both Both Both i Bath Both i Both i Bath Both PRG PRG PRG PRG PRG PRG PRG rni Tenn ze ose lose 36 Iren 2M Pech teo tnr othr 2 3 4 a Force OSC Mode OSC Select Portamento Force OSC Mode PRG Poly Mono LGT Selects the Mode Voice Assign Mode PROG 1 1b of the program selected for each track 1 8 9 16 rx COMBI 2 2a OSC Select Both OSC1 OSC2 Specifies the Mode Oscillator Mode PROG 1 12 of the program selected for each track 1 8 9 16 If the Mode Oscillator Mode is Double you can use this setting to make only one or the other oscillator sound COMBI 2 2a Portamento PRG Off 001 127 Specifies the portamento effect for each track 1 8 9 16 rx COMBI 22a MIDI When the track whose Status 2 1a 2a is INT or BT
427. receive this data First check Enable Exclusive GLOBAL 1 1b so that exclusive data can be transmitted and received When you change modes on the X50 microX a mode change message will transmitted When you change programs or combina tions the parameters for one program or one combination will be transmitted together with the program change When you edit individual parameters parameter change drum kit parameter change or user arpeggio pattern param eter change messages will be transmitted 177 Appendices 178 When these messages are received the same editing opera tion will be performed as on the transmitted device After MIDI exclusive data has been received and processed a Data Load Completed message will be transmitted The control master device must not transmit the next message until this message is received or until a sufficient interval of time has elapsed When you change programs combinations or multi set or use parameter changes to edit the changes will affect the data in the edit buffer and will not be stored in internal memory unless you Write so that the changes will be lost if you re select the program combination or multi set The Write operation can be performed by a MIDI exclusive Pro gram Write Request or Combination Write Request message in addition to the usual method of using this instrument s switches 1 OG X50 p 115 microX p 117 Saving data If notes are stuck I
428. reo compressor You can link left and right channels or use each channel separately Stereo In Stereo Out Left o EQ Trim LEQ Envelope Control TE Envelope Select Envelope Control X Compressor Output Level H EQ Trim LEQ HEQ Wet Dry Envelope Envelope Select L R Mix L R Individually Determines whether the left and right channels are linked or used separately Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity 0 100 S prz Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the compressor output level 100 100 Level Output Level Sets the output level of the compressor Amount Sets the modulation amount of the compressor output level Pre EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level 0 100 LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain 15 0 15 0dB Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain Sets the gain of High EQ W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D s Off Tempo 15 0 15 0dB Source Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance a Envelope This parameter selects whether the left and right channels are linked to control both signals simultaneously or whether each channel is controlled independently b Sensitivity d Level The Sensitivity parameter sets the sensitivity of the compressor
429. rite it to memory before turning off the power or selecting another program For the procedure refer to Write Program PROG 0 1 Write Multi Bee Pop Ballade To Cancel Copy From Combi Copy from Combination This command copies the parameters of the specified combi nation to the currently selected multi set CD Select Copy From Combi to access the dialog box Copy from Combination Combi with Effects T Tracki to ClAute adjust Arpeggio setting Cancel 2 In Combi select the copy source destination 3 If you check with Effects the insertion effect master effect and master EQ settings will also be copied 4 In To select the copy destination tracks 1 8 or 9 16 If in step you specified To as Track 1 to 8 the Auto adjust Arpeggio Setting option will be available If you select this option the MIDI channel and other settings of some tracks will be automatically adjusted and tracks will be added as necessary so that when you turn on the arpeggiator for the multi set it will sound just like it did when you played the combination 6 To execute the Copy From Combi command press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CAN CEL button Be aware that when you execute this com mand the setting data of the currently selected multi will be erased and overwritten by the data of the selected combination GM Initialize This command tran
430. rn off write protect and exe cute the write or load operation once again MIDI data receiving error Meaning While receiving MIDI System Exclusive data the format of the received data was invalid for exam ple because the size of the data was incorrect Now Writing into internal memory Meaning This message will appear while data is being writ ten into internal memory It will appear in the fol lowing situations e While writing updating Programs Combinations Multi set Multi set Global Settings Drum Kits or Arpeggio Patterns While receiving a MIDI data dump of Program Combination Multi set Global Setting Drum Kit or Arpeggio Pattern data e If writing to internal memory could not be completed successfully because the power was turned off while writing or for any other reason the X50 microX will automatically initialize the internal memory the next time the power is turned on in order to ensure that the memory is in the correct state This message will be displayed while the data is being written Now receiving MIDI data A data dump or other large quantity of MIDI data is being received Now transmitting data A data dump or other large quantity of MIDI data is being received XxOZOTwW We UO p uzn3 ST TOHLINOO IXJ Uauu peTqeuy d pexoeuo sr epou TeqoT5 ur uonort 4193gjV e qeug usym peTqeuy I pexoeuo sr epou TeqoT5 ur ebueu xueg pue uedibodg e qeusg ueuM pe qeus gd pexoeuo sr epou eqoio ur e
431. rolled on the MIDI channel specified for each track by MIDI Channel 2 1a 22 Bii 2 5 6 UTILITY Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY Detune BPM Adj Detune BPM Adjust If a drum program uses a multisample to match a specific BPM you can use this utility command to modify its BPM Detune BPM Adj changes the BPM of a phrase or rhythm by modifying its pitch This command is available for a track if the track Detune parameter is selected When you execute this command the selected Detune value will be set automatically es PROG 1 2c 1 3 GLOBAL 4 1b 4 2 For the procedure refer to Detune BPM Adj COMBI 2 3 2 7 Othr 8 other To1 08 2 8 Othr 16 other To9 16 For each track specify the delay time from note on until the sound is heard and select the scale MULTI 2 Track Param i Crum EI Bad ther Delau mz guita E slow A guita E anuita E Etrin 2 a 2 7b rupi feti 36 ase 2 Mose te Ftch 2 p ten dell otnr 2 othr 16 2 7 8 a Delay ms Use Prog s Scale Delay ms 0000 5000 KeyOff Specifies a delay time from when a track receives a note on until it actually sounds KeyOff The sound will begin when note off occurs In this case the sound will continue indefinitely unless the amp EG Sustain Level of the program is other than 0 This setting is useful for si
432. ront panel ARP ON OFF button is on will cause arpeggiator A to operate for tracks 1 and 2 and produce sound for both tracks e In Control Track 0 1a choose Track03 Playing the keyboard when the front panel ARP ON OFF button is off will play the sound assigned to track 3 Playing the keyboard when the front panel ARP ON OFF button is on will cause arpeggiator B to operate for track 3 and play the sound assigned to track 3 e Alternatively you could choose Track01 in Control Track 0 1a to run arpeggiator A for tracks 1 and 2 and use an external MIDI device connected to the X50 microX s MIDI IN to send note data to MIDI channel 3 to play arpeggiator B Arpeggiator Assign ELT Bus dual Pattern A Track MIDICh 1ch Status INT Pattern A Track2 MIDI Track2 MIDICh 2ch Status INT 2ch Status INT Pattern A Trigger ku E E EN Track3 MIDI Ch 3ch Status INT Pattern B B 7 1 2 UTILITY Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 Copy Arpeg giator COMBI 7 1 69 70 7 3 Arp A Arpeggiator A 7 4 Arp B Arpeggiator B Indicates settings for arpeggiator A in the Arp A page and for arpeggiator B in the Arp B page note You can use the Copy Arpeggiator utility to copy set tings from another mode such as Program mode MULTI fi Arp Ctris Pattern ip ETE du 7 3a ctaue 1 Gate step Velocity Step Swing H set Meat tell i M A Pattern e Sort Latch heu Syn
433. rrent mode D Press the MENU OK button to access the PAGE MENU The PAGE MENU will show an abbreviated name for each page Program xPHGE MENU Filter 1 Filter AMP 172 Rrp Cantrolz Insert Effect Master Effect 2 Use the ClickPoint lt 4 gt A V to select a page 3 Press the center of the ClickPoint to access the page 4 If the selected page is divided into multiple pages use the PAGE buttons to select the page you want MA Other ways to select a page e Use the PAGE buttons to move between tabs of a page e Hold down the MENU OK button and use the PAGE buttons to move forward or backward in the order of pages 0512 3 etc X50 Hold down the MENU OK button and press one of the numeric buttons 0 9 to move to the corresponding page number For example if you want to move to the PROG 3 Ed LFOs page hold down the MENU OK button and press numeric button 3 Play 0 Play Select and play programs Use the Performance Editor for easy edit ing and to do simple editing of arpeggio patterns microX Select an external control set ry p 1 Basic 1 Ed Basic Set basic program parameters such as Oscillator and Multisample p 6 40 Pitch 2 Ed Pitch Pitch settings Pitch EG settings p 10 LFOs 3 Ed LFOs Type and speed settings etc for the two LFOs provided for each oscillator Make settings in the pitch filter and amp pages to specify t
434. rt A attack B break to specify the direction of the effect if any on that segment AMS will function according to the Intensity setting The sign of the Intensity setting will be inverted 0 AMS will have no effect If I AMS Intensity is set to 66 the various EG levels can be controlled over a maximum range of 99 Set AMS to Velocity for Amp EG Level Modulation I AMS Intensity to 66 S to 0 A to and B to Set all Amp EG levels to 00 As you play with increasing velocity the EG levels will change more greatly At the maximum velocity the Start Level will stay at 00 but the Attack Level will change to 99 and the Break Level will change to 99 EG Time Pitch EG PROG 2 5c Filter EG PROG 4 5c 5 5c Amp EG PROG 6 3c EG times can be controlled by keyboard tracking control lers or tempo etc Set the I AMS Intensity value and select 0 for each EG segment A attack D decay S slope R release to specify the direction of the effect if any on that segment AMS will function according to the Intensity setting The sign of the Intensity setting will be inverted 0 AMS will have no effect Each EG time is determined by the Alternate Modulation value at the moment that the corresponding EG point is reached For example the Alternate Modulation value at the moment that the Attack Level is reached will determine the Decay Time If
435. rtaniento imme 11 Time Modulation 13 20 24 MONG r ji OE 90 99 Jo KO yaspa errr rte bids 45 Track Parameter 61 Transp OSE secsi 4 8 9 41 62 82 U Universal system exclusive 176 User arpeggio pattern 25 73 76 79 89 9L 177 User Octave Scale 85 User Seale ua iet EIS 75 85 V Velocity carcini 9 16 22 26 46 68 Velocity Cross fade 46 Velocity UV ENTE 76 82 Velocity Switch 7 46 87 Velocity Zone 9 46 68 Velocity Z OLI esseri metet 46 68 Volume 36 38 58 CONTO Dara 173 W Werkmeister Werkmeister IID 6 Write Write Arpeggio Patterns 91 Write Combination 34 Write Drum Kits 88 Write Global Setting 76 EI E 56 Wille EE 3 X c 78 179 IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should be used If you have purchased this product via the internet through mail order and or via a telephone sale you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in which you reside WARNING Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended coul
436. ry 0 100 20 1 00kHz 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 418dB 50 5 00kHz 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 418dB 300 10 00kHz 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 418dB 500 20 00kHz 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 418dB Right C Routing Parametric 4Band EQK x Wah Auto Wah PEQ Trim Sets the parametric EQ input level B1 Bandi Cutoff Sets the center frequency of Band 1 Q Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 1 B2 Band2 Cutoff Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Q Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 2 B3 Band3 Cutoff Sets the center frequency for Band 3 Q Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 3 B4 Band4 Cutoff Sets the center frequency for Band 4 Q Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 4 WAH FreqBtm Frequency Bottom Sets the lower limit of the wah center frequency Top Frequency Top Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency Swp Mode Sweep Mode Wet Dry 0 100 20 1 00kHz 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 18dB 50 5 00kHz 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 18dB 300 10 00kHz 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 18dB 500 20 00kHz 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 18dB 0 100 t Fx 09 0 100 t Fx 09 Auto Dmod LFO Selects the control from auto wah modulation source and LFO EFFECT t Fx 09 Dzez7 Src Source Off Tempo
437. s 24 St Rndm Phasr 25 St Env Phaser Stereo Random Phaser Stereo Envelope Phaser This is a stereo phaser The effect uses a step shape waveform This stereo phaser uses an envelope generator for modula and random LFO for modulation creating a unique phasing tion You will obtain the same pattern of phasing each time effect you play You can also control the Phaser directly using the modulation source Stereo In Stereo Out Left o VB Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Resonance nix High Damp Phaser Right o i vi 5 bog M Wet Dry 1 f LFO Phase Right o e le LFO Step Tri Random ii SES LFO Wave LFO Waveform Step Tri Step Sin Random Selects LFO Waveform is Fx 10 L Manu Bottom L Manual Bottom 0 100 LFO Phase 180 180deg Sets the lower limit of the frequency range for the effect on the left Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right e Fx 10 channel Fx 09 Freq LFO Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz L Manu Top L Manual Top 0 100 Sets the LFO speed vo Fx 10 Dime Sets the upper limit of the frequency range for the effect on the left channel v Fx 09 Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source commonly used for LFO speed and H Manu Bottom R Manual Bottom 0 100 step speed Sets the lower limit of the frequency range for the effect on the right channel t Fx 09 Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amou
438. s the corresponding effect s will be turned off as a group If you uncheck these settings the on off settings of each mode will be used The same applies to reception vv of 00 is off and 01 or greater is the original setting These messages are transmitted received on the global MIDI channel p 29 p 30 FX On Off Z8 These messages are defined simply for use in adjusting the effect levels and may not have the same function on another instrument connected to the X50 microX Using various controllers for control Foot controller CC 04 Bn 04 vv If the above CC is assigned as the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL function this message will be transmitted when the control ler is operated e n Combination and Multi modes transmission reception of this message can be turned on off independently for each timbre track Foot Pedal Switch COMBI 4 2a MULTI 4 3 4 a Knob modulation 1 2 3 4 CC 17 19 20 21 Bn 11 vv Bn 13 vv Bn 14 vv Bn 15 vv If the above CC are assigned to the B mode of REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs these messages will be transmit ted when the knobs are operated e n Combination and Multi modes transmission reception of this message can be turned on off independently for each timbre track Realtime Control Knob1 2 3 4 COMBI 4 1 2 a MULTI 4 1 2 3 4 a Controller CC 83 Bn 53 vv If the above CC is assigned to the B mode of REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs t
439. s changed However this will not be transmitted by a timbre that is set to the same MIDI channel as the global MIDI channel This message is transmitted on the MIDI Channel 2 1a specified for each timbre This parameter can also be set from the 1 Ed Tone Adjust Mixer page B 0 3 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 Select by Category 0 1 PROG 0 1 Hold Balance Adjusts the volume of the Combi while preserving the vol ume balance between timbres 1 8 Select the Volume of any timbre choose Hold Balance from the utility menu and press the center of the ClickPoint A check mark will appear at the left of Hold Balance The upper right of the LCD will indicate Hold Bal In this state adjusting any Volume value will simulta neously change the volume of the other timbres as well while preserving the volume balance between timbres 1 8 0 4 Arp A Arpeggio Play A 0 5 Arp B Arpeggio Play B Here you can select the arpeggiator settings for the combina tion A combination can run two arpeggiators simulta neously Arpeggiator parameters can be edited in 7 Ed Arp Ctrls but certain major parameters can be edited in these pages as well You can edit these parameters in realtime for example by changing the arpeggio pattern while playing in COMBI 0 Play To save the edits you make use Write Combination The arpeggiator can also be edited in realtime by
440. s controlled on the global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 1a rx p 157 Dynamic Modulation Source Dmod E 9 2 3 UTILITY r Write Program 0 1 9 4 M EQ Master EQ The master EQ is a three band stereo EQ It is used to adjust the overall tonality of the sound immediately before the L R bus is output to the MAIN OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks r p 149 The MEO High Gain and the MEO Low Gain can be controlled by assigning a modualtion source to the Low Gain Mod Src and High Gain Mod src functions on this page PROG Hx md FC Rs Haster ER Gain baih 3 80E Gait 6 506 Low Gamm Mod Sre Off Off E 9 4 UTILITY ws Write Program 0 1 31 32 2 Combination mode COMBI PAGE MENU For details on how to select pages in Combination mode refer to p 1 Combination PAGE HENUX NENNEN Tone Rd just HIDI Filter 1 MIDI Filter Velocity Zone AFP Controls Inzert Effect Mazter Effect 0 Play Select and play combinations Select a program for each timbre and make pan and level settings Select an arpeggio pattern and make settings microX Select an external control set rs p 33 1 Ed Tone Adjust Select the program used by each timbre Specify the pan and volume of each pro gram Use Tone Adjust to adjust parameters rs p 38 Track Parameter 2 Ed Track Param MIDI OSC Pitch delay and scale set tings for each timbre ep AO MIDI Filter 1 3
441. s the gain of Mid High EQ 2 PHS LFO LFO Waveform Selects the LFO waveform of the phaser F LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Manu Manual Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Dep Depth Sets the depth of LFO modulation 18 18dB Tri Sine 0 02 20 00Hz 0 100 D 100 100 100 t Fx 23 Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet t Fx 10 23 Res Resonance Sets the resonance amount Phs W D Phaser Wet Dry Sets the phaser effect balance Out Output Mode Selects the phaser output mode Normal Wet Inv t Fx 67 Routing OD PHS PHS OD Switches the order of the overdrive and phaser connection i Ex 67 W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D z Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 82 OD HG M Diy Overdrive Hi Gain Multitap Delay This effect combines a mono type overdrive high gain dis tortion and a multitap delay Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Overdrive Hi Gain Multitap Delay Output Level Mt Dly Wet Dry A Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Drive 7 Wet Dry OD Mode Drive Mode Switches between overdrive and high gain distortion OverD Hi Gain Drive Sets the degree of distortion Level Output Level Sets the overdrive output level r Fx 06 Di
442. s the volume level that will be reached after the attack time has elapsed B Break Point Level 00 99 Specifies the volume level that will be reached after the decay time has elapsed 00 99 S Sustain Level 00 99 Specifies the volume level that will be maintained from after the slope time has elapsed until note off occurs T Time parameters A Attack Time 00 99 Specifies the time over which the volume will change after note on until it reaches the attack level If the start level is 0 this will be the rise time of the sound D Decay Time 00 99 Specifies the time over which the volume will change from when it reaches the attack level until it reaches the break point level S Slope Time 00 99 Specifies the time over which the volume will change from when it reaches the break point level until it reaches the sus tain level R Release Time 00 99 Specifies the time over which the volume will change after note off until it reaches 0 6 3b Level Mod Level Modulation These parameters let you use AMS to modulate the amp 1 EG levels that were specified in Amp 1 EG 6 3a AMS Level Mod AMS Off KT EXT Selects the source that will control the Level parameters of the amp 1 EG r p 152 AMS List I AMS Intensity 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS Level Mod AMS will have For example if AMS Level
443. scillator x filter keyboard tracking within the same oscillator Amp Keyboard Track amp keyboard tracking within the same oscillator r p 153 amp keyboard tracking within the same oscillator t p 153 ii p 153 1 p 153 A 4 r r A 2 r r r amp keyboard tracking within the same oscillator ATITA SIE a We amp keyboard tracking within the same oscillator note number T Velocity MIDI Poly AT MIDI Poly After Touch MIDI AfterT MIDI After Touch Aftertouch channel aftertouch received from the MIDI IN USB connector X50 Pitch Bend microX JS X Joy Stick X X50 PITCH wheel microX Joystick X axis horizontal EXT X50 Mod Whl 01 microX JS Y 01 Joy X50 MOD wheel up direction CC 01 velocity Thi gt polyphonic aftertouch received from the MIDI IN USB connector gt sit mim x 53 n gt Stick Y CC 01 microX Joystick Y axis up CC 01 EXT JS Y 02 Joy Stick Y CC 02 microX Joystick Y axis down CC 02 EXT X50 M WhI amp AT 2 microX JS Y amp AT 2 Joy X50 MOD wheel up direction and aftertouch received from the MIDI connector rz p 153 Stick Y amp After Touch 2 microX Joystick Y axis up and aftertouch received from the MIDI connector EXT JS Y amp AT 2 Joy Stick
444. select a program and press the center to finalize your selection e 10 s HOLD p 2 e Use PROG BANK A GM to select a bank rz p 1 e Use Select by Category to select by category p 2 e Use the foot switch r p 80 164 e Receive a MIDI program change r p 171 microX e Turn the VALUE dial Press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight the field then use A V to select a program and press the center to finalize your selection Use Select by Category to select by category p 2 e Use the CATEGORY button and PROGRAM COMBINATION buttons to select by category r p 2 e Use the foot switch r p 80 164 e Receive a MIDI program change r p 171 MIDI You can receive MIDI program changes from a con nected external MIDI device or use a foot switch to select programs sp SO Foot SW Assign GLOBAL 0 3a p 164 Foot Switch Assign List Category 00 15 name Selects the program category All programs are classified into one of sixteen categories You can select the desired category and then choose pro grams from that category To select a program by category use the procedure described below note To assign a category to each program use the Write Program 0 1 dialog box To change the name of a cat egory use Category Name Prog 00 07 08 15 rx GLOBAL 3 1 2 X50 Cat HOLD Category Hold Press the HOLD button to display tat Hot pl The categor
445. ses this instrument to sound in duplicate M Even if this is unchecked MIDI transmission and recep tion will occur as usual Note messages will be trans mitted when you play the keyboard and this instrument s tone generator will sound when note mes sages are received Tone generator MIDI OUT USB 1 1b MIDI Filter Enable Program Change Off On On checked Program changes will be transmitted and received In Program mode PROG 0 Play the program will be switched when a program change message is received on the global MIDI channel specified by MIDI Channel 1 1a When you switch programs a program change message will be transmitted on the global MIDI channel In Combination mode COMBI 0 Play the combination will be switched when a program change message is received on the global MIDI channel However it is possible to set the Combi Combi Change parameter so that the combination is not switched When a program change is received on the channel specified for each timbre by MIDI Channel COMBI 2 13 the program of that timbre will be switched However the program changes for each timbre will be affected by the setting of the Program Change parameter COMBI 3 1a When you switch combinations a program change message will be transmitted on the global MIDI channel and also transmitted simultaneously on the channel of timbres whose Status COMBI 2 1a is set to EXT or EX2 In Multi mode
446. slopes the grayed portion to overlap the sounds will overlap and the proportion of the overlap will change according to the keyboard location Positional Cross fade 9 1 Key Key Zone COMBI 5 Ed Ee T Top key Tai B8istereaPiano mft Lee ET repe P 5 la Key Zone Map 1 Bottom Slope 1 1 lt 1 1 Top Slope This displays the range of note data that will sound the cur rently selected track The range of notes sounded is shown as a line and the slope portion is shaded 5 1b Top Key Bottom Key Top Key C 1 G9 Specifies the top key upper limit of the notes that will sound each timbre 1 8 Bottom Key C 1 G9 Specifies the bottom key lower limit of the notes that will sound each timbre 1 8 A It is not possible to set the bottom key above the top key of the same timbre Nor is it possible for the top and bottom slopes to overlap X50 You can also set this parameter by holding down the ENTER button and playing a note How volume will change according to keyboard location Volume Bottom Slope Top Slope Bottom Key Top Key B 5 1 UTILITY iz Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 COMBI 45 46 5 2 Slope Key Slope 5 2a 5 2a Top Slope Bottom Slope 00 72 Top Slope Specifies the range of keys 12 is one octave over which the maximum programmed volume level will be reached start ing from the top key 0 The
447. smits a GM System On message to Multi mode resetting all tracks to the GM settings refer to the table below GH Initialize tantel OK DI In Multi mode when a GM System On message is received from an external device or the tone generator will be reset to the GM settings in the same way as when this command is executed However even in these cases the parameters of the 9 MasterFX will not be reset Rename Track Selects Rename Track access the dialog box and rename the selected multi Up to sixteen characters can be input rz OG X50 p 112 microX p 114 Rename Track Te1 br lE ACE GM Initialize Parameters 0 2 Prog 8 Track Program T01 08 0 3 Prog 16 Track Program T09 16 Indicates the program that will be used by each track Program Multi select 4 128 quita kd guita Ef Etrin p 28 C853 H113 DAT bed CO56 HBbB D00835 Toi Ba2e Standard Kit 1 Status BTH Ch aiG l Huti Trroa zllero a tell e z rais 16 0 2 3 a Track Number amp Category Track Number amp Category This shows the track number and the abbreviated name of the program category 0 2 3 b Program Select Program Select X50 A D 000 127 G g 001 128 name microX A E 000 127 G g 001 128 name In this area you can select the program that will be used by each track The lower line shows part of the name of the pro gram assigned to the track For GM2 variation banks or the GM
448. sonance The filter resonance for each key is determined by adding this value to the filter Reso nance PROG 4 1b 5 1b of the program that uses this drum kit When the Type PROG 4 1a 5 1a is Low Pass amp High Pass there will be no resonance effect At Attack 64 63 Adjusts the attack time of the volume Amplifier The attack time for each key is determined by adding this value to the amp EG Attack Time of the program that uses this drum kit Dc Decay 64 63 Adjusts the decay time of the volume Amplifier The decay time for each key is determined by adding this value to the amp EG Decay Time of the program that uses this drum kit E 4 1 UTILITY For details on how to select the desired utility function refer to PROG 0 1 UTILITY G 87 88 Write Drum Kits This command writes all drum kits 00 INT 48 User CD Select Write Drum Kits to access the dialog box Write Drum Hits Caneell OK 2 To execute the Write command press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CANCEL button Rename Drum Kit This command renames the selected drum kit You can input a name of up to sixteen characters OG X50 p 112 microX p 114 Rename Drum Kit DoCNT KU Standard Fit 1 Copy Drum Kit This command copies the settings of another drum kit to the currently edited drum kit Drum kits 40 GM 48 GM can not be edited but you may copy them to another drum k
449. song 3 Press the AUDITION button to stop the demo song Alternatively you can exit the Demo Song Player page by pressing the EXIT CANCEL button 4 To select a song for playback use the ClickPoint A V to select the song name Demo song Select and use the VALUE dial to change songs X50 You can also exit the Demo Song Player page by pressing one of the COMBI PROG MULTI or GLOBAL mode buttons microX You can also exit the Demo Song Player page by pressing one of the COMBI BANK PROG BANK MULTI or GLOBAL mode buttons Demo Sond Select Repeat All Play Mode Continue to next zong Press AUDITION 0 1c 0 la Location Location While the demo song is playing this indicates the current position within the song This is only for viewing and can not be edited 0 1b Demo Song Select Play Mode Repeat All Demo Song Select 000 name Select the demo song that you wish to play Play Mode Continue to next song Stop at end of selected song Specify whether the demo songs will be played consecu tively or whether only one song will be played Continue to next song After the currently selected demo song has finished playing the next demo song number will be selected and played automatically Stop at end of selected song Playback will stop after the currently selected demo song has finished playing Repeat All Off On This is valid only if Play Mode
450. specify the value 3 You can use data increment CC 96 Bn 60 00 or data decrement CC 3797 Bn 61 00 n channel value is fixed at 00 to change the value in steps of one The X50 microX can receive the following three RPN mes sages tuning transpose and pitch bend range 175 Appendices 176 Tuning RPN fine tune Bn 65 00 64 01 This RPN message can be used to adjust the detuning for a program or timbre in Combination mode or for a track in Multi mode The procedure is as follows CD Bn 65 00 64 01 Select RPN parameter 01 2 Bn 06 mm 26 vv Use data entry to set the value A value of 8192 mm vv 40 00 is center 0 mm vv 00 00 is 100 cents and 16383 mm vv 7F 7F is 99 cents Z8 You can use the universal exclusive Fine Tune message to adjust the overall tuning that corresponds to the Master Tune GLOBAL 0 1a parameter About system exclusive messages Transposing RPN coarse tune Bn 65 00 64 02 This RPN message can be used to adjust the transposition for a program or timbre in Combination mode or for a track in Multi mode The procedure is as follows CD Bn 65 00 64 02 Select RPN parameter 02 2 Bn 06 mm 26 vv Use data entry to set the value Normally only the upper byte is used A value of 8192 mm vv 40 00 is center 6656 mm vv 34 00 is 12 semitones and 9728 Tomm vv 4C 00 is 12 semi tones MA You can
451. ssage if the right channel delay time exceeds the upper limit S HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range ix Fx 43 LoDamp Low Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the low range ix Ex 43 InLvl Mod Input Level Mod 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the input level i Fx 37 Dime Src Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level i Ex 37 W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance f Time Over L gt f R gt You can set the delay time up to 682msec If the delay time exceeds this limit the error message OVER appears in the dis play Set the delay time parameters so that this message will not appear Time Over gt is only a display parameter 51 Sequence Dly sequence Delay This four tap delay enables you to select a tempo and rhythm pattern to set up each tap Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Anput Level D mod Feedback ra AA BPM MIDI 44 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo S QS Rhythm Rhythm Pattern diese 523 Selects a rhythm pattern S ce Tap1 Pan L 1 99 R Sets the panning of Tap1 Tap2 Pan L 1 99 R Sets the panning of Tap2 Tap3 Pan L 1 99 R Sets the p
452. ssage is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated e In Program mode this message is transmitted and received on the global MIDI channel In Combination and Multi modes this is transmitted and received on the MIDI channel specified for each insert effect e When you set Pan CC 78 MULTI 83a in Multi mode or when you re select the multi set when Multi mode GLOBAL 0 2a is for Master in Multi mode Post Insert Effect Pan message will be transmitted by each track whose Status is BTH EXT or EX2 r p 72 Effect control Effect control 1 CC 12 Bn OC vv Effect control 2 CC 13 Bn OD vv When the above CC is assigned to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL or as the B mode function of a REALTIME CON 173 Appendices 174 TROLS knob 1 4 operating that controller will transmit Effect Control 1 2 messages and the specified dynamic modulation will be controlled When this message is received the result will be the same as when the controller is operated Although various types of control change can be selected as dynamic modulation sources Effect Control 1 CC 12 and 2 CC 13 are dedicated for dynamic modulation Effect 1 depth Send 2 CC 91 Bn 5B vv Effect 3 depth Send 1 CC 93 Bn 5D vv When the above CC is assigned to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL or as the B mode function of a REALTIME CON TROL knob 1 4 operating that controller will transmit Effect 1 Depth Send 2
453. ssignable switches SW1 and SW2 COMBI microX The B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs This offers a variety of possibilities such as applying sepa rate arpeggio patterns to two sounds that have been assigned as a keyboard split or using velocity to switch between two arpeggio patterns 7 1 Setup COMBI ried fr MS HM AS SiO 7 6 s 7 1a Arpeggiator Run Tempo Arpeggiator Run A B Run A B Off On When the ARP ON OFF button is on the arpeggiator s checked here will run if they are assigned to a timbre by Assign 7 1b 0 4 5 a J Tempo 040 240 EXT Set the tempo of the arpeggiator This can also be adjusted by the REALTIME CONTROLS C mode TEMPO knob p 34 e Tempo 0 1a 7 1b Assign Assign Off A B Assigns arpeggiator A or B to each timbre 1 8 When the ARP ON OFF button is on the arpeggiator specified for each timbre will operate according to Arpeggiator Run and these settings Off The arpeggiator will not play this timbre A This timbre will be played by Arpeggiator A Make set tings in the Arp A page to select the arpeggio pattern and set parameters B This timbre will be played by Arpeggiator B Make set tings in the Arp B page to select the arpeggio pattern and set parameters MIDI If the Status 2 1a of the timbre is INT each timbre 1 8 to which arpeggiator A or B is assigned will be sounded by the note data genera
454. ster Effect2 Simultaneously CC 91 will be transmitted MIDI CC 00 CC 95 The specified MIDI control change CC will be transmitted If this instrument is set so as to be controlled by the control change message the corresponding control will occur 162 amp The A mode functions of the REALTIME CONTROLS are fixed Knob1 A LPF Cutoff Filter LPF Cutoff CC 74 Control the low pass filter cutoff frequency of the filter Simultaneously CC 74 will be transmitted Knob2 A Resonance HPF Filter Resonance HPF Cutoff CC 71 Control the resonance level or the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter If the program Filter Type is Low Pass Resonance the resonance level will be controlled If Filter Type is Low Pass amp High Pass the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter will be controlled Simultaneously CC 71 will be transmitted Knob3 A EG Intensity Filter EG Intensity CC 79 Control the filter EG intensity Simultaneously CC 79 will be transmitted Knob4 A EG Release Filter Amplifier EG Release CC 72 Control the release time of the filter and amplifier EG Simultaneously CC 72 will be transmitted 163 Appendices 164 Foot Switch Assign You can assign the function of an assignable switch sepa rately sold Korg PS 1 option connected to the ASSIGN ABLE SWITCH jack e This setting is made in GLOBAL 0 System Foot page Foot SW Assign 0 3a B If you select
455. t 80 De 40 Lok ml Mig foL 4 2a Low Low Sample X50 000 517 name microX 000 928 name Selects the Low drumsample This will be sounded by veloc ities lower than the value set for Vel S W LH 4 1a Drumsample The drumsample can be selected using the utility menu command Select by Category 14 1 S Ofs Start Offset Off On Rev Reverse Off On Trans Transpose 64 63 Tune 99 99 Fc Cutoff 64 63 Reso Resonance 64 63 At Attack 64 63 Dc Decay 64 63 is High Drumsample 4 1b B 4 2 UTILITY is Write Drum Kits Rename Drum Kit Copy Drum Kit Copy Key Setup Select by Category 4 1 4 3 Voice Voice Mixer For each key of a drum kit you can set voice assign pan and effect routing etc GLOBAL d Dit Drum Fit GEER Voce Mixer Orum kit Standard Fit 1 C4 FlAssign Leve H 733 L 33 We SL LH och 4 3a Single Trig Enable Hate On ParnChb4 51 883 Excl Group off Enable Note Off BUS IFX Az B RSR 4 3a Voice Assign Mode Mixer Voice Assign Mode Single Trig Single Trigger Off On On checked Even when the same key note is played repeatedly the previous note will be halted before the new note is begun so that the notes will not overlap Normally you will leave this unchecked Excl Group Exclusive Group Off 001 127 001 127 This allows you to group keys to which a drum sample is
456. t Effect From Hana Portamento Pad IF Past IFA Miser Setting Cancel 2 In From select the copy source mode bank and num ber X50 You can press a PROG BANK button to select a bank You can also use numeric buttons 0 9 and the ENTER button to select a number 3 Select the effect that you wish to copy You can also copy from a master effect amp If you are copying from a master effect the result may not be identical due to differences in the routing and level settings of a master effect 4 If you check Post IFX Mixer Setting the Pan CC 8 BUS Select 51 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 settings that follow the copy source insert effect will also be copied If you do not check this only the effect type and its parameters will be copied 6 To execute the Copy Insert Effect command press the MENU OK button To cancel press the EXIT CAN CEL button 8 2 Setup Here you can select the type of insert effect turn it on off pan etc The direct sound Dry of an insert effect is always stereo input and output The input output of the effect sound Wet will depend on the effect type r p 98 FROG Ed InsertF z nzert Effect 8 2a GEB REG KQ ri EA DIII gt Copa LAR 51 127 52 27 CAT S02 EZ wiriTtTap Chott 8 2b 8 2a InsertFX Setup IFX On Off Selects the insert effect on off When this is Off the input will be output without change For
457. t function to temporarily adjust the tone of the program for each timbre While creating a combination you might use this function to soften the sound of a program or give it a faster attack so that it fits better within the combination without having to return to Program mode and edit the program itself For each timbre you can assign and adjust up to six parameters such as the filter cutoff resonance filter EO and amp EG COMBI 1 Ed Tone Adjust TH 1 Destination 1 kayb El orum Eborum Fast n HB n Mw Fe LFF Fe LFF Fe LFF Fe LFF Fe LFF Fe LFF Fe 1 3a i 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Rago HF Rezo HF Raso HF Rao HP Razo HF Razo HF Razo HF Rac HP 00 00 00 t00 00 00 00 00 AGG i Stereobt ano mtf Tin TL rr mra TAR 1 3 4 5 a Destination 1 6 Value 1 6 Destination 1 6 LPF Fc Reverse Selects the parameter that you want to adjust Value 1 6 99 99 12 00 12 00 1200 1200 Off On Specifies the value for the parameter you selected in Desti nation 1 6 If you set this to 00 or PRG the setting of the program will be used WA Normally you should not select the same parameter for more than one Destination in the same track How ever if you do so the parameters will operate as fol lows If you select other than Hold or Reverse The Value of each Destination set to the same parameter will be summed for each track However th
458. t sweeps according to envelope changes in the input signal level Auto wah is frequently used for funk guitar parts and clav sounds When Swp Mode is set to Dmod you can control the filter directly via the modulation source in the same way as a wah pedal When Swp Mode is set to LFO the effect uses LFO to sweep in cycle d Envelope Sens This parameter sets the sensitivity of auto wah Increase the value if the input signal is too low to sweep Reduce the value if the input signal is so high that the filter is stopped temporarily e Envelope Shape This parameter determines the sweep curve for auto wah Envelope Shape Envelope value 0 100 gt value 0 100 f IfoF g BPM MIDI Sync When BPM MIDI Sync Off the LFO speed uses the tot parameter setting When BPM MIDI Sync On the LFO speed follows the BPM Base and Times settings g BPM g Base g Times One cycle of LFO sweep is obtained by multiplying the length of a note selected for Base in relation to the tempo specified in BPM or the MIDI Clock tempo if BPM is set to MIDI by the number specified in the Times parameter 10 St Rndm Filter Stereo Random Filter This stereo band pass filter uses a step shape waveform and random LFO for modulation You can create a special effect from filter oscillation Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Right o 7 Wet Dry x E LFO Phase L
459. tave low pass filter with resonance Low Pass amp High Pass 12 dB octave low pass filter and 12 dB octave high pass filter in series amp If the trim value is set too high the sound may be dis torted if the Resonance is set to a high value or when you play a chord 4 1b A Filter A This filter cuts the high frequency range above the cutoff fre quency This is the most common type of filter which cuts the overtone structure to make a bright sharp tone darker mellow When Type Filter1 Type is Low Pass Resonance the cut will have a steeper curve Low Pass Level 12dB oct 24dB oct Frequency Frequency A Frequency 00 99 Specifies the cutoff frequency of filter 1A Resonance A Resonance 00 99 This emphasizes the overtone components that lie in the region of the cutoff frequency specified by Frequency A Frequency producing a more distinctive sound Increas ing this value will produce a stronger effect Reso AMS Resonance AMS Off PEG FEG AEG LFO KT EXT Indicates the source that will control the Resonance A Res onance level r p 152 AMS List Intensity AMS Intensity 99 99 Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that Reso AMS Resonance AMS will have on the resonance level specified by Resonance A Resonance The resonance level is determined by adding the Reso nance A Resonance and Intensity AMS Int
460. te Key Follow Switching between specifying the oscillator frequency and using a note number e F Fixed Frequency 0 12 00kHz Sets the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode is set to Fixed Dave Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode is set to Fixed Amount 12 00 412 00kHz Sets the modulation amount of the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode is set to Fixed Note Offset 48 48 Sets the pitch difference from the original note when OSC Mode is set to Note Key Follow ps Fine Note Fine 100 100 Fine adjusts the oscillator frequency IfoF LFO Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed of the oscillator frequency modulation i Fx 09 Dude Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 09 yer BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo ix Fx 09 Base Base Note Ds D J8 J d3 d 0 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed ix Fx 09 Times 1 16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed r Fx 09 Depth LFO Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation for the oscillator frequency D gt Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the depth of modulation Amount 100 100 Sets t
461. ted use S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 for the post IFX signal 3 Mixer HI Send level 1 is controlled by MIDI control change CC 93 and send level 2 by MIDI control change CC 91 At this time the actual send level will be the send level 1 or 2 of the program oscillator used by the timbre track multiplied by the send level 1 or 2 that is set via MIDI Send Level vs p 100 The following illustration is an example in Combination mode BUS Select settings have been made to send the output of timbre 1 to IFX and the other timbres to L R The output passes through the master EQ and is sent to MAIN OUTPUT L MONO and R It is not sent to the insert effect COMBI E d L3 BU gus Select Raub Ha El teat Riese Bra Bro R ck Ra D LE LARP CARE LR E my Ze S Er GE Se Sie 510085 180035 140015 1 000 eB agg S2 880 52 088 52 888 52 000 52 888 5 2 000 Settings for drum Programs If a drum Program OSC Mode Drums is selected for tim bres in Combination mode and for tracks in Multi mode you can select DKit for BUS Select If you select DKit the BUS Select GLOBAL 4 32 settings for each key become effective and each drum instrument sound will be routed to the corresponding buses e g the snare sound is sent to IFX and other sounds to L MONO and R If you select anything other than DKit you may apply the Insert Effect to all drum instruments regardless of the DrumKit settings
462. ted by the arpeggiator regardless of the MIDI Channel 2 12 setting of the timbre If a timbre is set to EXT or EX2 MIDI note data will be transmitted on the MIDI Channel of each tim bre 47 48 In this case the arpeggiator can be triggered operated by any MIDI channel specified for the MIDI Channel parameter of any timbre 1 8 assigned to arpeggiator A or B amp If Local Control Local Control On GLOBAL 1 1a is Off the keyboard will not trigger the arpeggiator The arpeggiator will be triggered via MIDI IN Turn Local Control OFF if you have recorded only the trigger notes on an external sequencer and wish to playback the external sequencer to trigger the X50 microX s arpeg giator If you want the note data generated by the arpeggiator to be recorded on the external sequencer turn the X50 microX s Local Control ON and turn off the echo back function on your external sequencer D You can control the arpeggiator from an external sequencer or use an external sequencer to record arpeg gio note data v p 178 Example 1 Set the MIDI Channel 2 1a of timbres 1 and 2 to Gch and set Status 2 1a to INT Assign arpeggiator A to timbre 1 and arpeggiator B to timbre 2 and check Arpeggiator Run A B 0 4a 5a 7 1a When the front panel ARP ON OFF button is off timbres 1 and 2 will sound simultaneously layered when you play the keyboard When the front panel ARP ON OFF button
463. ted program cannot be recovered if you do not write it to memory before turning off the power or selecting another program amp If you want to write a program you must first turn off the memory protect setting in Global mode p 79 GLOBAL 0 2b Memory Protect CD Select Write Program to access the dialog box Urite Frogram Agee WW Portamento Pad Category 89 Sloawsunth Ta Hansa Portamento Pad 2 The upper line shows the bank program number and program name 3 In Category specify the category of the program that you are writing The category selected here can be used to find this pro gram when selecting a program in Program Combina tion Multi WA With the factory settings the program categories have been given the names of instruments etc but you can use Category Name Prog 00 07 08 15 GLOBAL 3 1 2 to modify these category names 4 In To to specify the writing destination X50 You can use the PROG BANK A D buttons to select a bank You can also use the numeric buttons 0 9 and ENTER button to select a program number A You can t write to bank G or g d If you ve edited a program from bank G or g d and want to write it you ll need to write it to a bank other than the GM bank 5 If you want to change the program name select the writ ing destination press the center of the ClickPoint to access the text dialog box and enter a name OG X50 p 112 microX p 114
464. ted via MIDI v p 176 Changing the pitch bend range Control change Bn cc vv Transmitted and received as n channel cc control change no vv value Refer to MIDI transmission when the X50 microX s con trollers are operated p 166 and X50 microX operations when control changes are transmitted received rz p 168 e Control changes can be turned on off as a whole in Ctrl Change Control Change GLOBAL 1 1b e n Combination and Multi modes the COMBI MULTI 3 4 Ed MIDI Filter 1 2 settings allow transmission reception of control changes to be individually turned on off for each timbre track For the assignable controllers REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs etc MIDI filter settings will apply to the control change number to which each controller is assigned Other Control Change applies to control changes that are not covered by the items of the other check boxes p 42 64 note MIDI CC 00 CC 95 can be selected for the B mode of REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs Selecting program combination banks Bank select CC 00 CC 32 p 171 Program Change Bank Select Using the MOD wheel joystick to apply modulation Modulation 1 depth CC 01 Bn 01 vv X50 When you move the X50 s MOD wheel in the up direction Modulation 1 Depth messages will be transmitted If these messages are received the result will be the same as when the X50 s MOD wheel is operated Normally a vibrato effect
465. tensity for Filter A and B e X50 if you set AMS Filter EG AMS to Mod Whl 01 and set Int to A B AMS Int to A B to a positive value moving the MOD wheel up will gradually increase the effect of the Filter EG Setting Int to A B AMS Int to A B to a negative value will invert the effect of the Filter EG e microX If you select JS Y 02 as the AMS Filter EG AMS and set Int to A B AMS Int to A B toa positive value moving the joystick down the Y direction will gradually increase the effect of the Filter EG If you set Int to A B AMS Int to A B toa negative value the effect of the Filter EG will be inverted e f you select Ribbon 16 as the AMS Filter EG AMS and set Int to A B AMS Int to A B to a positive value operating the ribbon controller on a connected MIDI instrument such as the TRITON Extreme toward the right will gradually increase the effect of the Filter EG Operating the ribbon controller on a connected MIDI instrument such as the TRITON Extreme toward the left will gradually increase the effect of the Filter EG with an inverted phase Filter LFO 1 2 Intensity PROG 4 4a The LFO 1 2 filter modulation intensity can be controlled by EG keyboard tracking controller or tempo You can use Int to A LFO1 2 AMS Int to A and Int to B LFO1 2 AMS Int to B to independently specify the intensity for Filter A and B e f you se
466. ter vc Trim I Gain Adjust A 595 Wet Dry Envelope Contro LMT Ratio Sets the signal compression ratio Threshld Threshold 40 0dB Sets the level above which the compressor is applied t FX 03 G Adj Gain Adjust Inf 38 24dB Sets the limiter output gain t FX 03 Attack 1 100 Sets the attack time t Fx 03 1 100 t Fx 03 0 100 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 v Fx 03 Release Sets the release time PEQ Trim Sets the parametric EQ input level Routing LMT PEQ PEQ gt LMT Switches the order of the limiter and parametric EQ connection B1 Band1 Cutoff 20 1 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 1 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 418dB Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 1 B2 Band2 Cutoff Sets the center frequency of Band 2 50 5 00kHz 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 418dB Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 2 B3 Band3 Cutoff Sets the center frequency for Band 3 300 10 00kHz 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 18dB Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 3 B4 Band4 Cutoff Sets the center frequency for Band 4 500 20 00kHz 0 5 10 0 t Fx 06 18 18dB Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 G Gain Sets the gain of Band 4 W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet pas Source Off Tempo
467. tereo Out Left o 2 Pan Depth Doppler 3 Wet Dry LFO rmod ___ Trigger 0 o LFO Mode 1 Shot Mode LFO Mode Switches LFO operation mode Loop 1 Shot Dawe Src Source Off Tempo When LFO Mode is set to 1 Shot this modulation source triggers the LFO ps LFO Sync Off On Switches between LFO reset on and off when LFO Mode is set to Loop pap 0 02 20 00Hz i Fx 09 Dose Off Tempo Freq LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Source Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 09 yer BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo i Ex 09 Base Base Note A AP S eee Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed r Fx 09 Times 1 16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed r Fx 09 Pitch Dep Pitch Depth Sets the pitch variation of the moving sound Source Selects the modulation source of pitch variation Off Tempo 100 100 Amount Sets the modulation amount of pitch variation Pan Dep Pan Depth f 100 100 S D gt Off Tempo Sets the panning of the moving sound Source Selects the modulation source of panning Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of panning W D Wet Dly Dry
468. th of LFO modulation D s Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the LFO modulation depth Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth Pre EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain 15 0 15 0dB Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain 15 0 15 0dB Sets the gain of High EQ W D Wet Dly Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds r gt Ex 10 Dze 7 Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance e L Dly e R DIy Setting the left and right delay time individually allows you to control the stereo image 17 St HarmnicCho Stereo Harmonic Chorus This effect applies chorus only to higher frequencies This can be used to apply a chorus effect to a bass sound without mak ing the sound thinner You can also use this chorus block with feedback as a flanger Stereo In Stereo Out So ZH enensranger High Level A A High Damp High Low Split Point Feedback F 3 2 High Dam P High Level Chorus Flanger 7 Eu Low Level Righto g LFO Phase LFO Tri Sine LFO Wave LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform LFO Phase 180 180deg Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 10
469. than 64 off speed is selected and when the value is 64 or higher on is selected When Sw Tggl Toggle the wah effect is switched between on and off each time you press the pedal The switch will be turned on off each time the value of the modulation source exceeds 64 b SweepRng b Src This parameter sets the sweep range of the wah center frequency A negative value will reverse the direction of sweep The wah cen ter frequency can be controlled by the modulation source speci fied in the Src parameter d Drive e Level The degree of distortion is determined by the level of input signal and the setting of Drive Raising the Drive setting will cause the entire volume level to increase Use the Level parameter to adjust the volume level The Level parameter uses the signal level input to the 3 Band EQ If clipping occurs at the 3 Band EQ adjust the Level parameter d Pre Low cut Cutting the signal in the low range before it is input to the Distor tion will create a sharp distortion g Q h Q These parameters set the bandwidth of each equalizer The higher the value the narrower the band becomes 07 St Para 4EQ Stereo Parametric 4 Band EQ This is a stereo 4 band parametric equalizer You can select peaking type or shelving type for Band 1 and 4 The gain of Band 2 can be controlled by dynamic modulation Stereo In Stereo Out m Bandi Band2 Band3
470. the depth of LFO modulation Res Resonance 100 100 Sets the resonance amount t Fx 23 Phs W D Phaser Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Sets the phaser effect balance i Fx 10 23 Out Output Mode Normal Wet Inv Selects the phaser output mode ix Fx 60 W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D rs Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 78 Exct M Dly Exciter Multitap Delay This effect combines a mono type exciter and a multitap delay Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left 2 Wet Dry Exciter Multitap Delay EQ Trim LEQ HEQ gt lt Exciter High Damp 1 5 Mt Dly Wet Dry gt m Dry XCT Blend Exciter Blend 100 100 Sets the dine depth of the Exciter effect Emphatic Point Sets the frequency range to be emphasized Pre EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain 15 15dB Sets id gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain 15 15dB Sets the gain of High EQ DLY T1 Tap1 Delay 0 680ms Sets the Tap1 delay time T2 Tap2 Delay 0 680ms Sets the Tap2 delay time Sets the Tap1 output level i Ex 45 T2 Fb Tap2 Feedback 100 100 Sets the Tap2 feedback amount Div W D Delay Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the multitap delay eff
471. the insert effect Pan CC 8 Send1 MEFX1 and Send2 MFEX2 An asterisk will be displayed at the right of the channel number Ch01 16 for tracks that are routed to an IFX If mul tiple tracks with differing MIDI channel settings are routed these channels specify the channel that will be used to con trol the effect All Rt All Routed Control can be performed from any of the MIDI channels of the tracks that are routed A If BUS Select 8 1 2 a is set to DKit for a track in which a drum program is selected the MIDI channel of that track will be valid only if this is set to All Rt regardless of the drum kit BUS BUS Select GLO BAL 43a setting or the utility setting DrumKit IFX Patch 8 3c Routing Map BUS Select This specifies the bus to which the program used by each track 1 16 will be sent Routing Map This displays the settings of the insert effect The routing specified effect name and on off status of the insert effect are displayed T01 16 BUS Sel DKit L R IFX 1 2 1 2 Off While viewing the map you can specify the bus where the program oscillators for each track 1 16 will be sent Use the ClickPoint lt V to select a timbre and use the VALUE controller to specify the BUS Select 8 1a set ting You can also make this setting in BUS Select 8 1a E 8 3 UTILITY re Write Multi 0 1 Copy Insert Effect PROG 8 1 DKit IFX P
472. ther timbres will use the 51 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 settings shown in screen shot 1 At this time the send level will be the send level of the pro gram oscillator multiplied by this send level 101 EFFECT 102 COMBI Ed InsertFa BUS BUS Select Drum Drum Rouh Drum Drum Drum Fs LR LR LAR LYR LAR LAR 1 AM IU i5 1 Banis 1 0065 1 0065 EAR STT EAR ama 5 1 36 SD Bag SE GEI RSR IT HH OE 2E ERES 2 Ban Setting for drum program If a drum program has been selected for a timbre in Combi nation mode or for a track in Multi mode you will be able to select DKit for the BUS Select parameter If this is selected the BUS BUS Select GLOBAL 4 32 settings for each individual key will be used and will be sent to the bus for each drum instrument In this case the send level will be determined by multiplying the value of the S1 Send1 MFEX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 settings of each key in the drum kit by the value of the 51 Send1 MEFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 settings that you make here For the drum instruments of keys whose drum kit BUS BUS Select parameter is set to IFX this is determined by S1 Send1 MFEX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 after the signal has passed through IFX If L R or Off is selected the send levels specified by PROG 8 1a OSC1 Send 1 and Send 2 will be multiplied by the S1 Send1 MFX1 and S2 Send2 MFX2 settings that y
473. tings in conjunction with the Velocity SW LH 1 22 setting of each oscillator you can specify the velocity ranges for the High and Low multisam ples or drum kits PROG 1 Ed Basic Ue Znne sr BI Bottom 1 4a OSC1 Velocity Zone Bottom TER Top 127 QSC2 Velocity Zone Bottom op Top 127 race Tp eser TD eser Thnzone T uditien 1 4a OSC 1 2 Velocity Zone OSC1 Bottom 001 127 Sets the minimum velocity value that will sound oscillator 1 OSC1 Top 001 127 Sets the maximum velocity value that will sound oscillator 1 OSC2 Bottom 001 127 Sets the minimum velocity value that will sound oscillator 2 OSC2 Top 001 127 Sets the maximum velocity value that will sound oscillator 2 amp It is not possible to set the Bottom Velocity greater than the Top Velocity nor the Top Velocity less than the Bot tom Velocity X50 You can also input a value by playing a note on the keyboard while you hold down the ENTER button B 1 4 UTILITY is Write Program 0 1 Copy Oscillator Swap Oscilla tor 1 1 1 5 Audition When selecting preloaded programs you can play back a pre specified riff phrase that is suitable for the sound of that program This is called the Audition function When you press the AUDITION button to turn it on the audition riff will play back repeatedly Here you can select the audition riff and specify the transpo si
474. tion PROG 1 Ed Basic Audition Audition Riff Audition Riff Ei TUE eee DES Lt Tranzpoze 488 1 5a D sen Loser Je Thzzone udition 1 5a Audition Riff Transpose Audition Riff 000 Off 383 name Selects the audition riff The X50 microX contains 383 audi tion riffs suitable for a variety of instruments and musical genres With a setting of 000 Off no riff will be played Transpose 24 24 Adjusts the pitch of the audition riff in semitone steps amp It is not possible to change the playback tempo of the audition riff Nor is it possible to set the arpeggiator tempo while the audition riff is playing amp The arpeggiator will be turned off while the audition riff is playing B 1 5 UTILITY i Write Program 0 1 10 PROG 2 Ed Pitch Here you can make pitch modulation settings for oscillators 1 and 2 2 1 0SC1 Specifies how the key position on the keyboard will affect the pitch of oscillator 1 and selects the controller that will modify the pitch and the depth of this effect Here you can also specify the amount of pitch change caused by the pitch EG and set the portamento mode and on off status X50 PROG Z Ed Pitch O50 T Pitch Slope Pitch Fitch Slope EARS F Eend 62 AMS Off 2 1a Ribbon 163 66 PEend 82 Intensitu BB BB 2 1b 2 1c microX O5C1 Piteh Slope 2 4 Pitch Fitch Slope DRE IG Teta 082 AMS Robe 13 la Ribbon 163 App JSA
475. tion You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left A 35 Routing Wah Auto Wah E Amp Simulation Wet Dry Amp Simulation Filter Em EMEN Wet Dry WAH Freq Btm Frequency Bottom Sets the lower limit of the wah center frequency Top Frequency Top Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency Swp Mode Sweep Mode Auto Dmod LFO Selects the control from auto wah modulation source and LFO t Ex 09 Dyer Src Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the wah when Swp Mode Dmod Hot LFO Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Resonance 0 100 Sets the resonance amount LPF Low Pass Filter Off On Switches the wah low pass filter on and off AMP Amplifier Type SS EL84 6L6 Selects the type of guitar amplifier Routing WAH AMP AMP gt WAH Switches the order of the wah and amp simulation connection W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D z Source Off zo i zo i lio modulation source of the effect balance po ER or 100 100 po ER or the nonien amount of the effect balance 84 Deci AmpSim Decimator Amp Simulation This effect combines a mono type decimator and an amp sim ulation You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Routing Decimator V N Amp Simu
476. tion into memory before the next portion of data arrives so that it will be impossible to receive all of the data correctly Reception amp Do not touch this instrument s switches or turn off the power while data is being received amp Before receiving data we recommend that you close the various dialog boxes page menus or utility com mands amp After a data dump is received this instrument will require up to 20 seconds to process the data and write it into memory During this time the display will indicate Now writing into internal memory While this dis play is shown you must under no circumstances turn off the power of this instrument If the power is turned off during this time this instrument may fail to operate correctly when the power is turned on again If this occurs hold down the EXIT CANCEL button and the PAGE button while you turn on the power How ever when this is done the contents of memory will be initialized Transmission and reception of MIDI data is also impos sible during this time When receiving multiple data dumps in succession you must allow an interval between the transmission of each data dump refer to the table below Processing time for writing into memory Processing time for writing into memory Type of data dumped dis d X50 microX All All Programs One Program Bank All Combinations Approximately 3 seconds Approximately 2 seconds Less than 1se
477. tions that you can use via the microX s knobs while in any mode Switching programs or moving to Combination mode while the EXT CONTROLLER button is on will not change the external control set that is selected This means that you can select microX sounds without affecting your external MIDI control setup or conversely change the external MIDI con trol setup without switching sounds MA After you ve edited a external control set you ll need to execute the Write Ext Control Set utility to write save the edited settings 6 1 A Knob 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 6 2 B Knob 1 B 2 B 3 B 4 B 6 3 C Knob 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 C GLOBAL 6 Ez t Cuntrol 6 1a Est Control THEE EC gi Knob A Setup Select 6 1b H ch Gch Ch Gch CC HERS Cea 1 6 1 2 3 a Knob A B Ext Control Setup Select 00 63 Selects the external control setup that you want to edit 6 1 2 3 b Knob 1A 1C Knob 2A 2C Knob 3A 3C Knob 4A 4C MIDI Channel 01 16 Gch This specifies the MIDI channel on which each knob 1 4 will transmit messages when SELECT A B C is selected Gch Messages will be transmitted on the global MIDI chan nel specified in Global mode You can easily change the channel of all the knobs that are set to Gch simply by chang ing the global MIDI channel setting instead of changing the channel of each knob individually CC Assign Off 000 119 This specifies the MIDI control change number that each knob
478. tivity Attack Sets the attack level 1 100 t Fx 02 0 100 t Fx 02 0 100 Level Output Level Sets the compressor output level Pre EQ Trim Sets the EQ input level LoEQ Pre Low EQ Gain Sets the gain of Low EQ HiEQ Pre High EQ Gain Sets the gain of High EQ AMP Amplifier Type Selects the type of guitar amplifier 15 415dB 15 15dB SS EL84 6L6 Routing CMP AMP AMP CMP Switches the order of the compressor and amp simulation connec tion W D Wet Dly Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Dyer Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 65 Comp OD HG Compressor Overdrive Hi Gain This effect combines a mono type compressor and an over drive high gain distortion You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Wet Dry Routing Compressor XV N Overdrive Hi Gain D Output Level Output Level Ei Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Drive Wet Dry Envelope Control CMP Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity 1 100 t Fx 02 0 100 t Fx 02 OverD Hi Gain Attack Sets the attack level Level Output Level Sets the compressor output level OD Mode Drive Mode Switches between overdrive and high gain distorti
479. tput Level 0 100 Sets the decimator output level e Fx 14 CMP Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity Attack 1 100 Sets the attack level t Fx 02 Level Output Level 0 100 Sets the compressor output level ix Fx 02 Routing DECI CMP CMP gt DECI Switches the order of the decimator and compressor connection W D Wet Dly Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds D s Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 86 AmpSim Trml Amp Simulation Tremolo 87 Cho FI M Dly Chorus Flanger Multitap Delay This effect combines a mono type amp simulation and a trem This effect combines a mono type chorus flanger and a mult olo itap delay Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Righto f Left o f Wet Dry Amp Simulation Tremolo Amp Simulation Filter Wet Dry LFO Tri Sin Vintage Up Down gt LFO Shape AMP Amplifier Type Selects the type of guitar amplifier TRML LFO Wave LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Vintage Up Down Selects LFO Waveform i Fx 32 LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed w Fx 20 0 02 20 00Hz SS EL84 6L6 Freq LFO Frequency Sets the LFO speed Depth Sets the depth of LFO modulation W D Wet
480. trol Channel 8 2b MIDI channel unlike in Program mode The control changes used are the same as in Program mode 8 2b Control Channel Ch01 16 G ch All Rt DI Specifies the MIDI channel on which dynamic modula tion Dmod of the insert effect and the Pan CC 8 Send1 MEX1 and Send2 MFX2 that follow the insert effect will be controlled Control Channel COMBI The channel number of the timbre routed through this IFX will be followed by a displayed at the right of Ch01 16 If two or more timbres with different MIDI channel settings are routed through the IFX this parameter specifies which of these channels will be used to control the effect G ch The global MIDI channel MIDI Channel GLOBAL 1 1a will be used to control the effect Normally you will set this to G ch All Rt All Routed The channel of any timbre routed through this effect can be used to control the effect Chan nels of each routed timbre will be indicated by a A If BUS Select 8 1a is set to DKit for a timbre for which a drums program is selected the MIDI channel of that timbre will be valid only if this is set to All Rt regardless of the drum kit BUS Select setting GLO BAL 43a or the Utility DrumKit IFX Patch 8 1b setting n C 8 2c Routing Map BUS Select This displays the bus to which the programs used by tim bres 1 8 will be sent Routing Map This displays the insert effect settings
481. trol the volume of all timbres or tracks while pre serving the volume balance between timbres or tracks Foot Pedal CC 04 Alternate Modulation or Effect Dynamic Modulation can be controlled To control these set AMS to Pedal 04 or Dmod Src to Pdl 04 Control the volume of a Program of a timbre in a Combination or of a track in Multi mode Expres sion is multiplied with the Volume value to determine the actual volume level FX Control 1 CC 12 Control Effect Dynamic Modulation To control this set Dmod Src to FX1 12 FX Control 2 CC 13 Control Effect Dynamic Modulation To control this set Dmod Src to FX2 13 MFX Send 1 CC 93 Control the send level to master effect 1 MFX1 from a Program a timbre in a Combination or a track in Multi mode Simultaneously this will also control the send level to master effect 1 MFX1 from after the insertion effect of the matching MIDI channel MFX Send 2 CC 91 Control the send level to master effect 2 MFX2 from a Program a timbre in a Combination or a track in Multi mode Simultaneously this will also control the send level to master effect 2 MFX2 from after the insertion effect of the matching MIDI channel X50 Mod Wheel CC 01 microx JS Y X50 The pedal will control the effect of the up direction of the MOD wheel CC 01 microX The pedal will control the effect of the Y up direction of the joystick JS Y CC 02 X50 The pedal will control Alternate Mo
482. ts the type of the tremolo and phaser LFOs LFO Phase 180 180deg Sets the phase difference between the tremolo and phaser LFOs IS Freq LFO Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed t Fx 09 Dime Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 09 eye BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo ix Ex 09 Base Base Note J bs 2 5 J do d e Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed i Ex 09 1 16 t Fx 09 P Manu Phaser Manual 0 100 Sets the phaser frequency range Resonanc Resonance 100 100 Sets the phaser resonance amount P Dep Phaser Depth 0 100 Sets the phaser modulation depth D Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the phaser modulation depth Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount for the phaser modulation depth P W D Phaser W D Wet 2 99 Dry 2 99 Wet Sets the balance between the phaser effect and dry sounds par T Shape Tremolo Shape 100 100 Sets the degree of the tremolo LFO shaping i Fx 20 123 EFFECT 124 0 100 D Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the tremolo modulation depth Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the tremolo modulation depth W D
483. ttings from another mode such as Program mode COMBI 7 Ed flirp Ctrla Arp BH Pattern 7 24 Pattern eee aes Octave 1 Gate Step Reza a Velocity Step Sing H setup lap Dar Ej zone J naroa r Sort r Latch Chey Sync QD Keyboard 7 2 3 a Arpeggiator A B Setup Pattern Preset 0 Preset 4 U000 U250 Octave 1 2 3 4 Reso Resolution ED A 25 25 25 JI Gate 000 100 Step Velocity 001 127 Key Step Swing 100 100 Sort Off On Latch Off On Key Sync Off On Keyboard Off On These parameters are the arpeggiator A settings for the com bination ev p 25 PROG 7 Ed Arp Ctrls These parameters can also be set in 0 4 Arp A 0 5 Arp B 7 2 3 b Tempo J Tempo 040 240 EXT Sets the tempo of the arpeggiator This can be adjusted by the REALTIME CONTROLS C mode TEMPO knob r p 34 gd Tempo 0 1a B 7 2 3 UTILITY t Write Combination Solo Selected Timbre 0 1 Copy Arpeggiator 7 1 7 4 Zone scan Zone These settings specify the note and velocity ranges that will operate arpeggiators A and B COMBI 7 Ed flirp Ctris ScanZone 4 Bottom key 7 4a A Key Etm OE Top Go A Wel Btm amp a1 Top 127 B Key Btm C 1 Top B3 E UelBtm 881 Top 127 setup J rp JL arr E Tl zone 7 4a Scan Zone A B Zone Map This shows the Scan Zone for each arpeggiator A and B Key zone of arpeggiator B Key zo
484. u TeqoT5 ur dew xueg ueuM dd Ix ebueuo rquoj5 boag 203 HSW 3oe e9es xueg um ww 00 00 ug L SWV se eansseadg Key TOd AA AA ODD opt Uu gzt TOO p b 4L 00 00 aE V L IT T AA UO qON AA AA 13 AA u6 821 T00 2 gt AL 00 00 8 V JjO 3ON 00 00 13 AA u6 V 33O 939N xx xx CPt AA ug oct T00 p 5 iL 00 00 8L 8721 T00 5 AL 00 00 6L a H a H xeH xoaoru qe peTqeug LZl 000 ki JL 00 X v0 00 VN3 ete ssi uorladrz5ssd PXTUL puoo s euge Lei 000 q 3L 00 0 00 S T LZI 000 2 gt EZT 000 2 iL 00 20 00 Teuro q a xegH H SHOVSSAN THNNVHO T Z LZI 000 8 gt LZT 000 g gt 4L 00 TO 00 LZT 000 V ueg ZT 000 V xueg dL 00 00 00 dd qq wu VIVO SATHORN H2ZINOOO3 Z uorqaeurquoo uez6ozda xeH ur IGIN DAOA ST epou TeqoTD ur dew xueg ueuM Tx 182 cI 00 20vp 004 00 0vP ZI 00 v AA WU 8SW enteA 8S1 enteA euueuo TeqoTS TeqoT5 ur uu a qAq OI 3 q u39 b 9e3Aq pac L3 uu AA g0 yp0 50 3L 04 deas oraeuoaduo2 esodsuea O4334UuO sun sszeoD Zap 0S 00 09 00 00 0v 05 0002 AA um ASW SNTeA AST SNTeA TeuueyD TeqoTyS uu e934q ua A 93 q u39 b e3Aq pac La uu AA co po bo ar oa TeqoT5 UI 3use2 eun ZeAseW TOI4quOO eun eur4 Zaigp id 3ubrH 4L 3L 293u92 00 0vP 339T1 00 00 AA uu ASW ant AST SNTeA TeuueyD TeqoTyS sen UTW 8SW ente
485. uced Limiter Threshold Ratio Ratioz1 0 1 Output Level j _ Ratio 2 0 1 Threshold Ratio 4 0 1 Ration Inf 1 t o o 2 o l Louder gt Input Level Ratioz1 0 1 Ratio 2 0 1 Ratio 4 0 1 Threshold Ratio Inf 1 d Attack e Release These parameters set the attack time and release time A higher attack time will cause the compression to be applied more slowly Limiter Attack Release ali al ASSAR ARTERS Threshold UA Raton ua Attack 1 Release 1 Ratio Inf 1 Attack 100 Release 100 Release attack f Side PEQ Insert h EQ h Q h G These parameters are used to set the EQ applied to the trigger sig nal The Limiter determines whether the compression is applied or not based on the post EQ trigger signal Setting the equalizer allows you to set the Limiter to respond to any frequency band g Trigger Monitor Setting this parameter On will cause the trigger signal to be out put instead of the effect sound Use this parameter to check the trigger signal with EQ applied Usually set this to Off 04 Mitband Limit Multiband Li
486. until the original volume is reached Bottom Slope 000 120 Specifies the range of values over which the volume will be adjusted from the bottom velocity until the original volume is reached For a diagram of these parameters refer to COMBI 6 Ed Vel Zone E 6 3 4 UTILITY is Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 6 5 Review MULTI 6 el Zone Review T 1 6 5a A ete Heel zip z H sipas Review 6 5a Velocity Zone Map All T1 T16 This shows the range of velocity that will be sounded by tracks 1 16 The note range that will be sounded is shown as a line and the slope portion is grayed E 6 5 UTILITY Write Multi Copy From Combi 0 1 MULTI 7 Arp Ctris Arpeggiator Controls Here you can specify how the arpeggiator will operate in Multi mode These settings can be made for each multi set In Multi mode as in Combination mode you can run the two arpeggiators simultaneously This allows you to apply different arpeggio patterns to two tracks or use velocity to switch between two different arpeggio patterns etc 7 1 Set 8 Setup T01 08 7 2 Set 16 Setup T09 16 7 1 2 a Arpeggiator Run Tempo Arpeggiator Run A B Run A B When the ARP ON OFF button is on the arpeggiator s that are checked here will function for the track s to which they are assigned by Assign When the arpeggiator is on A and B can be turned on off independently Tempo 040
487. ur werbord puodsezi09 ubtssy 00790 S5 9 Wqouy 02S poug X4 9 SWV S pl4330 esodang TITOW AA AA 6T T ug 5 ur uezboad puodseaagoo ubtssy T0 00 5X q ptrT1S 07S powd x4 9 SWV S CT sodind TITON AA AA 81 ZT ug GLAW 5404 oni GL 00 aL ae 9 INqoux 235 Doud x4 9 SWV Se ZT3 0 esodang TITOW AA AA LT II ug oct T00 p b 4L 00 00 mE 2 uoqqrwg 07S Doud X4 9 SWV Se II432 esodang TIATOW AA AA 91 OI ug oct TOO 5 tos 00 00 9 o X4 07S powq X3 se Z lO43UuOD 3993jU AA AA 1 GO ug 82T I00 5 aL 00 00 00 9 IX 04S powq X3 se IT TOzqUuOO 3993j3U AA AA ZT 20 ug 5 uotss Idxy AA AA II 80 ug 821 T00 p 4L 00 00 8L o 3odueg AA AA OT VO ug oct TOO 5 aL 00 00 6L 2 x Tozquoo 3oduegd XJI 3sOd 303 T043uo5 eoueT eg AA AA 80 80 ug xozoru qe per qeus ZT 000 q iL 00 pO ae 2 SUNTOA AA AA LO LO ug LZl 000 d iL 00 Zeniag 9 3Tp Odd 493 HSW Aaaug eqed AA AA 90 90 ug LZI 000 2 gt Zl 000 o AL 00 70 aE 2 SWEL o3uoue440gd AA An GO SO uq LZT 000 8 LZT 000 g gt GL 00 To ae 2 Teped 94g Doud X4 9 SWV se Teped 3004 AA AA v0 v0 ug izt 000 V Steeg PST 000 V xuegd aL 00 00 ac dd qq uu 2 SWNV 0SX A yOTISAOP xXOZOTU se cUuor3e npo AA AA ZO zo ug uot yeuTquog werborg xeH UI IGIN 2 I99uM dGOW 0SX A4Xoras op xodoTu se TuoraeTnpo AA AA TO TO ug Z WND ST epo
488. use the universal exclusive Coarse Tune mes sage to adjust the overall tuning that corresponds to the Key Transpose GLOBAL 0 1a parameter About system exclusive messages Changing the pitch bend range RPN pitch bend range Bn 64 00 65 00 This RPN message can be used to adjust the pitch bend range for a program or timbre in Combination mode or for a track in Multi mode The procedure is as follows Bn 65 00 64 00 Select RPN parameter 00 2 Bn 06 mm 26 vv Use data entry to set the value Normally only the upper byte is used A value of 0 mm vv 00 00 is 00 and a value of 1536 mm vv 0C 00 is 12 one octave Although it is possible to set a negative value for a timbre track only positive val ues can be set using RPN messages Controlling the arpeggiator NPRN Arpeggiator operations can be controlled using NRPN Non Registered Parameter Number messages NRPN messages can be freely used in non compatible ways by different man ufacturers and models of instrument The procedure for using NRPN messages is the same as for RPN but you will use NRPN MSB CC 99 Bn 63 mm and NRPN LSB CC 98 Bn 62 rr messages n channel mm rr upper and lower bytes of the parameter number to specify the parameter NRPN arpeggiator on off Bn 63 00 Bn 62 02 Bn 06 mm This message will be transmitted when you press the ARP ON OFF button When the switch is turned ON the data wil
489. ve and play multi ple channels of MIDI messages from an external MIDI sequencer You can also make the arpeggiator play in syn chronization with an external MIDI sequencer A Multi has sixteen tracks for playing back musical data You can assign a separate program and MIDI channel etc to each track so that multiple programs can sound simulta neously MULTI PAGE MENU For details on how to select pages in Multi mode refer to pl Multi FAGE MENU 0 Play Select multis Select a program for each track and make pan and level settings microX Select an external control set resp D 1 Tone Adjust Select the program used by each track Specify the pan and volume of each pro gram Use Tone Adjust to adjust parameters p 59 Track Param 2 Track Param MIDI voice mode pitch delay and scale settings for each track p 61 MIDI Filter 3 MIDI Filter1 MIDI message transmission reception filter settings for each track Prog Change After Touch JS and Ribbon etc ep GA MIDI Filter2 4 MIDI Filter2 Filter settings Realtime Control Knob SW and Other Ctrl Change r p 65 Key Zone 5 Key Zone Key zone settings for each track vx p 67 Vel Zone 6 Vel Zone Velocity zone settings for each track p 68 Arp Controls 7 Arp Ctris Arpeggiator settings Controller settings p 69 f Insert Effect 8 InsertFX Set BUS and master effect send level for each track Insert effect routing select
490. whose channel matches and whose types are checked The types of effect that are checked will be applied to the program of each track when the X50 microX s con trollers are operated or when MIDI data is received The effect dynamic modulation function is not affected by these settings Settings that regulate MIDI transmission recep tion of the X50 microX itself are made in MIDI Filter GLOBAL 1 1b If MIDI control changes have been assigned as the function of the REALTIME CONTROLS knobs or of SW1 and SW2 only X50 the MIDI filter for these controllers MIDI Filter 2 will affect these control changes However if these are the same as the control changes of MIDI Filter 1 the MIDI Filter 1 2 settings will take priority Furthermore if the same con trol change has been assigned to two or more controllers checking any one of the MIDI Filter 2 parameters will cause the setting to apply to that control change Off unchecked Reception of MIDI data is disabled 3 1 M1 1 8 MIDI Filter1 1701 08 3 2 1 1 16 MibiFilter1 1T09 16 MULTI 3 HIDI Filteri Program Change i i i j ois Cl is d LZ s sias 5 HG l kl TAT poaa standard Mt Star E TH Chral Maei ae e a a 2 a Ae a 3 M iza 16 3 1 2 a Program Change After Touch Program Change Off On Specifies whether or not MIDI program change messages will be received After Touch Off On Specifies whether or not MIDI after touch messages will be rece
491. will be the master the controlling device or the slave the controlled device is made by MIDI Clock GLOBAL 1 12 Using this instrument as master and the computer as slave Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the X50 microX to the MIDI IN connector of your external MIDI device OG p 32 Alternatively connect the USB connector of the X50 microX to the USB connector of your computer When you set MIDI Clock to Internal this instrument will be the master device and will transmit MIDI timing clock messages The tempo can be controlled from this instrument Simul taneously the performance of the arpeggiator will be transmitted via MIDI In Combination Multi modes data will be transmitted by timbres tracks whose Sta tus is BTH EXT or EX2 An external tone generator connected to the MIDI OUT will sound and the tempo of an external sequencer can be controlled Using the computer as master and this instrument as slave Connect the MIDI IN connector of the X50 microX to the MIDI OUT connector of your external MIDI device r OG p 32 Alternatively connect the USB connector of the X50 microX to the USB connector of your computer e When you set MIDI Clock to Ext MIDI Ext USB or Auto the X50 microX will be the slave device The tempo will follow the MIDI timing clock If you play back the external sequencer the X50 microX s arpeggia tor will synchronize to the external timing clock OG p 105 Even
492. will be transmitted in Multi mode for Ext Seq Normally you will use Multi mode when using this instrument as a multi timbral sound module with an external MIDI sequencer In this case we recommend that you choose for Ext Seq When you switch multi sets on the X50 microX program change and other MIDI messages will not be transmitted even for tracks that are set to EXT or BTH This prevents echo back from the tracks of your exter nal MIDI sequencer from changing the program and other settings of tracks that are set to the same MIDI channel for Master Use this setting if you re using this instrument in Multi mode as a master keyboard to control an external MIDI sound module When you switch multi sets on the X50 microX program change and other MIDI messages for tracks set to EXT or BTH will be transmitted to set up your external MIDI sound module If you re using the X50 microX as a master keyboard you ll normally use Combina tion mode but we recommend that you use this setting if you re using Multi mode to control an external MIDI sound module When you switch multi sets MIDI messages for the follow ing parameters will be transmitted from tracks set to EXT or BTH e Program Select MULTI 0 2 3 b CC 00 bank select LSB CC 32 bank select MSB program change e Pan MULTI 0 4 5 a CC 10 pan e Volume MULTI 0 4 5 a CC 7 volume e Portamento MULTI 2 3 4 a CC 65 portamento on off CC 5 portamento time e
493. ximum of double its original length If you set Int AMS 1 2 Intensity to 16 moving the MOD wheel in the up direction will shorten the LFO cycle to as little as half of its original length e microX Select JS Y 01 for AMS1 2 Freq AMS1 2 and set Int AMS1 2 Intensity to 16 When you move the joystick in the Y direction the LFO frequency will be increased by a maximum of 2 times If you set Int AMS1 2 Intensity to 16 and move the joystick in the Y direction the LFO frequency will be decreased by up to 1 2 Dynamic Modulation Source Dmod You can control certain effect parameters using the joystick or MOD wheel REALTIME CONTROLS knobs etc on the fly Controlling effects in this way is referred to as Dynamic Modulation This lets you use effects expressively as a part of the instrument For example you can use a pedal connected to the X50 microX to speed up the LFO of a cho rus or flanger or use the joystick or MOD wheel to con trol wah Most of the parameters for dynamic modulation consist of parameter values for Source and Amount The Source field selects the modulation source and Amount sets the amount of dynamic modulation effect When the modulation source is set to the maximum value the actual degree of the effect will be the parameter value plus the Amount value Example W D Wet Dry 10 90 Source Pdl 4 Amount 50 In this case t
494. y of 8 0 Hz with zero input Freq 8 00 Hz Envelope Amount 7 00 Depth 100 Envelope Amount 100 34 Shimmer Dry Envelope FO Frequency Hz 8 00 d Envelope Amountz 7 00 Depth 100 gt Envelope Amount 100 Louder St Auto Pan Stereo Auto Pan This Auto Pan effect pans sound between left and right It is stereo and shifting the left and right LFO phases from each other will simulate the sound of the left and right channels crossing over each other by turns or chasing each other Stereo In Stereo Out Left Right Youc form o Wet Dry i A o bg Wet Dry g LFO Phase SES LFO Wave LFO Waveform Tri Sine Selects LFO Waveform Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed LFO Phase 180 4 180deg Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right va Freq LFO Frequency 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed t Fx 09 Dese Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amount 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo r Ex 09 Base Base Note Doll dd dd s Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed ix Ex 09 1 16 t Fx 09 0 100 Sets the depth o
495. y of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes r Fx 09 eye BPM MIDI 40 240 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo ix Ex 09 Base Base Note dio Ji das deco Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed ix Ex 09 Times 1 16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed ix Ex 09 Manual 0 100 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation D s Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the LFO modulation depth Amount 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth Resonance 100 100 Sets the resonance amount p High Damp 96 0 100 Sets the resonance damping amount in the high range W D Wet Dly Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds gt Fx 10 Dez Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance 100 100 Amount Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance g Resonance i W D The peak shape of the positive and negative Feedback value is dif ferent The harmonics will be emphasized when the effect sound is mixed with the dry sound if you set a positive value for both Resonance and W D and if you set a negative value for both Resonance and W D h High Damp This parameter sets the amount of damping of the resonance in the high range Increasing the value will cut high range harmon ic
496. y will be held fixed 2 Use the ClickPoint Talk A V to choose Category and use the INC DEC buttons or the VALUE dial to select a category 8 Use the ClickPoint lt V to choose Program Select and use the INC DEC buttons or the VALUE dial to successively select programs in that category 4 To cancel press the HOLD button twice to turn off the tat HOLD display Ki If you press the HOLD button in PROG 0 Play the selection will cycle in the order of gt Cancel Select by Category CD Press the CATEGORY button to access the category menu Prog Category X50 set EDI ABBE Portamento Pad E ABO sau strings z e i AG2S Overture Pad Be Wood Fast Hit R aas apadi Korgmatose trin Guita Lead Drum 884 pp Flutasonic Pad Prog Category 093 sTousunth Bass oras eras En ER Fast Hit R microX Frog Categoruyz 2 sTowsunth set EERO Bass gt ABB Ga Strings E i ABS Overture Pad Bell Hit H gas gd 1 Koramatose aadi ABST Flutasonic Pad MA Alternatively you can access the category menu by pressing the UTILITY button and choosing Select by Category from the utility menu 2 Use ClickPoint 44 to select Prog Category and use the VALUE dial to select a category Use ClickPoint A V to select a program Alternatively use the ClickPoint P gt to choose Sel Select and use the
497. you have an external sequencer connected and are using the X50 microX in Multi mode as a 16 track multi timbral sound module these parameters can be controlled via MIDI Parameters on the pages listed below can be individually edited by sending receiving system exclusive parameter change messages Multi page MULTI 0 Play Prog 8 Prog 16 pages Mix 8 Mix 16 pages MIDI 8 MIDI 16 pages OSC 8 OSC 16 pages Ptch 8 Ptch 16 pages Othr 8 Othr 16 pages M1 8 1 1 16 pages 1 2 8 1 2 16 pages 1 3 8 1 3 16 pages 1 4 8 1 4 16 pages M2 1 8 2 1 16 pages 2 2 8 2 2 16 pages 2 3 8 2 3 16 pages 2 4 8 2 4 16 pages f Key 8 Key 16 pages MULTI 5 Key Zone Slp 8 Slp 16 pages f Vel 8 Vel 16 pages MULTI 6 Vel Zone Slp 8 Slp 16 pages Set 8 Set 16 pages Arp A Arp B pages Zone page Ctrls page BUS 8 BUS 16 pages MULTI 8 InsertFX Setup page IFX page Setup page MULTI 9 MasterFX MFX 1 MFX 2 pages MEQ page A The Control Track and PLAY MUTE parameters cannot be edited MULTI 2 Track Param MULTI 3 MIDI Filter MULTI 4 MIDI Filter2 MULTI 7 Arp Ctrls Drum kit parameter change User arpeggio pattern parameter change e In Global mode you can edit drum kits and user arpeggio patterns external control sets on the microX Since other global parameters cannot be edited you will use data dumps to handle these The global MIDI channel is used to transmit and
498. you play more strongly and negative values will cause EG times to shorten as you play more strongly With a setting of 0 the EG times will be as specified in Amp1 EG 63a A AMS1 SW Attack 0 Specifies the direction of the effect that AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 will have on A Attack Time With positive values of I AMSI Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMS1 to lengthen the time and setting it to will allow AMSI to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no effect D AMS1SW Decay 0 Specifies the direction of the effect that AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 will have on D Decay Time With positive values of I AMSI Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMS1 to lengthen the time and setting it to will allow AMSI to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no effect S AMS1 SW Slope 0 Specifies the direction of the effect that AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 will have on S Slope Time With positive values of I AMS1 Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMS1 to lengthen the time and setting it to will allow AMSI to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no effect R AMS1 SW Release 0 Specifies the direction of the effect that AMS1 Time Mod AMS1 will have on R Release Time With positive values of I AMS1 Intensity setting this par

Korg MICROX X50 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents